Beitman Most Needed FM & Television Service Information 1948.CV01

Most Often - Needed
F. M.
and Television
Servicing Information
Compiled by
M. N. BEITMAN
SUPREME PUBLICATIONS
CHICAGO
P reface
This manual has a two -fold purpose.

First, the material included will aid you
in servicing and adjusting popular F.M.
and Television receivers. Second, you can
employ this material as a study -manual of
factory instructions for carrying out tests,
adjustments, and repairs of F.M. and
Television equipment. The contents will
give you the "know-how" to do F.M. and
television servicing, and will guide you
step-by-step if you are called to repair
any of the popular models included.
As always, it is the object of

SUPREME PUBLICATIONS to bring to servicemen
needed books of practical nature and this
volume is a worthy addition. The time
spent in the study of this manual will be
when more and more P.M.
and television service jogs will be coming
your way. You have made a wise move in
wanting to keep abreast of developments.
Our sincere thanks is extended to
the many manufacturers whose receivers are
described and whose cooperation was secured
in this undertaking.
M. N. BEITMAN
February, 1948.
Copyright, 1948, by
SUPREME PUBLICATIONS.
Chicago, Ill.
All rights reserved,

including the right
to reproduce or quote
the contents of this
book, or any portion
thereof, in any form.
Servicing Notes on 1947-1948 F. M. and Television Receivers
Table of Contents
Preface 2 Motorola, Inc.

Table of Contents 3 Models 95F31, 95F33, -B, -M,
Chassis HS -38, HS -39 109-113
Admiral Corporation Models 77FM21, -22, -23,
Chassis 9A1, Model 7C73 5-12 Chassis HS -89, HS -97 114-120
Bendix Aviation Corp. Models 77XM21,-22,-22B,
Model 847-B 13-17 Chassis HS -102 . 121-124
. .
Crosley Corporation Models VT-71,VK-101 using

Models 88TA, 88TC . 18-20. . Chassis TS -3 .
. 125-134
. .
87CQ, & Revised 86CR, 86CS 21-28 Olympic Radio & Television
Models 146CS, 146CS(V) 29-32 Models 7-925, 7-934,
Du Mont Laboratories, Allen B. 7-936, and 7-939 135-136
. .
Model RA -101 33-46 Packard -Bell Co.

Emerson Radio & Phonograph Corp. Model 872 137-138
Model 528, Chassis 120038 47-50
Model 537, Chassis 120043 51-53 Pilot Radio Corp.
Espey Manufacturing Co. Model T-601 139-140
Model 7-B 54 R.C.A. Victor
Farnsworth Television & Radio Models .610V1, 610V2 . . 141-144
Series GK -140 to GK -144 55-58 Models 612V1, 612V3 . . 145-152
Models GV-220,-240,-260 59-62 Model 630TS 153-162
General Electric Co. Sparks-Withington Company
Model 417A 63-68 Model 10 -76 -PA . .163-168. .
Model 801 69-88 Stromberg-Carlson Tel. Mfg. Co.

Howard Radio Company Model 1210, Series 10-11169-170
Model 474 89-90 Stewart :Varner Corp.
Models 472AC, -AF, -C, -F 91-92 A72T1, -2, -3,-4,9026- 171-174
Majestic Radio & Television Corp. Model T-711 hints .175-176. .
Model 8FM776, Chas. 81307D 93-96 Western Auto Supply Company

Models 12FM475, -778, -779, Model D1752, Truetone 177-180
Chassis 41201, 12B26E 97-100 Model D1846, 181-182
Meissner Manufacturing Co. Westinghouse Electric
Models 9-1091A, 9-1091B 101 H-113, -114, -116 to -119 183-186
Midwest Radio Corp. H-161, H-168, -A 187-188
Models R-12, RT-12, RGT-12, Zenith Radio Corp.
Chassis RGT-12 . . . 102-104 Models 12H090 to -094
Montgomery Ward Co. Chassis 11C21 . . . 189-191
Model 74BR-1812A . . . 105-108 Index 192
3
SUPREME PUBLICATIONS
9
CHICAGO 12, ILLINOIS
S. ICEDZIE AVENUE
0 Simplified Radio Servicing by
SUPREME DIAGRAM MANUALS
COMPARISON Method
Repair radios in minutes instead of hours.
Revolutionary different COMPARISON
technique permits you to do expert work on
all radio sets. Most repairs can be made
without test equipment or with only a volt ohmmeter.
Many simple, point-to-point, cross-reference, circuit sug-
gestions locate the faults instantly. Plan copyrighted.
Covers every radio set-new and old models. This new
Be prepared to repair quickly all new 1948 servicing technique presented in handy manual form, size
D 1948 sets. This big single volume contains clearly 81/2x11 inches, 72 pages. Over 1,000 practical service hints.
26 large, trouble -shooting blueprints. Charts for circuit
VOLUME 8 printed, large schematics, needed alignment
Price $2.00 data, replacement parts lists, voltage values, analysis. 114 tests using a 5c resistor. Developed ei 50
and information on stage gain, location of by M. N. Beitman. New 1945 edition. Net Price 1' I.
trimmers, and dial stringing, for almost all new 1948 sets. A
worthy companion to the seven previous volumes used by
over 120,000 shrewd radio servicemen. Large size: 8%2 x 11 0 STEWART-WARNER MANUAL 50c
in., 192 pages plus index. Manual style binding. $2.
Price postpaid, only 0 ARVIN DIAGRAM MANUAL 50c
PREVIOUS VOLUMES OF DIAGRAMS
Speed up and simplify all radio repairs. Service radios faster, GENERAL -ELECTRIC MANUAL
better, easier, save money and time, use these most -often - 64 pages of popular circuits. 51/2"x8% inches...___ 50c
needed diagram manuals to get ahead. At the low cost (only
$2 for most volumes) you are assured of having in your
shop and on the job, needed diagrams and other essential
repair data on 4 out of 5 sets you will ever service. Clearly
0 RADIO MATHEMATICS
printed circuits, parts lists, alignment data, and helpful serv- Introduces and explains arithmetic and ele-
ice hints are the facts you need. Each volume has between mentary algebra in connection with units, PR A CT I CAL
ADIO MATHEMATICS
192 and 240 pages, large size 8% x 11 inches. Manual style color code, meter scales, Ohm's Law, alter- H.m_mm
nating currents, ohmmeter testing, wattage

1947 El 1946 1942 1941 rating, series and parallel connections,
$2.00 VOLUME 6 VOLUME 5 VOLUME 4 capacity, inductance, mixed circuits, vac-
VOLUME 7 $2.00 $2.00 $2.00 uum tubes, curves, the decibel, etc., and has
1926-1938 numerous examples. Plainly written.
1940 1939 32 pages. Size : 5%x8% inches 25c
VOLUME 3 VOLUME 2 POPULAR VOLUME 1
$2.00 $2.00 Price $2.50
O CYCLOPEDIA OF TELEVISION FACTS
This new television book defines and explains every term
ri ADVANCED RADIO SERVICING and part used in television transmitting and receiving
equipment. The more important terms are described in
Use these 30 lectures in giant manual form to learn advanced
methods, hints, tips, and suggestions. Take advantage of greater detail. Well illustrated. Reprinted in 40c
M. N. Beitman's 19 years of radio experience as presented 1945. 48 fact -packed pages ; 5%x8% inches
in these easy -to -follow, illustrated lectures. Every servicing
topic of importance, including P.M. and television. O RADIO SRVICING COURSE -BOOK
Complete 30 lectures. large size:
$3. Learn new speed -tricks of radio fault
x 11 inches, only finding, case histories of common troub-
les, servicing short-cuts, extra profit
PRE-WAR RECORD PLAYERS ideas. Many large lessons on the use of
regular test equipment, explanation of
Just what you need to repair quickly thousands of auto- signal tracing, television to the minute,
matic record changers, manual units, pick-ups, wireless recording dope. Many active servicemen
oscillators, recorders, and combinations. Hundreds of used this reduced price radio training
mechanical and electrical diagrams. Instructions for ad- for brush -up and study of new service methods. Re-
justments and repairs. Most popular units of all $1.50 printed in 1946 with new information on signal -tracing,
makes. 132 large pages. 83/2x11 inches television, visual alignment, P.A., photocells, and every
other fact you must know to be more expert in your
111 POST-WAR RECORD CHANGERS work. Complete, 22 lessons, size 8 V2 x11 inches, 224 pages.
With self -testing questions and index. Greatest bar. cn
Service expertly all new (1945-1947) record changers. Fol- gain in home -study radio training. Postpaid, only
low simplified factory instructions to make needed adjust-
ments and repairs. Hundreds of photographs and exploded
views, thousands of test hints: service instructions for all Ej How to Use Diagrams in Servicing 10c
popular makes. Large size: 8%x11", 144 pages.
Just published. Great value at only $150
Radio Repairing with SUBSTITUTE Parts
HOW TO MODERNIZE RADIOS Hints, ideas, suggestions, changes ; 32 pages 25c
Cash in by improving and modernizing all all $1.
El REFRIGERATION Repair,
domestic units 1.
Pe* radio sets and cabinets. Add S.W., record
fir MIR
changers, improve audio response. Practical
4 IMIM03. job -sheets with schematics and photographs
make the work easy. Covers every phase; Practical Radio and Electronics Course
written for servicemen.
$1. In 3 volumes, 53 lessons, 332 pages, size 81, x11". $3.95
Size 8.V2. x 11 in. Price, only Giant manual. Wt. 3% lbs. Price only
4
oftimita CHASSIS 9A1 MODEL 7C73
FM ALIGNMENT POINTER SETTING

The model 9A1 chassis should be aligned only with an AM With the gang closed, the lower edge of the pointer should be
signal generator and a vacuum tube voltmeter. Any standard set at the upper tip of the pear-shaped opening (in the dial scale)
brand vacuum tube voltmeter with a DC scale of not over 5 volts on the A.M. range (see "Stringing Diagram?' Fig. 1).
is suitable. A 3 -volt zero center scale is desirable. A signal genera-
tor with a _frequency range up to 110 MC. is desirable. It is TRIMMER IDENTIFICATION CHART
possible however, to align the receiver with a signal generator
going to 20 or 30 megacycles, by using the harmonics of these TRIMMER SYMBOL FUNCTION
lower frequencies. To do this merely set the signal generator A,F T3 Ratio Detector
dial as follows and align exactly as explained in the alignment B,C T2 2nd I.F. Transformer (FM)
instructions. D,E T1 1st I.F. Transformer (FM)
Where alignment chart specifies 108.5 MC., set signal generator C16 FM Oscillator Trimmer
to highest available frequency of the following:
C14 FM Converter Trimmer (RF)
C7 FM-RF Trimmer
108.5 MC 27.13 MC J L7 FM Oscillator Coil
54.25 MC 21.7 MC K L5 FM Converter Coil (RF)
36.17 MC 18.08 MC L L4 FM-RF Coil
Where alignment chart specifies 102 MC., set signal generator to M,N, T5 2nd I.F. Transformer (AM)
highest available frequency of the following: 0,P T4 1st I.F. Transformer (AM)
102. MC 25.5 MC Q C21 AM Oscillator Trimmer
R CI1 AM Converter Trimmer (RF)
51.0 MC 20.4 MC
34.0 MC 17.0 MC
S C6 AM Antenna Trimmer
T L8 AM Oscillator Coil
Signal generators which do not tune to 110 MC or whose har- U L6 AM Converter Coil (RF)
monics are not strong enough, cannot be used for FM alignment. L3 AM Antenna Coil
REPLACING TUNING SLUG
If it becomes necessary to change a tuning slug proceed in
the following manner: Set the gang to its wide open position, un-
solder and remove the old slug. Set the slug adjusting screw about
half way down. Place the new slug in such a position that PA
inches of its length is above the coil form (or 1" above the
chassis top). Solder it in this position making sure that it does
not slip during the operation and that the slug wire is straight.
Realign as directed.
CHASSIS REMOVAL (For Servicing)
Due to the type of chassis mounting used, removal of the en-
tire tilt -out door assembly (with receiver chassis attached) sim-
plifies removal of the receiver chassis. The receiver chassis can then
be easily removed from its shock mountings. Removal is a little
"tricky" but can be done most readily as described below:
Disconnect all cabinet wiring and cables from the chassis.
Difficulty may be experienced in removing the phono pickup plug
due to the tight fit in the socket shield. This plug can best be
removed with long -nose pliers.
Remove the screw and washer ( # 1 in figure 5) from both
tilt -out spring studs (2), one on each side of the tilt -out assembly.
Slip the tilt -out springs (3) off their respective studs. Unscrew the
Fig. 5. Receiver Tilt -Out Mounting
ends of the tie -bar (4). The tie -bar then hangs free on the cop-
per braid used to bond it to the chassis.
Stand at the end of the cabinet (next to the radio compartment)
and hold the tilt -out door open slightly with the left hand. Use a
screwdriver to pry both tilt -out arms (#5 in figure 6) off their
studs (#6). Then push the tilt -out arms toward the front of
the cabinet (against bracket #7). The tilt -out assembly can
now be removed from the front of the cabinet by tipping it forward
and then pulling it straight out.
CHASSIS REPLACEMENT
Make sure the rubber Dumpers (#9, Fig. 5) and rubber
strips (#8) are in place.
To replace the radio tilt -out door assembly in the cabinet, set
the assembly in so that the tilt -out arms (#5) are in back of the
studs (#6) they normally hinge on. Use your left hand to hold
the assembly in the proper position in the same manner as was
done in removing the tilt -out assembly. Use a screwdriver (in
your right hand) to spring the tilt -out arm clear of its stud
#6). Push it forward as far as possible (as shown in figure
6). When both tilt -out arms are in this position, the assembly
can be lifted up and the tilt -out arms slipped into place on their
respective studs. The tilt -out assembly will now support itself (in
the open position).
Replace the tie -bar (#4). Replace the tilt -out springs ( #3.
See figure 5). Reconnect the cabinet wiring and cables to the
receiver chassis. Check to see that the rubber bumper (#9)
and rubber strips (#8) are in place. The assembly should now
appear as shown in figure 5.
Fig. 6. Receiver Tilt -Out Mounting
alitimatti CHASSIS 9A1 MODEL 7C73
87.5 M.C. 108.5 M.C.

POINTER EXTREMES
540 K.C. 1605 K.C.
FIGURE 2.
FIGURE 1.
ADMIRAL FREQUENCY MODULATION CIRCUIT

An amplitude modulated (AM) signal varies in amplitude in pulse), E3 and E4 would increase in proportion. Since 45 is the
accordance with the sound being transmitted. If the frequency of difference between E3 and E4, it must also increase. An increase
the sound increases, the amplitude variations in the transmitted in signal amplitude causes an increase in output voltage under
carrier occur at a faster rate (at the new audio rate). If the volume these conditions. This illustrates the fact that the discriminator is
of the sound increases, a greater amplitude variation takes place sensitive to amplitude variations as well as frequency deviation.
in the transmitted carrier. Since noise is essentially an amplitude variation, all amplitude
In the case of frequency modulation (FM), the transmitted sig- variations must be removed from the signal before it is fed to the
nal varies in frequency in accordance with the sound being trans- discriminator. This is the function of the one or more limiter
mitted. If the frequency of the sound increases, the variations in stages normally employed ahead of the discriminator circuit in an
transmitter carrier frequency occur at a faster rate. If the volume F.M. receiver.
of the sound increases, a wider frequency variation takes place
in the transmitted carrier. AUDIO
Due to the higher operating frequencies used for frequency

modulation transmission, a higher intermediate frequency is also
used in F.M. receivers. An IF of 10.7 Mc. is most frequently used.
The converter in the receiver changes the original signal to this TO LIMITER
new frequency without changing the modulation characteristic. PLATE
The audio modulation is obtained from the carrier in an amp-

litude modulation receiver by the second detector. This function
must be performed by a different type of circuit in a frequency
modulation receiver since the type of modulation is different. This
can be done by either a discriminator or a ratio detector. Fig. 3. Discriminator Circuit
Conventional Discriminator Due to the function of a limiter (which is essentially a class

An elementary discriminator circuit is shown in figure 3. Ll, "C" R.F. amplifier), a large input signal is required before it
L2 and L3 are all part of the discriminator transformer. Ll is the will remove amplitude variations from the F.M. signal. This re-
primary and signal input for the circuit. The voltages induced in quires the use of a high gain R.F. and I.F. amplifier system in
L2 and L3 add vectorially and are applied to the plates of the an F.M. receiver using a discriminator type second detector. This
two diodes, Dl and D2. When the I.F. signal is exactly 10.7 Mc., type of circuit does not provide noise rejection on weak signals
El and E2 are equal. The diodes then pass equal currents since the limiter must have a certain minimum signal in order
through R1 and R2. Since R1 and 112 have the same resistance, to operate. The result is an expensive receiver that is noisy on
equal voltages E3 and E4 will appear across them. Due to the weak signals.
polarity of E3 and E4 (as indicated in figure 3), output voltage
E5 will be equal to their difference. When the I.F. signal is ex- The Ratio Detector
actly 10.7 Mc., E3 and E4 are equal and E5 is zero. The ratio detector was developed to overcome the afore -men-
tioned limitations of the discriminator -limiter type F.M. second
If the I.F. signal is below 10.7 Mc., El will be greater than detector circuit. An elementary ratio detector circuit is shown
E2, thus Dl will pass more current than D2. E3 will then be in figure 4. Although a similar discriminator type transformer
greater than E4. Since E5 is the difference between E3 and E4, is used in the ratio detector, note that the connections of one
E5 will be positive. If the I.F. signal is above 10.7 Mc., conditions diode are reversed as compared to the discriminator circuit in fig-
will be reversed and E4 will be greater than E3. E5 will now be ure 3. As before, El and E2 are equal when the I.F. signal is 10.7
negative. Mc. El will be greater than E2 when the I.F. signal is below
10.7 Mc. and E2 will be greater than El when the I.F. signal is
Since the I.F. signal varies above and below 10.7 Mc. at the higher than 10.7 Mc.
audio modulation rate (it carries the same modulation as the
original transmitter signal), the positive and negative output If the total signal voltage across L2 and Cl be considered,
voltages from the discriminator will conform to the audio modula- diodes DI and D2 are connected in a series rectifier circuit. The
tion wave form. E5 is then amplified and reproduced as sound. load for this circuit consists of RI and R2 in series. Load voltage
E6 is developed across these two resistors and filtered by C4. Since
C4 has a capacity of 4 or 5 Mfd., E6 is essentially a D.C. voltage.
Assuming the I.F. signal is below 10.7 Mc., E5 will be a positive Since variations in amplitude are filtered out by C4, E6 is pro-
voltage equal to the difference between E3 and E4. If the signal portional to the average I.F. signal strength. Point "Y" is the
amplitude were to increase at this time (as it might due to a noise electrical mid -point of this circuit and is grounded.
6
So far, the circuit from the center tap of L2, through L3 and to The voltage at point "X" is determined by the ratio between
point "X", has been disregarded. This is permissible when con- E3 and E4. The ratio between E3 and E4 is determined by the
sidering a 10.7 Mc. input signal since the signal voltages El and frequency deviation of the I.F. signal input. The sum of E3 and
E2 are equal only for this condition. The diodes then pass E4 must be equal to E6 (series voltages E3 and E4 are paralleled
equal currents and current can flow from the bottom side of across E6). Since E6 is proportional to average signal strength,
L2, through D2, through lit and R1, through DI and back through
L2. No current flow will take place between center tap of L2' and
point "X". C2 and C3 having equal capacity are connected in
series across the load resistors R1 and 1(2. They will charge up
to equal voltages, E3 and E4 respectively. The electrical mid -point
of this capacitive circuit, point "X", will be at ground potential.
(Resistive center tap "Y" is grounded. Therefore, capacitive
center tap "X" must be at ground potential). Output voltage E5
is zero.
When the I.F. signal is below 10.7 Mc., El will be greater than Fig. 4. Ratio Detector Circuit
E2. C2 will then charge through D1 to a higher voltage (this amplitude variations being filtered out by C4, E3 and E4 will be
center connection now plays a vital part in the operation of the unaffected by amplitude variations (such as might be caused by
circuit). Since E2 is a smaller voltage, C3 will charge through noise signals). Therefore, output voltages E5 is purely a function
D2 and assume a charge that is less than that of C2. Therefore, of input signal frequency. The ratio detector is, therefore, in-
E3 and E4 are proportional to voltages El and E2, respectively. herently insensitive to amplitude modulated noise signals and
Although E3 is greater than E4, their sum is still equal to E6 provides noise rejection without the use of a limiter.
(due to the parallel circuit arrangement), point "X" is negative Since noise rejection does not depend on limiter action, a
with respect to point "Y" and ground. Output voltage E5 is ratio detector provides noise -free reception of weak signals. For
negative. When the I.F. signal is above 10.7 Mc., E2 is greater this same reason, the receiver is relatively quiet when tuning
than El, E4 is greater than E3, and E5 is positive. E5 varies from one station to another. Due to the fact that a limiter is not
positive and negative in accordance with the I.F. signal modula- used with a ratio detector, elaborate and expensive R.F. and I.F.
tion wave form. amplifiers are unnecessary.
ADMIRAL 9A1 R ECEIVER CIRCUIT

Due to the unusual nature of some portions of the circuit, and a very low impedance at the operating frequency since this
the fact that their function may not be too apparent, examination frequency is far removed from the resonant frequency of the un-
of the circuit prior to servicing will simplify the task of locating used windings. Therefore, they have little effect on the operation
trouble. This is the purpose of the following information on the of the circuit.
function of various portions of the circuit. Although it does not cause difficulty in tracing the operation
of the circuit, it is important to note that CH4 and C10 form a
Grounded -Grid R.F. Amplifier series resonant circuit at 10.7 Mc. Since this series resonant cir-
cuit is effectively connected from plate to ground on the RF
The input signal is introduced between grid and cathode in amplifier, it acts as an IF wave trap for FM operation. This pro-
any amplifier circuit. It is conventional to apply the signal be- vides excellent rejection of any strong 10.7 Mc. signals which
tween grid and ground. The cathode is then grounded at signal might be present in the input circuit of the receiver. (It is
frequencies. If the grid is grounded, the signal can just as well desirable to detune this trap for FM -IF alignment.)
be applied between cathode and ground. This is the circuit
arrangement of a grounded -grid RF amplifier.
Since the cathode circuit of a vacuum tube has a low character- FM Second IF Amplifier, AM Second Detector
istic impedance, the grounded -grid amplifier has a low input im- A 6BA6 tube is used as a second IF amplifier for FM opera-
pedance and provides a satisfactory match for a folded dipole tion. Self -bias is developed in the grid resistor (R15 and R16 in
antenna. This eliminates complicated antenna coupling devices. series) of this stage. Since this DC bias voltage is dependent on
signal strength, it is used for AVC purposes.
Due to the low impedance and inverted nature of the input
circuit of the grounded -grid amplifier, feedback which might re- In the AM setting of the band switch, plate and screen voltages
sult in oscillation, is unlikely. This permits the use of a triode are removed from this tube. The grid and cathode of this tube then
tube. The use of a triode tube greatly reduces circuit noise in function as an AM second detector (diode) and AVC tube in a
comparison to that present in a pentode amplifier stage. A triode conventional manner.
RF amplifier circuit provides excellent circuit stability without
the use of tricky circuits or adjustments.
Ratio Detector
Band -Switching In AM reception, the transmitter signal varies in amplitude in
accordance with the sound being transmitted. The second detector
There is little that is unusual about the operation of the band of the receiver converts these amplitude variations into an audio
switch in the FM, position. Due to the fact that some of the FM signal that is a duplicate of that used to modulate the trans-
components are not removed from the circuit in the AM setting of mitter. In the case of FM, the transmitter frequency is made to
the switch, it is rather difficult to trace the operation of the circuit. vary in accordance with the sound to be transmitted. These fre-
For AM operation, C7 is still in the circuit. Due to a relatively quency variations are again converted into an audio signal by the
low capacity, it does not bypass the signal around the RF ampli- discriminator or ratio detector in an FM receiver.
fier grid (but acts as a small portion of the tuned circuit capacity).
L4 is also left in the circuit and is in series with the feed to the The conventional discriminator has the disadvantage of being
RF grid. It, like C7, has no appreciable effect due to its low sensitive to amplitude variations as well as to variations in fre-
electrical value. A shunt feed system is used on the RF amplifier quency. Amplitude variations, such as might be introduced by
grid, R3 being the grid return resistor. noise signals, can be removed by the use of a limiter circuit ahead
of the discriminator. However, the input signal to the limiter must
C13 and L5 remain in series across the signal grid of the con- exceed a certain minimum amplitude before limiter action takes
verter stage for AM operation. They have no appreciable effect on place. Therefore, the limiter -discriminator type circuit does not
the circuit since C13 has a very low capacity. C14 is also across provide noise rejection on weak signals.
this grid circuit but it is also a very small capacity. The effect Since the ratio detector is relatively insensitive to amplitude
of these circuit components is merely that of added capacity. variations, it can be used without a limiter stage. It provides noise
The band switch shorts the primary of the first IF transformer rejection on weak as well as strong signals. This is the reason
that is not in use (the FM first IF transformer primary is for the use of the ratio detector in preference to the limiter -dis-
shorted out for AM operation). This prevents the production of criminator type circuit.
undesired frequencies in the plate circuit of the converter. The
unused IF transformer windings which remain in the circuit have
7
Fig. 8. VOLTAGE DATA 0 I.F.
0 0
SW4 0
No station tuned in. Dial turned to high frequency end. . Fig. 9. Simplified Schematic, Phono only
a
ttltages, measured with a vacuum -tube voltmeter. o AUDIO
o SW5
Voltages measured between point indicated and chassis. R30
R12 0
Readings with bandswitell in F.M. position. C39
ri 11 A.F. OUTPUT TT
-1 fl MO
C29 C38 6SJ7 R31 6V6
6AL5 6 A.0 0 C40
6SJ7 0 -.8*
6A.0 * * 06BA6
0 *ao C4I
80 86 RI 3
6BA6 o 0
70.2 00 0 801 A 8 R24 C42
100 6AC 6 AC 0 07
0 jMI R26
0 0 *80 0 100 0
*90 -5.2* C47 SW 045
250 0 ASO 0
*190 268 0,-. *250 C43
L./
250 13 6 I R29
6 -7 @P. -8 6 0 C50 C46
AC A.C.
6 0 AL. 0 0 0 0 0 0
AC SW7' SWITCH OPEN WHEN TONE CONTROL
6V6 6BA6 6BA6 6SB7-Y TURNED FULLY COUNTER -CLOCKWISE.
TO Me
Zero or practically zero if measured with hand switch in phono position. 2ND.DET.
1ST. LE
RE CONVERTER
C9 65137-Y 6BA6 68A6
6E1116 2
T,
R6 1 Hes 01;
0 0 1110 10,,
0 0 C27 1 r. el, I
C7 L-
CH4 RF RII 15
S 1
CIO
IT 1
L4 11
RIO 1 11
C8 A. L51
j C26 L_ TJ
R4 Ls. : llip2 C28
L2 --r - C3I,
R9
R14 T. R15 RI6
R3 L.PA/L.WOL
vry 4,
Fig. 10.
0
FRONT
OSC 0 o
SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC, AM ONLY
SW3 0
C211_ a 4.
AUDIO
o 5W5
C5 11134
L3 A.F.
C23. M4
C3e 6SJ7
REAR
CH5
124 OSC.
POWER SUPPLY SW3
_t
T6
TO
CH8 DIAL BULBS
5Y3 MAZ
C52 C52
CH7
011:47
M6 2 ND. 1.F 01 15T. IF CORE R.F. CONV
M7 M 6BA6 6BA6 6BA6 65137-Y IC 50
6V6 6SJ7 6AL5 6BA6
b
VITT:SWITCH OPEN WHEN TONE CONTROL

033 TURNED FULLY COUNTER -CLOCKWISE.
_J
5W6
11.1141
CHASSIS 9A1 MODEL 7C73
COILS, TRANSFORMERS, ETC.

0 CH1 .. Choke, P.M. Antenna AB 103-33
CH2 .. Choke, Grounded Grid Cathode AB 103-35
if in CH3 .. Choke, Grounded Grid Plate AB 103-35
w CH4 .. Choke, R.F. Plate AB 103-36
0Q CHS .. Choke, A.M. Oscillator Cathode.AB 103-1
0 (0 CH6 .. Choke, F.M. Oscilotor Cathode. AB 103-34
0 CH7 .. Choke, R.F. Filament...Consists
CC
of approximately 8 turns of
=20 solid hookup wire wound
around condenser C51
CH8 .. Choke, Filter 74A 9
Antenna, F.M. Folded Dipole AB 128
Antenna, A.M. (13') 95A 18-1
Coil, A.M. Antenna (less slug) AC 105-2
vfm. Coil, F.M.-R.F. (less slug) AA 122
Coil, F.M. Converter (less slug) AA 122
Coil, A.M. Converter (less slug).AB 100.1
... Coil, F.M. Oscillator (less slug). AA 123
1.13 ... Coil, A.M. Oscillator (less slug). AC 101-:
When Ordering Slugs Specify Color Code
Slug, Iron Core (F.M.Osc., Cony.,
& R.F. 718 1-19
:71 Slug, Iron Core (A.M.-Osc., Cony.). 71B 1-20
Slug, Iron Core (A.M.-Antenna) 71B 1-21
SW1.. Switch, Antenna (Second from
front) 76C 11-3
SW2.. Switch, R.F. (Fourth from front) 76C 11-5
5W3.. Switch, Oscillator (Third front
0 0 front) 76C 11-4
SW4.. Switch, I.F. (Farthest from front)76C 11.6
COILS, TRANS.,ETC., Cont.

Symbol Description Part No.
O w HH. Cr
SW5.. Switch, Audio (Closest to front) 76C 11-2
r L7--.-sv'A".'.
el .0
Band -Switch Shaft Assembly 76C 11-1
Set Screw, .,":6-32 x 1/4 1A 5-54
-:_z 29A 4.4
Spacers for Shaft Assembly
_, 009 11 SW6.. Switch (On -off) Part of R23
5W7.. Switch (Tone control) Part of R26
L mks T1 ... Transformer, 1st I.F. (F.M.)....728 24
I
T2 ... Transformer, 2nd I.F. (F.M.)....728 26

T3 ... Transformer, Ratio Detector....728 27
T4 .. Transformer, 1st I.F. (A.M )....728 25
15 ... Transformer, 2nd I.F. (A.M.)... 72B 25
Slug (For Tl, T2, T3, T4, T.5) 71C 1-22
TO Transformer, Power 80B 2
17 ... Transformer, Output 98A 22
Speaker (12" P.M.) and Output
0 Transformer 78B 21
TUNER PARTS
Description Part No.
ter` Tuning Shaft 28A 17
CD Slug Travel Bracket, Bushing and
. Roller Ass, (front) A1396
Slug Travel Bracket, Bushing and
Hv,,
3
cc
vv
0
lt
Roller Assy. (rear)
Brass Guide Rod (Tuner)
Speed Nut (for Guide Rod)
Corn and Hub for Tuner (front)
41398
28A 7-2
2A in.1-59
A1400
uit 0 Cam and Hub for Tuner (rear) A1467
Spring, Bearing Takeup 19A 16
00 AP Cable, Drive (for Com and Hub) 95A 15-1
Spring, Coil (for Cam and Hub) 19B 1-14
Bar -elite Plate for slug mounting
fl II" x 2K") 32A 36
Bracket (for slug -mounting,
bakelite plate) 15A 226
Slug -Adjusting Screw 27A 4
Drum and Hub on Tuner Shaft
(includes 1" drum and 3!,.'," drum) A1401
(0
DIAL PARTS
Pointe' Shaft 28A 19
T> Drum and Hub Assembly (Pointer Shaft).41388
00 Dial Cord (100 inches) 50A 1-3
Spring, Dial Cord (2 used) 19B 1-5
Dial Scale & Indicator Assembly A1404
Indicator Link 15A 176
swe Indicator Arm & Hub
(on Band Switch Shaft) A1405
Pial Bulb =47 81A 1.8
O Socket, Dial Bulb 82A 3-9
Dial Pointer A1477
Dial Escutcheon and Window
Hi. 0, (less rectangular insert) 23E 20
u Dial Escutcheon Insert
(Approx. 2,/," x 334") 23C 25
rc
o rg
o r.0 311 ) a
o
o
o
C52a. . 30 mfd., 350 Volts)

C52b . 30 mfd . 350 Volts (Electrolytic.67C 6-22
9
RESISTORS
Symbol Description Part No.
RI.... 100 Ohms, y, Watt 608 8-101
R2.... 330 Uhms, 1/2 Watt 608 8-331
R3.... 470,000 Ohms, '/2 Watt 60B 8-474
R4.... 39,000 Ohms, 1 Watt 60B 14.393
R5.... 4,700 Ohms, 1 Watt 60B 14-472 0
R6.... 33,000 Ohms, '/2 Watt .60B 8-333
R7.... 47,000 Ohms, '/2 Watt 60B 8-473 WA
R8.... 18,000 Ohms, 2 Watt 60B 20-183
R9.... 120,000 Ohms, i,2 Watt 60B 8-124
o <
R10... 18,000 Ohms, 1 Watt 60B 14.183
R11... 22,000 Ohms, 1 W0tt 60B 14-223 otO
R12... 120,000 Ohms, V2 Watt 60B 8-124
R13... 100,000 Ohms, y Watt 608 8-104
R14... 470,000 Ohms, 1/2 Watt 60B 8-474
R15... 220,000 Ohms, '/2 Watt 60B 8-224
R16... 82,000 Ohms, V2 Watt 60B 8-823
R17... 8,200 Ohms, 2 Watt 603 20-822
R18... 2,200 Ohms, 1 Watt 60B 14.222
R19... 390 Ohms, ±5%, '/2 Watt 608 7-391
R20... 27,000 Ohms, Y2 Watt 608 8-273
R21... 6,800 Ohms, ±5%, '/2 Watt...60B 7-682
R22... 6,800 Ohms, ±-5%, Y2 Watt...60B 7-682 .. 60
R23... 1 Megohm Volume Control &
on -off switch SW6. Tapped at
300,000 and 600,000 Ohms...758 3-4 cc, CD ate
R24... 4.7 Megohms, 1/2 Watt 60B 8-475 EC! <
R25... 47,000 Ohms, 1/2 Watt 608 8-473 12 CO
COW
R26... 2 Megohms Tone control
R27...
& D.P.S.T. switch SW7
10,000 Ohms, Y2 Watt
75B 1-14
6013 8-103
LL
r te
R28... 470,000 Ohms, '/2 Watt 60B 8-474

011. FY
R29... 100,000 Ohms, 1/2 Watt 608 8-104 000 0 HI,
130... 470,000 Ohms, '/2 Watt 608 8-474
R31... 2.2 Megohms, V2 Watt 608 8-225 -14_I
390 Ohms, 1 Watt .60B 14-391
R33... 390 Ohms, 2 Watt 60B 20-391
R34... 100 Ohms, 1 Watt 608 14.101
HI' 0
s
CONDENSERS
1000 mmfd., Mica 65B 5-33
.01 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper 648 1-25
35 mmfd. -±2%; 0 temp.
coeff.; ceramic 65B 6.14
27 mmfd. mmfd.; 0 temp r
coeff. ceramic 65B 6.17
C5.... 500 mmfd., Mica 65B 5-27
3-40 mmfd., Trimmer 66A 12-5
C7.... 3-12 mmfd., Trimmer 66A 22-1
200 mmfd., Mica .65B 5.21
C9.... 35 mmfd. ±2%; 0 temp.
coeff.; ceramic 65B 6-14
C10... 40 mmfd. ±2%; 0 temp. 0
coeff.; ceramic 658 6-22
C11... 12-170 mmfd., Trimmer 66A 12-1
C12... 300 mmfd., Silver Mica 658 1.24
C13... 25 mmfd. 1 mmfd.; 0 temp
coeff.; ceramic 658 6-15
C14... 3-12 mmfd., Trimmer 66A 22-1
C15... 50 mmfd. ±-2%; 0 temp.
66A 22.1 ati
C16... 3-12 mmfd., Trimmer
C17... 200 mmfd. ±3%; -.00033
coeff ; ceramic 658 6-20
.0
.>'12)
OW
C18... .005 mfd., 600 Volts, Pao,. 648 1.12 O (-4
C19... 100 mmfd. ±10%; -.00075
temp. coeff.; ceramic 658 6.19
C20... 5000 mmfd., Ceramic 658 9.53
C21... 3-40 mmfd., Trimmer 66A 12-5
C22... 27 mmfd. ± 1 mmfd.; 0 temp
C23... 180 mmfd. :L-5%; -.00033
temp. coeff.; Ceramic 65B 6.23
C24... 2000 mmfd., Mica 65B 5-37
C25... .01 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper.. 649 1.25
C26... 01 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper 648 1-25
C27... .01 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper.. 64B 648
1-25
1-20
C28... .10 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper
C29... .2 mfd , 400 Volts, Paper 64B 1-19 Ze
C30... .05 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper 648 1.32
C31... 200 mmfd, Mica 65B 5-21
C32... .05 mfd., 210 Volts, Paper 64B 1-22
C33... .05 mfd., 200 Volts, Paper... , 648 1.22
C34... 100 mmfd. ±10%; -.00075 658 6-19 c.°j:(A'-.----11'
temp. coeff.; Ceramic rc
rc
C35... 100 mmfd.-2:10%; -.00075
temp. coeff.; Ceramic 658 6-19
C36... 4 mfd., 150 Volts, Electrolytic 67A 4-2
C37... .002 mfd., 600 Volts, Paper 6.411 1-14
C38... .005 mfd., 600 Volts, Paper 648 1-12
C39... ,1000 mmfd., Mica 65B 5-33 00
C40... 500 mmfd., Mica 658 5-27 wire
C41... .005 mfd., 600 Volts, Paper 648 1-12
C43... .05 mfd., 200 Volts, Paper 648 1-22
C44... .05 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper 64B 1-32 CHI 13
C45... .01 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper 648 1-25 00 At'
C46... .005 mfd., 600 Volts, Paper 64B 1.12
C47... .005 mfd., 600 Volts, Paper 64B 1.12
C50a.. 20 mfd., 250 Volts I
C50b.. 30 mfd., 350 Volts I Electrolytic .67C 7-7
C51... .01 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper 648 1-25
L
10
PRELIMINARY ALIGNMENT STEPS CHASSIS 9A1 MODEL 7C73
C:44:1/mAtd:
With the gang closed, the lower edge of the pointer should the shaft. See Fig. 1 for correct drum position.
be at the dotted position shown in Fig. 1. That is, the lower In the wide open position, the roller on the slug tuning plat -
edge of the pointer should be at the upper tip of the AM pear- form must be as shown in dial stringing diagram, Fig. 2.
shaped opening in the dial scale. If the pointer is in different
position, move it by hand while keeping the gang closed. With the gang wide open, all slugs should bt 114 inches out
of their coil forms. If there is any serious deviation or if there
Check the set setews that hold the tuning drum to the shaft to has been any tampering, turn the adjusting screws until this
see that they are tight and that the drum has not slipped on distance is corrected.
FM IF AND RATIO DETECTOR ALIGNMENT

Solder output indicator leads in place and keep them well FM antenna disconnected during alignment
separated from signal generator leads and chassis wiring.
While peaking IF's, keep reducing signal generator out- Band switch in FM position (red signal at MC on dial)
put so VTVM reading is approximately +1.5 volts DC
with exception of Step #5 Speaker must be connected during alignment
I.F. SLUG INFORMATION
To avoid splitting the slotted head of the powdered iron of the coil form, it will be necessary to remove the other
core tuning slug in the I.F. transformers, use a screw -driver tuning slug on the opposite side of the I.F. can. Then, using
with a blade V wide for I.F. alignment. a thin rod and screw -driver, "jockey" the dislocated slug
Under normal operating conditions, mis-alignment of slug
-until it re-engages the threads in the coil form. Since this
is a difficult operation, care should be exercised as outlined
tuned circuits with age is slight. Therefore, re -alignment of above in paragraph and this difficulty will be avoided.
the I.F. transformers should be accomplished by only a slight
adjustment of the slugs. Do not turn a slug in an extreme If the iron core slug should become stripped or if the
amount or it will fall into the center of the coil form. slotted head should become rounded or cracked, it may be
Always try to adjust by first turning slug out. Should an removed by removing the opposite slug and forcing the
I.F. tuning slug be turned in too far and fall into the center defective slug out with a thin screw -driver.
Steps 1 and 2 may be omitted if set is not badly out of alignment so signal comes through in Step 3
Before proceeding, be sure to follow all steps listed above. under "Important Preliminary Alignment Steps."
Connect Generator Receiver Output Indicator and Special Connections Adjust as Follows
Signal Generator Frequency Dial Setting (very carefully)
Thru .01 cond. Tuning Connect 3300 ohm carbon resistor across second - "A" primary)
10.7 MC aries of both FM -IF transformers. Connect
1 to 2nd IF grid unmodu- for maximum reading on
(Pin #1 of gang
wide open
VTVM (DC probe) from point "W" to ground. VTVM.
6BA6 2nd I.F.). lated. (See Figure 19.)
Thru .01 cond. Iron cores "B" and "C" (2nd
2
to 1st IF grid ,i ti Same as above. IF trans.) for maximum
(Pin #1 of reading on VTVM.
6BA6 1st I.F.).
Iron cores D and E for maxi -
To FM antenna Same as above. In addition, connect a 50 mmfd. mum on VTVM. Re -adjust A,
terminals. (Do condenser in parallel with C10 to detune the IF .
C, D, E for maximum.
,, ,, rejection trap consisting of CH4 and C10. (See (.n
3 not feed signal (Keep reducing generator out -
into converter note at bottom of page.) This condenser MUST put to keep VTVM at 1.5
grid.) be removed after step 5. volts.)
a. Remove 3300 ohm resistors from IF transformers.
b. Reduce output of signal generator until VTVM reads exactly +1.5 volts DC.
c. Tune generator frequency above 10.7 MC until VTVM reads exactly +1.0 volt. Note exact
generator frequency. Extreme care in reading this is essential.
d. Tune generator frequency below 10.7 MC until VTVM reads exactly +1.0 volt. Note exact
4
" I. generator frequency. Extreme care in reading this is essential.
e. Add generator frequency in step c to generator frequency in step d and divide by 2. The
result is the center frequency of the IF curve to he used in step 5. See example on page 10.
f. Tune generator frequency above and below 10.7 MC and note voltage reading on VTVM at
different frequency points until you have a good impression of the shape of the selectivity
curve. If you have two peaks as in Figures 17 or 18, note readings (voltage) of both peaks.
A selectivity curve that would require realignment is illustrated by Figure 18.
Center of IF
selectivity Iron core "F" (detector sec -
curve per Set pointer ondary) for zero voltage read -
step 4e to upper Connect VTVM (DC probe) from point "X" ing on VTVM. (The correct
5
above. See limit on to ground. (See Figure 19.) zero point is located between
"EXAM- dial. a positive and a negative
PLE" maximum.)
on p. 10
If any adjustments were very far off, it is desirable to repeat steps 3, 4 and 5.
Note: Condenser C10 is mounted parallel to the chassis on the position shown in figure 19, the correct terminal board lug is
bakelite terminal board. Connect added 50 mmfd. condenser located on the corner nearest trimmer "C", and on the left side
between the terminal board lug (junction of CH4 and R5) and of the terminal hoard.
pin #1 of the 6BA6 (GG RF stage). With the chassis in the
11
Ohimeiai CHASSIS 9A1, MODEL 7C73
SETTING SIGNAL GENERATOR TO

CENTER OF IF SELECTIVITY CURVE
CAUTION: Due to the difficulty of setting a signal generator to 0 K.C. K.C.
the accuracy required by this operation, extreme care must be
exercised in making each setting. Otherwise improper alignment
10 7 N.C. O
- 0 10.72 M.C.
of the radio detector and consequent audio distortion will result.
10.64 M.C. 10.8 M.C. 10.64 M.C. 10.8 M.C.
EXAMPLE: (See Figs. 13 and 14)
FIGURE 13. FIGURE 14.
Voltage reading in Step 4b is + 1.5 volts.
Generator frequency on low side of 10.7 MC for a reading
of +1 volt DC = 10.640 MC. TYPICAL SELECTIVITY CURVES
Generator frequency on high side of 10.7 MC for a reading
of +1 volt DC = 10.800 MC.
Center frequency is obtained by adding 10.640 and 10.800, then
dividing by 2. For these readings it will be 10.72 MC. CORRECT
CORRECT
Set generator frequency to 10.72 MC as this is center of INCORRECT
selectivity curve as shown in Figure 14.
FIGURE 15. FIGURE 16. FIGURE 17. FIGURE 18.
Note: Numerical vernier dial readings may be used instead of MC.
S 0
(ANT) (OSC) (R5.)R FM RF ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
AM. TRIMMER Alignment of FM RF section will require re -alignment of AM RF section
0 0 0 CAPACITIES due to common trimmer capacities during AM operation. AM RF
section can be aligned, however, without affecting FM alignment.
TRIMMER
10 G0 H0 CAPACITIES
IG.G.R.F) (OSC.) (R.E) Ccomect Receiver Output Indicator
Generator Dial and Adjust as follows
Signal
O
O
0--D
0
0
00£0 0
0 0
GeneratorSetting Frequency Connections
Thru 270 Connect VTVM *Capacity trimmers "G",
PLACE 3300 OHM 108.5 MCI. Tuning (DC probe) from
RESISTORS ACROSS 6BA6 PIN I A.M.
ohms to (unmodu- "H" and "I" for
nFM maxi -
F.M. IT SECONDARIES
I Es 6
ant. point "W" to mum reading on VTVM.
WHEN ALIGNING.
0[O lated). wide ogangpen
ground.
terminal.
B M *Iron slugs "J", "K"
o o 102 MCI.
7
ft
(unmodu- 102 MC
119
and "L" for maximum
PIN I
lated). mum reading on VTVM.
2r1c1.1.F.
POINT
(PRI.) 108.5 MCI. Tuning
"X" O 0
8 " ( unmodu gang " *Repeat Step #6.
0
O
00
0
A RATIO
DETECTOR lated). wide open
Alignment of the FM RF section will affect the AM band also so the AM RF
9 section must be realigned after the FM RF alignment.
POINTV"
* It is advisable that generator output be adjusted so that VTVM readings do not exceed
approximately +1.5 volts DC after peaking.
BOTTOM VIEW
.1-
If your signal generator does not reach this frequency, use harmonics as described in
FIGURE 19. paragraph on "FM Alignment" .
F.M.
0 ANT. A.M.0 U OT 0V AM ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
-
(R.F.) (OSC.) (ANT)
2 I.
Use regular output meter connected across speaker voice coil.
3 0 LOOP
ANT.
FM -OK 0J eL Be sure both the set and the signal generator are thoroughly warmed up before
(RF) (OSC) (G.G.R.F.)
starting alignment.
full on.
Turn receiver Volume Control signal
Use lowest output setting of generator that gives a satisfactory reading
on meter.
Proceed in sequence as outlined below.
0- F.
Connect Dummy Antenna Signal Receiver Adj. Trimmers

Between Radio and Generator Dial in Following
Signal Setting Order to Max.
A.M.
I.F. s Generator Signal Generator Frequency
and be sure to follow instructions
Set Band Switch to Broadcast position (center) Steps.'
N 0- under heading "Important Preliminary Alignment (See page 9). Loop antenna
can be disconnected from chassis in Steps 1, 2 and 3.
6SB7-Y
Tuning gang M, N, 0, P
1 .1 MFD 455 KC wide open
(Pin #8)
To loop ant. Direct Tuning gang
0- F (SEC)
RATIO DETECTOR
F.M.
2 #3 connection
1605 KC wide open Q, Rterminal
To loop ant. Direct 1300 KC 1300 KC T. U

terminal #3 connection
Set Receiver Chassis on table next to back of cabinet. Connect
Loop Antenna to Receiver.
To loop ant. 10 MMFD (Or wrap sev- Tune in S
1605 KC signal
TOP VIEW terminal #3 eral turns of generator
To loop ant. lead around white loop Tune in V
1300 KC
12 FIGURE 20.
terminal #3 lead.) signal
lirendpe'Redio
COPYRIGHT 1947 BENDIX AVIATION CORPORATION
BB 55° .:160 '109
MODEL 847-B 09
60°
m 16]
s s° fi
:140: 1081
90 92 9S 90 1132 108 107

S F llUIENCY MODULATION
00
OFF ON
VOLUME
TREBLE
TONE
BASS
CI El CI El ET
MANUAL-/
PHOF
AM
RANGE
M 0
TUNING
Controls --The various controls are shown in the above drawing.
OSG
A BC
(i)
DE
ANT .O
0
0 0 0 0-70L 0
0
MAN
540 650 650 900 900

925 1250 1250 1550 1550
KGS KGS KCS KCS KGS
Pushbuttons --The adjustment position of the pushbutton assembly is
shown below. Pushbutton operation is provided by rotating the band
switch to the center position and depressing the desired Pushbutton.
The extreme right hand pushbutton is depressed when MANUAL tuning
operation is desired.
Access to the adjustment screws is obtained by pulling the Push-
buttons off the shaft vertically. The osc. and antenna adjust-
ment screws, with the Pushbutton frequency ranges, is shown in
the above diagram.
70 RIT 70
CIRCUITS USED ON EARLY MODELS
TO
RIB R 15 4 6 TO R13 4ME
1 MEG TO R2I
TONE
TO RI4
C15 T.01 I 0-,_ 100
R33
T. .02 K
Values of R15 & R33 Changed Test Socket Connection Changed R37 Not Used
SI 52 S3 S4 RI5
FRONT FRONT GND. FRONT R33 -LOOK FRONT
1MEG.
C 38 _- PHONO
AM OSC. R2 TERM *2 PLUG
14 1ST. I.F. C36 ---
PIN *6 PB RIB- I MEG.
757 SWITCH TERM #5 C39 -.0I
151 I.E R33 -100K
TERM.*4 TERM *6 _7: R13
151.1.F 1ST. I.F. 2.2 MEG.
TER M.4:3
C 9-220
1ST. I.F
C 14-45 MMF
EG
TERM 442
PIN *6 GNU.
7F8
1ST. I.F.
SI 54
REAR L
REAR
00
6
TERM#4 0 R 23
1ST, I.F. 14 611K
0 AM OSC.
TERM#3 0
1ST. I.F. PIN # 4 15
7F8 FM -0SC
TERM #2
1ST. I.F BAND SWITCH SECTIONS 13
CONDITIONS OF MEASUREMENTS
LINE VOLTAGE 117 A -C ZERO SIGNAL INPUT VOLTAGE
VOL. CONT. MIN. SOCKET RESISTANCE TO COMMON GROUND D -C AT A -C AT
20,000 1I/V 1,000 11/V
CD
A M DEMODULATOR a POWER
FM -R F AMP CONVERTER IS! I F AMP 2M I F AMP FM DEMODULATOR 111 AUDIO AMP RECTIFIER
6AG5 0 7F8 3 7/0-17 7AG7 6116 6 SO7
4
6V6 GT 5Y3 GT
0 0 20 20 3 I
6034C o 210 0 275 V. AC NC

P /-2;57-' AM 80 V n 0 G3 0 G3 NC ..... PZ Qo 2.25 MEGD 02 250 243 K :
KI 62 GI 470 -20C, / NC
60 FM I rn J.)31_ 200
AM 300K P 290 K --0- 100 230 NC
244 K 244 K 55K -p I
NC 0 K
Vi 0 Q 460K 245K NC P75
0 0 200 eQ
P 200 p H 6.3AC H- 0 NC
0 _ug_ 244 47 244 K 663A 10 MEG HO
0 O 6.3101C .6,--
H
NC
AM 3V 6, G 0 AC 0 H
0 K
1.2 MEG NC F.
FM 2V \ -5 0 0 0 O
V!' NC 270t NC 2241°K o
22K AM 22 MEG
FM 0 rt
AM -455 KC IF FREQUENCY FM -10.7 MC CD
w
O
(S28) PART OF TRIMMER 0
ci. OI ASSEMBLY C4513
C5
2-20
01456/
,/G44 R4 01
/ 45 6800 Cl5
/ C58 R 17
R18
1555 100 I<
L 1 MEG
CD
G 38
0 ,
06 680
EXTERNAL
03
ANTENNA
00 [A4
)0 220I
L
0 (g -n)
EXTERNAL
GROUND C19 TEST
.05 SOCKET
B7
-.0 k,\ 2.2 MEG.
0 ,o
OL R33 (S 4A) 0
CEE 100 K
FM
NOTES 'C8 C15 01
OSC.
ALL CAPACITANCE IN WHOLE CD 100 T 02 TA10 , 07- -1ME5G
NOS. IN MMF.-THOSE IN DEC. g"- ...4 e_ 05 Owe
AM x> C X1 220
NOS. IN MF.-ALL RESISTANCE UT' G40 ID
IN OHMS UNLESS OTHERWISE OSC.e 3-2 r C 1 dl
STATED. K.1000.11. 0 A4 CD
IOOK5j C
0_10
R27 R28
F 1500 R 21 om..002
0 BAND 00 R 19
I
SWITCH
AMOo 0 OiS2A: ,
Nor.0 (s44°)- 100K 220K
I POSITIONS C 31
Po
D R 36 TONE .006
, IBPHON0.0
MANUAL / 470 K C27
r. -r C32 C29 .006
6SQ7 .01 SPKR.
20 MF
tit 1.t J1, .11,
r 20 MF 3 CD
_t, 20 MF
/ I MEG
R16
1---- 2 MEG. C 28
/ /420!,,
800 / G61 ..1 C62/ ''C6aL
/ C6IL (74) 220
10 C12 / r
7 r L8 R22 we. C 48 R 24
220 R 25 CD
-C60 (L 3) 0 MEG K 270
4-75 la. 4-75 CleT470 G 43 101) 11
IL 7 7 8 T 1470
.01 0116
1125- 900- 650 650- 540- e- w .2
1600 500 1250 1250 925 S, , OK-)
KC KC KC KC KC * * .0
7.5
BROADCAST BAND ALIGNMENT
Rotate gang condenser until full closed. Set pointer to reference mark.
Connect output meter across voice coil on lowest scale.
Signal Generator amplitude modulated.
Rotatevolume ontrol full ON. Keep nerator output low as practical.
Band
Dial Adjust
Apply Thru To Switch
Setting
Position
455 KC .05 mfd. Term. #2 gang AM -mid- Gang cond. IF slug, C418, C43A,
cond. & chassis position full open C438, C45A, C458 for
max output
580 KC Bendix dummy Dummy loop plugged " 580 KC ref. C13 for max. output
loop ADOLOO in AM ant, socket mark
2n rear of chauis
1475 KC " " 1475 KC ref. *C12,C10 for max.
mark output
580 KC " " " Approx. 580 CI3 for max. output
ad'ustment
. i
965 KC " " :Purr::: :1:::kg:naglidbur:itigon
KC ref. mark
580 KC " " " Approx. 580 **Check Calibration
Kr rpf mark
* Repeat 1475 KC and following 580 KC adjustment in rotation several times until receiver is
properly aligned.
5* If calibration does not check within 10 KC, "knife" oscillator and antenna gang sections.
BAND SWITCH TEST
PHONO AM -FM SOCKET TONE
PUSH/BUTTONS 6 ,//OFF -0141
CHASSIS TRIMMER LOCATION TUNING
1
VOLUME
0 AM -455 KC IF
AM C4IB
FMC401 FM -I0.7 MG IF
I FAMSLUG
FM SIGNAL TEST JACK
/C13
FM DETECTOR
AM OSC PADDER
i OSC CONV
FM OSC .0*5
gdk4 1ST. 3RD IF
IF
F FM INP T 6AG5 DEMODULATOR
3
1ST AUDIO
LFAM INPUT *2
TERM.R 2ND. IF 6V6
F GT
AMP FM
2ND IF OUTPUT RECT.
AM ANT. TRIMMER
CIO ®C45A
AMOC43A AM
10C43B C45B
C42A C44A
FM I I FM
C428 C448
TEST SOCKET
PLUG
BEND/ X STOCK 7
- JP .3002
AC
FM ANT AM ANT PHONO INPUT SPEAKER LINE
01 MFD JACK CORD
V T UM SHOULD siGHO TO LOOP ANTENNA CONNECTION
PREFER/9BL Y ON SOCKET
LOWHAVE-
RANGE
ZERO CENTER
GEN.T
SCALE.
TO LOOP ANTENNA CONNECTION
GNO
ON SOCKET (CHASSIS GNCL)
A M
COIL FOR 847B IS 3.7 MICRO -HENRY
TEST CY RCT FOR DEMODULATOR
TRANSFORMER "IL/ GNMENT .01 MFD
300 OHM iiee
HOT HOT"SIDE- ANTENNA TERMINAL
TEST CIRCUIT FOR FM ALIGNMENT VALUE OF THIS RESISTOR TO BE

SIG. GEN. ADJUSTED TO OUTPUT IMPEDANCE
OF SIGNAL GENERATOR
,
BENDI X RADIO ) GN CND. SIDE OR CHASSIS
F.M. DUMMY ANTENNA 15

FM ALIGNMENT
For reference marks see Fig.
Rotate gang condenser fully closed and set pointer to reference mark
Trimming screwdriver must be 100% insulated A - CW METER METHOD
Generator output - pure RF or amplitude modulated
VTVM must not be AC -DC, or with GND. connected to AC line or through resistor
Gen. Dummy Gen. To Band Sw. Pointer Special VTVM

Adjust Remarks
Freq. Ant. Position Setting Conditions Connections
10.7 .01 Term. #3 on FM -Full Short FM Test socket 1st IF -C40 Realign several times
mc. mfd gang & counter- osc.term. pins #I(+) 2nd IF-C42A to assure max. output
chassis clock- #5 to & #2 (-) C428 Signal may be fed into
wise chassis Low Scale 3rd IF-C44A "Test Jack" in 1st IF
for max.out- can for prel. align.
out on VTVM of C44A,C42A & C4213.
.
10.7 " " " *Center of 3rd. IF-C44B **Alternate step #1
mc. jumper res- (C44A for max. output)
(store & To zero & step #2 (C448 for
test sock. reading on zero) several times
Pin #4 - VTVM to assure correct
Fig. #2. alignment
106 Std. FM ant " 106 mc. Remove Test socket ""Osc.-C11 "Rock" tuning control
mc. FM input refer. short from pins #1 (+) RF -05 during alignment
Fig. term's. mark osc. term. & #2 (-) Ant -C4
#4 #5 Low scale for max.out-
put on VTVM
97 " " " Approx. - " ----------- ****Check Calibre-
mc. 97 mc , tion
ref.
mark
.
90 " " Approx. " ---- ****Check Calibre-
mc. 90 mc. tion
refer.
mark
* See Fig. "Test Circuit for FM Alignment".

** A VTVM with azero center scale is very convenient for use in this alignment step. A50 microamgeter may be
used in place of the VTVM, but is not as accurate.
*** The oscillator circuit has been designed to operate on the high freq. side of the incoming. signal. It is
possible to adjust the trimmer (:11) at 106 MC such that the osc. Is operating on the "image" or low
freq. side of the signal. To check the osc. (CII) adjustment, set sig. gen. to 84.6 MC, freq. modulated,
dial pointer at 106 MC. If signal is NOT heard, adjustment of CII is correct, but if signal a heard,
osc. trimmer CII has been incorrectly adjusted on the "image" frequency. Readjust CII to other setting
at 106 MC and recheck with gen. freq. at 84.6 MC. Signal MUST NOT be heard with pointer at 106 MC and
sig. gen., freq. modulated, set at 84.6 MC.
*** If calibration is not within reasonable tolerance at these points, the osc. coil inductance must be ad-
justed. if dial pointer reading is on low freq. side, inductance is too low, and turns must be compressed
slightly. If pointer reading is on high freq. side, osc. coil is too high and coil turns must be spread
slightly.
To check and adjust inductance of ant. and RF coils, tune receiver to 90 MC signal and observe AVC
reading. Insert iron core end of "tuning wand" into RF coil, at same time rocking tuning control to max.
AVC. If reading increases as wand is inserted, RF coil inductance is too low and turns must be com-
pressed slightly. If reading decreases, reverse wand and insert metal.end into coil, again rocking
tuning control to max. AVC. If reading decreases, (after iron core check), inductance is properly ad-
justed. If reading increases, inductance is too high and turns must be spread slightly.
Ant coil is checked and adjusted exactly like RF coil.
SET POINTER TO THIS MARK

-WITH CONDENSER GANG AT
MAXIMUM CAPACITY( FULLY
55°
580 KC ..-14T5 KC
ED° :WO
AM--.._
STANDARD AM
90 MC
FM
se fo °Eh 'idle 12b 1O6 MC
FM
91 MC 965 KC
FM AM
3 TU:N411S11r
ALIGNMENT REFERENCE POINTS
16 TUNING SHAFT
Visual Method. FM ALIGNMENT
Band SW. Special Dial VTVM Oscillo- Adjust Remarks
Dummy Generator
Gen.Freq. Gen. Mod. Position Conditions Setting Conn scope
Ant. to
.05 High side FM -Max. Short Osc. Test No conn. 1st IF Adjust for max -
10.7 MC Pure RF
CCW. Stator- Socket C40 imum output on
or mfd to Term.
#3 Gang Term. #5 Pins 2nd IF low range of
Amplitude VTVM - Realign
Cond. Low to Chassis #1(+) C42A,
side to Gnd. &#2(-) C42B each Cond.
Low 3rd IF several times to
chassis
Scale C44A assure max. out-
put.
Signal may be fed
into "test jack"
in 1st IF can
for Prelim.
Alignment of
C44A.C41A&C426.
. .
" No con- Connect 3rd IF *Adjust for max.
Approx. Freq.Mod. "
nectionvert. in- C448 symmetrical "S"
10.7 MC 60 Cy- curve similar
put to
Adjust Sweep
Test to Fig. 5.
until width Alternate adjs.
Socket
Ratio max.
Pins #4 of C44A & C446
Detector possible to obtain Max
&Chassis
curve (should desired curve.
Gnd.
is cen- be 200 KC
tered Min)
on Noriz
Scope
Sweep
Line
Remove 106MC No con- " FM **Adjust until
106 MC " Std. FM Ant. "
short from ref. nection Osc. "S" curve is

FM Terms's
Term #5. mark CII centered on
Fig.4 thru
dummy
"sng11:°
'
" " FM RF Adj.for Max.
"
106 MC " " "
Trimmer height of "S"
C5. FM pattern -"rock"
Ant. tuning control
Trimmer at same time
C-4. to keep "S"
curve centered
on Scope.
.
. .
" Approx. " ***Check Cal -
"
97 MC ibration
97 MC
ref. mark
. . Approx. " " ***Check Cal -
" "
90 MC ibration
90 MC
_ref. mark
Generator and the scope horizontal sweep may be encountered, resulting
* Some phase shift between the Signa
in a double trace pattern, shown in Fig. 6. In some Oscilloscopes, provision is made for connecting this
phase shift directly in the oscilloscope circuit. If so, rotate the "phase shift" control until the curves
in the scope, the connection might be accomplished by in-
coincide as in Fig. 5. If no provision is made
serting a condenser of suitable value in series with the signal generator "Synchronized Sweep Voltage"
output. The condenser value will depend upon the amount of phase shift and the horizontal input impedance
of the scope - approximate condenser range .01 to .1 mfd. See Fig. 7 for instrument connection diagram.
AE*
See **
ta If calibration is not within tolerance at these points, the inductance of local FM oscillator coil, RF and
antenna coils must be adjusted.
NOTE: The latter operation is a very delicate and difficult procedure, and must be attempted only by tech-
nicians of considerable high frequency experience.
V VM
OSCILLOSCOPE
SIGNAL
GENERATOR RECEIVER
JACK
VCR,. MORE.
MO, SEG L MAP DE TAKEN PROM

POWER Li E PMASIND
GENERATOR DOES NOT mVE A CPACITOR
ST, OUTPUT, 11
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 17

MODELS: 88TA, 88TC
-GROSLEY-
F-M OSC. CORE
-411114-_.
TO EXT. ANT. INTERLOCK PINS TO
TERMINAL POWER CORD
TO DIPOLE
ANT. TERMINALS
CHASSIS TOP VIEW SHOWING ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENTS

807 vitm nuag.
VoirDrMIDDII <Dal.,
0.5.1:1111110%
1
;E:
;
0 OD
oneroare
'WARM. COL
000
00
.07
2I I, SU, 4/
z
ICHASS,S I
DOW II CNN
AWES
"0=1:.:C",;(71=1710 71DC
2 !,07;FUV.r14:511011,1P"
%, AUTO OU:A
CONCIVOD TO CAMSP
. ru
18
ALIGNMENT CHART
Signal Generator Output Position of
Align- Type Dial Type of Ose.
ment Gen- In Pointer Adjust Selectivity Fre- Remarkr
Se- eratorSeries
quency with To Range
Switch Var. or
Cond.
Curve quency
quence
1 AM 455 100 Mixer Grid AM Open A&B Single See Note 1

kc mmf. 6SH7 Peak
2 AM 1400 100 Stator Plates, AM 1400 kc. C Above See Notes 1 and 2 ,
kc. mmf. Ant. Section
of Var. Cond.
3 AM 1400 220 Loop AM 1400 kc. D Above See Note 1.

kc. mini. Primary
4 FM 10.7 30 2nd I.F. Grid FM Closed E See Notes 1, 3, 4. 5 & 6.

mc. mini. 6SH7
5 FM 10.7 30 1st I.F. Grid FM Closed F See Notes 3, 5 & 6,

mc. mmf. 6SG7
6 FM 10.7 30 F.M. Ant. FM Closed G See Notes 3, 5 & 6.

mc. mmf. Terminals r\.-
7 FM 98.0 *78 F.M. Ant. FM 98 mc. H&I Single See Notes 7 & 9
mc. ohm Terminals Peak
Dummy
8 Disconnect Generator. Connect Field FM 92 mc. J Adjust for null point. See
Strength Meter.* Note 8.
9 If Trimmer (J) in Step 8 is turned more than Yi turn, repeat Step 7.
10 Repeat Step 8 if Step 9 was necessary.
11 FM 98.0 *78 F.M. Ant. FM 98 mc. K Adjust for maximum out-

mc. ohm Terminals put.
Durrun
1. All Amplitude Modulated input signals are modulated 30% at 400 cycles with the High side of the signal
generator connected to receiver as indicated in the alignment chart. Connect the low side of signal genera-
tor thru a 0.1 mfd condenser to the receiver chassis.
2. Receiver should tune thru peaks at 540 and 1600 kc.
3. Sweep generator alignment. (For 10.7 mc. I.F. alignment use approximately 450 kc. sweep width).
4. Sweep generator output 0.1 to 1 volt R. M. S.
5. Connect high side of scope to discriminator transformer terminal at shielded lead wire junction. Connect
low side of scope to the receiver chassis.
6. Align for maximum peak amplitude. Peak separations should be 150 to 170 kc.
7. Disconnect scope. Connect output meter to voice coil (3.2 ohms).
8. It is important that the radiation balance trimmer be adjusted to the null point for proper operation of
the Frequency Modulation band. To check the null point, connect a Field Strength Meter across the
F.M. antenna primary trimmer.
9. (a) With the F.M. signal generator set to 98.0 megacycles, feed a signal, modulated with 400 cycles at
30% to the receiver as indicated in the alignment chart. Shunt the antenna primary trimmer with a
10 ohm carbon resistor and adjust trimmer (H) for maximum output.
(b) Place the 10 ohm carbon resistor across the F.M. antenna secondary trimmer and adjust trimmer (I)
for maximum output. Remove 10 ohm carbon resistor from secondary trimmer.
Copyright 1947. CROSLEY Division-AVCO Manufacturing Corporation
19
REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST -MODELS 88TA, 88TC
Figures in first column correspond to figures in Schematic Diagram
49 39373-92 Resistor, 1 megohm, w.
Item Part No. Description 60 39373-97 Resistor, 2.2 megohm, w.
No. 51 39373-102 Resistor, 4.7 megohm, A w.
Transformer Amy., Antenna (F.M.) 52 W-139035 Resistor, 80 ohm (Wire Wound) ) Two
1 AC -137783 Resistor, 18 ohm (Wire Wound) (Section
2 AC -138819 Transformer Amy., 1st I.F. Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper
Transformer Amy., 2nd I.F. 54 39001-17
3 AC -139094 55 39001-17 Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper
4 AC -139077 Transformer Amy., Discriminator Condenser, .01 mfd., 600 v., paper
Coil Amy., Oscillator (Broadcast) 66 39001-13
5 AW-138924 57 39001-13 Condenser, .01 mfd., 600 v., paper
6 AW-138950 Coil Amy.,Oscillator Mixer Coupling Condenser, .01 mfd., 600 v., paper
Choke Assy., Plate (F.M. Osc.) 58 39001-13
7 AW-138978 60 39001-13 Condenser, .01 mfd., 600 v., paper
8 AW-139056 Condenser Assy., .01 mad., 200 v., (shielded) Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper
Choke, R.F. Heater 61 39001-17
9A AW-136720 62 39001-17 Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper
9B Choke, R.F. Heater Condenser, .06 mfd., 600 v., paper
Loop and Support Assy., Antenna 63 39001-17
10 AB -139118 64 39001-19 Condenser, .1 mfd., 600 v., paper
11 Part of Item 1 Coil Amy. 65 39001-76 Condenser, .003 mfd., 600 v., paper
12A Part of Item 1 C°iI}Two Section Assy. 66 39001-80 Condenser, .02 mfd., 600 v., paper
12B Coil Part of Item 3 Condenser, 100 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
Speaker 67
13 AD -138246 68 Part of Item 3 Condenser, 100 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
14A C-139028 Condenser, Variable[ Two
Condenser, Variable J Section 69 Part of Item 2 Condenser, 100 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
14B 70 C-137727-8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 .v., ceramic
15 B-137364 Transformer, Output Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
B-137781 Control, Volume (1 megohm)\ 71 C-137727-8
16A C-137727-8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
16B Switch, Power 72
Control, Volume 73 C-137727-8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
39368-18 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
39370-2 Shaft, Plug, in 74 C-137727-8
39369-1 Switch, Power 75 Part of Item 4 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
Control, Tone (2 megohm) 76 C-137727-8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
17 B-137782 C-137727-8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
39368-11 Control, Tone 77
18A B-137976 Condenser, 50 mfd., 200 v. Four 78 Part of Item 10 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
Condenser, 50 mfd., 200 v. Section 79 C-137727-19 Condenser, 39 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
18B Part of Item 4 Condenser, 50 mmf., 600 v., ceramic
18C Condenser, 60 mfd., 150 v. Elect. 80
Condenser, 20 mfd., 25 v. Filter 81 C-137727-24 Condenser, 180 mmf., 500 v., ceramic
18 D C-137727-28 Condenser, 51 mmf., 500 v., ceramic
B-137986 Switch, Band Change 82
19 Condenser, 10 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
20 W-48858 Bulb (Dial), Type 47, 6.3 v., .15 amp. 83 C-137727-37
21 39012-70 Iron Core, F.M. Oscillator Coil 84 Part of Item 4 Condenser, 10 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
Interlock Assy. 85 B-137499-5 Condenser, 500 mmf., 300 v., silver mica
22 AB -138971 Part of Item 6 Condenser, 3.3 mmf., 500 v.
23 C-132300-6 Cable and Plug Assy., Power 86
Transmission Line, 75 ohm 87 W-139285 Condenser, 52 mmf., ceramic
26 W-137143 88 W-138268 Condenser, Trimmer
26 W-139286 Coil, Oscillator (F.M.)
Resistor, 47 ohm, IA w. 89 C-136327-29 Condenser, Trimmer
27 39373-9 Part of Item 1 Condenser, Trimmer
28 39373-93 Resistor, 1.2 megohm, w. 90
29 39373-143 Resistor, 1000 ohm, 1 w. 91 Part of Item 1 Condenser, Trimmer
30 39373-16 Resistor, 150 ohm, A w. 92 Part of Item 2 Condenser, Trimmer
32 3937343 Resistor, 1000 ohm, A w. 94 Part of Item 3 Condenser, Trimmer
39373-33 Resistor, 1000 ohm, A w. 97 Part of Item 2 Condenser, Trimmer
35 Part of Item 3 Condenser, Trimmer
37 39373-54 Resistor, 10,000 ohm, A w. 98
38 39373-54 Resistor, 10,000 ohm, A w. 99 Part of Item 3 Condenser, Trimmer
39 39373-64 Resistor, 33,000 ohm, A w. 100 Part of Item 4 Condenser, Trimmer
40 Part of Item 3 Resistor, 47,000 ohm, A w. 101 Part of Item 4 Condenser, Trimmer
41 39373-67 Resistor, 47,000 ohm, A w. 102 Part of Item 6 Resistor, 47,000 ohm, !,; w.
Part of Item 4 Resistor, 100,000 ohm, A w. 103 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper
42 Resistor, 100,000 ohm, 14 w.
43 Part of Item 4 Resistor, 100,000 ohm, %Z. w. 104 39373-74
C-137727-8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
44 Part of Item 4 Resistor, 100,000 ohm, [' w. 105
Resistor, 1 megohm, w.
46 39373-84 Resistor, 330,000 ohm, A w. 107 39373-92
Resistor, 470,000 ohm, A w. 108 39373-92 Resistor, 1 megohm, 2 w.
47 39373-87
48 39373-92 Resistor, 1 megohm, w. 109 Part of Item 10 Resistor, 1 megohm, w.
IS' I -F. AMPLIFIER AM. DECTECTOR a AVG FM. DISCRIMINATOR

FM. 2° AWL.
NC
°
OSC *43ti.'
RADIATION GA{
TANNER
0 012 -
131.04111!(1):
-.0
0
0-- A94
SOCKET VOLTAGE CHART ®

P' AUDIO AMPL.
O ..OtA
MF4i...
ANT SEC.
NOTES:
BoT TON VIEW OF TUN SOCKETS.
(t)
12-
ihrdra.
:(1)
2 MEASURE VOLTAGE WITH AN ELECTRONIC VOL
FROM SOCKET LUG TO CHASSIS.
A ALL VOLTASES ARE TN! SA/SE FOR BC. FM. EXCEPT
TN DELTA IALTIIIS IS THE VOLTAGE
0 0- :640/(11--
MITH RAND SUITOR IN THE PM. POSITION
OSCILLATOR 24 POWER OUTPUT RECTIFIER
A -LINE VOLTAGE 1170 N00
A NC NO CONNECTION 6.4 120
G. VIJ MIRING JUNCTION 90 -0
=0 " 3 o ____15164:1 0 60 NC
7 AC. VOLTAGE
A SOCKET VOLTAGE TOLERANCE 10%
452 112:t.
wA'ts ikt 25L A--I's fitz146 ilk\
30-0 552
93 ....,- 31111 GT/0 11):
o
07/G ...P -432
AV R "1
SC. OR M VOLT. 41: VO (39 W j r0.40144:
t 41:11," / '464, sm. -...
BROADCAST SAND- N. WI -36 I00-1'44."..
---- 105
120
12
*112
20
-CR-OIL-EY
Model: 87C Q and Revised Models: 86CR, 86CS
Pages 21 to 28.
ANT. PRIMARY
107 MG TRAP
Arra
5arkom
.1
AM.USED.
ANT.
ROUND
IF Model 86CR-Walnut Cabine,t
ORONO MOTOR and Albums.
OGNET
Model 86CS-Mahogany Cabinet
Model 87CQ with doors. No albums.
TYPE: Eight -tube, three -band, Superheterodyne. Frequency Modulation Band: 10.7 mc.
FREQUENCY RANGE: Standard American Broad-
cast Band: 540 to 1600 kc. (Selector Switch to AM POWER SUPPLY: 60 cycle a.c. only.
position).
VOLTAGE RATING: 105-125 volts.
Short-wave Band: 9.45 to 11.9 mc. (Selector switch
at SW position). POWER CONSUMPTION: 85 watts maximum at
Frequency Modulated Band: 88.1 to 107.9 mc., normal power supply voltage (117 volts), 20 watts
Channel 201 to 300 (Selector Switch at FM position). additional for record changer.
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY: Standard Ameri-
can Broadcast Band and Short-wave Band: 5825 POWER OUTPUT: 8 watts maximum at 3.2 ohm
and 167.5 kc. load.
NOTE: Models 87CQ, 86CR, 86CS, use the Model "K" Automatic Record Changer.
2nd A.M. MIXER
F. .DETECTOR3 DISCRIMINATOR I.F.AMPLIFIER A.M. 2nd I.F.T.-F.M. 1st I.F.AMPL.F.M. let I.F. TRANSFORMERS
TRANS. 10.7 MC 2nd I.F.AMPL.Fe. 1st I.F.T.-A.M. mi. 0 5825 BC - 10.7
( 10.7MC Sec. s 'sot'sL
1(:)
'5"o=0. 4E0Cd. AIJ:I 25 (144/167-CilimisStil IN BArDJSeT. If 1A0D1JUITri Pr,.M
IO
6 1111 ,4
1 e't
5825 KC Sec. 5825 KC Pri.
.0V
,
167.5 KC
I
TR 1414 T A
Sec.Adj. 11100 I ' I
15
A.M.DET.-AVC.-let A.F.AMPL. 4135
I a
(167.5 KC Pr 161-17/C-14TM'
NOTES: ADJUSTMENT F.M. MIXER
I. Bottom View of Sockets. 255
2. Voltage measered from sogket
lugs to chassis.
3. Voltage me arse with an
Bizt .A0:19).Csaddl. KIT8,121137,3 gm II a
Electronic Voltmeter. SNOWING ITRII. NO'S
R. Voltage ne sewed with switch in ------
AM. position except where marked 2nd I.F.TRAIIS.A.14. SASii_20__READJ.
witNA.
5.4 Oland Switch in FM position.
" Miring Junction.
7.NC
B.
No connection.
A.C. Voltage. (6* 8C.OSC.CORE ADJ.
F.W.ANT.TRINS.
SEC. TRIMMER
9. All voltages measured at nominal
1
operating voltage 117 volts -60 cycle

F.M.ANT.TRANS.
BR. 4o,t1g: il,cog tolerance 10%.
lot A 2nd OSC.A.W. PRI. TRIMMER
co scfmr.tIc ore
mint:ter to °°°°° °'"" OSCILLATOR F.M.
1st 0. CILLATOR GRID VOLTS

BAND FREGUENCT VOLTS S.W. AMT. SEC.
AM Minimum 13.5
-8.2 TRIMMER
SW Minimum -2.5
FM Minimum -3.1
SOCKET VOLTAGE CHART SHOWING BOTTOM ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENTS

Copyright 1947. CROSLEY Division-AVCO Manufacturing Corporation
21
ALIGNMENT EQUIPMENT
The following equipment is used as indicated in the alignment charts and alignment notes:
Signal Generators:
1. Amplitude Modulated Signal Generator with 400 cycle modulated signal to cover 167.5 kc. to 108 mc.
2. Frequency Modulated Signal Generator to cover 87 to 108 mc., with sweep to cover 10 to 30 kc. on narrow
band and 450 kc. on wide band (Scope alignment only).
Cathode Ray Oscillograph (Scope alignment only).
Meters:
1. Suitable Output Meter.
2. Field Strength Meter (Fig. 1). This meter may consist of a D.C. 100 microampere (full scale) meter, shunted
by a 1000 mmf. mica by-pass condenser; a crystal
rectifier connected in series with the meter and a GERMANIUM
5 FOOT 75 OHM
five foot, 75 ohm twisted, pair of leads. The open TWISTED PAIR
CRYSTAL
ends of the leads are connected to the dipole TO DIPOLE ANT.
antenna terminals. Connect condenser directly 10 /la
TERMINALS
across meter terminals, and crystal directly to one 1000 mmf
terminal of meter. Keep connecting leads as short as Fig. 1
possible.
Dummy Antennas: F.M. SIGNAL

39 OHM
DIPOLE ANT.
1. 78 ohm Dummy Antenna (Fig. 2). GENERATOR CARBON RESISTORS TERMINALS
TERMINALS 39 OHM
2. Dummy Loop Antenna (Fig. 3) is used to replace
"Signal Web" antenna, when chassis is removed
Fig. 2
from cabinet.
SIDE OF LOOP
GENERATOR THRU TERMINAL
Condensers:
30 uuf. CAP.
1. 0.1 mfd. Condenser.
2. 30 mmf. Condenser.
GROUND SIDE OF
GENERATOR GROUND
Shunts: Fig. 3
1.. 5000 ohm carbon Resistor in series with a 0.1 mfd. Condenser.
2. Hairpin Shorting Shunt composed of two inches of No. 14 bare tinned copper wire.
11011 A I
rg,
AMOME.
Chassis top and
back view show-
ing location of
tubes and top
alignment ad-
0 1.1.S RC
%
0 CI
0
0
justments. A.R. HARR CORO
40 OMCM
HASA,
0
I.E.
TRIOUORIHR
FC Olt
1:111'12
0 0
0 0
0
O
O
WOM
SOCRI, V01.146( MARI. 110. T. -111T4

F OR 1101101 or taus, UM.. AR.
22 """1:14Nt"*".
TONI. CO110l
Turn the tuning condenser to full mesh, against stop, and set the dial pointer, to the reference point which is
to the left of Channel 200 on the dial.
Set tone control knob to the treble position, (extreme right).
When output meter is used, connect across voice coil: (3.2 ohms).
Feed an R. F. signal modulated 30% at 400 cycles to the receiver as indicated on the alignment chart
When F. M. signal generator is used, a 30% modulated signal is equal to 22.5 kilocycles deviation.
Turn volume control knob to maximum clockwise position and adjust signal generator output to produce
a noticeable output meter reading, (approx. 500 mw.) Keep signal generator output as low as possible to
prevent excessive AVC action in the receiver.
A. M. Signal Generator Output Position of ALIGNMENT CHART (Output Meter Method)

Dial
Align- In Series Range Pointer Osc. Remarks
ment Frequency with To Switch or Adjust Frequency (Alignment notes begin on page zs)
Sequence Var.Cond.
1 167.5 kc. 0.1 mfd. 2nd I. F. Grid SW Open 2nd I. F. See Note 1
6SG7 (B) Trans. (8)
2 167.5 kc. 0.1 mfd. 1st I. F. Grid SW Open 1st I. F. See Note 2
6SG7 (A) Trans. (4)
3 10.7 mc. 30 mmf. 2nd I. F. Grid FM Open Discriminator See Note 3
6SG7 (B) Trans. (5)
4 10.7 mc. 30 mmf. 1st I. F. Grid FM Open 2nd I. F. 10.7 mc. See Note 4
6SG7 (A) Trans. (4)
5 10.7 mc. 30 mmf. See Note 5 FM Open 1st I. F. 10.7 mc. See Note 5
Trans. (2) & (3)
*Link Coupling
6 5825 kc. 30 mmf. on 10.7 mc. SW Open 5825 kc. I. F. 167.5 kc. See Note 6-*The short lead
I. F. No. 2 Trans. (3) Above between Transformers No. 2 & 3
7 5825 kc. 30 mmf. 6AC7 SW Open 5825 kc. I. F. 167.5 kc. See Note 7
Grid Trans. (2) Above
F. M. Osc. Core
8 100 mc. *78 ohm F. M. Dipole FM Channel F. M. Ant. Trims. 10.7 mc. See Note 8-*See "Dummy
Dummy Terminals 260.5 Sec. & Prim. Above Antennas (1) "
9 97.9 mc. .78 ohm F. M. Dipole FM Channel F. M. Osc. Core 10.7 mc. See Note 9-*See "Dummy
Dummy Terminals 250 Above Antennas (1) "
10 Disconnect Generator FM Channel Radiation Bal. *See Note 10-*See "Field Strength
*Connect Field Strength Meter 215 Trimmer Meter"
11 *9.6 mc. 30 mmf. One F. M. SW 9.6 mc. S. W. Oscillator 5825 kc. *Disconnect Field Strength Meter
Ant. Term. Series Padder Above Connect Signal Generator. See
Note 11
12 11.8 mc. 30 mmf. One F. M. SW .11.8 mc. S. W. Osc. Core 5825 kc. See Note 12
Ant. Term. Above
13 10.7 mc. 30 mmf. One F. M. SW 10.7 mc. S. W. Ant. Prim. See Note 13
Ant. Term. & Sec. Padder
14 10.7 mc. 30 mmf. One F. M. FM 10.7 mc. S. W. Primary See Note 14
Ant. Term. (10.7 mc. Trap)
*HI. Side AM Closed B. C. Oscillator 5825 kc. *See Note 16-See "Dummy
15 535 kc. 30 mmf. of Dummy Series Padder Above Antennas (2) "
Loop Ant.
HI. Side
16 1620 kc. 30 min!. of Dummy AM Open B. C. Osc. Core 5825 kc. See Note 16
Loop Ant. Above
HI. Side
17 1400 kc. 30 mmf. of Dummy AM 1400 kc. B. C. Antenna See Note 17
Loop Ant. Trimmer
HI. Side
18 600 kc. 30 mmf. of Dummy AM 600 kc. B. C. Antenna See Note 18
Loop Ant. Core
HI. Side
19 5825 kc. 30 mmf. of Dummy AM 1400 kc. B. C. Wave See Note 19
Loop Ant. Trap Trim.
20 600 kc. See Note 20
*Refer to remarks (with corresponding asterisk) in last column. 23

N
Irtir
.4,45
as lT
tl..Jodo
It tO
To. ...WM.
an,
tam moms.
2=C
'Irt7 1 tom
MT 11.0"..4"nn
nr 1-0 !Dots
miTztv.
Annan. MOM M.VE COM
ino.o. Vann Man.
r ---
!
MODELS 87CQ, AND REVISED MODELS 86CR, 86CS.

:
g i
anal. Gana novo v. no. MEC.
MOWN &Mann oat. Affelas.
sow To sow OtaMen OE GO 01."
-CROSIE*
DIVISION -4M 141INTJFACTURING CORPORATION
ALIGNMENT NOTES (Output Meter Method)
Use the following notes in conjunction with ALIGNMENT CHART, TOP AND BACK VIEW,
SOCKET VOLTAGE CHAR; and SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM. Reference numbers of
parts correspond to item numbers in Parts List.
1. (a) Place Shunt from link, between transformers (5) and (8), to ground See "Shunts (1):' Adjust
secondary (top) for maximum output.
(b) Connect the Shunt from diode plate (pin No. 4) of 6SQ7 tube socket to the shielded lead junction on
transformer (8). Adjust primary (bottom) for maximum output. Remove Shunt.
2. (a) Place Shunt from plate of the 6SG7 tube socket (A) to the transformer side of 2200 ohm resistor (106),
See "Shunts (1)". Adjust secondary (bottom) for maximum output.
(b) Connect the Shunt from grid of the 6SG7 tube socket (B) to Transformer side of 68,000 ohm resistor
(109). Adjust primary (top) for maximum output. Remove Shunt.
3. (a) Adjust secondary (bottom) core for null point.
(b) Tune Signal Generator for maximum Output Meter reading, approximately 75 to 100 kc. off the null
point obtained in 3 (a), and note reading.
(c) Tune Signal Generator to the opposite side of the null point for maximum reading on the Output Meter.
Note this reading. If the two readings are not equal, adjust primary (top) core until equal readings
are obtained.
4. (a) Set Signal Generator to peak on high side of 10.7 mc. and adjust primary (top) and secondary (bottom)
for maximum output. Note meter reading.
(b) Set Signal Generator to peak on low side of 10.7 mc. and note reading. If necessary, readjust primary
(top) and secondary (bottom), slightly, until Output Meter readings and frequency spacing are equal
on both sides of the 10.7 mc. null point.
5. (a) Connect Signal Generator output in series with a 30 mmf. condenser to either lug of the F. M. antenna
transformer primary Trimmer (60). Connect Signal Generator ground to the receiver chassis at a point
close to the trimmer. Keep lead lengths to a minimum and do not drape shielded cable, from Signal
Generator output, near under side of chassis.
(b) Set Signal Generator to peak on high side of 10.7 mc. and adjust 10.7 mc. primary (bottom) of trans-
former (2). Adjust 10.7 mc. secondary (top) of transformer (3). These two adjustments should be
adjusted for maximum output. Note reading on Output Meter.
(c) Set Signal Generator to peak on low side of 10.7 mc. and note Output Meter reading. If meter readings
obtained on the peaks on both sides of 10.7 mc. are not equal, readjust the 10.7 mc. primary of trans-
former (2), and the 10.7 mc. secondary of transformer (3). The peaks should appear approximately
80 kc. on each side of 10.7 mc.
6. (a) Set Signal Generator frequency control for maximum output. Adjust 5825 kc. secondary Trimmer and
secondary link adjustment, on bottom of transformer (3), for maximum output.
7. (a) Adjust 5825 kc. primary trimmer (bottom) and 5825 kc. primary link adjustment (top) of transformer
(2) for maximum output.
8. (a) Adjust F. M. oscillator core (131), on top of chassis, to midway position.
(b) Preset F. M. radiation balance adjustment (57), on top of chassis, to approximately two turns from
the closed position.
(c) Short circuit F. M. antenna primary trimmer (60), located on bottom of chassis, with Hairpin Shorting
Shunt See "Shunts (2)."
(d) Adjust F. M. antenna secondary trimmer (58), on bottom of chassis, for maximum output.
(e) Transfer Shorting Shunt to F. M. antenna secondary Trimmer (58) and adjust F. M. antenna. primary
Trimmer (60) for maximum output.
25
(f) Remove Shorting Shunt.
9. (a) Adjust F. M. oscillator core (131), slowly, until 97.9 mc. signal is tuned in. Receiver should tune thru
87.9 and 107.9 mc. signal (channel 200 and 300).
10. (a) Connect Field Strength Meter to dipole antenna terminals, on back of chassis.
(b) Adjust F. M. radiation balance trimmer (57), on top of chassis, to null point. If it is necessary to move
this trimmer more than a quarter turn, repeat steps 8 and 10.
Alternate Method :-Connect a D.C. Vacumn Tube Voltmeter to No. 1 lug of 7F8 tube socket and adjust F. M.
radiation balance trimmer for maximum grid volt reading.
11. (a) Set Signal Generator to 9.6 mc. modulated 30% at 400 cycles.
(b) Turn volume control to maximum.
(c) Adjust short-wave series padder (55), on top of chassis, for maximum output.
12. (a) Adjust short-wave oscillator core, on bottom of chassis, for maximum output. Repeat steps 11 and 12
until dial tracks at 9.6 and 11.8 mc.
13. (a) Shunt short-wave antenna primary padder (51), (lug connected to coil) to chassis with a Shorting Clip.
(b) Increase Signal Generator output if necessary.
(c) Adjust short-wave antenna secondary trimmer (59), for maximum output, while rocking variable
condenser.
(d) Transfer the Shorting Clip to across the short-wave antenna secondary trimmer (59).
(e) Adjust short-wave antenna primary padder (51), for maximum output, while rocking variable conden-
ser.
(f) Remove Shorting Clip.
14. (a) Connect Field Strength Meter froni Signal Generator side of 30 mmf. condenser to chassis.
(b) Increase or decrease Signal Generator output until Field Strength Meter reads between 10 and 15
microamperes.
(c) Adjust short-wave antenna primary padder (51), for lowest reading on Field Strength Meter. Make
this adjustment slowly, otherwise the dip may be passed unnoticed when a highly damped meter is used.
(d) Disconnect Field Strength Meter.
Alternate Method :-After the receiver is installed in cabinet, turn band switch to F. M. position and tune in an
F. M. station. If a 10.7 kc. signal (indicated by a whistle or code) is heard in the speaker, adjust the short-wave
antenna primary (51) until the interferring signal disappears or is minimized. Make this adjustment slowly.
15. (a) Connect Dummy Loop Antenna to Signal Web Antenna terminal and to ground terminal (See "Dummy
Antennas (2)."
(b) Preset broadcast antenna wave trap (85), on top of chassis, to approximately two turns from the closed
position.
(c) Adjust broadcast oscillator series padder (56), on top of chassis, for maximum output.
16. (a) Adjust broadcast oscillator core, on bottom of chassis, for maximum output.
(b) Repeat steps 15 to 16 until frequency shift stops.
17. (a) Adjust broadcast antenna trimmer, on top of variable condenser, for maximum output.
18. (a) Adjust broadcast antenna core (132), on top of chassis, for maximum output while rocking variable
condenser.
26
19. (a) Set dial pointer to approximately 1400 ke. and retune Signal Generator to maximum output.
(b) Adjust Signal Generator output to approximately midseale reading on the Output Meter.
(c) Adjust broadcast antenna wave trap trimmer (85), for lowest reading on Output Meter.
(e) All Air Trim/hers should be locked in position by applying a drop of household cement on the screw
threads.
20. (a) After the receiver is placed in cabinet and all connections are made for normal operation, readjust the
broadcast antenna core for maximum output at 600 kc.
ALIGNMENT CHART (Scope Method)

Align- Type Type of Osc.
ment Gen- Dial Selectivity Fre-
Se- erator Fre- In To Range Pointer Adjust Curve quency Remarks
quence quency Series Switch or
with .._
Var. Cond.
2nd I. F. Flat or
1 F. M. 167.6 0.1 2nd I. F. Grid SW Open Trans. (8), Double See Notes 1(a) & 2(a)
kc. mfd. 6:3G7 (B) Top & Bottom Peak
1st I. F. 10% Double
2 F. M. 167.5 0.1 1st I. F. Grid SW Open Trans. (4), Peal See Notes 1(a) & 2(a)
kc. mfd. 6SG7 (A) Bottom & Top
Discriminator Adjust *Disconnect F. M. Signal
3 * 10.7 30 1st I. F. Grid FM Open Trans. (6), for null Generator and Scope
A. M. mc. mmf. 6SG7 (A) Bottom point See Note 5.
Discriminator *Disconnect A. M. Signe
4 * 10.7 30 1st I. F. Grid FM Open Trans. (6), ...,./.... Generator and Output
Meter
F. M. mc. mmf. 6SG7 (A) Top
See Notes 1(b), 2(b), &
5 F. M. 10.7 30 1st I. F. Grid FM Open

2nd I. F., 10.7 mc.,
Trans. (4),
....r_ See Notes 1(b), 2(b), & 4
Readjust, slightly, dis
mc. mmf. 6SG7 (A) Top & Bottom criminator primary (Top)
6 F. M. 10.7
mc.
30
mmf.
Grid,of
6AC7
FM 1st I. F., 10.7 mc., --j
Open
Trans. (2) & (3)
\r-- See Notes 1(b), 2(b), & 4
Adjust Trans. (2) bottom
Adjust Trans. (3) Top
7 A. M. Use Alignment Chart on page 4. Begin with sequence No. 6 and continue thru to sequence No. 19, inclusive.
*Refer to Remarks (with corresponding asterisk) in last column.
1. (a) Sweep align (Use approximately 20 to 30 kc. to sweep).

(b) Sweep align (Use approximately 450 kc. to sweep).,
2. (a) For 167.5 kc.; connect Scope to terminal No. 8 on the rear plate section of band change switch.
(b) For 10.7 mc.; connect Scope, thru a 100,000 ohm resistor, to lug No. 6 of 6H6 tube socket.
3. Sweep Generator output 100,000 to 200,000 microvolts.
4. Scope Adjustment remains. Reduce Sweep input.
5. Connect Output Meter across voice coil. Feed an R. F. signal, calibrated at 10.7 mc. and modulated
30% at 400 cycles, to the receiver as indicated.
Cross index between channel calibrations on the dial and frequency in megacycles follow:
Channel No. Frequency in Megacycles' Channel No. Frequency in Megacycles
200 87.9 255 98.9
205 88.9 260 99.9
210 89.9 265 100 . 9
215 90.9 270 101 . 9
220 91.9 275 102 . 9
225 92.9 280 103.9
230 93.9 285 104.9
235 94.9 290 105 . 9
240 95.9 295 106 . 9
245
250
96.9
97.9
300 107 . 9
27
PARTS LIST-MODEL 87CQ AND REVISED MODELS 86CR, 86CS
Figures in first column correspond to figures in Schematic Diagram
Item Part No. Description Item Part No.

No. No. Description
AC -136171 Transformer Assy. (F. M. Antenna) 81 Part of Item #4 Condenser, 33 mmf., 500 v., ceramic
2 AC -136264 Transformer, 10.7 mc. and 5.825 mc. 83 B-226638-49 Condenser, 10 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
I. F. (A) 85 C-137219-3 Condenser, Trimmer (B. C. Ant. Wave
3 AC -136081 Transformer, 10.7 mc. and 5.825 mc. Trap)
I. F. (B) 86 B-226638-27 Condenser, 82 mmf., 500 v., ceramic
4 AC -136276 Transformer, 10.7 mc. and 167.5 kc. I. F. 87 B-226638-51 Condenser, 39 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
5 AC -136260 Transformer, 10.7 mc. Discriminator 88 B-226638-52 Condenser, 91 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
6 AC -136509 Coil Assy., 1st Oscillator (B. C. & S. W.) 89 GC -210685-183 Condenser, 50 mmf., 500 v., mica
8 AC -136261 Transformer, 167.5 kc., Diode 90 B-226638-35 Condenser, 27 mmf., 500 v., ceramic
9 AW-136511 Coil, Antenna (B. C.) 91 Part of Item #3 Condenser, 27 mmf., 500 v., ceramic
10 AB -136444 Coil Assy., Antenna (S. W.) 92 Part of Item #1 Resistor, 1000 ohm, w.
24 W-136179 Coil, F. M. Oscillator 93 39373-87 Resistor, 470,000 ohm, w.
25 39001-17 Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper 94 39373-87 Resistor, 470,000 ohm, 3/2 w.
26A B-137028 Condenser, 20 mfd., 400 v.) Four 95 39373-69 Resistor, 56,000 ohm, w.
Condenser, 30 mfd., 350 v. Section 96 39373-94 Resistor, 1.5 megohm, w.
26B
26C Condenser, 20 mfd., 300 v.(Elect. 97 39373-67 Resistor, 47,000 ohm, w.
26D Condenser, 20 mfd., 25 vt) Filter 98 39373-75 Resistor, 120,000 ohm, w.
27 B-135336 Transformer, Power 99 39373-75 Resistor, 120,000 ohm, 3/2 w.
28A C-135946 Condenser, Variable)Two 100 39373-129 Resistor, 220 ohm, 1 w.
Condenser, Variable f Section 101 39373-74 Resistor, 100,000 ohm, %' w.
28B
29 C-136161 Switchi Band Change 102 39373-74 Resistor, 100,000 ohm, 3 w.
30 B-135783 Control, Volume (3 megohm, Tap 103 39373-74 Resistor, 100,000 ohm, w.
720,000 ohm) 104 39373-80 Resistor, 220,000 ohm, 3,2 w.
39368-22 Control (Volume) 105 39373-40 Resistor, 2,200 ohm, w.
39370-2 Shaft (Knurled Plug-in) 106 39373-40 Resistor, 2,200 ohm, M w.
31A B-135784 Control, TonelAssembly 107 39373-40 Resistor, 2,200 ohm, w.
31B Switch, Power 108 39373-90 Resistor, 680,000 ohm, 3/2' w.
32A W-48858 Bulb (Dial), Type 47, 6.3 v., .15 amp. 109 39373-71 Resistor, 68,000 ohm, IA w.
32B W-48858 Bulb (Dial), Type 47, 6.3 v., .15 amp. 110 Part of Item #8 Resistor, 68,000 ohm, ,1/2 w.
33 C-132300-2 Cable and Plug Assy., Power 111 39373-92 Resistor, 1 megohm, w.
34 39001-7 Condenser, .001 mfd., 600 v., paper 112 39373-92 Resistor, 1 megohm, w.
35 39001-13 Condenser, .01 mfd., 600 v., paper 113 Part of Item #1 Resistor, 1 megohm, w.
36 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 114 39001-17 Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper
37 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 115 39373-67 Resistor, 47,000 ohm, V2 w.
38 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 116 39373-62 Resistor, 27,000 ohm, w.
39 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 118 39373-60 Resistor, 22,000 ohm, w.
40 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 119 B-226638-59 Condenser, 15 mmf., 500 v., ceramic
41 39001-1r Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 120A W-137021 Resistor (Wire -wound),)
42 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 400 ohm, 4 w. lTwo
43 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 120B Resistor (Wire -wound), (Section
44 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 700 ohm, 4 w.
45 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 121 39373-107 Resistor, 10 megohm, w.
46 39001-13 Condenser, .01 mfd., 600 v paper 122 C-135974 Speaker & Transformer Assy. (86CR,
47 39001-13 Condenser, .01 mfd., 600 v., paper 86CS)
48 39001-17 Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper 123 AW-136911 Condenser, 1.3 mmf. (Transmission Line)
49 39001-17 Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper 124 39019-3 Terminal Board
50 39001-76 Condenser, .003 mfd., 600 v., paper 125 W-137143 Transmission Line (75 ohm)
51 C-137219-1 Condenser, Trimmer (S. W. Ant. Prim.) 126 W-137143 Loop Antenna (Transmission Line)
52 Part of Item #2 Condenser, Trimmer (5.825 mc. Prim.) 128 39001-17 Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper
53 Part of Item #3 Condenser, Trimmer (5.825 mc. Sec.) 129 39001-7 Condenser, .001 mfd., 600 v., paper
55 W-136964 Condenser, Air Trimmer (S. W. Osc. 130 B-226638-49 Condenser, 10 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
Series Padder) 131 39012-59 Iron Core (F. M. Osc.)
66 W-136964 Condenser, Air Trimmer (B. C. Osc. 132 39012-60 Iron Core (B. C. Ant.)
Series Padder) 133 W-136998 Connector, Phono Pickup
57 W-136964 Condenser, Air Trimmer (F. M. Radia- 134 W-137213 t Cable & Plug Assy., Phono Motor
tion Balance) 135 B-138131-2 Transformer, Output ,
58 Part of Item #1 Condenser, Trimmer (F. M. Ant. Sec.) 137 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper
59 Part of Item #10 Condenser, Trimmer (S. W. Ant. Sec.) 138 39373-170 Resistor, 22,000 ohm, 1 w.
60 Part of Item #1 Condenser, Trimmer (F. M. Ant. Prim.) 139 39373-60 Resistor, 22,000 ohm, w.
61 Part of Item #2 Condenser, 82 mmf., 300 v., ceramic 140 W-138531 Condenser, 53 mmf., 500 v., ceramic
141 B-138774 Crystal, 5992.5 kc.
62 Part of Item #3 Condenser, 68 mmf., 300 v., ceramic 142 W-137398-6 Condenser, 4.7 mmf., 500v.
63 Part of Item #4 Condenser, 470 mmf., 300 v., silver mica 143 39373-92 Resistor, 1 megohm, w.
64 Part of Item #4 Condenser, 470 mmf., 300 v., silver mica 144 Part of Item #1 Condenser, 30 mmf., 500 v., mica
65 Part of Item #8 Condenser, 470 mmf., 300 v., silver mica 145 C-138777 Speaker & Transformer Assy. (87CQ)
66 Part of Item #2 Condenser, 150 mmf., 500 v., silver mica 146 AB -138935 Cable & Plug Assy., Speaker (87CQ)
67 Part of Item #3 Condenser, 150 mmf., 500 v., silver mica
68 Part of Item #5 Condenser, 150 mmf., 500 v., silver mica C-137173 Album, 12" Record (86 CR)
69 Part of Item #5 Condenser, 150 mmf.' 500 v., silver mica C-137236 Album, 10" Record (86 CR)
70 Part of Item #5 Condenser, 62 mmf., 500 v., ceramic AC -136204 Background, Dial (86CR, 86CS)
71 B-226638-39 Condenser, 120 mmf., 300 v., ceramic AC -139380 Background, Dial (87CQ)
75 Part of Item #8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 500 v., silver mica C-136222 Bracket, Variable condenser Mtg.
Condenser, 100 mmf., 500 v., mica R-137010 Cabinet (86C 1i)
76 GC -210685-182 R-138491 Cabinet (86CS)
77 Part of Item #8 Condenser, 100 mmf., 500 v., mica R-138569 Cabinet (87CQ)
79 Part of Item #5 Condenser, 12 mmf., 30G -v., ceramic W-136201 Clip, Dial Glass
80 Part of Item #4 Condenser, 33 mmf., 500 v., ceramic W-131154-1 Cotter, External
28 There are also other parts.

-GRAS-LEY
Models 146CS, 146CS (V)
TYPE: Fourteen tube, four -band superheterodyne. Frequency Modulation Band: 88.1 to 107.9 mc.
(Selector switch at FM position).
FREQUENCY RANGE: American Broadcast Band:
535 to 1620 kc. (Selector switch at AM position). INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY: AM, Police and
SW Bands: 455 kc. FM Band: 10.7 mc.
Police Band: 2.25 to 6.7 mc. (Selector switch at POWER SUPPLY: 60 cycle a.c. only.
POLICE position). VOLTAGE RATING: 105-125 volts.
Short-wave Band: 6.7 to 18.5 mc. (Selector switch POWER CONSUMPTION: 120 watts.
at SW position). POWER OUTPUT: 18 watts maximum.
110E0
00
Top view of
chassis showing
trimmers and tubes.
811 0-1 if.,(11.."

I I 111
t 0.,11 1 I' ft, 1,1 I tA P.m. "Al &DJ', 0

MIT (4114/1
...111.A.MILIAT11,110WIAS
OA/ LIS RC 4.4

11
1.1Am bon or*dc.11

'1=====.7::::1174:oic
Vertarn
tea 661.114i.
1011. TO1400.
SOCKET VOLTAGE CHART
11.0.1m1.1.
b11341W
coeor.
I)
'AO
29
PUSH BUTTON ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
Each of the six push buttons, for automatic tuning, has two adjusting screws by which it may be set to any
nearby American broadcast station whose frequency in kilocycles is within the kilocycle range covered by
that button. To gain access to these screws, carefully pull off the
push button. To set No. 1 push button to a desired position, pro - 40 590 680 750 880 1000
TO TO TO To
teed as follows: TO
900
TO
1000 1150 1300 1500 1620
KC KC KC KC ILL KC
1. Turn the ANTENNA ADJ. SCREW clockwise until moderately
tight, then turn the OSCILLATOR ADJ. SCREW counter-
clockwise until the threaded portion extends approximately
34 inch. Use a small screw -driver and do not exert pressure.
)ct, \o, 0,
2 Turn the band selector switch to the "AM" position and manually
tune in the station to which the push button is to be set. The ANTENNA ADJ SCREW
frequency of the station selected must be between 540 and 900 OSCILLATOR ADJ SCREW
kilocycles. Carefully adjust the tuning control to the point of
clearest reception.
3 Turn the band selector switch to the "AUTO" position and slowly turn the OSCILLATOR ADJ. SCREW
clockwise until the same station is heard. Adjust the screw for maximum volume.
4 Adjust the ANTENNA ADJ. SCREW for maximum volume.
5. Turn the band selector switch from "AUTO" to "AM" and back again to check if the adjustment has
been correctly made. There should be no change in tone quality when switched from one to the other.
6 Place the tab with the call letters of the station, to which the push button has been set, in a celluloid "V"
and slide it into the button from the side.
The remaining push buttons may be set in a similar manner. No adjustment of master tone control push
buttons is required.
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE NOTES CIRCUIT
37.5 Ohm
1. Sweep alignment (use approximately 500 kc. to sweep).
F.M. Sig. 4,--MMA---s- To Receiver
2. Sweep Generlikr Output .1 to 1 Volt RMS. Generator Carbon Ant. Terminals
Resistors and 2I
3. Scope connected to center terminal on phono switch.
4. Align for maximum peak amplitude. Peak separation should be 150 to 200 kc.
37 5 Ohm
5. Scone connected to center terminal of 3rd I.F. through 200,000 ohms. FIG. I
6. Repeat operations 8 and 9 until no change can be noted in sensitivity.

TO SIGNAL WEB
7. Rock gang. TERMINALS ON
CHASSIS
8. Repeat operations 12, 13 and 14 for maximum sensitivity.
FIG. 2
9.* C=Channel number.
10. When aligning the shortwave oscillator trimmer, make certain the circuit is aligned at the correct frequency and not at the image
frequency which is 910 kilocycles lower in frequency as indicated on the receiver dial. To check, tune in signal generator frequency,
then increase the generator output and tune in the image frequency which should be audible, but weaker than the fundamental
frequency. If the image can not be tuned in, the oscillator trimmer is adjusted to the wrong peak. The correct peak is the second
peak of the trimmer from the closed position.
The F.M. channel numbers run from 200 to 300, and correspond to
frequencies from 87.9 to 107.9 megacycles. To find the frequency
in megacycles for any channel number, multiply the channel number
by 2/10, and add 47.9 . For example, channel number 280 when mul-
tiplied by 2/10 equals 56.0 and plus 47.9 gives 103.9 megacycles
0 as the frequency.
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE CHART

Align- Adjust for
ment Maximum Output Remarks
Sequence Frequency In Series To Band Tuning
with Switch Dial
1 465 kc. .1 mfd. 2nd I.F. Grid AM Hi. Freq. 3rd I.F.
stop
2 455 kc. .1 mfd. 1st I.F. Grid AM Hi. Freq. 2nd I.F.
stop
3 455 kc. .1 mfd. 19 plate section AM Hi. Freq. 1st I.F. Retouch 3rd, 2nd, let.
of center gang stop
4 10.7 mc. .1 mfd. 3rd I.F. Grid FM Hi. Freq. Discriminator Notes 1, 2, 3, 4
stop
5 10.7 mc. .1 mfd. 2nd I.F. Grid FM Hi. Freq. 3rd I.F. Notes 1 and 6
stop
6 10.7 mc. .1 mfd. 1st I.F. Grid FM Hi. Freq. 2nd I.F. Retouch 3rd I.F.
stop
7 10.7 mc. .1 mfd. 3 plate section FM Hi. Freq. let I.F. Retouch 3rd, 2nd, 1st
of center gang stop
8 1400 kc. 200 mmf. Ant. 1 AM 1400 kc. BC.-Ose.-RF. &

Ant. Trim
9 600 kc. 200 mmf. Ant. 1 AM 600 kc. Broadcast Notes 6 and 7
Osc. Padder
10 6.0 mc. 400 ohm Ant. 1 Police 6.0 mc. Police Osc., R.F.
& Ant. Trimmers
11 18 mc. 400 ohm Ant. 1 SW 18 mc. Sw. Osc., R.F., & Note 10
Ant. Trimmers
12 108.1 mc. See Ant. 1 & 2 FM Hi. Freq. FM-Osc. Trimmer

Circuit Diag. stop
Fig. 1
13 87.9 mc. See Ant. 1 & 2 FM Low Freq. FM-Osc. Core

Circuit Diag. stop
Fig. 1
14 106.9 mc. See Ant. 1 & 2 FM 5C-290 FM. R.F. & Notes 7,8 and 9*
Circuit Diag. Ant. Trimmer
To align, turn the tuning condenser to full mesh, against stop, and
set dial pointer to the reference line at the end of the dial scale.
Release all tone control buttons to the "out" position. Connect the
output meter across the speaker voice coil (3.2 ohms). Feed an R.F.
signal modulated 30% at 400 cycles to the receiver as indicated in
the chart above. Connect signal generator ground terminal to the
chassis of the receiver. When F.M. generator is used, a 30% modu-
lated signal is equal to a deviation of 22.5 KC. Advance volume
control to maximum clockwise position, adjust generator output to
produce noticeable output meter reading. Keep generator output low
to prevent excessive AVC action. The low impedance "Signal Web"
antenna should remain connected at all times. If chassis is
removed use dummy antenna Fig. 2, page 30. Link in "Ext. Ant:'31
Model RA -101
© 1947 Allen B. Du Mont Laboratories
Passaic, N. J.
The material presented on pages 33-46 has been supplied by
Allen B. Du Mont Laboratories and is reproduced with the permis-
sion of this firm. While this information has direct reference
to Du Mont Model RA -101 television receiver, it will prove
helpful to television students and servicemen in servicing other
sets since much of these data are of a general nature.
ANTENNA SPEAKER
SE
RF- IF MIXO
CHASSIS AMPLIFIER
SELECTOR
SWEEP ARO SYNC AY

STAt CRAMS TVLR
ANTTEEJNNA
Audio Amplifier Schematic
Figure 1. Block Diagram of RA -10I Receiver AUDIO AMPLIFIER CHASSIS.

The audio amplifier assembly contains its own power sup-
DESCRIPTION OF SET. ply furnishing sufficient output to operate the entire audio
system and sound IF of the RF tuner. The amplifier section
The Model RA -101 is a complete home entertainment unit
itself contains four tubes, namely: two tubes, Type 6SN7, Vi
containing facilities for television, FM and AM reception.
Included in the model is an automatic record changer.
and V2, and two tubes, Type 6V6, V3 and V4. The audio
amplifier is resistance coupled. VI is a dual triode with both
All cabinet styles contain the following chassis and sub- sections connected as voltage amplifiers in cascade. The sound
assemblies: volume control is in the input circuit of the first stage. The
1. Audio amplifier chassis (containing the audio amplifier tone control is connected in the plate circuit of the second
and its power supply). half of Vl. The first half of V2 is another voltage ampli-
2. Sweep chassis (containing sweep circuits, a power sup-
ply for low voltage and bias voltage for the sweep and RF-IF sess
less 0* 16. .
chassis, and the high -voltage supply for the cathode-ray tube). - Coos 0 44 'i
111. , fb V ,
2a. Sync stabilizer chassis (containing automatic frequency 0111

iik
9011100
control circuit).
3. The RF-IF chassis (containing both sound and video IF
CO
' oc`r.
0
circuits, video amplifier, RF input system).
4. The AM tuner chassis (containing the tuning unit for
AM reception).
5. The tuning meter assembly. (The Tele-FM tuning meter
plus the cable connecting it to the RF-IF chassis.)
6. The tone selector assembly (consisting essentially of a Figure 2. Audio Amplifier Chassis
push button switch and the tone control attenuators).
7. The service selector switch assembly (consisting of a push fier which in turn feeds the second half of V2. The second
button switch system). half of V2 is the phase inverter containing balanced plate and
8. Record changer assembly (containing the complete assem- cathode -loads from which the signal is derived to drive the
bly of motor, turntable, pick-up arm and changing mechanism). two 6V6's, V3 and V4 in push-pull. The power supply on
9. Cathode-ray tube assembly (consisting of the cathode-ray
this chassis also furnishes B+ to the AM Tuner, the RF and
tube socket, cabling, focusing coil and deflection yoke). Sound IF sections of the RF-IF chassis, and focusing current
to the cathode-ray tube focusing coil. The Focus control is
A block diagram of the set showing the relationship of the also on this chassis.
various circuits is given in Figure 1.
33
must be synchronized to those at the transmitter, and for that
purpose, synchronizing pulses transmitted with the video sig-
nal are used.
The sync pulses are obtained from the video channel on
the RF-IF chassis and fed to V2, the sync amplifier. The out-
put from V2 drives the circuits in the sync stabilizer chassis.
SYNC STABILIZER CHASSIS

Four stages comprise the sync stabilizer chassis. The signal
from the sync amplifier is clipped by VI, the clipper stage on
the sync stabilizer. The three other stages on the sync stabil-
izer chassis comprise the "automatic frequency control" circuit
The object of the "AFC" circuit is to obtain pulses for syn-
chronization that are stable in frequency and phase and not
Figure 3. Audio Amplifier Chassis
affected by extraneous disturbances. The principle used is to
originate the pulses by a local oscillator, whose frequency
,.1:477.7":"..:=17....."7:
Figure 4. Audio Amplifier Chassis
SWEEP CHASSIS.
The sweep chassis contains the power supply which fur-

nishes both B+ and bias voltages to the sweep chassis and Sync Stabilizer Schematic
also to the video IF amplifier and the video amplifier on the
RF-IF chassis. A negative voltage is also derived from this and phase are controlled by the incoming sync pulses. The
same power supply to furnish a negative bias voltage for both oscillator output will then be used to pulse the sweep circuits.
the sweep and RF-IF chassis. This low voltage power supply The oscillator used is an electron coupled oscillator using
a 6K6 tube. The oscillator is coupled to the phase discrimi-
nator by transformer coupling (T1). The sync pulses are fed
to the center tap of the discriminator transformer from the
clipper stage. With respect to the center tap, the sinusoidal
oscillator output on the discriminator plates are 180 degrees
out of phase. The pulse, being center fed, adds to both plates
with the same polarity. When the oscillator frequency is in
adjustment, the pulse rides the sine wave at the 180 degree
point in its cycle. See Figure 7. During one-half the cycle,
one section of the dual diode will conduct, and during the
second half of the cycle, the other section of the diode will
conduct. The output voltage across the diode load will be
Figure 5. Sweep Chassis the same in magnitude throughout the cycle, since the magni-
tude of the voltage on each plate is equal during each diode's
contains two 5U4G rectifiers, V9 and V10, each of which is conduction period. If the oscillator frequency changes, the
operated as a half wave rectifier to result in full wave rectifi- pulse will no longer ride the mid -point of the wave. See
cation. A time delay relay in this power supply prevents B+ Figure 7. Now the pulse voltage adds to the sine wave volt-
from being available for about 30 seconds. age on one plate while it subtracts from the voltage on the
The sweep chassis also contains the high voltage power other plate. Thus during the cycle, the magnitude of the out-
supply. This power supply uses two Type 2X2 rectifiers, put voltage will change. A bias of -1.5 volts is applied to
Vii and V12, which are connected to operate as a voltage the cathode circuit of the diode. Since this voltage supply
doubler circuit. This voltage doubler furnishes high posi- has no d -c return path to ground in the diode cathode cir-
tive voltage to the anode of the cathode-ray tube. The sweep cuit, no current will flow and the 1.5 volts will be applied
circuits on this chassis generate both the vertical and horizon- equally to both cathodes. The output voltage of the diode
tal sweep voltages for the deflection yoke of the cathode-ray stage will add or subtract from the -1.5 volts. The -1.5 volts
tube. A toggle switch on the chassis is available to shut off are used to bias the "reactance tube" V4 through the diode
the high voltage at the convenience of the serviceman. lead.
The sweep circuits are used to generate deflection voltages There is, therefore, a d -c voltage that is constant for proper
which when applied to the cathode-ray tube will cause the oscillator frequency, but changes when the oscillator frequency
electron beam to scan across the face of the tube. The sweeps is not correct. The voltage is fed to the grid of the "reactance
34 tube" (V4). Output from the oscillator is fed to the cathode

of the reactance tube through C10, a .01 tLf capacitor. This
.011.101Wil. 011
VS 711
---:krA--- AM. 0001Telial.

Is.
01Z
?it
72%
1.01 41
a
M Mr: 111__
1/..
a
V Ihri Ft, E: VIIRTPCAL Sam, GOILSATON

won... KRUM. urunsa
W."
.41220,
,ILLO
1104.
T5:
w. ?if
LON Pn.v
MI. voLTAGE 11ST POMO
1.6
64,9656
90
oyo
1;41
3 3 d
LA/ Loo Diet
TS
21.1 Sweep Circuit Schematic

01; t
There is a filter circuit between the discriminator and the
reactance tube (C12, R17 and C11). Any irratic pulses or
disturbances are by-passed to ground by the filter, and there-
;,1110
t
a* q!'5,
0 0h,°`
t ftC-8 fore will not affect the operation of the sweeps. The oscilla-
tor output is a distorted sine wave which, when differentiated,
will give a pulse output. The differentiating circuit used is
'00,20.000
000PC
-' C6, C7, R9 and R10.
- C -30.O
N
The signal from the plate of the electron coupled oscilla-
tor is then fed to the second half of V2, a Type 6SN7, which
is connected as a driven sweep generator (sometimes called a
sawtooth wave generator). The signal from the sweep gen-
erator is then fed to the grids of the horizontal deflection
amplifiers, two tubes Type 807. These tubes are V3 and V4,
which operate in parallel to drive the horizontal output trans-
former T2. Because of the relatively high frequency com-
ponents present in the horizontal sweep signal, it is necessary
that the primary of this output transformer have relatively
few turns compared to the vertical deflection amplifier in
order to keep the distributed capacitance within the trans-
former to a minimum. Also, much more power must be deliv-
ered to the horizontal deflection coils due to greater energy
*intensifier Lead losses. Thus it is necessary to supply more current and power
to the horizontal output transformer than to the vertical.
The horizontal damping tube, V5, is a 6AS7. This tube is
Figure 6. Sweep Chassis a dual triode which is connected across the output of the hori-
zontal output transformer. The function of the horizontal
capacitor causes a phase shift of the signal. Depending upon damping tube is to eliminate the oscillation which occurs
the voltage on the grid of the reactance tube, the output from an overshoot on the sawtooth voltage. The horizontal
impedance of the reactance tube will be of a certain inductive sweep signal is fed to the deflection yoke. Horizontal posi-
value. Changes in the oscillator frequency or phase with tioning is obtained by means of a potentiometer which injects
respect to the pulse frequency will cause different values of a portion of the bias voltage into the secondary of the hori-
voltage on the reactance tube grid and therefdre vary the zontal output transformer.
inductive output impedance of the tube. The vertical sync amplifier, V6, is a 6SJ7. This tube ampli-
By coupling the reactance tube across the oscillator coil, fies the vertical sync signal and transmits it to one of the
the oscillator frequency will vary in such a manner as to cor- windings of the vertical blocking oscillator transformer. The
rect its deviation from the proper value. The oscillator is
thus synchronized to the pulse frequency.
35
PLILSt
PULSE
One-half of this tube is normally conducting and the other
half is normally cut off. If either of the sweeps fail, the half
of the dual triode which is conducting becomes non -conduct-
ing. Since the solenoid of the relay is connected in series with
PIN 3 the plate of the normally conducting half of the tube, the
OSCILLATOR OSCILLATOR relay contacts are allowed to open. The opening of these
OUTPUT OUTPUT
relay contacts applies a positive voltage to the cathode of the
PULSE cathode-ray tube, thus cutting off the beam of the cathode-ray
tube, and preventing a stationary bright spot or line from
PULSE
OSCILLATOR OSCILLATCO
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
appearing on the screen if the sweep should fail.
PIN 4
PIN 4
THE RF-IF CHASSIS.
The RF tuning assembly is the complete input system for
the Du Mont Teleset. It consists of three separate variable
inductors (the Du Mont Inputuner) which cover the range
7(a) Oscillator Synchronized to 7(b) Oscillator Not Synchronized of 44 to 216 megacycles without band -switching. In the Du
Pulse Frequency to Pulse Frequency Mont input system are the tubes Vl, V2, and V9. Vl and V9
Figure 7. AFC Diagram are type 6J6 tubes and V2 is a Type 6AK5; VI is an RF
stage; V9 is the local oscillator, and V2 is the mixer.
vertical blocking tube oscillator consists of one-half of V7, a The output of the RF section is the intermediate frequency
Type 6SN7. This blocking tube oscillator triggers the sweep of the Teleset. This intermediate frequency differs, however,
generator which is the second half of V7. The vertical sweep from the normal AM receiver in that it is a band of fre-
signal from the sweep generator is fed to the vertical deflec- quencies which contains both video and sound signals. The
tion amplifier which consists of another 6SN7 with both halves video and sound IF signals can be separated because they
operating in parallel. The vertical deflection amplifier drives occur at different frequencies due to the fact that they were
the primary of T4, the vertical output transformer. Because transmitted on separate carriers, 4.5 megacycles apart. The
the vertical sweep operates at a low frequency of 60 cycles sound IF is separated from the video signals by means of a
(distributed capacitance has much less effect than at 15,750 sound trap and is impressed on the grid of the first sound IF
cycles), it is possible to use more turns of wire in T4 and thus stage. The sound IF amplifier is a three -stage amplifier con-
obtain the same number of ampere turns as used in the hori- sisting of V3, V4 and V5, which utilize Type 6BA6 tubes.
zontal output transformer, and drive the primary of T4 with After passing through the sound IF amplifiers, the sound IF
less current. Thus, a 6SN7, operated in parallel, will furnish signal passes through the two limiter stages, V6 and V7, which
sufficient current as a deflection amplifier to operate the verti- are connected in cascade. These tubes remove amplitude
cal output transformer. Vertical positioning is obtained by modulation from the FM signal. The output of the second
means of a potentiometer, which injects a portion of the bias limiter is coupled to the discriminator tube by means of the
voltage into the secondary of the vertical output transformer. discriminator transformer. The discriminator, V8, is a 6AL5.
The beam control amplifier, V13, is also on the sweep This is a typical discriminator circuit for removing the modu-
chassis. This amplifier is a dual triode, Type 6SN7, which lation from the intermediate frequency and is so tuned that
receives the signal from the vertical output transformer on its output is zero volts, at exactly 21.9 megacyles. The volt-
one grid and a signal derived from the horizontal output on age output of the discriminator is a varying DC voltage
the other grid. whose magnitude is dependent upon the deviation of fre-
CS
IS .1m10
cf. %
io 7.
ilSO TLMS C511 -SONIAVO 4.0usI5O Ses0 /CMS COCK
COOP WOO
F YE '%" To I -F TRANS.
VI GAR 5 ISOYOC ON R1,5,11.5105
CIO*
4TONNIO
54 Wu, cI
saft.544_
TO ANT.
rTERSONALS ROA
cAs RP IF Mum.
15%
"D" TO MN *Or w (NEATER)
oN RS .1 CHASSis
CAN "C". TO R13

1AARNATIC 5555 ON Of .11, CHASSIS
C1.11TcN
IS2±1,Lil.0111. I
C41
SI
SEASNIMO
MOTOR.
." Tea.wm.;:iv, RF Circuit Schematic

:r.zr
s
tle 50,150
To SEL REES 11,1

ON R5-1, CRASiss
"0" TO G.S. Is WINDING
OF Ti ON 5{1..15 CHASSIS
II Is NOT C:
. SCAN SWITCH
743 550 Sam
36 oR CCATALICHT L MITI DOE VARMIPLE 0ONEIw

S.
oe..
Cnas GOODS Re AAACITV.
El,
13. ti
50.'00
w 1;;:
3 Gut:
0 0 a
..xt.
".3 L.... 414
0
40
F
lb f,-1-1
0 1,
4.
0
r "T11,
.3. 0
IL 30
04! Pft
AP. g frr
Ig if --wr-11,`"
.111, e,ft,
xI
I
To, t s
Ist
IST:It.
o41,o° ;IS
41' 10
0 000
si 014
irk II'
I
T.re
HI
II-
:00
00
MOM 00
s
00000,
.102
694.1"..ird
37
quency of the sound IF signal from the center value of 21.9 1. The Contrast Control, which effectively is the same con-
trol on the video signal as the volume control is on the
megacycles. The FM teletuning meter is connected to one
of the cathodes of the discriminator and registers zero when audio signal, varies the output of the video IF amplifier by
the FM or television station being received is properly tuned. varying the negative bias voltage applied to the grids of the
The output of the discriminator is the audio signal which is first two video IF amplifiers.
fed to the audio amplifier, which in turn drives the speaker. 2. The Picture Brightness Control is located on this chassis.
The tuned circuit in the plate of the mixer tube, V2, is It is used to set the intensity level of the background of the
tuned to have a band pass between 21.5 and 26.4 megacycles. picture.
3. Because the Picture Brightness Control is located on this
V-9 6J6
V-17 5AG7 V-2 6555 chassis, it is also convenient to place the relays for the sweep
Z_2
V 16J6 failure protection circuit for the cathode-ray tube on this
same chassis.
4. The Sound Volume Control is also located on this chassis
to consolidate all controls on a single chassis, and is con-
nected by cable to the audio chassis.
5. The motor for driving the pointer on the FM teletuning
dial, the magnetic clutch, and the hand vernier tuning mech-
anism, all of which are used in conjunction with the induc-
tuner, are also included on this chassis, thus consolidating
all front panel controls on one chassis.
Figure 8. RF-IF Chassis 6. The Grid Drive Control-which adjusts the cathode-ray
tube grid sensitivity.
2.4 THE AM TUNER CHASSIS.

AM tuner chassis, which is employed in the Model RA -101,
consists essentially of four major sections. The. RF amplifier
is a tuned RF stage which feeds a 6SA7 converter. The
6SA7 serves the function of both oscillator and mixer to con-
vert the RF signal to an intermediate frequency of 456 KC.
This chassis contains one IF amplifier, a 6SK7, which in turn
feeds a 6SN7. One-half of this tube acts as a diode detector
and the other half as a cathode follower output. This chassis
contains its own heater transformer but B+ is supplied to it
from the audio chassis.
Figure 9. RF-IF Chassis
The sound IF frequency is picked off prior to the tuned cir-

cuit and the video IF frequency passes through to the grid
of VIO, the first video IF amplifier. Two sound traps are
located, one between the first and second video IF stages and
the other between the second and third video IF stages. These
sound traps prevent the sound IF signals from passing through
the video IF amplifier and causing interfering patterns in the
picture. In all there are five video IF stages in the Model
RA -101. These five stages consist of V10, V11, V12, V13, and
V14. All of these stages employ the same tube type, a 6AU6,
with the exception of V14, which uses a 6AG7. The video IF
stages utilize special coupling circuits to provide a band pass
of 4 megacycles. The output of the fifth viedo IF stage feeds
V19, the video detector. V19 is a 6AL5 which is connected
as a half wave diode detector. The output of the video detec-
tor feeds the first video amplifier, V17. a 6AG7. V17 in turn
feeds V16, a 6V6, connected as a cathode follower output.
The output of V16 is coupled directly to the control grid
Figure 10. AM Tuner
of the cathode-ray tube. However, V15, the DC restorer and
sync clipper is connected across the output. THE TONE SELECTOR.
The DC restorer and sync clipper consists of a single tube,
V15, a 6AL5. One-half of this tube operates as the DC The Tone Selector is a separate assembly with five different
restorer and the other half as the sync clipper. The signal is RC circuits connected for varying the quality of the audio
taken from the plate of the sync clipper and fed to the sweep signal. This separate assembly is located directly behind the
chassis as composite sync. bezel for the teleset.
There are a number of other components also located on
THE SERVICE SELECTOR.
this chassis. These items are enumerated below:
38 The Service Selector is a push-button switch assembly which

connects both AC and DC circuit voltages to the proper units
AM Tuner Schematic
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.
Before attempting any sort of servicing or adjustment it is
imperative that the serviceman bear in mind certain safety
precautions.
HIGH VOLTAGE PRECAUTIONS

1. The high voltage applied to the accelerating electrode
is 12,000 volts and contact with it can cause severe burns or
Figure 11. AM Tuner
even DEATH.
depending upon the service selected, and switches the output 2. Always turn OFF the high voltage switch on the sweep
of the three different chassis to the input of the audio amplifier. chassis before doing any work on this chassis.
3. Always turn OFF all power, and remove the power plug
oi w.) from wall receptacle before removing any chassis from the
4141.4"IS".r:Lo cabinet.
raft.,
(.11)
06.0
J.' : e'7-- Milla121
4
I
&
& Of+ MO 0.4

OD Ororm)
4. Always make adjustments with only one hand.
5. Always turn OFF all power before soldering or making
0i0 TO 1416)
ror tr) J 3
4334,4 ' 0 fee TO 9,0
connections.
Oto n ...-119
(00 0.40 CATHODE-RAY TUBE PRECAUTIONS
_c
1. Do not bump the tube against hard objects.
0 ra 0151
itgr 2. Do not use tools near the tube.
SurEmsEeES 006 .02 .16r
00000o +0 FRAME or 501.CH
3. Always wear safety goggles and gloves when handling
the tube.
Service Selector Schematic
4. Always stand the tube on its face on a thick piece of felt
in a protected place if it is removed from the cabinet.
5. Always replace a tube if it becomes scratched and return
it to the factory for a pressure test.
4.2 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTROLS.

Normal operating procedure should be followed. See oper-
DE -1033
ating instruction manual. If satisfactory results are not ac -
quired, then further adjustments should be made as outlined
ow4 Nevem. 0. 4/1. al below. If required results are still not obtained, a diagnosis
39
should be made to locate the trouble.
Tone Selector Schematic
se
LOCATION OF CONTROLS EFFECTS OF CONTROLS ON LINEARITY
A.
Location on Effect on Pattern
Control
Designation Chassis
Control Chassis
Hor. linearity Flattens and expands pattern on right side.
Sensitivity RF-IF R96 (Fig. 8) Rear -Left
Hor. peaking Flattens and expands both sides, but affects
Audio R22 (Fig. 3) Rear -Left left side more.
Focus
Vert. Hold Sweep R29 (Fig. 5) Rear -Left Hor. damping Flattens and expands left side of pattern.
Vert. Size Sweep R33 (Fig. 5) Rear -Left Vert. linearity Flattens and expands top side of pattern.
Sweep R37 (Fig. 5) Rear -Center
Vert. Linearity
R36 (Fig. 6) Top Front TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE.
Vert. Positioning Sweep
Hor. Peaking Sweep R14 (Fig. 5) Rear -Center Although much information can be given for diagnosing
Sweep R46 (Fig. 5) Rear -Right trouble in the Telesets, the information is of a general nature.
Hor. Linearity
R31 (Fig. 6) Top -Center The nature, location and repair of troubles must be analyzed
Hor. Size Sweep knowl-
R20 (Fig. 6) Top -Rear by the repairman. This necessitates a good working
Hor. Positioning Sweep edge of the circuits of the sets, as well as an understanding of
Top -Rear study tele-
Hor. Damping Sweep R19 (Fig. 5) television principles. It behooves the repairman to
Sync. Top of Phase set circuits as well as outside information on television.
Hor. Frequency
Stabilizer Discriminator Before attempting to repair a set, a diagnosis should be
Transformer made to determine in what channel or circuit there is trouble.
Bottom of Remember that in 99% of cases only one trouble develops at
Hor. Phase Sync.
Stabilizer Phase a time. It is only a waste of time and effort to indiscriminately
Discriminator test circuits of a set when trouble occurs. The method to fol-
Transformer low is by use of logic and symptoms to localize the trouble
before testing. When the troublesome circuit has been local-
All other controls are on the control panel and are marked. ized, a tube check should be made for faulty tubes. A few
examples of proper reasoning are presented below.
B. ADJUSTMENT OF CONTROLS
Assume that the following trouble is evident: No picture
I. Sensitivity Control Adjustment (should not be touched can be obtained, but sound is operating. First of all, it If can
it
except when cathode-ray tube is changed). be assumed that the Inputuner is operating correctly.
a. Press the "Tele" button on the service selector switch. weren't, the sound channel would not be operating. Turn
b. Increase brightness for raster appearance. the brightness control clockwise. If a raster appears, the sweep
c. Decrease brightness until raster just fades out. circuits must be operative. The trouble has_been localized to
d. Check voltage on cathode of cathode-ray tube. If the the video channel. The repairman can now test
the video
voltage is less than 45 volts, this adjustment is correct. If the channel.
voltage is greater than 45 volts, turn sensitivity control full
clockwise, increase brightness until 45 volts are obtained and PHOSPHOR
BRONZE
then turn sensitivity control for disappearance of raster. -LEADS
2. Turn up contrast control for image, and adjust the focus

control for a clear picture.
3. If the picture is tilted, adjust the yoke on the neck of
the cathode-ray tube. Loosen both top and bottom screws to
turn yoke. Be certain that the set is turned off. Remember,
contact with the high voltage may be lethal.
4. Increase brightness more than usual, and adjust vertical
hold control if necessary.
5. When horizontal adjustment is necessary the following
procedure should be followed:
a. Turn the screwdriver adjustment (horizontal frequency
adjustment on phase discriminator transformer) until the test
pattern or picture comes into sync.
b. Turn clockwise until the test pattern falls out of sync,
then back off until it pulls in again. Note the position where
"pull in" occurs. PIN PIN
c. Continue rotating counterclockwise until the test pat- I 3
tern falls out of sync again. Then turn clockwise until it Figure 12(a). 6AK5 Adapter Tube
pulls in. Note the position of the control for this second If when the brightness control is advanced, no raster ap-
pull in point. pears, the difficulty can be in either the sweep circuits or the
d. Set the adjustment half way between the two "pull in" high voltage power supply. A failure of either sweep circuit
points. will cause excessive bias on the cathode-ray tube and cut it
6. Adjust phase control for proper blanking and sync pulse, tube.
above. off. Check the voltage on the cathode of the cathode-ray
if necessary. Then readjust frequency as outlined If it is excessive, a failure of sweep is indicated. If it is nor-
7. Set the vertical linearity, size and positioning controls mal, a failure of high voltage is indicated. Thus, the trouble
for a good pattern. has been localized to either the sweep or high voltage circuits.
8. Set the horizontal controls for good linearity, as well as Another condition is that there is picture, but no sound.
for size and positioning. Check the action of the tuning meter. If it is operating cor-
40 rectly, the trouble is in the audio amplifier. If it is not, the

trouble is in the sound IF channel. This assumption comes OPTIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
from the fact that the tuning meter operates from the sound VIDEO SWEEP GENERATOR-Output varies from 0 to 6
discriminator. Again, it can be assumed that the Inputuner megacycles.
is operating correctly since the picture is being received. VOLTAGE CALIBRATOR-Du Mont Type 264-A recom-
-If the receiver is completely dead (no picture, no sound), mended for use in measuring peak -to -peak voltages.
check the input power, input power cords and interlock SQUARE WAVE GENERATOR-For servicing audio and
(safety) switches. The antenna lead-in cable or the Inputuner video amplifiers.
may be bad. If these checks do not reveal the trouble, the
SWEEP WAVEFORMS.
low voltage power supply outputs should be checked. In
case of Inputuner difficulties (aside from bad tubes), the entire Sweep waveforms are given in Figure 16. Waveforms were
unit should be removed and sent back to the factory. taken with the following control settings:
If the sound channel is operating correctly, and the picture Line Voltage -115 volts a -c
alone is distorted, an analysis can be made by merely viewing Horizontal Damping Control-Full counterclockwise
the screen of the cathode-ray tube. Such faults as too strong Horizontal Linearity -Full clockwise
a signal, too weak a signal, outside interfering signals, exces- Horizontal Peaking -Full clockwise
sive ripple, distortion and phase shift, can be viewed on the Vertical Linearity -Full counterclockwise
screen. Once recognized as specific faults, corrections can be Vertical Size -Full clockwise
made. The procedure to follow then is: Horizontal Size -Full counterclockwise
Vertical Hold -Set to lock picture
1. Analyze symptoms. Positioning Controls -Normal setting
2. By reasoning, localize trouble to possible channels.
3. By tests,. locate actual channel.
4. By further tests, find and correct trouble.
INSTALLATION
Normal signal tracing methods of testing is recommended
Installations, at the present state of the television art, are
for the audio amplifier and the sound channeL For the video of the utmost importance. Customer satisfaction will depend
channel, response curves can be checked by using a wobbula- entirely upon a well made installation. The best teleset manu-
tor and an oscillograph. For the sweep channel, waveforms factured is not capable of improving upon the signal presented
can be viewed and checked against those given in section 4.5. to it by its antenna. The consumer is not technically edu-
1N34
cated enough to appreciate the difficulties involved in obtain-
TO 220 " ing a clean picture in our urban areas. He will judge the
PLo---IATE + -
CRYSTAL
1/2 VI
OUTPUT television industry by the picture presented to him in his
.0010
220" 10K
home. No amount of explanations or apologies will offset the
.0010 .0010
R F INPUT I/2 W 1/2W unfavorable impression created by a noisy, blurry, jumpy
picture.
0 O CND. Remember also, that a teleset purchaser will remain a tele-
TO
OND. set owner, only as long as he is able to enjoy the entertainment
Figure 12(b). Probe Detector provided by the art. A rejected and returned teleset will not
improve a dealer's net profit. It, therefore, is important for
REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT the service or installation man to bend every effort to make
a good installation when a teleset is sold, not only for his own
VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER -20,000 ohms -per -volt volt- immediate profit, but also for the good of the art as a whole.
meter with ranges approximately 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, The mortality will be high among servicemen attempting to
0 to 100 V, 0 to 500 V. profit from television installations. The field is complex and
CATHODE-RAY OSCILLOGRAPH-Du Mont Type 208-B demanding of perfection. Only those who have firmly grasped
recommended for RF-IF alignment, and audio ampli- and assimilated the necessary techniques and principles, will
fier servicing. Du Mont Type 224-A or Type 241 survive the competitive era now approaching. The following
for troubleshooting sweep chassis. installation data is not complete. To be of value to a prac-
SIGNAL GENERATORS- ticing serviceman it should be amplified by study and experi-
(1) FM Signal Generator-This is a wobbulator-type sig- mentation on his part.
nal generator whose center frequency ranges from
20 to 30 megacycles with a sweep width of ±5 Select a temporary position for the antenna, bearing in
megacycles (adjustable). The voltage output of this mind the requirements for a clean signal. Connect the antenna
generator should be 0.1 volts. to the receiver and examine the resulting picture.
(2) RF Signal Generator-With amplitude modulation If the picture is satisfactory on all stations available, orient
available. RF range from 20 megacycles to a mini- the antenna for. maximum signal strength, and note the loca-
mum of 60 megacycles. The RF signal must be tion so determined. A permanent .installation may then be
adjustable to within 10 kc with a calibrated attenua- made.
tor on the output. Should the location prove to be poor, one or more picture
(3) Audio Signal Generator (for Checking Audio Ampli- defects will be evident. Various remedies should be applied
fiers). until a clean picture results. A permanent installation can
TRAVELING DETECTOR-This is a crystal detector then be made. The advantages of the survey method should
mounted in a probe assembly to enable IF stages to be self-evident. Trying out different antennas and antenna
be aligned stage -by -stage. (See Figure 12b.) positions in permanent form is not only difficult hut almost
6AK5 ADAPTER TUBE-See Figure 12a. impossible.
41
The detailed alignment instructions presented below, and the resulting
patterns illustrated on the next two pages, will not only assist you in
carrying out necessary alignment of the Du Mont Model RA -101 television
receiver, but will also serve as instructions for clearly understanding
the effect of various adjustments on the response. In general, thesere
information can be applied to any modern television set. Please bear
in mind that these patterns were obtained on a separate oscilloscope
connected as instructed. To obtain the values of voltage A and B, a
source of measureable and controlled voltage is applied with the con-
trols of the test oscilloscope unchanged for the particular test, see
page 45. For instructions of the connections see diagram on page 37.
DATA FOR ALIGNMENT SOUND CHANNEL
Feed Output Leads Adjust

Connect Connect Directly Into Oscillograph Coils to
To Type of Input Generator Output or Into Oscillograph Via Conform
Adjust Signal Required Leads Across Leads Across Probe Detector to Fig. No. Remarks
Z2 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, V3 Pin 5, V4 Probe Detector 15-E RF Signal Generator Set at

Signal Generator and Chassis and Chassis 21.9 mc to give birdie
Z3 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, V4 Pin 5, V5 Probe Detector 15-E RF Signal Generator Set at

Signal Generator and Chassis and Chassis 21.9 mc to give birdie
Z4 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, V5 R27 Direct 15-F Connect 1190 k resistor in series

Signal Generator and Chassis with oscillograph
Z2, Z3, Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, V3 R27 Direct 15-G

Z4 Signal Generator and Chassis
Z5 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, V7 Pin 1, V8 Direct 15-L Readjust Z4 and Z3 to obtain

Signal Generator and Chassis and Chassis good response curve
VIDEO CHANNEL
L37, L44 Wobbulator, RF Pin 4, V14 Pin 8, V16 Direct 15-0 RF Signal Generator set at
Signal Generator and Chassis and Chassis 26.4 mc
L34, L35 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, V13 Pin 8, V14 Probe Detector 15-S
Signal Generator and Chassis and Chassis
L31 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, V12 Pin 5, V13 Probe Detector 15-T

L9 Wobbulator, Pin 1, V12 Pin 5, V13 Probe Detector 15-V RF Signal Generator at 21.9
Signal Generator and Chassis and Chassis mc
(Sound Trap Adjustment)
L27, L28 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, V11 Pin 5, V12 Probe Detector 15-X
L26 Wobbulator Pin 1, V11 Pin 5, V12 Probe Detector 15-Z Second sound trap adjustment.
and Chassis and Chassis Remove RF Generator
L24, L25 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, VIO Pin 5, V11 Probe Detector 15 -BB
L5, L6 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, 6AK5 Pin 5, VIO Probe Detector 15 -CC Remove V2 and replace with
Signal Generator Adapter (V2) and Chassis 6AK5 adapter tube. See Fig-
and Chassis ure 12(a)
Wobbulator Pin 1, 6AK5 Pin 8, V16 Probe Detector 15 -DD Signal generator set at 26.4 mc.
42 Signal Generator Adapter (V2) and Chassis

and Chassis
Figure 158 Figure 15C

Figure 15-A
Oscillogram of the single sound IF curve Oscillogram of Figure 15-B with birdie
Oscillogram of the dual sound IF curve (untuned). This is the response curve
(untuned). at 21.9 mc.
appearing on the right of Figure 15-A
after it has been expanded.
Figure 15-D Figure 15-8 Figure 15-F

Oscillogram showing the effect of too Properly tuned sound IF curve with Sound IF curve obtained of the grid of
much birdie. birdie at 21.9 mc. the first limiter (properly adjusted).
Birdie at 21.9 mc.
Figure 15-G Figure 15-H Figure 15.1

Oscillogram of overall sound IF re- Oscillograph showing a slight amount Oscillogram showing excessive over-
sponse. (The improper alignment is of overload caused by too much sig- load caused by too much signal from
due to the different amplitude of the nal from the wobbulated signal gen- the wobbulated signal generator.
signal now being applied to the grids erator.
of each stage.) (Birdie at 21.9 mc.)
Figure 15-.1 Figure 15-K Figure 15-1

Double discriminator curve. Single discriminator curve (expanded Properly aligned discriminator curve.
from double curve). Birdie at 21.9 mc. Birdie at 21.9 mc.
Figure 15-M Figure 15-N Figure 15-0

Video IF response curve: Wobbulated Same as Figure 15-M except that the Same as Figure 15-N with L37 and L44
signal generator at the grid of V14. sweep of the oscillograph has been properly tuned (birdie at 26.4 mc.).
Oscillograph at the cathode of V16. expanded to obtain a single curve.
Birdie at 26.4 mc.
Figure 15. Alignment Waveforms
43
Figure 15-Q Figure 15-R

Figure 15-P
Video response curve showing exces- Video IF response curve showing slight
Same as Figure 15-0 except that the overloading due to too much signal
birdie is at 22.4 mc. sive overloading due to too much
signal applied to the stage from the applied to the stage from the wob-
wobbulated signal generator. bulated signal generator.
Figure 15-S Figure 15-T Figure 15-U

Video IF response curve: Wobbulator Video IF response curve: Wobbulator Sound trap much too low. Birdie at
to the grid of V13 and the traveling to the grid of V12 and the traveling 21.9 mc.
detector to the oscillograph at the detector to the oscillograph at the
plate of V14. L34 and L35 properly plate of V13. L31 and L32 properly
tuned (birdie at 26.4 mc.). tuned (birdie at 26.4 mc.).
Figure 15-V Figure 15-W Figure 15-X

Sound trap properly set. Birdie at 21.9 Sound trap slightly too high. Video IF response curve: Wobbulator
mc. to the grid of VII and the traveling
detector to the oscillograph at the
plate of V12. L27 and L28 properly
tuned (birdie at 26.4 mc.).
Figure 15-Y Figure 15-Z Figure 15 -AA

Sound trap too low . Sound trap properly adjusted. Sound trap too high.
Figure 15 -BB
Figure 15 -CC Figure 15 -DD
Video IF response curve: Wobbulator Video IF response curve: Wobbulator Overall video IF response curve: Wob-
to the grid of VIO and the traveling to the grid of V2 and the traveling bulator to the grid of V2 and the
detector to the oscillograph at the detector to the oscillograph at the oscillograph to the cathode of V16.
plate of V11. L24 and L25 properly plate of VIO. L5 and L6 properly The birdie at 26.4 mc. is 50% down
tuned (birdie at 26.4 inc.).
44 tuned (birdie at 26.4 mc.). on the curve.
Figure 15 Alignment Waveforms (Continued)

NV\
Oscillator Grid, Tube V3 Pin 5 Sync Stab
A=35 volts
Oscillator Pate Tube V3 Pin 3
A=52 volts
Cathode of Discriminator Tube V2 Pin 8 Sync Stab
A=22 volts 8=20 volts
Horizontal Saw Gen Tube V2 Pin 5 Damping Tube Plate Tube VS Pin 2
A=50 volts A==450 volts
Horizontal Saw Gen Grid Tube V2 Pin 4

A=72 volts
Sync Amplifier Plate Tube V2 Pin 2 Vertical Sync Amp Grid Tube V6 Pin 4
A=17 volts A=35 volts
Sync Amplifier Grid Tube V2 Pin 1

A=4.5 volts
Vertical Saw Gen Grid Tube V7 Pin 4

A=25 volts B-105 volts
Vertical BTO Red Trans Lead
Vertical Sync Amp Plate Tube V6 Pin 8 A=60 volts B=50 volts
A-55 volts B -50 volts
Vertical Amp Plate Tube VI3 Pin 2

Sweep Non -Linear Due to Extreme Position of Controls
A-125 volts
Vertical Deflection Amp Grid Tube V8 Pin 4
Vertical Saw Gen Plate Tube V7 Pin 5
A-25 volts 8-725 volts
A=60 volts
Figure 16.
8-85 volts
Sweep Waveforms 45
Laboratories in connection
Test patterns presented by Allen B. Du Mont but applicable to other
with their television receiver Model RA -101,
modern television sets.
WAS
.""
pigs 1
-ir
-or
------""
,..1
Focus Control Misadjusted*
Brightness Control Misadjusted
Normal Picture
Contrast Control Set Too Low

Contrast Control Set Much Too High*
Contrast Control Set Too High
Horizontal Linearity Control

Vertical Hold Control Misadjusted* Misadjusted*
Horizontal Frequency Control
Misadjusted*
Outside Interference Caused By

Vertical Linearity and Size Controls Horizontal Size Control Misadjusted* Diathermy
Misadjusted*
* Test patterns taken with INS news tape.
Figure 17. Test Patterns
A self-contained loop antenna is provided for broadcast An internal power line antenna is provided for FM op-
band reception. For permanent home installation, how- eration in relatively strong signal areas. An external
ever, if it is desired to improve reception of weak sta- dipole antenna is recommended for maximum FM op-
tions, an additional outdoor antenna may be used. Con- eration. To connect the dipole, remove the wire from
nect the outdoor antenna to the single screw terminal the FM ANT. screw terminal "A" and connect the
on the loop terminal marked BCST. ANT. The loop dipole leads to "A" and "G."
antenna operates at maximum efficiency when its posi- A ground connection is not required for AM or FM
tion is at right angles to the broadcasting source. Once
the station is tuned in, rotate the cabinet back and forth operation.
through a quarter of a circle, leaving it in the position An external phonograph can be connected to the jack
where the station is received with maximum volume. provided at the rear of the chassis base.
FM TUNING
7,01AF 71.41.1F 1.°°'

co
O O
6 AG5 68A6 6BA6
I0
--
005104 0
FRONT
\
.FRONT
5Y3GT
0
0
4
0
m
Ir
UI
sour
oe
oos
I F=10.7MC(FM)
F 'ALINE ANT. 1 MEG
0 Co TREBLE
IF=k4 55KC (AM)
5t,13504F
-1
POWER SUPPLY: 60 -cycle a.c. If replacements are made or the wiring disturbed in the
r -f section of the circuit, the receiver should be care -
VOLTAGE RATING: 105-125 volts. fully realigned.
POWER CONSUMPTION: 80 watts. The color coding of the i-f transformer leads is as fol-
lows:
CURRENT DRAIN: 0.75 amp. at 117 volts a.c.
Grid -green Plate -blue
Grid return -black B -I --red
INSTRUCTIONS FOR VOLTAGE AND RESISTANCE READINGS

1. All readings taken in broadcast position except those for item 4A, 6BA6 tube, which should be taken in FM position.
2. Voltage readings are in volts and resistance readings in ohms unless otherwise specified.
3. D -C voltage measurements are at 20,000 ohms per volt; a -c voltages measured at 1,000 ohms.
4. Socket connections are shown as bottom views.
5. Measured values are from socket pin to common negative.
6. Line voltage maintained at 117 volts for voltage readings.
7. Nominal tolerance on component values makes possible a variation of ± 15% in voltage and resistance readings.
8. Volume control at maximum, no signal applied for voltage measurements.
9. Resistance readings in the B+ circuits may vary widely according to the condition of the filter capacitors.
VOLTAGE READINGS
SYMBOL TUBE PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8
1 6AG5 -0.5 DC 0 6.5 AC 0 225 DC 137 DC 0
2 6BE6 -0.3 DC 0 0 6.5 AC 270 DC 100 DC 0
3 6BA6 -0.1 DC 0 0 6.5 AC 260 DC 115 DC 0
4 6BA6 -0.4 DC 0 6.5 AC 0 0 0 0
4A 6BA6 -0.3 DC 0 6.5 AC 0 250 DC 110 DC 0
5 6AL5 0 0 6.5 AC 0 0 0 -0.8 DC
6 6AU6 -0.8 DC 0 6.5 AC 0 105 DC 32 DC 0
7 6V6GT 0 0 260 DC 270 DC 0 105 DC 6.5 AC 13.5 DC
8 5Y3GT 0 300 DC 0 300 AC 0 300 AC 0 300 DC
RESISTANCE READINGS
SYMBOL TUBE PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN S PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8
1 6AG5 1.5 meg. 0 0.2 0 55,000 90,000 0
2 6BE6 20,000 1 0.2 0.5 50,000 68,000 12,000
3 6BA6 680,000 0 0 0.1 50,000 77,000 0
4 6BA6 3 meg. 0 0.1 0 inf. inf. 0
4A 6BA6 3 meg. 0 0.1 0 50,000 77,000 0
5 6AL5 Mf. inf. 0.1 0 520 0 135,000
6 6AU6 2.5 meg. 0 0.1 0 520,000 1.5 meg. 0
7 6V6GT 0 0 50,000 50,000 470,000 520,000 0.1 250
8 5Y3GT inf. 50,000 inf. 130 inf. 125 inf. 50,000
4117a
- .....
..-- ----.
FRAME
i
TO DRUM
\
F RON T gni e
EMI
>SLUGS il
MINE
TO TUNING
SHAFT SCREW
....
DETAIL OF FM COLLAR ---
STRINGING AND CORRECT
SETTING OF SLUG TUNER
WITH TUNING CONTROL
FULLY COUNTER -CLOCKWISE.
FREQUENCY RANGE:
0 6 TURNS
Broadcast band (AM) -530-1620 kilocycles FM TUNING COLLAR
48 Frequency modulation band (FM) -87.75-108.5

megacycles 6 TURNS
ALIGNMENT
To set pointer turn variable condenser fully closed and set pointer to last reference mark at low -frequency end of dial. To
inject signal in Steps 4, 5 and 6, remove tube and connect wire to pin 1. Replace tube, making certain that wire does not
short to shield base. For Step 8, connect two 100,000 ohm resistors in series from pin 7 of 6AL5 to chassis. After Step 8,
turn variable condenser fully counterclockwise and check adjustment of FM tuning unit per dial cord drawing. Volume con-
trol should be at maximum position; output of signal generator should be no higher than necessary to obtain an output read-
ing. Use an alignment screwdriver for adjusting.
SIGNAL SIGNAL BAND RADIO
DUMMY GENERATOR GENERATOR SWITCH DIAL OUTPUT ADJUST REMARKS
ANTENNA COUPLING FREQUENCY POSITION SETTING METER
0.1 mfd. High side to stator 455 kc BC (center High fre- Across Al, A2, Adjust for maximum
of front section of position) quency end voice coil. A3, A4 output.
the variable con-
denser. Low side of dial.
to chassis.
0.1 mfd. High side to stator
of front section of
455 kc BC (center Low fre- Across Adjust for minimum
the variable con- position) quency end voice coil. output.
denser. Low side of dial.
to chassis.
0.05 mfd. High side to pin 1 10.7 mc FM (fully High fre- VTVM con- A6 Adjust for maximum
(grid) of 6BA6, quency end nected to pin
1st 1-f tube (5). (unmodulated) clockwise)
of dial. 7 of 6AL5
deflection.
Low side to chassis.
and chassis.
0.05 mfd. High side to pin 10.6 mc FM (fully High fre- VTVM con- A7 Adjust for maximum
(grid) of 6DE6.
Low side to (unmodulated) clockwise) quency end nected to phi deflection.
chassis. of dial. 7 of 6AL5
and chassis.
(grid) of 611E6. (unmodulated) clockwise) quency end nected to pin deflection.
Low side to chassis. of dial. 7 of 6AL5
and chassis.
(grid) of MEG. (unmodulated) clockwise) quency end nected to pin deflection.
Low side to chassis. of dial. 7 of 6AL5
and chassis.
(grid) of 611A6, nected to pin
2nd 1f tube (4). (unmodulated) clockwise) quency end
of diaL 7 of 6AL5
deflection.
and chassis.
0.05 mfd. High side to pin 1 10.7 mc FM (fully High fre- VTVM con- All Adjust for zero
(grid) of 613A6, (unmodulated) clockwise) quency end nected from deflection.
2nd 1-f tube (4). Junction of
Low side to chassis. of dial. two 100,000
ohm resistors
and Junction
of condensers
25 and 24.
(See prelimin-
ary alignment
notes.)
150 ohms High side to "A," 108 mc FM (fully 108 mc VTVM con- A 12 Adjust for maximum
in series low side to "G" (unmodulated) clockwise) nected to pin
on FM antenna deflection.
with each terminals. Dis- 7 of 6AL5
lead. connect internal and chassis.
antenna.
10 150 ohms High side to "A," 88 mc FM (fully 88 mc VTVM con- A 13 Adjust iron core (hold
in series low side to "G" (unmodulated) clockwise) nected to pin brass in position)
on FM antenna
with each terminals. Dis- 7 of 6AL5 for maximum de-
lead. connect internal and chassis. flection.
antenna.
11 150 ohms High side to "A," 98 mc FM (fully 98 me VTVM con- A 13 Adjust brass and iron
low side to "G" clockwise) nected to pin cores (one screw) for
in series on FM antenna maximum deflection. Re-
with each terminals. Dis- 7 of 6AL5 peat steps 0, 10 and 11
lead. connect internal and chassis. until no further improve-
antenna. ment can be made.
12 150 ohms High side to "A," 106 mc FM (fully Tune for VTVM con- A 14, Adjust for maximum
in series low side to "U" clockwise) maximum nected to pin A 15
on FM antenna deflection.
with each terminals. Dis- deflection. 7 of 6AL5
lead. connect internal and chassis.
antenna.
13 150 ohms High side to "A," 90 mc FM (fully Tune for VTVM con - A 16, Adjust iron cores (hold
low side to "G" clockwise) maximum nected to pin A 17 brass in place) for
in series on FM antenna
with each terminals. Dis- deflection. 7 of 6AL5 and maximum deflection.
lead. connect Internal chassis.
antenna.
14 150 ohms High side to "A," 100 mc FM (fully Tune for VTVM con - A16, Adjust both iron and
in series low side to "G" clockwise) maximum nected to pin A17 brass cores for maximum
on FM antenna deflection. Repeat steps
with each terminals. Dis- deflection. 7 of 6AL5 and 12, 13, and 14 until no
lead. connect internal chassis. further improvement
antenna. can be made.
15 200 mmfd. High side to "A,"
low side to "G"
1600 kc BC 1600 kc Across voice A18 Adjust fbr maximum
terminals of AM coil. output.
antenna terminals. Adjust for maximum
16 20 mmfd. High side to "A," 1400 kc BC Tune for Across voice A19
low side to "0"
terminals of AM
antenna terminals.
maximum
output.
coil«
9
Emerson Radio
Model 528
Chassis 120038
TYPE OF TUBES:
1 -6AG5, r -f amplifier
1-6BE6, converter
Z-6BA6, first i-f amplifier and FM second i-f
1-6AL5, FM -AM detector, a.v.c.
1-6AU6, a -f amplifier
1-6V6GT, power output
1- -5Y3GT, rectifier TONE CONTROL
VOLUME CONTROL BAND PHONO
ON -OFF SWITCH TUNING CONTROL
r 42 39 40 98 44 103 36 38 31 59 414
SWITCH
Al5
---1
58
43
48
55
56
52
AIS AO 82 AI 4 97 Ale An 89 85 88 87 94 90 99 92 100

L
i
A88 813 417 112 104 101 61
46 33 32 31 63 65 108 64 30 21 67 11 29 68 69 28 73 49 25 26 84 80 24 81 82 23 806
75
27
74
111
93 83 78 43 77 14 86 20 50
50
7 10 7 102 87 15 72 13 16 76 18 51 105
MODEL: 537
CHASSIS MODEL: 120043
Emerson Radio
6AG 5 6 BE6 (I) 6BA6 613A6®
ft .1.®
9
SECT]
EXT.
ANT.
P05.1 PHONO
P05.2 BC
ROS. 3 EM 0
5U4G
nj'6SWITCH IS SHOWN IN EXTREME (4) 6AL 5
COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION 6V6 000
GT
O
6V6GT
RO OR
r 9
SECT
INFO,
t-
P .c Hu.
11.16
EMERSON RADIO & PHONOGRAPH CORPORATION
ALIGNMENT
to last reference mark at low frequency end of dial.
To set pointer turn variable condenser fully closed and set pointer
wire to pin 1. Replace tube, making certain that wire does
To inject signal in Steps 5, 6 and 7, remove 6BE6 andohm connect chassis. These resistors
resistors in series from pin 7 of 6AL5 toadjustment
not short to shield base. In Step 9, connect two 100,000 of FM tun-
condenser fully counterclockwise and check
should be equal within 5%. After Step 9, turn variable in same relative position to chassis as when receiver is in cabinet.
ing unit per dial cord drawing. Loop should be maintainedsignal generator should be no higher than necessary to obtain an
Volume control should be at maximum position; output of
output reading. Use an insulated alignment screwdriver for ad jus ing.
SIGNAL SIGNAL BAND RADIO
DIAL OUTPUT ADJUST REMARKS
DUMMY GENERATOR GENERATOR SWITCH METER
ANTENNA COUPLING FREQUENCY POSITION SETTING
High side to front stator
0.1 mfd. 455 kc BC (center High fre- Across voice Al, A2 Adjust for maximum
1
of variable condenser. position) quency end coil. A3, A4 output.
Low side to chassis. of dial.
BC (center Low frequency Across voice A5 Adjust for minimum
2 0.1 mfd. High side to front stator 455 kc
end of dial. coil. output.
of variable condenser. position)
High fre- VTVM con A6, A7 Adjust for maximum
0.05 mfd. High side to pin 1 (grid) 10.7 mc (un- FM (fully nected from
of 6BA6, 2nd 14 tube (4). modulated) clockwise) quency end pin 7 of 6AL5 deflection.
Low side to chassis. of dial. to chassis.
VTVM con. As, A9 Adjust for maximum
4 0.05 mfd. High side to pin 1 (grid) 10.7 mc (un- FM (fully High frequency nected from pi deflection.
of CHAO. let i-f tube (3). modulated) clockwise) end of dial. 7 of 6AL5 to
Low side to chassis. chassis.
VTVM con-
side to pin 1 (grid) 10.6 mc un- FM (fully High frequency nected from pif A10 Adjust for maximum
5 0.05 mfd. High end of dial. 7 of 6AL5 to deflection.
of 6BE6. Low side .to modulated) clockwise)
chassis. chassis.
VTVM con- All Adjust for maximum
0.05 mfd. High side to pin 1 (grid) 10.8 mc (un - FM (fully High frequency nected from pi deflection.
of 6BE6. Low side to modulated) clockwise) end of dial. 7 of 6AL5 to -
chassis. chassis.
VT V51 con-
FM (fully High frequency nected Al2 Adjust for maximum
7 0.05 mfd. High side to pin 1 (grid) 10.7 mc (un- from pii
end of dial. 7 of 6AL5 deflection.
of 6BE6. Low side to modulated) clockwise) to
chassis. chassis.
VTVM con-
FM (fully High frequency nected from pin A13 Adjust for maximum
0.05 mfd. High side to pin I (grid) 10.7 mc (un- deflection.
8
6AU6, 3rd 14 tube (5). modulated) clockwise) end of dial. 7 of 6AL5 to
Low side to chassis. chassis:
10.7 mc (un- VTVM con-
FM (fully High frequency nected from A14 Adjust for zero
9 0.05 mfd. High side to pin 1 (grid) end of dial. junction of two deflection.
6A U6, 3rd 1-f tube (5). modulated) clockwise)
Low side to chassis. 100,000 ohm re
sistors and
junction of con-
densers 31 and
32. (See pre-
liminary align
went notes).
FM (fully 108 mc V11751 con- A15 Adjust for maximum
10 150 ohms in High side to ungrounded 108 mc (un- nected from deflection.
clockwise)
series with I'M antenna terminal.
modulated) pin 7 of GALS
to chassis.
each lead. (Disconnect internal
antenna.) VTVM con- A16 Adjust Iron core (hold
side to ungrounded 88 mc (un- FM (fully 88 -mc nected from brass in position) for
11 150 ohms in High
FM antenna terminal. modulated) clockwise) pin 7 of 6AL5 maximum deflection.
series with Low side to chassis. to chassis.
antenna.)
98 mc VTVM con- A16 Adjust iron and brass
High side to ungrounded 98 mc (un- FM (fully nected from cores (single screw) for
12 150 ohms in FM antenna terminal. modulated) clockwise) pin 7 of 6AL5 maximum deflection. Re-
series with Low side to chassis. to chassis. peat steps 10, 11, 12
each lead. (Disconnect internal until no further im-
antenna.) provement can be made.
VTVM con- A17, Adjust for maximum
FM (fully Tune for nected from
High side to ungrounded 106 mc (un- maximum pin 7 of 6AL5 A18 deflection.
13 150 ohms in FM antenna terminal. modulated) clockwise)
series with Low side to chassis. deflection. to chassis.
antenna.) VTVM con- A19, Adjust iron core (hold
High side to ungrounded 90 mc (un- FM (fully Tune for nected from brass in position) for
150 ohms in maximum pin 7 of 6AL5 A20 maximum deflection.
14 FM antenna terminal. modulated) clockwise)
to chassis.
series with Low side to chassis. deflection.
antenna.)
Tune for VTVM con- A19, Adjust Iron and brass
100 mc (un- FM (fully nected from cores (single screw) for
15 150 ohms in High side to ungrounded clockwise) maximum pin 7 of GALS A20 maximum deflection. Re-
series with FM antenna terminal.Low modulated)
to chassis. (Discon- deflection. to chassis. peat steps 10, 11, 12
each lead. side
nect internal antenna.) until no further im
provement can be made.
High side to AM un- 1600 kc BC 1600 kc Across voice A21 Adjust for maximum
16 200 mmfd. grounded lug on antenna coil. output.
terminal strip. Low side
to chassis. Across voice Adjust for maximum
High side to AM un
200 mmfd. grounded 1400 kc BC Tune for A22 output.
17 maximum coil.
lug on antenna
52 terminal strip. Low side

to chassis.
output.
VOLTAGE READINGS
1 6AG5 -0.4DC 0 6.2AC 0 225DC 137DC 0
2 6BE6 -0.3DC 0 0 6.2AC 270DC 100DC 0
3 6BA6 -0.3DC 0 6.2AC 0 270DC 122DC 0
4 6BA6 -0.5DC 0 6.2AC 0 260DC 110DC 0
5 6AU6 -0.6DC 0 6.2AC 0 280DC 48DC 0
6 6AL5 0 0 0 6.2AC 0.4DC 0 -11DC
7 6AU6 -0.7DC 0 6.2AC 0 59DC 29DC 0
9 6V6GT 0 0 320DC 290DC 0 59DC 6.2AC 15DC
10 6V6GT 0 0 320DC 290DC 0 0 6.2AC 15DC
11 5U4G 0 330DC 0 300AC 0 300AC 0 330DC
RESISTANCE READINGS
1 6AG5 1.1 meg. 0 0.2 0 85,000 120,000 0
2 6BE6 22,000 0.7 0.2 014 80,000 98,000 12,000
3 6BA6 650,000 0 0.1 0 80,000 110,000 0
4 6BA6 650,000 0 0.1 0 45,000 70,000 0
5 6AU6 45,000 0 0.1 0 45,000 10,000 0
6 6AL5 inf. inf. 0 0.1 450 0 15,000
7 6AU6 2.4 meg. 0 0.1 0 770,000 1.8 meg. 0
9 6V6GT 0 0 80,000 80,000 450,000 0.3 0.1 170
10 6V6GT 0 0 80,000 80,000 0 620,000 0.1 170
11 5U4G inf. 80,000 inf. 69 inf. 72 inf. 80,000
1. Voltage readings are in volts and resistance readings in ohms unless otherwise specified.
2. All readings taken in broadcast position except those for items 4, 5 and 6, which should be taken in FM position.
3. D -C voltage measurements are at 20,000 ohms per volt; a -c voltages measured at 1,000 ohms.
4. Socket connections are shown as bottom views.
5. Measured values are from socket pin to common negative.
6. Line voltage maintained at 117 volts for voltage readings.
7. Nominal tolerance on component values makes possible a variation of ± 15% in voltage and resistance readings.
8. Volume control at maximum, no signal applied for voltage measurements.
9. Resistance readings in the B+ circuits may vary widely according to the condition of the filter capacitors.
49 46 63 82 105 AS 50 48 43 61
15
41
81
104
128
116
45 108 65 106 103
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
Remove four push -on type control knobs from top of
cabinet.
Remove phono motor plug, phono pickup plug, and two
speaker plugs from chassis.
TO DRUM
Remove two Phillips head screws holding antenna ter-
minal strip to chassis.
FRAME Remove two nuts and washers fastening loop to cabinet.
Remove two Phillips head bolts in phono compartment
retaining chassis to cabinet.
Remove two hex head bolts and washers retaining chassis
to cabinet. Remove loop and chassis from rear of cabinet.
Remove four nuts fastening speaker to cabinet and re.
move speaker.
SC EW
TO TUNING SHAFT
DETAIL OF FM COLLAR
STRINGING AND CORRECT
SETTING OF SLUG TUNER
WITH TUNING CONTROL
FULLY COUNTER -CLOCKWISE.
4 TURNS
53
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE FOR A.M.: 10. Adjust primary of 2nd IF Transformer for
maximum VTVM reading.
1. Connect generator to tuning condenser stator 11. Adjust secondary of 2nd IF transformer,
(BC Antenna) in series with .01 mfd.; tune gener- keeping reading between 2 and 3 volts.
ator to 455 Kc.; tune radio to quiet point on high
frequency end of dial, and adjust 1st and 2nd IF 12. Connect 10.7 Mc generator to point E and
transformers (455 Kc.) for maximum peak output. ground. Rotate 10.7 Mc adjustment screw of 1st
2. Connect generator to antenna terminal in IF Transformer Secondary maximum number of
series with 200 mmf. Turn tuning control to ex turns counter clockwise. Adjust primary of 1st IF
treme full mesh position of tuning condenser. Set Transformer for maximum VTVM reading.
pointer to line located just below 55 calibration on 13. Adjust secondary of 1st IF Transformer for
Bcst. Band. Tune receiver to 60 on dial; tune gen- maximum VTVM reading, keeping the voltage be-
erator to 600 Kc. Adjust BC padder, BC Ant. Coil
Inductance (%2 screw on rear of chassis) for maxi- tween 2 and 3.
mum output. 14. Connect 106 Mc. Signal Generator to FM
3. Tune receiver to 160 on dial; tune generator antenna terminals. If generator impedance is low,
to 1600 Kc. Adjust BC. Osc. and BC. Ant. trim- put one 150 -ohm carbon resistor in series with each
mers for maximum output. Repeat 2 and 3 for best of the generator leads. Tune receiver dial to 106
alignment. Mc.
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE FOR F.M.: 15. Adjust FM Oscillator Trimmer for maximum
Note: Points A, B, C, D, E, and F, are noted on VTVM reading.
circuit diagram. 16. Adjust FM Antenna Trimmer for maximum
1. Set Band Switch to FM. VTVM reading.
2. Connect vacuum tube voltmeter (VTVM) BAND
SWITCH-,
VOLUME
CONTROL --,
TONE
A -CONTROL
across points B and C. TUNING CONTROL -
ON -OFF
SWITCH
2 PILOT LIGHTS
3. Connect 10.7 Mc. signal generator through .01 TYPE N0.07
II
mfd. condenser to point A and ground. TCMMHS
ANTENNA P
BC
ER TWR TA PNUSTE
4. Adjust primary of FM Detector Transformer OSC. POWER

TRANSF.
for maximum VTVM reading. OSC.
5. Connect VTVM across points B and D =wwwwwww PRI. ADJ.

M ANT.
SM. ADJ.
6. Adjust secondary of FM Detector Transformer osFILTER CONDENSER

(M END IF'
for zero VTVM reading. ST IF
10.7 MC
ADJ. TRANSF.
7. Connect 10.7 Mc. Signal Generator to point 455 KC

TRANSF
IF AOJ
F and ground. 105-125V. 60,
C Lool,
8. Connect VTVM across points B and C. 0 0l PHONO INPUT
SPEAKER
LINE CORD
9. Rotate 10.7 Mc. adjustment screw of 2nd IF 500A.

F M DIPOLE
) ANT COIL PHOWWTORO
Transformer Secondary maximum number of turns AI 42 BC ANTENNA (EXTERNAL] LINE CORD
counterclockwise. 7F8 74117 7487 766

6866 F DETECTOR
1 F 2ND F
TRASFOREFER TRANSFORMER
TRANSSFT ORMER
2 LOAF 6 3 165
(0,
0. 70 00 3
0 A )1
5 SANA
RI_ 10.1 01510503
.", OSC COI
0 111-11,032
4- TO 700.
.01
zz
0 4 MED
2500
C.5
500 RS ®0 L
2200 1-
c II
RI L 26_ L27
Moo, 430
15
22K 2200, 7
0 00
2 MEG 05 KOSS
C2] 451 CI 6000
2F.,,o3.0 SM.
IKn T FINV.
ILzi A 36
706
70
R20
470K
%.
220 29
.01 R 29
3ADOI 220A
7.7 G21
7 I0.
1("°
xi
.002
05 os
Noov
Mw 2200 31.
wIT,ZrAC:3=0,,""D TO
FOS I -PHONO A 26 00
I. GIS C2C
POS 2.P PE .005 1
POS 3...1.13C1
SY
SPEAKER
ORIENTATION POT R]5
0 --
100 MA
3.2K
6,,T
Espey Mfg. Co. 011., 0. GSA
401.601,
37
1.4014F0
0.000. 40 6-60N0.47
PILOT LIGHTS
STANDARD TERMINALOOARO 90 8 8 0 0
F011151E2. IFS M DETECTOR TAANSFOREFERS CATLF 0 G3

NIAIBERS was. DOTTED LINE OF TRANS ORAEFRS DENOTE TAM
WC 10 vnicH LiADS APE CONNELTED AS SHOWN ON
C39 , 600 11 11
400V
1788 707 7101 7.17 726 766 727 785 705 8026
Model No. 7-6

STANDARD TERMINAL BOARD ABOVE 105-125 L
60,
,86 VOLTAGE READINGS SHOWN AT SOCKET PRONGS
10 PHONO INPUT AIFF TO CHASSIS ANO ARE TAKEN WITH NO SIG-
RECORD ANGER
NAL WITH 1000 OHM PER VOLT METER WINO
10 AFIONO SNITCH . F EA POSITION FOR ALL TUBES EX
54
MOT OR LINE GOAD CEPT 707 WHERE SWITCH IS IN M 03G) POS-
MON LINE VOLTAGE AT ir7 0 WHERE NO REA-
iCt1L±I.C'1,611.,A,11 DING IS GIVEN VOLTAGE 15 ZERO OR TOO LOWTO
READ
00..41 3: .55,512.5 , 6 Vg1,52 .2515,1012 9 555.5,555 V01,02 i0 nEMS'IMME 501.500. I 1125,57555g 12 Aggig20.0012 VOLUM 13 212 &&&&& 115.
4 .5,5vay" yoL,Et 5 115,5111505 V01.11512 Av,,r,0,0. 50,505 7 .55,51.05 VOL,. 5.50. vo,umg 14
.9 10 1 Mg
"c'e I., CPO
0 _ 3 1.20 000 LYN MO
so 50
%I:39 :L',""'sT 'c5c1c)°:,°."
/0 MI 0 " CD
5 .250 INF g 5'81 ge'l 55 g'-'2 g 300 Ifr
1X 33X 32 X 95 X 56 X 13 X 11.5 X
600 KC 600 KG 455 KC 455 KC 400 CY 400 CY 1400 CY
2 3 4 5
7A07 6A G5 6567 65 27 MS 57 1SC TRANS 6H6
1
FM RE AMP FM CONY A M -F31 IEL F 32 F TRANS FM 25.61F 392 TFANS FM.516 IF RATIO DU FM AV1
H50 MAW
If .00 WO
50 MAW e6564 4 MPO
90 AMP
20
I m6G
_ 330
MNIF _J
R EC RFC
ars F
3;9, NI -
1500 INN1r
- T ME
0
68 66- 200 MMF
500 MNIE
-I I -_t .002 ME
TJ R FG 01
470 , 05 FO
IA
1?1'
Fm ANT \ GANG 11006 0
t4
SOC.FT
05 mFD 005...
NEAT MOM I MEG
w. WE 1-1
600 0700.,
IA
TAME
BLuE
6G4 0 3 MF4
55 BLUE
FM 050 1.1,6ED SOCK E
0 tO'CXT
41. 4
470 Pa 071,4
CC 9
WIRE ENO
r.1
6V6GT
FC ACK
OUTPUT
1.4
m -BLACK 47,ANIF
GANG SPKR PLUG BLUE
I F
&
90.11 BLUE ..RED
100 M
10 MEG 416
l','ROV EPNV) MEG 470 M 220 M
8 rn
SEG 3 FRONT 2 2 MEG 6607 a)
AM DET
121 90010 9900 2106 230,,
SEEN 5W
470 220 M
Di '1
0 BC 11
10 6507
65A7 PHASE INV 0
AM GONV OSC
0 31
M. CM OFZ 02 MED
mi
052C 100 M
'LANK-. 2 216EG 90
MFD 0
--TMF
I J6
Mare"' 22 M
12
60607
tO MEG 3ZELe OUTPUT
T"
II 2s GONT
05 2 2 MEG
'GANG MMF
GK -140 3
S 61 PAD _ BASS
Ja
GK -141
Q
SEC 2 REAR
SEG 3 REAR 66M
GK- 1 42 100,, GANG CD
GK- 1 43 SEC 4 FP0NT SEG 5 FRONT 4
GK -144 SEC o
500 SW 500,,SW
FRONT D2 YELLOW
13
6567
AM RE AMP
0
132
,yo, ' YEL .5V
0 I:
0 -
lk T, 14
E2 5U4
0
D4
SECT
ER ER
PROGRAM SWITCH IS IN ExTRFNE COUNTER -CLOCKWISE POS

DIM IS SHOWN FROM GEAR END OF SWITCH
o
POS I- PHONO
2 -AU
3-F M TELLOV0RrEC, CD
4 -SHORT WAVE L5 Li GREEN
ALL POINTS MARKED (FL CONNECTED TO UNGROUNDED 47G, 1* F ci
SIAM OF 6 3 VOLT WINDING ON POWER TRANSFORMER 6 3V CD
VOLTAGE MEAS0KMENTS TAKEN w,TH vAcuum LoBE
42 . GREEN
PHONO mOTOR
REEN O
VOLT l..4F TER, NO SIGNAL, A v C INOPERAT ivF
'Or SC
L2
BLUE
04, 0
z
INM ON
SEC REAR 3F.13.
0 2.2 MEG
RU loom" %Lc,
E LACK
gwalt4,41100Wit GK -140 SERIES
TELEVISION & RADIO CORPORATION TABULATION FOR AM ALIGNMENT
SET TO
STEPS CONNECT GENERATOR SET GANG ADJUST
GENERATOR AT AT OBTAIN
1 Set Tone and Volume Controls at Maximum
2
2nd. I.F.
pow Slugs
01.. Grid Cony. tube 455 Kc Quiet
x Point
,__,
1st. I.F.
3 H Slugs
H
4 ..-,
BC Osc. a(
Trimmer H
1500 Kc 1500 Kc HRF
BC Mixer
0
5 ,4 of
tuo
GANG Trimmer
=
o
6 ic_, 600 Kc 600 Kc Padder * X
7
Check dial calibration at several frequencies. If not reasonably correct,
adjust oscillator padder. See Note 1
8 # Ext. Ant. Binding 1500 Kc 1500 Kc Loop

Post Trimmer
#Through RMA dummy antenna.
* This adjustment should be made while gang is rocked.
SHORT WAVE RF
9 Place Band Switch in Short Wave position,
10 15 MC SW Osc. Trimmer
See Note 2
0I-, SW Cony.
11
-v 15 NIC
Image at Trimmer
H
s..
15.91 MC
12 E SW Ant. 0.4
,4 Trimmer H
o External
8 Antenna
SW Osc.
0
13 .1. 9.4 MC ,,-1
..c Padder ,.
bi)
=
o
14 2E. 9.4 MC SW Cony.
H Padder
Image at <
10.31 MC SW Ant.
15 Padder
16 Recheck Steps 10 to 15 inclusive.
NOTE 1. After any adjustment of oscillator padder, repeat steps 4, 5 and 6.

56 2. Set oscillator trimmer to maximum capacity, then slowly loosen trimmer until 2nd signal
heard.
is
Oscilloscope Alignment FM Band
FM IF ALIGNMENT 6. Shift connection of sweep signal generator
to the grid of the second FM IF tube.
1. Equipment Required: Oscilloscope. 10.7 MC NOTE: As alignment moves from stage to
sweep generator, voltomyst, and RF signal stage, reduce input instead of reducing oscillo-
generator. scope gain.
2. Set band switch in FM position. 7. Align third FM IF transformer for a sym-
3. Make connection from vertical deflection am- metrical flat top pattern. (Fig. 2).
plifier of oscilloscope to pin #3 of 6H6 dis- 8. Shift signal generator- to the grid of the first
criminator tube. Make certain that the 4MFD IF tube.
electrolytic condenser is disconnected from 9. Align second IF transformer in same manner
this same circuit. It is necessary that the as described in Section 7.
lead to the oscilloscope be shielded, of low Note that the width of the nose of the curve is
total capacity, and connection to receivor the same as before, but the sides have become
isolated by means of a 1 meg. resistor. steeper, as in Fig. 3.
4. Connect sweep generator to last FM IF grid 10. Connect the signal generator to the grid of
through a .1 MFD coupling capacitor. the converter tube grid in series with 10,000
5. Load primary of discriminator transformer ohm resistor and a .1MFD capacitor, or loosely
with resistor of approximately 39000 ohms. couple by stray capacity of an insulated wire.
Back out secondary slug (top slug) as far as 11. Align first FM IF transformer 'in the same
it will turn. Align primary (bottom slug) to manner as in Section 7.
obtain curve similar to figure 1. This does Note that the sides of the curve have further
not constitute a final alignment of ,sliscrim- steepened, but that the nose of the curve has
inator, but is a convenient expedient to assist retained approximately the same width as in
in I.F. alignment. Fig. 3.
GK -140
GK -141
GK -142
GK -143
GK -144
(1)
(3) (4)
12. Connect 4 MFD electrolytic capacitor that was 14. With sweep signal input to converter grid,
previously disconnected, and take off load realign discriminator transformer for conven-
sistor on discriminator primary. tional discriminator pattern, as in .Fig. 4.
13. Connect oscilloscope to audio output terminal 15. Connect signal generator to converter tube
of discriminator. There are several points grid through .1MFD capacitor. An unmod-
where contact can be made and can be identi- ulated signal input of 65 microvolts at 10.7 Mc
fied as the circuit connected to the terminal should develop .55 volt rise on the AVC line
on the terminal board (nearest the discrimina- with voltobmyst connected to AVC line
through 1 megolim resistor.
tor transformer) to which the shielded lead is
connected. 57
GK -140 SERIES
FM RF Alignment
1. Equipment Required : 8. Set tuning controls so dial pointer calibrates
a. RF Signal Generator. Range 88 to 108 MC. at the equivalent of half way between channels
b. Output Meter. 200 and 201.
c. Insulated Screw Driver.
9. Apply 88 MC signal.
2. Connect RF signal generator in series with
400 ohm carbon resistor to "high" side of FM 10. Adjust oscillator, converter, and antenna slugs
antenna socket. Connect output meter across to maximum output.
voice coil of speaker. 11. Repeat operations 3 to 10 inclusive.
3. Set tuning control for pointer to calibrate at NOTE: The degree of adjustment required
the equivalent of half way between channels in the tuning of the oscillator slug will deter-
300 and 301. mine the number of times operations 3 to 10
4. Apply 108 MC Signal. must he repeated until no further gain in sen-
sitivity is obtained.
5. Set converter and antenna trimmers at mini-
mum capacity. 12. Carefully time across the entire FM band for
6. Adjust oscillator trimmer by tuning from the observance of the dead or weak spots that
maximum capacity to first signal that is heard, may he a resultant of improper alignment or
and peak for maximum output. defective components. This can be deter-
mined by carefully noting the degree of re-
7. Adjust antenna and converter trimmers for ceiver noise, that is, high noise generally is
maximum output. accompanied by good sensitivity.
CHASSIS LAYOUT FRONT OF CHASSIS
iTUNING TREBLE
r -PROGRAM SW BASS -OFF -ON S.W. CONV. S.W. OSC
PAD TRIM
nn I I I int I I I nn
F.M. OSG- r F. M. CONV r F.M.R.F. S.W. ANT S.W. CONV. OSC TRIM
PAD TRIM 1600 KC
AM
OSC
AM
CONV
AM
RF
0
S.W. ANT BC CONV S.W. OSC OSC PAD
TRIM TRIM PAD 600 KC
F.M. TRIMMERS 40.0 FM. ANT 0 O 0 0
FM. OSC
1ST I .FO 0 FM. CONV PAD F.M. ANT PAD
000
TRANSF
6AG5 6SA7 7AG7 6SK7
6C4
F.M.
DRIVE CORD STRINGING
0.7 MC 455 KC FM OSC CONV A.M. OSC F.M.R.F. A.M.R.E
CONV
2ND I.F. 3RD 1.F DET.

6SK7 TRANSF 6SK7 TRANSF 6SK7 TRANSF
1ST 1.F.
0
2ND I.F. 3RD I.F.
ELECT. 455 KC 10.7 MC

6SA7
A.M. DET 6SA7 E M. DE T

POWER
5U4 1ST AUDIO DRIVE CORD
TRANSF 6V6GT 6V6GT
PHASE
INV
RECT
OUTPUT OUTPUT
I--1 1---1 TO PREVENT BINDING, THIS CORD
TUNING SHAFT
PHONO--) LL)F7HONO
MUST BE WOUND AS SHOWN
PULLEY
SPEAKERU COMP LIGHTS
58 KNOB END
MODELS GV220, GV240

Model GV-260 is similar
The features described below

will be of special interest to
the serious student of televi-
sion. By referring to the com-
plete schematic diagram on this
page, you will note that the
control grid of the first tube
is grounded, and that cathode
injection of signals into the
R.F. amplifier is used. This
technique has the advantage of as
simplifying the input circuit

and reducing tube noise.
The R.F. section uses sub -
chassis construction for better
isolation of circuits. This is N
especially advantageous at fre-
quencies above 100 MC.
A separate broadcast band
adapter is avilable which can
be plugged in and will permit
the reception of both televi-
sion and broadcast stations.
Band -switching is accom-
plished through a compact and
stable turret assembly. This
assembly carries all tuning
inductances, slug -tuned, and 1"-rfort
L !
the associated damping resis- ^

tors. It is in three scetions,
corresponding to plate coils of
V1, grid coils of V2, and the aaH
-1t
oscillator tuning inductances.
In the video I.F. amplifier
a wide pass -band is obtained
through the use of loading re-
o; Ao0oa;,,
sistors across the overcoupled
transformer secondaries, while
adjacent channel suppression is
secured with trap circuits in
each transformer.
Video detection, sync sepa-
ration, automatic gain control
action are accomplished with a
single tube. Quite a complete
explanation of such a circuit
is given in "Advanced Radio
Servicing" by Reitman. 59
In connection with the presentation of material on the Farnsworth
television receiver, stress will be placed on detecting the existence
of faults through observation of a test pattern. These are several
different types of patterns and these are transmitted for short periods
for use by servicemen. The Farnsworth Company pattern used in our
illustrations embodies some special features, but in general the sugges-
tions given can be applied to other patterns.
Refer to Figure 32a which shows this pattern. It consists of
several sets of converging alternately black and white lines, a
centrally -located series of concentric circles of graduated shading,
certain lettering, and a series of horizontal and vertical lines. These
shall be discussed in turn and their purpose explained.
The converging lines constitute "resolution wedges" whose purpose is
to indicate the amount of resolution which may be had in a picture.
Those bars which are situated in a vertical direction measure the
resolution in horizontal direction and those lying horizontally measure
the vertical resolution.
At the transmitter, the scanning of two lines, one black and one
white, produces an electrical signal of one cycle (not one cycle per
second). The scanning rate is a constant and -it is evident that the
more closely spaced these lines are placed, the greater the number of
cycles are produced in a given lapse of time.
So may a known spacing of the lines represent a certain frequency
of the video signal. It is also evident that, should the receiver be
incapable of reproducing the high -frequency components in the reproduced
image. The high -frequency portion of the resolution wedge will not be
reproduced --the alternate black and white lines will not be distinct.
Rather, they will merge into a single dark mass. Therefore, the point
at which the lines merge into indistinction indicates the degree of
frequency response of the system.
For example, the normally -functioning receiver should reproduce
the lines approximately to the point marked 400 --which means the equiv-
alent of 400 alternately black and white lines between one side of the
picture and the other. If the receiver is out of adjustment and the
bandwidth is too narrow, it will not reproduce this many lines.
Next, we shall consider the concentric circles shown in the chart.
Even as in photographic work, an improper gamma in reproduction will
lead to a picture which is "washed out" or one which is "overly
32a Normal test pattern 32b Loss of vertical sync.

contrasty." If the proper gamma is present, the graduation of shading
in these concentric circles will appear to be equally darker or lighter
than adjacent circles. Misadjustment in the receiver may cause, for
example, the two inner circles to be equally shaded - black - or the
two circles may both be equally white. The first condition would
produce an overly contrasty picture while the latter would produce a
picture having a "washed out" appearance. Gamma is determined by the
relative settings of the contrast control and the brilliance control.
The circles must not become oval, for this indicates that there
exists excessive sweep amplitude in the direction of the longer axis
of the ellipse (or insufficient in the direction of the shorter axis
which may also be shown by the fact that the raster is not filled).
Non -linearity of sweep is shown by an improper relationship between
the various portions of the test patterns and by an egg -shaped set of
"circles."
Some test patterns incorporate two large circles, one somewhat
larger than the other. These may be used to obtain proper setting of
the width and height controls, for the larger of the circles should
just fill the screen in a horizontal direction, the smaller in the
vertical direction. They, too, should be circles and not ellipses.
There are a few additional items to be observed in the use of the
test chart. Its aspect ratio is 4.3, the proper ratio for a televi-
sion picture. Therefore, it may be adjusted to just fill the screen
by properly setting the height and width controls.
Should the frequency response of the receiver be peaked at any
portion of the response curve, this will be indicated in the test
pattern as an excessively dark portion of the resolution wedge. A
dark portion across the screen may be the result of hum -modulation Of
the signal, such as the entrance of 60 cycle hum into the video portion
of the receiver but this will be distinguished by a dark band extending
from the left to the right extremities of the raster. Peaking in the
video section will produce a darkened portion of the wedge alone and
the frequency of this peak may be judged by the portion of the wedge
which is dark (overly contrasty). If at the high frequency portion of
the pass -band, the effect will be noted at the high -frequency portion
of the wedge. The various figures illustrate the appearance of the
pattern when defects in reception are present.
32c 120 cycle hum in video and in H. scan 32d Faulty horizontal linearity 61
32k Horizontal oscillator out of sync.
,
GENERAL ELECTRIC
RADIO
SERVICE DATA
FOR
MODEL 417A
SPECIFICATIONS
OPERATING FREQUENCIES: each tuner in the best physical and electrical position in the
Standard Band . 540 to 1600 kc assembly. Furthermore, since the shunt capacity is small and
Short Wave 1 9.4 to 9.9 mc the inductance is consequently at its highest corresponding
Short Wave 2 11.6 to 12.1 mc value, the additional unavoidable inductance introduced in
Frequency Modulation 1 42 to 50 mc the wiring, band switch, etc., produces a minimum of circuit
Frequency Modulation 2 ..................88 to 108 mc losses and unbalance.
AM I -F Frequency 455 kc The guillotine tuner consists of a heavy, silver-plated, two -
FM I -F Frequency...:......10.7 mc turn square coil, rigidly supported between two plastic posts.
A flat, solid vane slides up and down between the two turns.
POWER OUTPUT (/17 volts lino): It is guided in grooves in the plastic posts so that it passes
Undistorted .4.0 watts between the two sections of the coil without touching them.
Maximum . . .5.5 watts The posts are so moulded and the coil so constructed that the
whole assembly is held rigidly at a predetermined spacing.
ANTENNA INPUTS:
The tuning vane is raised and lowered by the tuning elevator.
When the elevator is all the way up (set tuned to lowest
Broadcast and Short Wave-conventional antenna frequency), the vane is completely above the coil which then
FM -300 -ohm input for folded dipole acts as a simple two -turn coil. As the set is tuned toward the
PHONOGRAPH PICK-UP:
higher frequencies, the vane moves downward into the field
of the coil until, finally, it is all the way in. The vane reduces
Type Variable Reluctance the inductance of the coil through two principles. First, it acts
D -C Resistance 250 ohms as a shorted turn, and thus reduces inductance directly;
second, it provides a barrier between the two turns of the coil
GENERAL INFORMATION which reduces the mutual coupling and thus also reduces
INTRODUCTION inductance.
The information contained in this service note covers the The tuners described above are identified as T2, T4, and
Model 417A completely except for the record player. This T5, on the schematic diagram.
receive{ employs either the type P2 (two -post) or type P3 FM BANDS
(single -post) record player which are covered in separate Guillotine tuners T2, T5, and T4 are used as the tuned
service notes. circuits for the r -f amplifier, converter, and local oscillator
THE TUNING SYSTEM respectively, in both FM bands. In the higher frequency
The "r -f end" of the receiver is unusual in a number of band, the tuner is used with only a small shunt trimmer for
respects. Variable inductance tuning is employed instead of adjusting distributed capacity. In the lower band, a higher
using a conventional tuning capacitor. This design makes value shunt trimmer is used to reduce the frequency. The
possible two distinct advantages. First, it provides a high layout of band switch, tuners, and tube sockets is arranged to
efficiency FM circuit in the 88 to 108 megacycle range which give, the shortest possible leads when the FM bands are in use.
would not be possible with the more conventional methods of The lead length in the other bands is not nearly so critical.
tuning. Second, it provides stable short-wave spread -bands
which tune as easily as the.broadcast band. Other advantages SHORT-WAVE SPREAD -BANDS
are also obtained but the two mentioned above are the most Bandspread tuning in the short-wave bands is obtained in
important. the converter and oscillator circuits by inserting the guillotine
Tuning is accomplished by an "elevator" which consists of tuners in series with a higher inductance so that the two
a rigid plastic horizontal plate raised and lowered by means of inductances together form the "L" part of the short-wave
a windlass controlled by the tuning knob at the panel. From tuned circuit. The small percentage change in inductance
this plate are suspended three powdered iron cores which tune obtained in the tuner provides smooth, wide, and stable
the broadcast r -f, converter, and oscillator coils; and three tuning. The "C" part of the tuned circuit consists primarily
tuning "vanes" which tune three low -inductance circuits. of a shunt trimmer. Switching from one short-wave band to
These latter circuits are employed in both FM bands and both the other is accomplished by selecting a different shunt
short-wave bands with the exception of the antenna circuit for trimmer.
the short-wave spread -bands when a broad tuned antenna coil The converter grid circuit, as an example, includes L7 and
is used and the r -f guillotine tuner is switched out. They are T5 in series in both the SW1 and SW2 bands. Tuner T5 is in
called "guillotine" tuners because of their appearance. the ground end of the circuit and the signal is fed into the
grid and through C10. The shunt tuning capacity is either
FACTS ABOUT "GUILLOTINE" TUNING C56 or C57, depending upon which of the two short-wave
The "guillotine" tuners are designed primarily for the bands is used. Additional oscillator coupling capacitors, C72
88-108 megacycle FM band where special technique is needed or C73, are also added to compensate for the lower coupling
to realize high gain and circuit stability. Ordinary coils, tuned through C67 when the higher shunt capacitors are 'in the
by a variable capacitor, are inefficient at these frequencies, circuit.
first, because of the low inductances required to reach these In the r -f stage, a section of the loop is used as the grid
frequencies when a variable tuning capacitor is employed circuit. It is tuned for resonance by a shunt capacitor (C54
and, second, because shunt capacity reduces the gain of the and C55) and a shunt inductance (L20). Because a tuned
amplifier circuit; shunt capacity must be kept very low. circuit of this type is inherently broad, tuning through the
Another disadvantage of standard tuning arrangements at relatively narrow spread -band offers little advantage and
these frequencies is that common coupling is obtained through is not done.
the shaft of a ganged tuning capacitor unless insulated single
sections are used (cumbersome and costly). Common coupling
of this type tends to cause oscillation or general instability
and precludes high gain per stage. The guillotines make
possible short leads, completely isolated sections, stable
tuning, high Q circuits, low shunt capacity, and location of 63
STANDARD BROADCAST BAND These checks with oscillator tube (V3) removed:
When manual tuning is employed (Band Switch in STD VI grid to V2 grid 13 @ 1000 kc
position), the receiver employs an r -f stage, a converter, and VI grid to V2 grid 6@ 9.6 mc
an oscillator, all of which are tuned by iron slugs suspended VI. grid to V2 grid 9 @ 11.8 mc
from the tuning elevator. In the automatic position (Band VI grid to V2 grid 13 (4) 45 mc
switch in the AUTO position), the r -f stage is not used. VI grid to V2 grid 10 (4) 98 mc
Instead, a separate antenna coil is used which couples the These checks with oscillator tube (V3) removed:
antenna and loop directly into the converter. A separate coil V2 grid to V4 grid .23 @ 455 kc
is used in order to make the tuning circuit independent of the
dial tuning mechanism so that it may be tuned by trimmers
V2 grid to V4 grid ... .. ..37 @ 10.7 mc
in the push-button assembly. V4 grid to V5 grid . 23 @ 455 kc
V4 grid to VS grid 60 @ 10.7 mc
Switching from manual to automatic tuning is accomplished ........ 40
V5 grid to V6 grid .....
in the oscillator by using an oscillator coil which is tuned by a
separate shunt inductance. In manual tuning, the inductance (2)
V5 grid to V6 grid...25
Audio Gain
455 kc
@ 10.7 mc .
@
is one which is tuned by the tuning elevator. In automatic

tuning, a fixed shunt capacity (C-76) plus one of a series of .07 volts at 400 cps across volume control with control set
push-button selected coils tunes the oscillator. at maximum will give approximately watt output across
the speaker voice coil.
I -F AMPLIFIER (3) Oscillator Grid Bias
The i-f amplifier consists of a composite 455 kc and 10.7 mc D -c voltage developed across R5 (average):
circuit. The,electrical changes required to transfer between 13 v. @ 1000 kc 2.7 v. C6 11.8 mc
AM and FM service are made by the Band Switch. When the 2.7 v. @ 9.6 mc 5.5 v. @ 45 mc
switch is in either the FM1 or FM2 position, the amplifier 7 v. 6-2; 98 mc
operates at 10.7 megacycles and delivers the i-f signal into an (4) Socket Pin Voltages
FM discriminator circuit. When the switch is in any of the Fig. 8 shows typical tube pin voltages. All readings should
other positions, the amplifier operates at 455 kc. Screen be made from the pins to ground unless otherwise indicated.
voltage is removed from the tube which acted as an FM
limiter and this tube then acts as an AM diode detector. REPLACEMENT OF DRIVE CORDS
Thus, the AM audio signal appears across R16 while the DIAL STRINGING:
FM audio signal appears across R22. A section of the Band Push the tuning elevator all the way down and string the
Switch switches the audio input circuit from one to the other. dial as shown in Figure 1. This illustration shows the stringing
The AVC bus is also shorted out for FM. as viewed from behind the dial scale, as you would see it when
working on it. The numbers and arrows indicate the pro-
gression of the dial cord from start to finish. Notice that the
STAGE GAIN AND VOLTAGE CHECKS dial cord, in progressive steps 9, 10, 11, and 12, is made to
Stage gain measurements by vacuum tube voltmeter or travel behind the start and end of cord stringing, as viewed
similar measuring devices may be used to check circuit per- in Figure 1. The procedure will be easier if pulley C is by-
formance and isolate trouble. The gain values listed may have
passed until the rest of the work is finished after which the
tolerances of 20%. Readings taken with low signal so that cord can be pulled tight over that pulley. During the pro-
AVC is not effective. cedure, locate the two brass eyelets so that they fall between
pulleys A and B. When finished, crimp the eyelets on the
(1) R -F and I -F Stage Gains
cord in the proper positions to act as minimum and maxi-
mum stops for the tuning mechanism and clip the pointer
Signal applied through IRE dummy antenna: on the cable half -way between the eyelets.
Antenna post to V1 grid 4 @ 1000 kc Separate detail drawings are given to show the three
Antenna post to V1 grid. 2 @ 9.6 mc different methods of attaching the ends of the cord. The
Antenna post to VI grid. 2 @ 11.8 mc arrangement with the standard helical spring was used in
Signal applied through 300 ohms, including signal some earlier production receivers. If the cord and spring are
generator impedance: to be replaced, the Type 1 spring should be used. It fits the
Dipole terminals to VI grid 1 5 @ 45 mc same drum and is an improved type. The Type 2 spring
Dipole terminals to VI grid 2 @ 98 mc should be used with the later type of drum (with two tabs).
Figure 1-Dial Stringing Diagram Showing Later Production Springs
64 Figure 2-Elevator Windlass Stringing Procedure

When stringing the mechanism with either the Type 1 or The table is broken down into six parts, one for each switch
Type 2 spring, load the spring by pulling the hook over the wafer. Section 1 is nearest the front and section 6 is the rear-
projection at the other end of the spring, string the dial and, most wafer.
as a final step, release the hook so that it pulls up the slack Individual lugs on each wafer are numbered from 1 to 12, de-
in the dial cord. pending upon their position on the wafer. The method of num-
bering is illusttated in Figure 5.
Elevator Stringing
The step-by-step procedure for stringing the elevator wind- SECTION 1
lass is shown in Figure 2, a rear view of the mechanism. Start
by inserting the metallic cord in slot as shown in Step 1. At this -the other end of which is
Observe that the cord is measured five inches from end of loop lug- -connect this- connected to this -
to where it enters the slot. Now bring the loop end around the
pulley counterclockwise, as in Step 2. Next, thread loop
through hole in elevator top plate, fastening it to the hoist 1 Insulated wire, 5" lg. Antenna transformer T13, terminal 4
cord tension spring, as viewed in Step 3. Steps 4, 5, 6, and 7
show how the free end of cord progresses on the pulley, going 2 a. Insulated wire, 1139" lg. Antenna terminal at rear of chassis
b. Insulated wire, r 1g. Switch Section 1, lug 6
clockwise and that each turn is laid progressively one in c. Capacitor C50 Switch Section 2, lug 1
back of the other and in back of the vertical section, going
to the tension spring in tuner plate. In Step 6, pass the free 3 Capacitor C52 Switch Section 2, lug 3
end of cord down through the hole in chassis, grasping its 4 a. Insulated wire, 1W lg. Antenna transformer TI, terminal 1
end with long -nosed pliers and drawing tension on cord while b. Insulated wire, 14" lg. Beam -a -scope plug; terminal A
running elevator completely down to the bottom. Keeping c. Insulated wire, 539" lg. Antenna transformer T13, terminal 2
tension on cord and forcing large dial drive drum so that 5 a. Short bare bus Ground lug on C65
hoist cord spring is compressed, complete Step 7 making a b. Resistor R15 Switch Section 1, lug 11
one turn loop of the cord's free end around the lug shown 6 See lug 2b, above
on end of elevator shaft and solder.
7 Insulated wire, 11" 1g. Terminal strip 1, lug 4
Concluding Comment
After replacing the dial cord or the elevator cord, it may be 8 Capacitor C31 Front terminal of T2
found that some correction in relative positioning is needed. 9 a. Insulated wire, 9" lg. Terminal strip 2, lug 5
This can be done by loosening the set screws in the large drive b. Insulated wire, r lg. Filter capacitor, C46C
pulley directly behind the dial scale and re -positioning it on
the shaft. The object, of course, is to permit the tuning control 11 See lug 5b, above
to drive the elevator through its full tuning range. Slight SECTION 2
errors in final setting are not serious since leeway is provided
in the location of the dial pointer itself.
See Section 1, lug 2c
WIRING OF BAND SWITCH 1
In order to facilitate repair, replacement, and circuit trac- 3 a. Insulated wire, 23. " lg. Trimmer Cl, big nearer Ti
b. See Section 1, lug 3
ing, a table and diagrams are supplied with reference to the
GRID
4 Insulated wire, 139" lg. Trimmer C55, lug nearer T1
GRID
GRID 5 Coil L20 Ground lug on trimmer C2

LOOP 6 Short bare bus Trimmer C65, left-hand terminal*
PRI
PLATE
GRID
ANT 7 Short bare bus Trimmer C2, left-hand terminal*
LOOP
PRI.
8 Capacitor C7 Tube socket Vl, pin 1
CIRCLES
TERMINALS Antenna transformer T13, terminal 1
FM DIODE GRID HOLE PLATE
65117 9 Insulated wire, 4" lg.
GRID PILOT RSVP
HOLE
AM IO Insulated wire, 3;9" Ig. Anterkna transformer T1, terminal 2
AUDIO
CATHODE
640767 11** Insulated wire, 11W lg. Beam -a -scope plug, terminal C
Bf AUDIO
PILOT PILOT
HOLE PLATE HOL6_,/
DIODE IS)
PLATE ""
DIODE I
6A07GT 640767 SECTION 3
GRID PLATE
CONV 6SV7
RSVP
BOTTOM VIEW OF COILS LOOKING FROM FRONT OF CHASSIS
1 Shielded wire, 8.4" lg. Terminal strip 2, lug 6
Figure 3 -Terminal Identification of Coil Assemblies 2 Insulated wire, 139" Ig. Switch Section 3, lug 12
(Numbers correspond with schematic) a. Insulated wire, 239" lg. Converter coil T6, terminal 1
3
b. Capacitor CI6 Ground lug on terminal strip 3
connections made in the band switch. If used properly, these c. Choke L3 Switch Section 3, lug 11
will be of invaluable aid 4 Insulated wire, 739" lg. Terminal strip 2, lug 3
TERMINAL 0
B SOA CANE; IgfACLat STRIP NO.1 5 Insulated wire, 1 34" lg.Converter coil T6, terminal 2
COIL I 4
4 6 Short bus with spaghetti Chassis
45
TERMINAL 7 Short bare bus Terminal strip 3, lug 4
10 Shielded wire, 1039" lg. Terminal strip 2, lug 2
PILOT
HOLE ,;()
11 a. See lug 3c, above
2 b. Capacitor C10 Switch Section 4, lug 3
3
12 a. See lug 2, above
b. Shielded wire, 7.34" 1g. Push-button socket, terminal B
5
PUSH-BUTTON
SOCKET
* Looking from front, chassis inverted.
5 TERM NAL ** Double lug (front and rear) soldered together.
STRIP NO.3 7
F
Oo0
2O Ci
13
Figure 5 -Identification of Switch Lugs

-Set Inverted and Viewed
SWITCH from Panel
Figure 4 -Physical Location of Components

Listed in Band Switch Wiring Table 65
GENERAL * ELECTRIC
BROADCAST If
V4 VS V61
LIPX16611 6507 TB 6SV7 6607
SATANTENNA NAM
n
OSINIECT JUMPER 20,I
WHEN NOINTENNS
IS USED TUNING
VANE
R-F AMPLIFIER
161.
K0. Pr.
6
C25
7B013165
ffll15
s 052.0.5 ISO
L -J
DIB COO 153 F 600

02 MF - 1) 0INF
Mr
M6
E,13?CC
310
027-15 zrornvEwrzx
If cita 4.7o1745%.1"7"` BASS TONE
CceNECTof SWITCH 52
Cf PLUG
WITCH Of SOCKET 2k_ WSW jar& 'InG" ZAN L651 CA66,
All FIVE -POLE SWITCHES SUCH SWAGES.
&L..TARIVer.% 30MAI 30IAPT
ritr:74sTers=
POSITION OSSIGNATIONSANE SS
POLIO. Iiii.
SSTEr
,41:1-1
,.. 3 ;:4' is 8 -888
1001( M
---,A6,---e __co,
--w 1
swilcH sum. : g
SSE "F9
' l'
OFT i--, igge al T12
MONO MF VF R26 2206/1
Lue a -T i ,,
JACK AT MAIN
LIB CHASSIS ..s.
L__TREBLE TONE_ j `, DAL LIGHTS
9A3TCH 53
N. CC.E.0 t.
SHIELDEr6W-.4 RECONNErCT AS
PHONOGRAPH --r HENN PA GASH LOW
LOCAL OSCILLATOR 1600 4. PRE -AMPLIFIER
V3
FILAMENT
AK5
5 6A1(5 WAS
WIPINnG
GS
IibR PLUGS JACK
cs C45 16507 AVAGT
3 30 130
0101 C(12
STD. BAND
05W +
OSC SHIRR.
TL6116 COIL RIO 69V7 6507 60076T
.-41444- (MANUAL/ "17
tratatrit7014! k
--
AaNeLsAnTDR SECTIOG SSE IS',
-82 FI:niTe," OMOMI 6.3VA-CT
POWERT. ti
Aware 6-Sc6emallc 01091am, Made! 417A

Signal Signal Band Dial See
Step Generator Input Switch Setting Adjust Note Remarks
Frequency Point
FM IF ALIGNMENT
1 10.7 mc 6SH7 grid thru .-01 mf FM1 C49 for zero** 1, 2 Adjust C49 for zero meter reading.
Apply 1 -volt signal input.
2 See last
column
6SH7 grid thru .01 mf FM1 . ..... Signal
Generator
1, 2 Detune signal generator to point of
maximum meter reading.
3 As in step 2 6SG7 grid thru .01 mf FM1 . Peak C48 1, 2
4 10.7 mc 6SV7 grid thru .01 mf FM1 . .. Peak C28 & 1, 3 6AQ7GT tube removed from its
C94 socket.
5 10.7 mc 6SG7 grid thru .01 mf FM1 Peak C26 & 1, 3 6AQ7GT tube removed from its
C93 socket.
6 10.7 mc Cony, grid directly FM1 Peak C24 & 1, 3, 4 6AQ7GT tube removed from its
L-10 socket.
AM IF ALIGNMENT
7 455 kc Cony, grid directly STD Peak C86 & 5, 6
C61
C23
C14
FM RF ALIGNMENT
10 88 mc DIPOLE terminals FM2 88 mc-6.8 to Peak C6** 1, 3, Set dial accurately-then adjust C6.
6.9 in.* 7, 10
11 98 mc DIPOLE terminals FM2 For max. out- Peak C3 1, 3, Tune dial for maximum output, then
put 8 peak C3 while rocking dial.
12 98 mc DIPOLE terminals FM2 Do not change Peak C2 1, 3
13 43 mc DIPOLE terminals FM1 43 mc-6 to Peak C45** 1, 3, Set dial accurately-then adjust C45.
6.1 in.* 7
14 46 mc DIPOLE terminals FM1 For max. out- Peak C63 1, 3, Tune dial for maximum output, then
put 8 peak C63 while rocking dial.
15 46 mc DIPOLE terminals FM1 Do not change Peak C65 1, 3
SW RF ALIGNMENT
16 11.8 mc Antenna thru 400 SW2 11.8 mc-4.5 Peak C58 5, 6, Set dial accurately-then adjust C58.
ohms to 4.6 in.* 7, 10
17 11.8 mc Antenna thru 400 SW2 Do not change Peak C57 5, 6, Peak C57 while rocking dial.
ohms 8
18 11.8 mc Antenna thru 400 SW2 Do not change Peak C54 5, 6 C54 is located on back apron of
ohms chassis.
19 9.6 mc Antenna thru 400 SW1 9.6 mc-4.5 Peak C59 5, 6, Set dial accurately-then adjust C59.
ohms to 4.6 in.* 7, 10
20 9.6 mc Antenna thru 400 SW1 Do not change Peak C56 5, 6, Peak C56 while rocking dial.
ohms 8
21 9.6 mc Antenna thru 400 SW1 Do not change Peak C55 5, 6

ohms
BROADCAST RF ALIGNMENT
22 1620 kc Antenna via 200 mmf STD Extreme right- Peak C5 5, 6
hand position
23 1620 kc Antenna via 200 mmf STD Extreme right- Peak C4 5, 6
hand position
24 1620 kc Antenna via 200 mmf STD Extreme right- Peak Cl 5, 6
hand position
25 1500 kc Antenna via 200 mmf STD 1500 kc-1.4 Osc. Coil T3 5, 6, T3 iron slug is the rear one on the
to 1.5 in.* iron slug 7, 9 left side. Adjust for peak.
26 1000 kc Antenna via 200 mmf STD For max. out- Cony. coil T6 5, 6, T6 iron slug is the center one on the
put iron slug 9 left side. Adjust for peak.
27 1000 kc Antenna via 200 mmf STD Do -riot change R -F coil Ti 5, 6, Ti iron slug is the front one on the
iron slug 9 left side. Adjust for peak.
28 580 kc Antenna via 200 mmf STD For max. out- Peak L8 5, 6, Peak L8 while rocking dial.
put 8
29 Repeat steps 22 to 28.
* Important! See Note 7.
**Use insulated hex wrench, ,c. 67
ALIGNMENT
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:
1. Test Oscillator with tone modulation. (See Table.) Notes in Connection with Alignment Wale
2. D -C Voltmeter or Microammeter. (See notes 2 and 3.) 1. Use unmodulated signal.
3. A -C Voltmeter, 2 volts. (See note 6.) 2. Connect 20,000 -ohm -per -volt meter from junction of
4. Insulated hex wrench, Yj'. (See steps 1, 10, 13.) R21 and C29 to chassis. Use ten -volt scale. (Steps 1-3.)
5. .01 MF Paper Capacitor. (See steps 1 to 5.) 3. Connect 20,000 -ohm -per -volt meter from grid pin 4 of
6S117 to chassis with a 200,000 -ohm resistor in series.
6. 400 -ohm, 3, -watt resistor. (See steps 16 to 21.) The resistor must be connected directly to the grid so
7. 200 mmf. mica capacitor. (See steps 22 to 28.) that capacity loading will be negligible and so that the
Important detailed instructions and references in connec- meter is isolated from the i-f signal voltage. Keep signal
tion with the alignment table which follows are keyed in by generator output down so that the meter indicates not
means of column 7, headed "See Note." The notes are in- more than one volt at the grid (5 micro -amperes through
cluded in numerical order after the table. They are important 200,000 ohms). (Alignment steps 4 to 6, 10, to 15).
-refer to them carefully. 4. Connect signal generator directly to the converter grid
at some convenient point. The generator lead must be
shielded up to this connection so that not more than
LOCATED ON BACA C54 A- inch of exposed lead exists. Ground the shield solidly
APRON OF CHASSIS mc by clamping it firmly to the chassis or a shield as close
to the connection as possible. (Steps 6-9.)
5. Use 400 -cycle modulation. (Steps 7 to 9, 16 to 28.)
6. Connect a standard output meter across speaker voice
CI3 6 014
4556C coil. Turn volume control fully on. Keep signal gener-
C24
ator output down so. that the meter indicates not more
10.7 than 1A -watt output (2 volts) during alignment. (Steps
0961 7 to 9, 16 to 28.)
6300
"" 80.c
7. If dial scale is not available, index pointer as follows:
LIO
Turn pointer to right-hand limit of travel. Mark the
©acmc dial back plate at a reference edge of the pointer slider.
456
Then set pointer by turning dial knob until the indicated
ieZO gc
C5T
e9B.. dimension exists between the reference edge and the
II BPAC 46NC mark.
8. "Rocking" consists of adjusting the indicated adjuster
C55
SC while turning the dial a small amount back and forth
AuTO STD
through peak output. The object is to find the maximum
00
CI
000414
C2
YI
peak. Rocking is necessary and is permissible only when
162.040
interlocking circuits are being adjusted.
BAND SWITCH 9. The main tunin% iron slugs are suspended from the left
C65
46MC
POSITIONS
side of the tuning "elevator." They are individually
adjustable by loosening the locknut and turning the sup-
porting screw into which the suspending wire is soldered.
LJ
VOLUME
LJ
BASS BANG ON -OFF TUNING
10. Two oscillator settings will give response. The higher
SWITCH TREBLE TONE frequency response point is the correct one; the other is
the image. If in doubt, start with the trimmer screw
Figure 7 --Location of Tubes and Adjusters loosened completely and adjust for the first response.
V10-6SC7 V4-6967 V5 -6S V7

-.7
0\ E -F90 6.3 A.C.
CATHODE +2.3 SCREEN +125
V6-6SH 7
7
I 06 30 6
7 8
..,0
PLATE +216 40567.
\ 5 4 /
05 PLATE +239 03 2 8
4 3
PLATE170 0 0 O 0
3.1 A.C. 6.3 A.G.
3.1A.C. SCREEN+95 SCREEN +57
(F.M. BAND ONLY)
L -J 6.3 A.C.
PLATE +114
THIS TUBE ON
PRE -AMP CHASSIS V3-6AK5 BOTTOM VIEW OF
CHASSIS SHOWN
PLATE 07 ...\\
+140 6 10
ALL VOLTAGES MEASURED
V9- 5Y3GT V7-6AQ 7GT
SCREEN
+140 4 3 2y TO CHASSIS USING A
0 20,000 OHM PER VOLT
6.3 A.C. 6.3 A. C.
METER
V2 -6AK 5
SCREEN
PLATE
+168
6.3 A.C. V8-6V6GT
VI - 6AG 5
SCREEN +247 6.3 A.C.
SCREEN 07 ...\\
+87 6 10
PLATE
+142 4 39 2, PLATE + 29
68 6.3 A.C.
Figure 8 -Socket Voltage Diagram CAT HODE+13
GENERAL jt ELECTRIC
SERVICE DATA
FOR
TELEVISION RECEIVER
MODEL 801
ELECTRICAL RATING: ANTENNA REQUIREMENTS:

Type . Folded Dipole
Frequency 50/60 cps 60 cps Impedance 300 ohms
Voltage 105-125 v. 105-125 v.
Wattage (Radio) 85 85
Wattage (Television) 215 215 CAUTION NOTICE
THE REGULAR 8+ VOLTAGES ARE DANGEROUS AND PRE-
CAUTIONS SHOULD BE OBSERVED WHEN THE CHASSIS IS RE-
R -F FREQUENCY RANGE: MOVED FROM THE CABINET FOR SERVICE PURPOSES. THE HIGH
Selector Switch Picture Sound VOLTAGE SUPPLY (8000 v.) AT THE PICTURE TUBE ANODE WILL
Position Freq. Range Carrier Carrier GIVE AN UNPLEASANT SHOCK BUT DOES NOT SUPPLY ENOUGH
540-1600 kc CURRENT TO GIVE A FATAL BURN OR SHOCK. HOWEVER,
Radio .
SECONDARY HUMAN REACTIONS TO OTHERWISE HARMLESS

No. 1 44- 50 mc 45.25 49.75
SHOCKS HAVE BEEN KNOWN TO CAUSE INJURY. SINCE THE
No. 2 54- 60 mc 55.25 59.75
60- 66 mc 61.25 65.75 HIGH VOLTAGE IS OBTAINED FROM THE B + VOLTAGE, CER-
No. 3 TAIN PORTIONS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATING CIRCUIT
No. 4 66- 72 mc 67.25 71.75
ARE DANGEROUS AND EXTREME PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE
No. 5 76- 82 mc 77.25 81.75
OBSERVED.
No. 6 82- 88 mc 83.25 87.75
THE PICTURE TUBE IS HIGHLY EVACUATED AND IF BROKEN,
No. 7 174- 180 mc 175.25 179.75
GLASS FRAGMENTS WILL BE VIOLENTLY EXPELLED. IF IT IS
No. 8 180- 186 mc 181.25 185.75
NECESSARY TO CHANGE THE PICTURE TUBE, USE SAFETY
No. 9 186- 192 mc 187.25 191.75
GOGGLES AND GLOVES.
No. 10 192- 198 mc 193.25 197.75
No. 11 198- 204 mc 199.25 203.75
No. 12 204- 210 mc 205.25 209.75
No. 13 210- 216 mc 211.25 215.75
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCIES:
Television Video (carrier freq. equivalent) 26.4 mc
The General Electric Model 801 television receiver is a
21.9 mc
console type, 24 tube instrument providing reception of all
Television Audio 13 commercial television channels and radio reception in the
Radio 455 kc standard broadcast band. The television picture is reproduced
AUDIO POWER OUTPUT:
on a 10 -inch electromagnetically deflected picture tube. All
3 watts electrical components are mounted on a single chassis, per-
Undistorted mitting optimum ease in adjustment and service.
Maximum 4 5 watts Features of this television receiver include a constant in-
TUBES: (24 Including rectifiers) put impedance r. -f amplifier, ion trap, safe high voltage
Type
power supply, automatic frequency control for horizontal
Symbol Purpose synchronization, ten -inch picture tube, and high fidelity FM
(V 1) Television R -F Amplifier 6AU6 audio system.
(V 2) Television Converter -Oscillator 7F8
(V 3) 1st Video I -F Amplifier 6AC7
(V 4) 2nd Video I -F Amplifier 6AC7 DESCRIPTION -TELEVISION CIRCUITS
(V 5) 3rd Video I -F Amplifier 6AC7 The television receiver circuits are divided into the follow-
(V 6) Video Detector -Bias Rectifier 6H6 ing sections:
(V 7) Video Amplifier 6AC7 1. R -f amplifier, converter and oscillator
(V 8) Picture Tube 10BP4 2. Video and audio i-f amplifier
(V 9) Clipper -Horizontal Sync. Ampli 6SN7GT 3. Video detector and amplifier
(V10) Horizontal Discr.-D-C Amplifier 6SL7GT 4.' Sync pulse clipper -amplifier
(V11) Horizontal Multivibrator 6SN7GT 5. Horizontal multivibrator and AFC sync.
(V12) Horizontal Output 807 6. Horizontal sweep output
(V13) High Voltage Rectifier 8016 7. Vertical multivibrator and sweep output
(V14) Horizontal Damping 6AS7G 8. High voltage power supply (H.V. supply)
(V15) Horiz, Discrim.-Vert. Sync. Amplifier 6SL7GT 9. Low voltage power supply (L.V. supply)
(V16) Vertical Multivibrator 6SN7GT A brief description of the operation of each section is de-
(V17) Vertical Output 6V6GT scribed in the following paragraphs. This is supplemented
(V18) Radio Converter 6SA7 by a comprehensive television training course in the publica-
(V19) 1st Audio I -F Amplifier 6SG7 tion, RSM-4-TV.
(V20) 2nd Audio I -F Amplifier 6SV7 A block diagram of the complete receiver is shown in
(V21) Audio Discrim.-Audio Amplifier 6AQ7GT Figure 1 to assist in signal tracing and to better visualize the
(V22) Audio Output 6V6GT operation of the receiver as a whole.
(V23) Low Voltage Rectifier 5V4Ga
(V24) Low Voltage Rectifier 5U4G I. R -F AMPLIFIER, CONVERTER & OSCILLATOR (Soft Figur* 2) -
a Changed to a Type 5Y3GT in late production receivers, The r -f amplifier makes use of a Type 6AU6 tube connected
at approximately serial No. 2000. as a triode grounded -grid amplifier. The antenna is connected
into the cathode circuit so as to provide a substantially
LOUDSPEAKER: constant input impedance of 300 ohms to the antenna at all
Type . Alnico "PM" Dynamic frequencies. With a 300 -ohm antenna and transmission line
Size 12 inches system, this coupling arrangement permits optimum transfer
Voice Coil Impedance (400 cycles) 3 2 ohms of signal from antenna to r -f amplifier for all 13 channels.
69
PICTURE SIZE:
Height 6 inches
Width 8 inches
ANTENNA
__ YI4fit &M.E1.1. _ C.R.T.
-F
ee*'
AMPLI. CONY, 'AD DET. AMPLI I n3T'
,
OSC
N.V.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SUPPLY
SYNC
CLIPPER A.F.0 AMPLI.
AMPLI.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
SYNC AMPLI
AMPLI. M.V.
AUDIO I -F AUDIO DETECTOR - OUTPUT
FM FM
AMPLI.
I -F DET.
DAET. I
Fig. 1. Block Diagram, Model 801
R101 is the normal bias resistor. A choke, LIC, is placed in 2. VIDEO AND AUDIO I -F AMPLIFIERS (So* Figure 3)-The
series with this cathode resistor to prevent the input im- video i-f amplifier makes use of a three -stage band-pass
pedance from being lowered by the shunting effect of the amplifier using three Type 6AC7 tubes. The transformers,
total stray capacity to ground of the cathode of the tube. Ti, T2, T3, and T4, are overcoupled and then loaded with
The choke value is changed with frequency. resistance, RL, to give an adequate (approx. 4 mc) band-pass
The r -f amplifier is coupled to the converter tube by a frequency characteristic. A third winding is added to each
wide band transformer consisting of windings Lp and Ls. video transformer and tuned to trap out the adjacent audio
and associated audio interference. The trap on T1 is tuned
RF C103 C104
CON V. to 27.9 mc to provide rejection of the adjacent channel audio
i-f, while the traps at T2, T3, and T4 are tuned to 21.9 mc
to provide rejection of the same channel audio.
VIDEO 1-F
AMPLI.
R104
ANTENNA
INPUT OSC.
COUPLED
R101 C105
C107
Cg
T22 LI4
CII2
tINDICATES SWITCHING
POINT
Fig. 2. 14 Amplifier, Converter 8, Oscillator
The windings are self -tuned by the distributed and tube

capacities to provide optimum gain. On channels No. 1 and Fig. 3. Video l Audio 114 Ampliflor
No. 2 the transformer is triple tuned to prevent the image The audio i-f frequency is developed by taking the 21.9 mc
frequencies of the 88-108 mc FM band from interfering signal from across the trap on T2 and applying it to the grid
with these two channels. The triode converter is one section of the audio i-f amplifier tube V19. The ground return side
of a Type 7F8 dual triode, V2A. Bias for this tube is of the trap is effectively connected to ground at 21.9 mc
provided by the oscillator voltage appearing in the grid of through the low impedance circuit offered by the capacitors
V2A causing grid rectification charging the grid resistor - C74 and C42. Since the audio channel of the television is
condenser combination, R104 and C104. frequency -modulated, the transformer T6 functions with the
The oscillator makes use of the remaining half of the Type diode sections of V21 as the discriminator.
7F8 tube, V2B, and is inductively coupled to the converter Bias voltage, derived by rectifying 6.3 volts a -c through the
grid by locating the oscillator grid coil, T22, on the same diode V6B, is applied to the grid circuits of the video i-f
coil form as the converter grid coil, Ls. The oscillator is a amplifier tubes, V3 and V4. A variable potentiometer con-
modified Colpits oscillator, oscillation being produced by the trast control, permits this voltage to be changed so as to
cathode -to -grid, Cg, and cathode -to -plate, Ck, interelectrode vary the gain of the i-f amplifier.
capacities of the oscillator tube. The choke Lt provides a d -c
ground to the cathode of the oscillator but maintains the 3. VIDEO DETECTOR AND AMPLIFIER (See Figure 4)-The video
cathode off -ground at the r -f frequencies. The oscillator i-f amplifier output is applied to a diode rectifier, V6, and
operates on the high frequency side of the r -f signal on all the diode load, R14, is connected so as to develop a negative -
bands. going signal voltage at this point. The signal is amplified by
The r -f amplifier, converter and oscillator is constructed tube V7 and then applied directly to the cathode of the pic-
as a complete unit sub -assembly which can readily be de- ture tube, V8. This provides direct coupling so that d -c re-
mounted from the main chassis. insertion is unnecessary. The chokes L5 and L3 are series
peaking chokes, while L4 is a shunt peaking choke. These are
used to obtain good high frequency response. Li also pre-
70 vents harmonics of the i-f frequency from being passed

through the video amplifier. R16 is the V7 tube plate load
resis
speed, permitting a synchronizing system which is relatively
V6 V7 it V8 free from random noise triggering. The Horizontal Hold
control, R36, controls the speed of the multivibrator, per-
T4 L5 mitting the free -running speed of it to be set near the correct
frequency during the time when no sync pulses are available.
RI4 6. HORIZONTAL SWOS OUTPUT (See Figure 6)-The horizontal
sawtooth voltage generated by the multivibrator, V11, is
To
shaped and then amplified by a Type 807 tube, V12. The
Cl lapel'
415 v* output of this tube is coupled to the horizontal deflection
yoke through an impedance matching transformer, T9. An
R16
70-155v* oscillatory voltage, as shown in the dotted line in the wave
shape at the upper left of Figure 6, which results from the
rapid retrace in transformer T9, is removed by the damping
*VOLTAGE VALUES ARE APPROX. FOR NO SIGNAL INPUT tube, V14. This tube is a triode Type 6AS7 and by its use the
Fig. 4. Video Detector & Antpillier
transient may be dampened, linearity controlled and the
positive overshoot voltage retained for use in the high voltage
supply. The linearity of the horizontal trace is controlled by
With the cathode of V8 coupled directly into the plate varying the voltage wave shape applied to the grid of V14 by
circuit of V7, it is necessary to apply a variable positive volt- potentiometer R49. The horizontal size is varied by the
age to the control grid of the picture tube in order to control adjustable iron core inductance, L7, which is in series with
the beam current and, therefore, the brightness of the picture. the output to the yoke.
In late production receivers where the rectifier V23 is a
Type 5Y3G tube, the cathode and control grid voltages of
V8 will be approximately 25 volts less.
4. CLIPPER AND SYNC AMPURER-The triode section, V9A, of
a Type 6SN7GT tube is used to separate the sync pulses
from the video signal taken off at the load resistor, R16,
see Figure 4. This is accomplished by applying very low plate
voltage to V9A,. then the resulting grid rectification causes
negative bias to be developed at the grid of V9A so that
conduction occurs only during the sync pulse intervals which
are the most positive component of the video signal.
Tube V9B is a horizontal synchronizing amplifier which
rejects the vertical pulse at the transformer, V, by virtue
of its low inductance to the vertical synchronizing pulse.
The cathode impedance is required to raise the control grid
to a positive voltage with respect to chassis for proper
operation of V15B. The tube V15B is operated as a cathode
follower vertical synchronizing amplifier. Integration of the
vertical signal is provided in both the grid and cathode cir-
cuits.
5. HORIZONTAL MULTI VIBRATOR AND AFC SYNC (See Figure 5)-
The horizontal sawtooth oscillator makes use of a -Type Fig. 6. Horizontal Sweep Output
6SN7GT tube, V11, in a conventional cathode -coupled
multivibrator circuit. Instead of its frequency being con- 7. VERTICAL MULTIVIBRATOR AND SWEEP OUTPUT (Soo Figure 7)-
trolled directly by the horizontal sync pulses, it is controlled The vertical sawtooth voltage is generated by a Type 6SN7-
by a d -c voltage on its grid, which is the resultant of the GT tube, V16, connected as a multivibrator. This voltage is
phase error between the incoming sync signal and a saw - coupled directly to a Type 6V6G vertical sweep output tube,
tooth voltage derived from the output of the horizontal sweep V17, and then to the vertical sweep yoke through the im-
amplifier. This voltage is called an automatic frequency pedance matching transformer, T8. Vertical speed is con-
control (AFC) voltage. trolled by changing the time constant of the multivibrator
The AFC voltage is developed by the diode -connected grid circuit by the potentiometer, R62. Sweep size is changed
triodes V1OA and VISA by mixing the horizontal sync pulse by the potentiometer, R61, which changes the B+ voltage
at the secondary of transformer T7 with a sawtooth wave- applied to the charging network of tube V16 simultaneously
form derived at the output of the sweep amplifier. When the with the screen voltage on tube V17. Vertical linearity is
sync pulse occurs at the time "a" shown in the sawtooth controlled by feeding back voltage through C37 from the
waveform drawing in Figure 5, no voltage will be developed cathode to grid of the output tube. The amount of the voltage
at the output of the filter. However if the multivibrator runs is varied by the variable cathode resistor, R58.
faster or slower so that the pulse falls at a point other than
at "a," a positive or negative voltage will appear at the filter, S. HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY (Se* Figure 6)-The high voltage is
which will be amplified by the d -c amplifier V1OB and then derived by making use of the inductive "kick" voltage pro-
duced during retrace in the horizontal output transformer
B
R61
R64
R60 2 C22c T8
V16 MIS
S nc. VI7 CIvERT.
Input NA G36 e R63

SWEEP
YOKE
C37 R58
R67
Fig. 5. Horizontal M.V. & Sync Circuit C22d
R62 R57
applied to the grid of the multivibrator. This change in d -c
voltage on the grid of the multivibrator will cause it to speed
up or slow down so as to cause the sawtooth wave to com-
bine with the incoming sync pulses until the correction volt-
age becomes zero. With the filter, consisting of C92, R32, Fig. 7. Vertical Sweep Output
and C30, the change is relatively slow in controlling the
71
This "kick" voltage is shown in the wave shape shown as a -b (b) Use a 200 mmf mica capacitor or standard RMA
in Figure 6. This voltage is generated in the primary winding dummy between the high side of the signal generator and the
and is further increased by an additional winding added to signal input point, as indicated in the Alignment Table.
the transformer which connects to the rectifier tube plate of 2. Broadcast R -F Alignment -Apply signal generator input
V13. The rectifier tube, V13, is a Type 8016 which derives to one of dipole input terminals through a 200 mmf mica
its filament voltage from the horizontal sweep transformer capacitor as in (1) above. An output meter may be used in
T9 by a single turn around the transformer. Because of the place of the oscilloscope for indicating output. First adjust
high frequency which is rectified, a 500 mmf capacitor is oscillator trimmer by tuning gang condenser to minimum
more than sufficient for filtering purposes. capacity and aligning oscillator trimmer for maximum with a
1620 kc input signal. Next with 1500 kc input signal, tune
9. LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY -Two rectifiers are used to in signal, set pointer to 1500 kc calibration then align r -f
supply the required plate current for the television and radio trimmer for maximum output.
receiver. A Type 5U4G tube, V24, supplies the bulk of the 3. Video 1-F Trap Alignment -The video i-f traps are used
current and makes use of combination inductive and resistance to attenuate the sound i-f of the same and adjacent channels
type filter. A Type 5V4G or 5Y3G tube, V23, is used to from being detected and reproduced as sound bar interference
supply higher voltage to the horizontal output, horizontal on the picture tube. Misalignment of these traps results in
multivibrator, and the cathode ray tube 1st anode. This is the interference pattern, as shown in Figure 31.
followed by a choke filter. All filament supply leads except Set the contrast control about half -way up. Turn the
for tubes V19, V20, V21, V22 and the rectifier filaments Station Selector to channel 13. Connect the oscilloscope
pass through the band switch so that tubes may be switched through a 10,000 -ohm resistor, to the top of the 3300 -ohm
ON or OFF when switching from radio to television. video load resistor, R16.
Connect the output of an accurately calibrated signal
CIRCUIT ALIGNMENT generator with tone modulation to the grid of the converter
tube, V2A, through a 200 mmf mica capacitor. The alignment
GENERAL -A complete alignment of the Model 801 television frequencies are:
receiver consists of the following individual alignment pro- Ti (C10)-27.9 mc
cedures. These are listed below in the correct sequence of T2 (C13)-21.9 mc
alignment. However, any one alignment may be performed T3 (C16)-21.9 mc
without the necessity of realignment of any one of the other T4 (C19)-21.9 mc
sectional alignments. The trimmers should be aligned for minimum output, care
1. Broadcast i-f amplifier being taken to get the lowest possible indication at the output.
2. Broadcast r -f amplifier The input signal should be attenuated below saturation of
3. Television i-f traps the i-f amplifier tubes at start, then raised as signal is at-
4. Television sound i-f amplifier tenuated during alignment.
5. Video i-f amplifier 4. Television Sound 1-F Alignment -Since the television
6. Oscillator adjustments sound i-f amplifier transformer is slightly overcoupled,
7. Television r -f amplifier alignment by a sweep generator is recommended. Connect
The alignment procedure is in table form on pages 8 through the generator through a 200 mmf capacitor to grid (4) of V3.
11. The following paragraphs are importaht suggestions to be For alignment, connect the oscilloscope through a 100,000
followed when attempting alignment and should be read ohm isolating resistor across capacitor C49.
thoroughly before alignment is attempted. For step 1, insert a 21.9 mc marker signal from an un-
TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS -To provide the over-all align- modulated signal generator into the same point of input as
ment as outlined above, the following test equipment is the sweep generator. This input from the signal generator
required. should be very loosely coupled by clipping the signal gen-
I. Cathode Ray Oscilloscope -This scope should preferably erator through insulation to the grid (4) of V3.
have a 5 -inch screen and should preferably have good high Keep the input of the sweep generator low enough so that
frequency response, which will be useful in making waveform the sound i-f amplifier does not overload. Check by increasing
voltage measurements on pages 20 and 21. the output of the sweep; the response curve on the scope
2. Signal Generator -This signal generator must have good should increase in size proportionally. Set Contrast Control
frequency stability and be accurately calibrated. It should be to half -advanced position.
capable of covering the following frequency ranges with tone The response curve of the amplifier at the grid return of
modulation where desired. V20 should appear as in Figure 8A.
(a) 455 kc for broadcast For discriminator alignment the secondary trimmer, C78,
(b) 550-1600 kc for broadcast of T6 is aligned by using a tone modulated 21.9 mc signal and
(c) 21.9 mc for video i-f trap listening to the tone at the loudspeaker. The trimmer is
(d) 27.9 mc for video i-f trap adjusted for minimum tone signal output. If the sweep is used
(e) 23.0 mc for video i-f marker for the secondary trimmer alignment, the cross -over should be
(f) 25.65 mc for video i-f marker symmetrical about a 21.9 mc marker and should be a straight
(g) 26.4 mc for video i-f marker line between the alternate peaks, as shown in Figure 8B.
(h) 44-110 mc and 174-238 mc for oscillator adjustment Reconnect oscilloscope across the top of the volume control.
and markers for the r -f channel bandwidth measure-
ments.
3. R -F Sweep Generator -This should give approximately
0.1 -volt output with adjustable attenuation of the output. Fig. 8. T -V Audio
The output should be flat over wide frequency variations. The I -F Curves
frequency coverage should be:
(a) 20 to 30 mc, with 10 mc sweep width
(b) 40 to 90 mc, with 25 mc sweep width
(c) 170 to 220 mc, with 25 mc sweep width
4. Output Meter -An output meter with a voltage range
0-2,5 volts a -c.
AUGNMENT SUGGESTIONS -With the exception of the broad- With the same sweep input as in step 1, adjust the primary
cast i-f and r -f trimmers and the FM sound i-f discriminator trimmer, C84, of T6 for maximum peak -to -peak amplitude
trimmers, all alignment adjustments are performed from the of the positive and negative peaks as shown in Figure 8B.
underside of the chassis. Remove the chassis from the cabinet 5. Video I -F Alignment -The video i-f amplifier uses trans-
and turn it on its side with the power transformer down. formers which are coupled and loaded to give the proper
This is the only safe position in which the chassis will rest band-pass characteristic. Before attempting alignment of the
and leave all adjustments accessible. The following sugges- video i-f, the sound i-f traps should be aligned as in (31, then
tions apply to each individual alignment procedure. do not touch these trimmers when making the video i-f
1. Broadcast 1-F Alignment -(a) Although the oscilloscope alignment.
is recommended in the table for indicating the output voltage Stage -by -stage alignment should be performed so as to
during alignment, an output meter may be connected across duplicate the curves, as shown in Figures 9A, B, C, and D.
the speaker voice coil as an alternate output indicating device. The markers are used to establish the correct bandwidth and
When this is used, the volume control should be set for frequency limits.
maximum volume and then attenuate the signal generator The trap formed by L20 and C89 in the cathode of V4 is
output so as not to cause audio overload. used to reduce the overshoot of the 21.9 mc traps. Adjust the
spacing of turns comprising L20 by either pushing them to-
72 gether or separating them so as to give a minimum amplitude

to the overshoot.
23.0 M.C.
necessary that the curve be adjusted for maximum amplitude
consistent with correct band width. To provide these mini-
26.4 MG mum requirements, the r -f coils are overcoupled in a very
ADJUST similar manner to the video i-f transformers. However,
OVERSHOOT
FOR MIN. instead of adjusting capacity to tune the coils, the inductance
70 % is varied by moving a few turns. Coupling is also adjustable
by moving the entire coil either away from or toward the
I. O21.914.C.
adjacent coil on the form.
The physical assembly of the coils in the band switch
locates the r -f amplifier plate coil at the rear of the switch
and the oscillator coil towards the front end. Two types of
coils are used-the Channel No. 1 and No. 2 coils have an
25.25M4- additional link circuit between the grid and plate coils to
provide better image rejection of the FM band (88 to 108 mc)
26.4 M.C. signals on these two channels. These links are tuned by means
211.4
22.4 M.C.
of two copper rings which are moved along the coil forms for
adjustments.
The input sweep signal is applied to the antenna terminal
board at the r -f unit. The 300 -ohm cable between the antenna
terminal board and r -f amplifier input must be disconnected
at the r -f unit when making r -f alignment. The marker signal
Fig. 9. Video I -F Alignment C
Connect the sweep generator to the tube grid preceding the

transformer to be aligned. Adjust the sweep width for a PLATE
minimum of 10 mc about the center frequency of the video COUPLING LINN
i-f. The marker frequencies are supplied by a signal generator
and sufficient marker signal may be supplied in most cases
by merely connecting the high side of the signal generator to
the television chassis.
The primary of the transformer preceding the grid where
the signal is applied will act as a trap putting a hole in the COPPER ADJ. RINGS GRID
alignment curves as viewed on the scope unless it is short
circuited or detuned. It may be detuned readily by connect-
ing a 100 to 200 mmf capacitor across the primary trimmer or CHANNELS' I al CHANNELS .3 2.6
place a temporary short circuit across the primary trimmer.
Be sure to remove this capacitor after the stage is aligned. Fig. 10. R -F Coil Assembly
Keep the input of the sweep generator low so as not to
overload the video i-f amplifier.
The response curves shown are obtained on an oscilloscope generator may be coupled loosely to the antenna input ter-
at the junction of L4 and R16. Use a 10,000 resistor in series minals.
with the input lead to the oscilloscope. The output r -f response curve is taken off at the junction
The contrast control should be advanced approximately to of R1 and Cl. The Contrast Control should be set for mini-
its half -advanced position. mum for all r -f alignment.
The Selector Switch should be turned to radio position and For channels No. 1 and No. 2, the r -f coil should be aligned
a temporary jumper put across filament switch wafer so to give approximately the curve shown in Figure 11A. The
as to keep the television tube filaments lit while in this radio high frequency end of curve (at S marker) may be peaked
position. If a television position is used, the i-f curve will be slightly higher than the low frequency end of curve, but the
affected by the interaction from the r -f coil in the converter 'ow frequency end should never be aligned with more ampli-
tube grid. NOTE-When jumper is used, remove B+ from tude than the high frequency end. The markers should be
r -f assembly by disconnecting external lead to terminal (2) located on the inside of the humps of the curves, the video
of r -f assembly, see Fig. 12. marker (P) preferably being inside slightly farther than the
6. Oscillator Adjustment-The oscillator coil must be ad- sound marker (S). Adjustment of the bandwidth is made
justed so that the Television Tuning Condenser, C112, will by moving the plate coil closer to the grid coil or vice -versa.
tune the sound carrier of the television signal at the middle In most cases the sliding of the copper rings will give both
of its range. Set the condenser, C112, to mid -position. Then the required bandwidth and frequency adjustment. Spread
adjust oscillator coil for channels No. 1 through No. 6 b3
spreading turns to raise frequency or compressing turns tc
lower frequency. For channels No. 7 through No. 13, the
oscillator coil consists of a single turn. Adjust these coils by
spreading the gap to lower frequency or closing the gap to
raise frequency in the leads of the coil which run to the
terminals.
Apply the signal generator with tone modulation to the
antenna input terminals and set the generator to the sound
carrier frequency for the channel under alignment. The signal CHANNELS CHANNELS CHANNELS
generator must be very accurately calibrated. This can be a'a r6 7-`13
done by beating its output against a known channel carrier LEGEND P. VIDEO CARRIER
or use a station operating on the channel and tune in the sound. 5 SOUND CARRIER
For output indication, advance the volume control about
to mid -position so that the tone modulation or audio modula- Fig. 11. R -F Alignment Curves
tion on the channel station may be heard through the loud- or squeeze turns in plate and grid coils if the frequency can-
speaker. not be obtained by sliding the rings. Spreading turns results
The oscillator coil is located on the coil form or assembly in a raising of the frequency; while squeezing turns lowers the
nearest to the front of the switch assembly and is wound of frequency.
heavier wire than the other coils. This is shown in Figure 10. For the remainder of the channels, the adjustment of the
7. R -F Coil Alignment-The r -f coil assembly is designed plate coil in relation to the grid coil changes the bandwidth
for stable, band-pass operation and under normal conditions while the spreading or squeezing of the plate and grid coil
will seldom require adjustment. In cases where it is definitely turns results in the raising or lowering of frequency. Only
known that alignment is necessary (such as when the present when the plate and grid coils are tuned to the same frequency
coil is damaged and has been changed), do not attempt the will the amplitude be greatest with the correct bandwidth.
adjustment unless suitable equipment is available. When The outside peaks of the r -f response curve should be aligned
tubes V1 or V2 are changed, alignment of r -f and oscillator to the carrier markers. In general it is desirable to have a
may be necessary. slight rise on the high frequency (sound carrier) side of the
The minimum requirements for correct r -f alignment is to curve, however the rise should not exceed approximately 30
provide the correct band width, and for the response curve
to be centered within the limit frequencies shown for each
of the individual bands, as shown in Figure 11. It is also
73
per cent of the low frequency side. A low frequency rise in the TO GREEN LEAD OF
response curve is not desirable and must be avoided, as a POWER TRANSFORMER,TI4 LIB
SIB
SIA
picture with poor definition will result if this is done. DE so. ,wilEIED14)..
The upper channel coils (No. 11, No. 12, and No. 13) may $,a-orot..F.A
have the plate winding reversed from the winding direction TO VI -V17
of the plate coil of the other transformers. If this is the case,

the bandwidth will be increased by separating the plate
and grid coils and vice -versa. This condition can be deter-
mined by inspection or by the effect on the curve when mak TO R43
ing the alignment. TO C22
TO C4I
TO 0
TO R78
TO R70 0
tr.
L19 T20 T21
* TERMINAL 0 NOT USED ON EARLY PRODUCTION RECEIVERS
FIg. 12. R -F Coil & Switch Assembly
A. C. RECEPTACLE
VERTICAL
LINEASI TY
VfiR71S,C1.1),L
R61
VERTICAL
62
HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL
HOLDWIDTHLINEARITY
R36 L7 j R49
ION TRAP COVER

REMOVED
V23 V10
5Y 3 GT
SV4G)
6SL7GT rJUSTMENT
T 14
POWER TRANSFORMER
FOCUS COIL
CENTERING ADJUSTMENT VII
V9 VI5 SCREWS 14) 6SN7GT
6SN7GT 6 SL7GT
VI2
807
(613G6G1
TS
V16 L9
6VEGT BAUDIO 6SN7GT DEFLECTION YOKE
IE TRANS.
T9
V21 HORIZONTAL OUTPUT
TRANSFORMER
AO7GT C22A13C 0 VI7
ELEC. 6V6GT
713
BROILS T HIGH VOLTAGE

ANODE CONNECTION
IF TTANS
V8
C67 B C67A IOBP4
OSC SE NE SECT' PICTURE TUBE
0
PICTURE TUBE MOUNTING STRAP

AIR TRIMME
O 0112
VOLUME/ RADIO TELEVISION STATION CUS CONTRAST-' BRIGHTNESS

R694
ft, OFF TONE
TUNING
- TUNING
0112
SELECTOR
SI
R88 R84A 61348
R698-52
-1
Fig. 13. Component Location, Top View of Chassis
74
LI
VIO
FILTER
V23 CHOKE T14
POWER TRANS.
6SL7GT
SY3GT 00
MR. SYN
T7
VIS V9 V7 0
TRANS
6SL7GT 6SN7G7 6AC7
L2
FILTER
CHOKE
V16 V2 2
6SN7GT 6AC7 J 73 6V6GT

3RD VIDEO
I -F
T6 V21
T8 VI7 OISCR,
VERTICAL SWEEP / TRANS.
TRANS. 6SG7 6A075
6V6GT
T13
T2 2ND 1ST BC
I -F
VIDEO I -F
TIO
AUDIO
V8 OUTPUT
108P4 71
TRANS.
VIDEO I -F
ICIBP4
6SA7
COATING
GROUND STRAP
R -F SWITCH
ASSEMBLY
B -G ANT
TRANS.
Re4A
Fig. 14. Component Location, Bottom View of Chassis
554
Fig. 16. Television Tuning, Drive Stringing
Fig. 1.5. Radio Tuning, Dial Drive Stringing
75
ALIGNMENT TABLE
Before attempting the following tabular alignment procedure, read the preceding section "ALIGNMENT SUGGESTIONS"
SIGNAL SWEEP
STEP GENERA- GENERA- SIGNAL CONNECT STATION
OSCILLO- SELECTOR DIAL
TOR TOR INPUT SCOPE TO SET- ADJUST REMARKS
NO. FRE- FRE- POINT CHASSIS & SWITCH TING
QUENCY QUENCY
(1) BROADCAST I -F ALIGN/RENT
1 455 kc Not Used Grid (4) Junction C41 Radio 550 kc C75 & C76
with tone of V19 & R69A for max.
modulation thru output
200 mmf
2 455 kc Not Used Grid (5) Junction C41 Radio 550 kc C73 & C74
with tone of V18 & R69A for max.
200 mmf
(2) BROADCAST R -F ALIGNMENT
1 1500 kc Not Used Ant. Junction C41 Radio C67B osc. a Tune gang condenser to
with tone terminal & R69A trimmer for minimum capacity setting.
modulation thru maximum
200 mmf output
2 1500 kc Not Used Ant. Junction C41 Radio ' 1500 kc** C67A r -f ** If pointer does not fall on
with tone terminals & R69A trimmer for the 1500 kc calibration when
modulation thru maximum 1500 kc signal is tuned in,
200 mmf output slip pointer drum on dial
cord until it does.
(3) TELEVISION I -F TRAP ALIGNMENT
1 21.9 mc
with tone
Not Used Grid (8)
of V2A
Junction L4 Channel #13
& R16
- C19 on T4 Connect 10,000 ohms in
for minimum series with oscilloscope input
modulation thru output lead.
200 mmf
2 21.9 mc
with tone
Not Used Grid (8) Junction L4
of V2A & R16
Channel #13 - C16 on T3
for minimum
200 mmf
3 21.9 mc
with tone
Not Used Grid (8) Junction L4
of V2A & R16
for minimum
200 mmf
4 27.9 mc
with tone
Not Used Grid (8)
of V2A
Junction L4
& R16
for minimum
200 mmf
(4) TELEVISION SOUND I -F AMPLIFIER ALIGNMENT
1 21.9 mc 21.9 mc Grid (4)

unmodulated with 2 mc of V3
Junction of
R77 & C49
Channel #13 - C79 & C80
for max.
Detune C84 on T6; then ad-
just trimmers C79 and C80.
sweep width amplitude Adjust for max. amplitude
and symme- and symmetry about 21.9
try at 21.9 mc marker as shown in Fig.
mc 8A.
2.6, 21.9 mc
with tone
Not Used Grid (4)
of V3
Channel #13 - C78 for mini- With volume control half -
mum tone way up and speaker con -
modulation output nected, adjust C78 for mini-
mum tone output.
3 Not Used 21.9 mc Grid (4)
with 2 me of V3
Junction of
C41 and
Channel #13 - C84 for max. Peak trimmer so that the
peak to peak positive and negative peaks
sweep width R69A amplitude have max. peak to peak
amplitude. See Fig. 8B.
-.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3.
76
ALIGNMENT TABLE (CONT'D)
SIGNAL SWEEP CONNECT STATION DIAL

GENERA- GENERA- SIGNAL OSCILLO - SELECTOR SET- ADJUST REMARKS
STEP TOR TOR INPUT SCOPE TO TING
NO. FRE- FRE- POINT CHASMS es SWITCH
QUENCY QUENCY
(5) VIDIO 1-F AMPLIFIER ALIONMINT
1 23.0 mc & 20-30 mc Grid (4)

of VS
Junction of
L4 and R16
Channel #13 - C17 and C18 Shunt C14, T3 primary trim -
for max. mer with a 100 mmf capaci-
26.4 mc sweep amplitude, tor. See Fig. 9A.
marker bandwidth,
and correct
positioning
of markers.
Junction of Channel #13 C14 and C15 Remove 100 mmf capacitor
2 23.0 mc & 20-30 mc Grid (4) for max. from C14, and shunt C11, T2
26.4 mc sweep of V4 L4 and R16 amplitude, primary trimmer, with it.
marker bandwidth, See Fig. 9B.
and correct
positioning
of markers.
3 23.0 mc & 20-30 mc Grid (4) Junction of Channel #13 - Adjust L20 See Fig. 9B. Either spread or
for minimum squeeze turns together to
26.4 mc sweep of V4 L4 and R16 overshoot give minimum amplitude of
marker overshoot.
4 23.0 mc & 20-30 mc Grid (4) Junction of

L4 and R16
Channel #13 - C11 and C12
for max.
Remove 100 mmf capacitor
from C11 and shunt C8, T1
26.4 mc sweep of V3 amplitude, primary trimmer, with it.
bandwidth, See Fig. 9C.
and correct
position of
markers
5 23.0 mc & 20-30 mc Grid (4) Junction of

L4 and R16
Channel #13 - Readjust L20 See Fig. 9 C. Repeat pro -
for minimum cedure as in step 3, except
26.4 mc sweep of V3 overshoot for point of signal input.
6 23.0 mc, 20-30 mc Grid (8) Junction of Radios

L4 and R16
- C8 and C9
for max.
Remove 100 mmf. capacitor
from C8. See Fig. 9D.
26.4 mc, & sweep of V2A amplitude,
25.65 mc bandwidth, * Jump filament wafer
and correct switch with clip lead so that
tube filaments will be lit. Re -
position of
markers move 8+ from r -f assembly.
(6) OSCILLATOR COIL ADJUSTMENT
I 49.75 mc - Antenna - Channel #1 - Turns of osc. Make sure that C112 is at

coil, T20. mid -position of travel. Use
with tone terminals sound output as indicator.
2
modulation
59.75 mc - Antenna - Channel #2 - Turns of osc. Same as for Step #1.
coil, T21.
with tone terminals
3
modulation
65.75 mc - Antenna Channel #3 - Turns of osc. Same as for Step #1.
coil, T22.
with tone terminals
4
modulation
71.75 mc - Antenna - Channel #4 - Turns of osc. Same as for Step #1.
coil, T23.
with tone terminals
5
modulation
81.75 mc - Antenna Channel #5 - Turns of osc. Same as for Step' #1.
coil, T24.
with tone terminals
6
modulation
87.75 mc - Antenna Channel #6 - Turns of osc. Same as for Step #1.
coil, T25.
with tone terminals
7
modulation
179.75 mc - Antenna - Channel #7 - Lead gap of
oscillator
Same as for Step #1.
with tone terminals
modulation
coil, T26.
77
SIGNAL SWEEP
STEP GENERA- GENERA- SIGNAL CONNECT STATION DIAL
NO. TOR TOR INPUT OSCILLO -
CS OPE TO SELECTOR SET- ADJUST REMARKS
FRE- FRE- POINT CHASSIS & SWITCH TING
QUENCY QUENCY
(4) OSCILLATOR COIL ADJUSTMENT (Cent'd)
8 185.75 mc
with tone
- Antenna
terminals
- Channel #8 - Lead gap of Same as for Step #1.
oscillator
modulation coil, T27.
9 191.75 mc
with tone
- Antenna
terminals
oscillator
10 197.75 mc
with tone
- Antenna
terminals
oscillator
11 203.75 mc
with tone
- Antenna
terminals
Channel #11 - Lead gap of Same as for Step
oscillator
#1
modulation coil, T30

12 209.75 me
with tone
Antenna
terminals
- Channel #12 - Lead gap of
oscillator
Same as for Step #1

13 215.75 mc
with tone
- Antenna
terminals
- Channel #13 - Lead gap of
oscillator
Same as for Step #1
(7) 1-1, COIL ALIGNMINT
I Markers
45.25 mc &
Channel #1 Antenna Junction RI Channel
with 25 mc terminals and CI
#1 - For max.
amplitude
See Fig. 11A for resultant
alignment curve.
49.75 mc sweep at r -f and for
amplifier recommended
response
2 Markers
55.25 mc &
Channel #2 Antenna Junction RI Channel
#2 - For max.
amplitude
See Fig. IIA for resultant
alignment curve.
response
3 Markers
61.25 mc &
Channel #3 Antenna Junction RI Channel #3
with 25 mc terminals and Cl
- For max.
amplitude
See Fig. 11B.
response
4 Markers
67.25 mc &
Channel #4 Antenna Junction RI Channel #4
- For max.
amplitude
See Fig. IIB for resultant
alignment curve.
response
5 Markers
77.25 mc &
Channel #5 Antenna Junction R1
with 25 mc terminals and Cl
Channel #5 - For max.
amplitude
See Fig. 11B for resultant
alignment curve.
response
6 Markers
83.25 mc &
Channel #6 Antenna Junction R1 Channel #6
- For max.
amplitude
See Fig. 11B for resultant
alignment curve.
response
7 Markers Channel #7 Antenna Junction RI Channel
175.25 mc & with 25 mc terminals and CI
#7 - For max.
amplitude
See Fig. 11C for resultant
alignment curve.
78 response
SIGNAL SWEEP
STEP GENERA- GENERA- SIGNAL CONNECT
OSCILLO- STATION DIAL
NO. TOR TOR INPUT SCOPE SELECTOR SET- AD JUST REMARKS
FRE- FRE- POI NT CHASSISTO
& SWITCH TING
QUENCY QUENCY
(7) R -F COIL ALIGNMENT (Cont'd)
8 Markers Channel #8 Antenna Junction RI Channel #8 For max. See Fig. 11C for resultant
181.25 mc & with 25 mc terminals and Cl amplitude alignment curve.
response
9 Markers Channel #9 Antenna Junction RI Channel #9 For max. See Fig. 11C for resultant
187.25 mc & with 25 mc terminals and CI amplitude alignment curve.
response
10 Markers Channel #10 Antenna Junction 121 Channel #10 For max. See Fig. 11C for resultant
193.25 mc & with 25 mc terminals and Cl amplitude alignment curve.
response
11 Markers Channel Antenna Junction RI Channel #11 For max. See Fig. 11C for resultant
199.25 mc & #I1 with terminals and Cl amplitude alignment curve.
203.75 mc 25 mc sweep at r -f and for
response
12 Markers Channel Antenna Junction RI Channel #12 For max. See Fig. 11C for resultant
205.25 mc & #12 with terminals and CI amplitude alignment curve.
209.75 mc 25 mc sweep at r -f and for
response
13 Markers Channel Antenna Junction RI Channel #13 For max.
211.25 mc & #13 with terminals and Cl amplitude See Fig. 11C for resultant
215.75 mc 25 mc sweep at r -f and for alignment curve.
response
MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION AND SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS
REPLACEMENT OF PICTURE TUBE NOTE-Some ion traps have been magnetized so that it is
To remove the picture tube from the television chassis, necessary to rotate the small magnet at 180 degrees to this
remove the picture tube socket and then untape and slide normal position. Then slide the assembly onto the picture
off the ion trap adjustment assembly. The ion trap can be tube neck so that the ion trap assembly slit is at the bottom
removed readily, if the gap in the assembly is pulled apart or top (dependent upon picture tube) and lines up with pin
slightly with the fingers while attempting to slide it. Loosen #12 or #6. Slide the assembly forward on the picture tube
the two set screws partially that clamp the left side of the until it is about the position shown in the illustration. NOTE
picture tube mounting strap, then slide the strap backward --'LThe wider of the two magnets should be located at the rear
from the top -front rim of the picture tube until the rim of or the base end of the picture tube rile final following steps
the tube is free from the strap. Carefully pull the tube out should be taken with the television receiver operating:
through the focus and deflection coils. 1. With Brilliance control advanced, turn ion trap
To replace a picture tube the reverse procedure should be assembly so that gap in rubber holder is faced up or down and
followed, being careful never to force the picture tube if it lines up with either pin #6 or pin #12. Whichever way gives
sticks or fails to slip into place readily. Investigate and remove some illumination, is the correct approximate orientation of
the source of the trouble. The picture tube should be oriented assembly. If the tube V16 is removed, it will be found much
so that the anode cap is adjacent to the H.V. rectifier, V13, easier to adjust for maximum illumination since the resultant
and the high voltage lead. thin line will illuminate even though the magnets are consider.
Wipe the screen surface of the tube to remove finger marks ably out of adjustment.
and dust. PRECAUTION-Do not handle, remove, or install 2. Move assembly back and forth and rotating it while
a picture tube unless shatterproof goggles and heavy gloves viewing screen, adjust for maximum brightness.
are worn. 3. If illuminated area gets very bright, reduce brightness
with control and repeat step 2. If tube V16 was removed as
ION TRAP ADJUSTMENT suggested in Step 1, replace it before proceeding with step 4.
4. If any shadowing of the tube neck is present after com-
The ion trap may be approximately located as shown in pleting step 3, rotate the small (front) magnet to correct
Figure 17; however its final adjustment must be made with shadow and repeat step 2 and 3. NOTE-Badly out -of -line
the television receiver operating. focus coils can also cause neck shadowing. The focus coil
The approximate adjustment requires that the gaps in the should be symmetrical and straight before starting the ion
two magnets be lined up with the break in the rubber holder. trap adjustment.
79
CENTERING (FOCUS COIL) ADJUSTMENT Minor Adjustments-If the receiver does not have the tuned
The four focus coil adjustment screws should all be tightened
circuit consisting of L21 and C91 in the cathode of the
sufficiently so that the springs are always under tension. Too horizontal multivibrator, Vii, the horizontal hold control,
loose pressure on the springs will result in the picture centering
R36, should be adjusted until the above checks can be satis-
being unstable. These adjustments are not readily available factorily accomplished. If attempted adjustment of the hold
with the back cover in place unless a long screwdriver is used. control will not permit all the above checks to be met when
Since each screw adjustment reacts in both the horizontal the tuned circuit is incorporated, then make the adjustment
and vertical directions, a maladjustment in the centering as outlined under "Complete Realignment."
may have to be corrected by the adjustment of one to four Complete Realignment-Tune in a television signal for
optimum sound and adjust for normal contrast.
screws.
1. Adjust the Horizontal Hold control to the center of its
range.
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
2. Remove tube V9, and then adjust the iron core of L21
Three set screws permit the deflection yoke to be loosened, until the picture is approximately synchronized (held in
permitting limited turning in either direction. If the picture frame) in the horizontal direction.
does not line up horizontally or square with the picture tube 3. Replace tube V9 and then adjust the Horizontal Hold
mask, rotate the yoke until this condition is remedied, Then control until the picture passed all tests as outlined in "Check
tighten the set screws. on Alignment."
HORIZONTAL (HOLD) OSCILLATOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT VERTICAL (HOLD) OSCILLATOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT
The horizontal hold control is a preset adjustment on the This control, R62, is used to lock the picture in synchro-
rear of the chassis which is used to adjust the speed. In late nism with the transmitted picture in the vertical direction.
production receivers, a tuned circuit consisting' of L21 and When the control is maladjusted the picture will slide ver-
C91 was added to the horizontal oscillator cathode circuit to tically out -of -frame or lock out -of -frame, giving overlapping
stabilize the horizontal hold operation. For complete align- vertical images or even double images in the vertical direc-
ment both controls must be adjusted. Check operation first as tion. After the picture is locked in vertically on a normal
follows: picture, reduce the contrast control until the picture is barely
Check on Alignment-With a normal television signal visible, then readjust the control until the picture holds in
being received, free from excessive noise, turn the horizontal frame.
hold control to the position where the picture locks in hori-
zontally and passes the following tests: HORIZONTAL LINEARITY AND WIDTH CONTROL
1. With a picture being received, switch the Station These controls react on each other so that when one control
Selector to a channel having no program and then back to the is adjusted the other may have to be. The adjustment of the
desired channel. The picture should immediately lock into linearity control should only be made on a test pattern signal.
position. First, obtain the correct width by adjusting the width con-
2. With a picture being received, turn the television re- trol, L7, until the picture extends approximately li-inch out-
ceiver power "off" for two or three seconds and then turn it side the edge of the mask on both sides. Next, adjust the
back "on" again. The picture should come into synchronita- Horizontal Linearity control, R49, until the test pattern is
bon within ten seconds after the picture tube has been symmetrical in the left and right direction. A slight readjust-
illuminated. ment of the Width control may now be necessary, as well as
3. Turn the Station Selector to the "radio" position and touching up of the centering adjusting screws.
allow the television receiver to transfer for two or three
minutes to Broadcast reception, and then return to the tele- VERTICAL LINEARITY AND HEIGHT CONTROL
vision channel transmitting a picture. The picture should The Height control, R61, is adjusted until the picture ex-
synchronize within ten seconds after the picture tube becomes tends approximately WI inch outside the edge of the mask on
illuminated with receivers not equipped with L21. Receivers both top,.. and bottom. Next, adjust the Vertical Linearity
with L21 should sync immediately upon showing raster. control, R58, until the test pattern is symmetrical from top
4. Turn power off for three or four minutes and then turn to bottom. Readjustment of the Height and Vertical Hold
"ON." The picture should lock -in horizontally within ten controls as well as the centering adjustments may be neces-
seconds after the raster becomes illuminated. sary.
(
APPROX. ION TRAP ADJ
PICTURE TUBE
ri ry.
/zzav:e.Is
COL
SIDE VIEW SNOWING ION
TRAP ADJUSTMENT
ION TRAP
AOJD5 MINT
CENTERING ASEAN I'
ADJUSTMENTS
NNRIZ
L- -.4
NOTE - GAP Ill ION TRAP AOJ
LINES UP ANN IS mos
PICTURE TURF
MOUNTING STRAP
TO DIPOLE
ROR APPROX. SETTING
HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL VERTICAL

ORMAN,
LINEARNT HOLD HCIGNTH
HORIZONTAL
O
NERTICAL
0 O
VERTICAL
WIDTH NOLO LINEARav
80 P19. 17. Location of Installation Atilustmont Controls

PRODUCTION CHANGES 11. Change in R63-The 3304000 ohm resistor, R63, was
changed to 220,000 ohms so that the Vertical Hold control
The following production changes have taken place up to will operate near its mid -adjustment position.
the time that this service data was compiled. In most cases 12. Removal of R95-To correct a transient which ap-
the change can not be accurately identified with the serial peared in the vertical retrace as a white line at the top of the
number of the chassis. The order of listing below does not picture, the 2200 ohm resistor, R95, in series with capacitor,
indicate the chronological order of the change. C37, was removed. The potentiometer, R58, was reconnected
as a variable resistance as shown on the schematic.
I. Power Transformer, T14 and V23-The original trans- 13. Value Change of C52-The original capacity of C52
former, T14, supplied, gave insufficient B+ voltage (385 was 47 mmf. To improve vertical interlace, this capacitor
volts) when using a Type 5Y3GT rectifier tube, V23. This re- was changed to 240 mmf.
sulted in a low anode voltage of 7500 volts for the picture
tube. To increase this voltage, a Type 5V4G tube was sub- 14. Addition of Tuned Circuit, L21 and C91-A 15.75 kc
stituted for the 5Y3G tube, V23. At approximately serial tuned circuit was added to the cathode of the horizontal
number 2500, a new transformer T14 having Stock No. multivibrator, V11. This stabilizes the horizontal AFC cir-
RTP-040 was substituted, which gave the correct B+ volt- cuit to the extent that it prevents picture wiggles on noise
age of 415 volts when a Type 5Y3G tube was used as V23. pulses and echoes. With this addition, the 240 µµf capacitor,
This B+ voltage gives an anode voltage to the picture tube of C56, should be changed to 150 mmf. and the 150,000 ohm
8500 volts. resistor, R40, should be increased to 330,000 ohms. This pre-
2. Television Tuning Trimmer C112-For approximately vents a white line at the left -center of the picture which may
the first 2000 receivers, the tuning trimmer C112 did not quite result with installation of L21 -C91. With addition of L21,
have the correct tuning range, making it necessary to add a the capacitor, C30, was changed from a 40 mfd to a 1.0 mfd,
fixed 10 mmf. capacitor C114 in series with it. The shunt and C92 was changed from 1.0 mfd to a .05 mfd.
capacitor C102 had a value of 4.7 mmf. Later production 15. Connection of Primary of T11-On early production
trimmer, C114, has the correct range. With this new value receivers the primary of T11 was connected to a mid -tap on
of trimmer, the shunt capacitor C112 was changed to 6.0 choke LIO. This connection caused a resonant condition to
mmf. This shunt capacitor in a few receivers was merely a develop which affected the lower television bands. This was
5.0 mmf., while in most it will consist of two capacitors; a corrected temporarily by shunting a 47 mmf. capacitor be-
5 mmf. and a 1.0 mmf. capacitor in parallel. The early tween the midtap of L10 and ground. Later the primary of
production trimmer has a h -in. O.D. shaft, while the late T11 was connected to the junction of L10 and C101 as shown
production trimmer is slightly larger and has a O.D. on the schematic.
shaft.
3. Tone Control, R69B-The tone control R69B, on early 50 -CYCLE OPERATION
production receivers was connected in series between the
Volume Control R69A, movable arm, and C39. C72 was a The supplement schematic diagram, Figure 18, shows
680 mmf. capacitor from C39 to ground. Hum in the audio the wiring of the power transformer, T14, through the special
dependent upon the tone control setting necessitated a revi- terminal board installed. Also, it shows the addition of capac-
sion as shown in the schematic. itors C98 and C99 required for additional filtering. The
4. Tuned Circuit, L20 and C89-The capacitor, C89, changes involved in changing from 60 -cycle to 50 -cycle opera-
was originally 240 mmf. and the coil, L20, was fixed -tuned tion are listed below:
and wound on a resistor form. This was later changed to 1000
mmf. and the coil turns were reduced and made variable, 1. The 50 -cycle power transformer, T14, is separated
resulting in a higher Q circuit. This change permitted adjust- from the chassis and installed on a mounting plate at the base
ment of the trap as described in the alignment procedure. of the cabinet.
5. Resistor, R87-This resistor was changed from 100,000 2. All filament and high voltage leads are extended on the
ohms to 330,000 ohms to prevent excessive beam current in transformer and terminated at the chassis ',toper in a ter-
the picture tube, V8. This excessive beam current caused the minal board. The connection of these leads through this
high voltage to be reduced when the Brilliance control was terminal board is shown in Figure 18. All leads are twisted.
advanced to maximum with the result that the control re- 3. A 90 mfd. capacitor, C98, is shunted across C62. A 90
duced brightness at end of its clockwise travel instead of mfd. capacitor, C99, is shunted across C45 -A.
increasing brightness. 4. The bias supply filter capacitor, C69, is changed to a
6. Resistor, R47-This resistor has been changed from SO mfd. capacitor.
M -watt to a 1 -watt size. In some cases, the original ,1z/ -watt 5. Filament leads to V6, V7, V9, V10, VII, V12, V14,
resistor dissipation is exceeded, especially if the Width con- V15, V16, and V17 are twisted. The ground connection is
trol iron core is nearly all the way in the coil, resulting in a made at one point only for this series of tubes, and the high
reduction in the resistance value. This reduced resistance side is connected through the filament wafer of the band
changes the waveshape across C29 so much that the horizontal switch.
multivibrator may lock in at half frequency or not lock at all.
It may also result in the resistor burning out. TROUBLE SHOOTING
7. Change in Horizontal Output Transformer, T9-A new
design horizontal output transformer, T9, was used in late The following is a listing of possible troubles and their
production receivers. This may be identified by the fact that cures. This is not intended as a comprehensive coverage of all
it has two windings instead of the single winding design, as possible failures but serves to point out some of the more
characterized the early production receivers. When the late difficult troubles that may be experienced. From time to time
production transformer is used, a 3900 -ohm, 1 -watt resistor this information will be expanded as information becomes
must be added in series to the existing 6800 -ohm, 1 -watt re- available.
sistor, R47. Do not use a single 1 -watt resistor for this. The
capacitor, C66, should be returned to ground when the new 1. NO RASTER ON PICTURE TUBE
type transformer is used.
8. Horizontal Multivibrator Cathode Switching-After (a)Ion trap adjustment incorrectly made. Assembly on
the first 150 receivers were built, a shorting contact was backward or improperly oriented. See ion trap adjustment
added to the filament wafer of the Station Selector switch so under "Miscellaneous Preset and Service Adjustments."
as to stop the horizontal multivibrator as soon as the Station (b) Check for waveform at output of T9. If present, the
Selector was switched to "Radio" position. This connects trouble is probably in the Type 8016 rectifier tube or filter
the multivibrator cathode to ground through the filament circuit. Check for open in high voltage winding of T9. If the
circuit when switching to "Radio" so that "birdies" are not V13 tube filament glows yellow, high -voltage is being gener-
heard on the broadcast band as the television tubes cool off ated and the trouble will possibly exist in the picture tube, V8.
after switching from television to radio reception. (c) If there is no waveform at output of T9, check opera-
9. Screen Resistor, R79-This resistor was changed from tion of 807, V12, V7, and multivibrator Vii by oscilloscope
an original 47,000 ohms to 33,000 ohms. This' reduces the waveform measurement.
operating d -c voltage on the plate of V7, and gives greater (d) Check that high voltage anode cap is contacting the
brightness. anode terminal of V8.
10. Addition of C21-A fixed 10 mmf. mica capacitor,
C21, was added across C10 so that the trimmer CIO would
peak at the center of its range. 81
1. NO RASTER ON PICTURE TURF (Coned) 8. NO vutripm. OR NO HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
(e) Open Brightness control R84B, R87, or R85. Check waveform and socket voltages of output and
(a)
(f) No. B+ voltage at junction L4 and L3. multivibrator tubes of respective sweep circuits.
If only two or three thousand volts are generated,
(g) (b) Check output transformer and yoke for continuity.
check deflection yoke, L9, and Width control, L7, for con-
tinuity. 9. ONE OR MORE HORIZONTAL WHITE UNES AT TOP OF PICTURE
(a) Check for Production Change #12.
2. RASTER NORMAL, NO PICTURE OR SOUND
(a) Oscillator V2B defective, or oscillator coil resonates 10. RIPPLE ON EDGE OF PICTURE
out of band. Reflections on antenna lead-in.
(a)
(b) Defective antenna or lead-in. Instability of horizontal AFC circuit. See Production
(b)
(c) Converter, r -f amplifier, or first video i-f amplifier Change #14.
stage defective. (c) Defective capacitor, C30.
3. PICTURE NORMAL, NO SOUND 11. RASTER EDGE NOT STRAIGHT-KEYSTONING
(a) 21.9 me audio i-f amplifier, discriminator, or audio (a) Defective yoke.
amplifier defective. (b) Defective sweep transformer.
(b) Oscillator V2B off frequency. (c) Improperly adjusted ion trap adjustment assembly.
(c) Defective speaker.
12. PICTURE JUMPY
4. RASTER NORMAL, SOUND NORMAL, NO PICTURE (a) Operation at too high contrast control setting.
(a) Video i-f amplifier (after 1st i-f) inoperative. (b) If picture moves at regular rate sideways, check
(b) Resistor R83 in contrast control defective or open. capacitor C30, R32 and C92. Put in change #14.
(c) Screen by-pass C32C open or shorted. (c) If left of picture jitters, change 807 sweep tube, V12.
(d) Noisy sweep or sync circuit tubes.
S. NORMAL PICTURE AND SOUND, NO HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL
13. POOR INTERLACE OF VERTICAL SWEEP
SYNC.
(a) Check for signal input waveform at grid (11 of V9A. (a) Check Production Change #13.
(b) Defective V9A or plate circuit components. 14. POOR PICTURE DETAIL
(c) Operation of receiver with Contrast control advanced Mismatch in antenna or lead-in.
(a)
too far. Misalignment of i-f or r -f circuits.
(b)
6. PICTURE NORMAL, NO VERTICAL SYNC. Defective chokes L3, L4 or L5 in video amplifier.
(c I
(d) Make sure that focus control operates on both sides
(a) Check grid of V15B for normal waveform. of proper focus point.
(b) Check speed of vertical multivibrator. Should be (e) Overload of video amplifier, check contrast control
capable of free running speed less than 60 cps. operation.
(c) Check V15B circuit components.
IS. PICTURE CANNOT BE CENTERED
7. PICTURE NORMAL, NO HORIZONTAL SYNC. (a) Move focus coil back by loosening all four adjustment
(a) Check AFC transformer, T7. screws.
(b) Check alignment of L21 and C91.
(c) Check socket voltages and waveforms of V1OB and 16. FOCUS CONTROL AT END OF TRAVEL
VII. (a) Short out resistor R96.
(d) Check resistor R47 for correct value. (b) Check for correct B -E voltages.
R7 -1 MEG.
BLACK
0 117 V. 50 'NJ
BLACK INPUT
T14 BROWN
0
0 I
LI
BROWN 7H
4
V23
RED RECTIFIER
0 5V4G - C63 C62-- +C98
RED -GREEN ^30 ME 30 MFG ^90 ME
CD
RED -YELLOW
RED -GREEN
®
I (DI V24 L2
RED RECTIFIER 7H
5U4G
©I
YELLOW
12 I
- T90
C64 C45A
30 ME
+ +C99
F 90 MF
YELLOW
13
GREEN IOI
GREY
GREEN
II NOTE:- I. ALL LEADS FROM POWER TRANSFORMER TO TERMINAL BOARD
MUST BE TWISTED.
6.3 V. 2 A -C LEADS FROM TERMINAL BOARD TO V23 B V24 ARE TWISTED.
GREY FILAMENTS 3. FILAMENT LEADS TO V14,VI2,Vii,V10,Vi5,V16,V17,V9,V6,V7 ARE
TWISTED. GROUND CONNECTION IS MADE AT ONE POINT ONLY,
AND HIGH SIDE IS CONNECTED TO THE BAND SWITCH.
0
82 Fig. 1$. Schematk Changes for 50-eyde Operation

V4 VS V6A VT VI
VI 02 VIDEO DETECTOR VI0E0 AMPLIFIER PICTURE TuDE `<altt
CONVERTER -TELEVISION .1 VIDEO I F 26e VIDEO IF 3 VIDEO IF GACum0E0
RP' AMPLIFIER SAC/ /08P.11
'ACT 6407 RAVI 42-8118 1.5
RAW Cm ...No 4,7E8 vE.
en DEFL
Teo T2
1-s7T.001 1-F an pot 1-F FOC.1.15COL
2 RAP Cr. tRIGOESIESS

16
- RA
V E1 ;."
CI VIDEO I F EMS RECTWIER
406 06
CONTRAST ',T.
TO 6.3040
LI
RPC.0
SID
SIB v
SIC
N V RECTIFIER
8016
V104 V108 VII VI2
09/1 098
HO. DISCRumo TOR D C AMPLIFIER NOR MULT1018R410R 008 OUTPUT
rt. nap. MO son. rpm,. Or CLIPPER HON SYNCAMPLIFER 907
.RAEPO RAW, 1/2 - 6SN7GT - 6SLIGT 6SLIG1 650761
SPITO 11:1 4101: 42- 6.9.17GT 42
P05
MT.. POW <011.3.0010 TO PIT no
C1P1101111. 1106 TM MM. 111.1070 720
=====711111
002:W
01
R23
8I
M2G 45^
Gvl 1.26
.000
0
TE4.5,Z1.1..1
8SR
;2.1?
8 030 F
Uto VISA WIDTH 2009129100

006 DISCRIMINATOR
631.70 T VISE VII 11NEARITT
CII4 VERT SYNC AMPLIFIER VERT MULTMEIRATOR
ICE NOTE V1,1, TYPE 00" It 661.7GT 6567GT
C16 'Tit NUSVOLTt
3". v it .
020 vERT OUTPUT

V18 60661
:--AMU CCNVERTER-RODID AUDIO I F
WED 6561 SSVI 0214 02IE1 v22
los 1 0670 WUAT2
6ZI 22
CC
DISCRIMINATOR AUDIO AMPLIFER AUDIO OUTPUT ISIFF
P.Z1LAI.1144,2240.. I/2 6A07GT V2 6/107GT 64401 K
Kut
Tli
cem A69
22 c.541.
01
693 Y 0820
Oi F
sow
ICOR
/ C. O OP Oro
ICINS100
4010
C42± SID
.OSMFT
Loo.
651
2 OMEN
023
FILAMENT SI RECTIFIER
S1361
tl'AE
A,-_ SOME
CAT RECTKEA ArAs-

54146
1M 0656
a_L<}4
C74
I
ei.a.
Fig. 19. Sehernotl< Diagram, Media $01 SO, ,..... S2 * EARLY Sus- *NM WILL Of A 5444
SETS US. 5446 V/iLl. USE PT 1 Of POWER
wax. 11.5510110.67 SETS USING SOSO! WILL USE
....wirEpo..D PT 2 OF POWER TREAISEOpitiEP
117
MEG
w GENERAL 0 ELECTRIC
ca
SOCKET VOLTAGE CHART
NOTE -All d -c measurements taken by a 20,000 ohm/volt meter. Station selector switch at Channel No. 1 unless noted. Con-
trast control at maximum, Brilliance at minimum.
SYM- TUBE PLATE SCREEN CATHODE GRID PLATE SCREEN NOTES
BOL TYPE PIN VOLTS PIN VOLTS PIN VOLTS PIN VOLTS M.A. M.A.
VI 6AU6 5 140 6 140 7 1.3 1 0 7.2 -

V2A 7F8 6 115 - - 5 0 8 -4.5* 2.5 - Measured with V.T.V.M:
V2B 3 180 - - 4 0 1 0 10 -
V3 6AC7 8 150 6 150 5 0 4 -2* 14 3 * Measured on 50 v scale
V4 6AC7 8. 160 6 160 5 0 4 -2* 15 3.2 Measured on 50 v scale
- - ----
V5 6AC7 8 170 6 170 5 2 4 0 14 3
V6A 6H6 5
--
0 - - 8 0
- - 4
V6B 3 -8.5 - - 4 6.3AC - ---- -

--- ____ 0
V7 6AC7 8 150 6 125 5 0 4 0 15 3.7
V8 10BP4 CAP 8300* 10 415 11 150 2 90 - - Use multiplier with 1000 v
V9A 6SN7GT 2 12.5 - - 3 0 1 -1

---- -
.2
scale
V98 5 110 - - 6 11 4 6 -10
V1OA 6SL7GT 2 , -95 - - 3 0.5 1 -9.5

---- __-- - 0
V1013 5 42.5 - - 6 0.5 4 0.5 - 1
____ -
-Ct,
- - <7 -25
-` V11A 6SN7GT
-
5 170,. 6 Y6
6 4
---- 2.5
VI1B 2
-7-CT
135 - - 3 6 1 0 -2.9
V12 807 CAP
- -
415 2 343,V
-
4
_
8300*
22 3
___
- -
-10
---- ---- 76
-
13
- * Use multiplier with 1000 v

V13 8016 CAP 2
scale
V14 6AS7GT 2 &5 - 0 - 3&6 10 1 &4 -15 - -

VISA 6SL7GT 2 - 0.5 - 3 7.5 1 0.5 0
V15B
V16A 6SN7GT
--\ 5
2 ' 30
-
-
' 105
9 ;2
-
-
6
3
1110
'1.5
4
1
1° 4
71"7"--
0
- -_- 1
.7--
V16B 5 - 14.5 - 6 11.5 4 .-4.5 .1
V17 6V6GT 3 1 95
07 4 135 8 23.5 5 414.5 20 1.85
V185 6SA7 3 200 4 80 8 0 6 0 3 8.5
V19 6SG7 8 200

--- ---- --- ----
6 110 5
--- ---- ----
1 4 0 10 4
V20 6SV7 6 195 4 88 -0.52 3 0 9.7 1.7
V21A 6AQ7GT 1 & 3 0 - - 2 0 - - 0 -

V21B 5 75 - - 6 0 4 0 1 -
V22 6V6GT 3 230 4 200 8 10 5 0 41.5 4.5
V23 5Y3GT 4 & 6 315AC - - 2 425 - - 85* - * Cathode current
5U4G 4 & 6 240AC - - 2 250 - - 160* - Cathode current.

PICTURE MALADJUSTMENT OR INTERFERENCE
Fig. 20. Normal Picture Fig. 21. Contrast Too High
Fig. 22. Contrast Too Low, Brightness Fig. 23. Focus Control Misadlusted
Too High
Fig. 24. Vertical Hold Control Misadlusted Fig. 25. Horizontal Hold Control Misadlusted
Fig. 26. Vertical Linearity Control Fig. 27. Horizontal Linearity Control
Misadlusted Misadlusted
PICTURE MALADJUSTMENT OR INTERFERENCE (Cont'd)
Horizontal Width Control Fig. 29. Vertical Height Control

Fig. 28. MIsadjusted
Misadjusted
Fig. 31. Sound Bar Interf ee Such as

Interference Pickup on Channel or Microphonics
Ad' a
Antenna
Fig. 33. Strong Diathermy or Hum in Video

Fig. 32. Weak Diathermy Interference I -F, Detector, or Video Output
Fig. 34. Ion Trap or Focus Coil Not Properly

Adjusted
WAVEFORM MEASUREMENTS
The waveforms shown in Figures 35 through 55 represent An oscilloscope where the vertical deflection amplifier has
measurements on an average receiver wherein the controls been pre -calibrated is used to take measurements at the point
have been adjusted for a normal picture with correct Con- indicated in the waveform boxes. The oscilloscope sweep fre-
trast, Height, Width and Linearity. Most measurements quency is indicated in the waveform title.
must be made when a signal is being received.
GR D (4) OF V7 JUNCTION L3 8 L4
2 V. ill111111411111
T
55 V.
12111 ari
11111111111111111111111 111111111111111111111111111111 111111
Fig. 35. Video Output of Detector (Osc. Fig. 36. Video Output of V7. (Osc. Synced
Synced at Half of Veil. Speed) at Half of Vert. Sweep Speed)
PLATE (5) V9B
\ T
65V.
area 100 V.
Fig. 37. Clipper Output (Osc. Synced at Fig. 36. Sync Amplifier Output (Osc. Synced
Half of Vert. Sweep Speed) at Half of Hor. Sweep Speed)
ACROSS R30
40V.
2IV
Fig. 39. A.F.C. Sawtooth (Osc. Synced at Fig. 40. Discriminator Voltage (Osc. Synced
Half of Hor. Sweep Speed) at Half of Hor. Sweep Speed)
Fig. 41. Discriminator Voltage (Synced at Fig. 42. Hor. M -V Cathode (Osc. Synced at
Half of Hor. Sweep Speed) Half of Hor. Sweep Speed)
ACROSS L2I ACROSS R44
50 V.
Fig. 44. Hor. M -V Output (Osc. Synced at

Fig. 43. Cathode Tuned Circuit (Synced at
Half of Hor. Sweep Speed)
Half of Hor. Sweep Speed)
87
ACROSS HORIZ. YOKE JUNCTION C6I a R52
T
J A,
850 V.
I500 V.
Fig. 45. Hor. Yoke Input (Osc. Synced at Fig. 46. V14 Control Voltage (Osc. Synced at
Half of Hor. Sweep Speed) Half of Hor. Sweep Speed)
Fig. 47. 807 Cathode (Osc. Synced at Fig. 48. Vert. Sync at VI SB. (Osc. Synced at
Half of Hor. Sweep Speed) Half of Vert. Sweep Speed)
CATHODE (6) OF VI58 GRID (1)0F VI6
( I
71-2-EV
la4 v.
Fig. 49. Vertical Sync at Cathode VI SB (Osc Fig. 50. Vert. Sync at Grid of M -V. (Osc.
Synced at Half of Vert. Sweep Speed) Synced at Half of Vert. Sweep Speed)
CATHODE (3&6) OF V16
Fig. 51. Vert. M -V Cathode (Osc. Synced at Fig. 52. Vert. M -V Output. (Osc. Synced at
Half of Vert. Sweep Speed) Half of Vert. Sweep Speed)
CATHODE (8) OF VI7 PLATE (3) OF VI7
T T
250 V.
1y v.
Fig. 53. Vert. Output Cathode (Osc. Synced at Fig. 54. Vert. Output of V17 (Osc. Synced at
Half of Vert. Sweep Speed) Half of Vert. Sweep Speed)
ACROSS VERTICAL YOKE

T
25V.
8 V.I
1
88 Fig. 55. Vert. Yoke Input (Osc. Synced at
Half of Vert. Sweep Speed)
!EXTERNAL
L&M. ANT.
1ST. LF. DIODE I.F.
12 BE6 LI-002i 12BA6 12AT6 50L6GT
LOOP ANT. 5 7 300_L 3 .0021_
AN -0011 I
M MFT MFD-
5i022 .01
400V .0*
MFD 4 0
2 MMF TO -0001 SK -0009

22K
.05 25
MFD MFD
200V 47K 25 V
100
---- B.C. OSC. MMF
LO -0024 Wifff
2.2 MEG.
9..-vonNv
1.05 MFD F.M. t.F.
I/2-12AT7 Li -00216
6
2.2MMF CT -0004 k
1.5- SMMF 115 MED40 \

150V
C A MN.
ANT I I MMF 500K SR -0003
SW -0005 2
SWITCH SHOWN IN VOL. CONT.
AM POSITION AS VC -000I
VIEWED FROM REAR IW
F. M-A.M. FM IQ 30 LC -0011
GROG R. E COIL MMF C 150K
I
-.02 LR-0008 e n
1
1.02 MFD.
MED. 400V LC -0015 30MED 30MFD
4300v .05 150V 1.50V 150V
2500 =100 CE -0007
MFD.700v.
-(11151P--ce-'0 TOMFD
1.5K C MMF ON -OFF
WOK SWITCH .2 mF0
LAMP Boo v
CDDIAL 50L6GT I2BA6 12E4E6 12AT6 12AT7

-1000
MMF 7 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 5
791-, COLD 9
1/2-12AT7 RC -0097 WO
MMETC
SOMME 500
MMF AM I F 455KC
I I
117 VOLTS
3-30
CT -0 INT. F.M. ANT. 12AT6
DIODE ir.126A6
CONNECT TO F M. ANTENNA CLIP
WHEN EXTERNAL F M DIPOLE IS
NOT USED.
0:0:0
50L6GT
IST.tF128"
I2AT7
TUBE
LOCATION
F.M. OSC. CHOKE
LC -0016
LO -0025 0 F.M. I.F.
MMFC NOTES - 21.35 MC
I. Nip INDICATES CHASSIS
FM 88 to 108 M.C, 2. /776 INDICATES B-
TUNING RANGE: 3 ALL RESISTORS ARE I/4 WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
kin 540 to 1600 K.C. A. ALL CONDENSERS RATED AT 500 VOLTS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED.
S. C' INDICATES CERAMIC CONDENSERS.
SOCKET VOLTAGE READINGS
Howard Radio Company Screen

Tube Function Cath. Plate
Model 474 - Grid
12BE6 Mixer 0 100 98
120
12BA6 I.F. Amp. 1 100 98
:;,1413
:150
-sa Pin 8
ar 12AT7 FM Tube 120
'Z111111I rR 14 V.
)ou
Of 12AT6 Det, 0 0 65
i4Otmizp
50L6 Output 6.8 100 130
All voltages taken from the buss bar (B-) to

0 0 the socket contacts, with a 20,000 Ohm per volt
D.C. meter and the line voltage fixed at 117
0
Volts A.C.
.02
00
J20MU.
MFD-OCIP
H
I REC. ANT.
I2AT8 12 BA8 I2BE8 L
DIODE 1.F. 1ST IF. GEN. OUTPUT 000-4-1 400-^.
IMF 0 OREC. GND.
12AT7
O
.05 MFD
050L8GT QA
2 S G
. LF 150
OA
(1-8) AM 3 1
"AAA/V
17- F M
0 150" G
TRIMMER LOCATION CHART DUMMY GENERATOR CHART
See Order of
Sig. Gen. Gen. Band Dial See
Dummy Trimmer FUNCTION
Connection Setting Note
Antenna Freq. Position Adj.
To
Chart
Grid of 455 Off I.F.Peak to

2
K.C.
B.C.
Station
CD ®® (4) Max. Output
12BE6
B.C.Osc.
1
A.M.Ant.
Clip
1400
K.C.
B.C.
1400
K.C.
(5) 0 and R.F.
A
F.M.Ant, 21.35 Off B

2 F.M.
Clip M.C. Station
F.M.Osc.
3
F.M.Ant.
Clip
105
F.M.
105
N.C.
e Peak to C
Max, Output
Note A. Set pointer in horizontal position with condenser gang closed.
Note B. Adjust for minimum noise with modulation off.
Note C. Adjust eto 105 M.C.- Oscillator section.
90 While adjusting e, rock condenser gang slowly back and forth for
point of optimum! Check tracking of R.F. at 90 to 100 M.C.
SW -0016
SECTION 3
R F. CHOKE REAR
LC -0012
100 1ST. LE. 2NO I.F. F. M. DETECTOR
6BA6 SAW 68E6 6 BA6 6BA6 6AL5
LI-0023 LI-0024 LI-0025 VI
,0
FM ANT COIL 100
LA -0014 MAW
1c .007)
50
MAW
500V. }.
100V
7 D.C.
(CI
ANT
LOAD.
DIPOLE COIL CT -AM
ANTENNA LA -001
0
AN -0013 4.7K
ME4.
MW
.002 476
MFD 150K
600V
002
NFD
6000.
100K
LOOP ANTENNA
Fa
AN -0006
(1)
-100104F 40N0
471( PICKUP 02NFD
.005
MFD .01
2000 MFD
6000
500K
T
t
NOTES- LC -001
!. BAND SWITCH SHOWN IN BROADCAST POSITION. REAR VIEW VOL. a,
CONT
2.CONDENSERS INDICATED ST "C. ARE CERAMIC 50000.0
RP'
5Y3GT
00
OFF -ON .
SWITCH LC -0010
3000 D.C. 5110^ 2W
-ywon 245 V. D.C. !'l
. 0 0 0.9) riTcs, r-re I5K
TO VIhNr
8
117V -60q, -- ZONED TONE CONTROL
a LOW
.350044vED 4500 T SW -0010 27K 11.1.1
r 100K 3 MED
T.
2206
TO 6.3 VOLT FILAMENTS 6 V6 GT

PNONO.
MOTOR
SOCKET -1 .002
IW
.05 MFD
MFD 6000 CD
7 6, I5- F/L. 2000
470,' 56-0004
25MFD TO7-0006 CD
250
T 44
7 0
20 MU.H
.0 MFD002
REC. ANT.
.05 MFD
I OA PI
GEN. OUTPUTC 400 G
MFD 0 REC. GND.
10004
2.
Howard Radio Company ISO." 44
A 0
3. 1
Circuit of Models 472AC, 472AF G pq
150 .'s m
TRIMMER LOCATION CHART
Models 472C & 472F are similar DUMMY GENERATOR CHART
Howard Radio Company ** Models 472C - 472F - 472AC - 472AF
ALIGNMENT CHART USING MODULATED GENERATOR
Sig. Gen. Gen. Band Dial Order of Trimmer See
See
Sw. Setting Slug and or Slug Notes
Dummy Connection Freq.
Gen. Trimmer Function Below
Chart Adjust.
2 Point C on 455KC AM Gang 0606)0 AM I.F. A & B
Diagram Closed Green D.
1 Ant. post,
rear of ch. 1.4hE AM 1400KC 0 g AM - Osc.0 & D
loop conn. & RF Trm,
2 Point D on
Diagram
10.WMC FM Gang
Closed
0 FM Det. E & F
Adj.
It
2 As above 11 11 11
@Adj. G
to 0 v.
2 Point C on "
It It
FM H
Diagram E R 8;) I.F.
3 Ant and Gr 0 14 Osc. & I & J
Back of Ch. 1D5 MC FM 105 MC RF FM
3 As above 90 MC FM 90 MC og) FM - RF
Ind. Adj. K & L
3 As above lal MC FM 101 MC CI FM Ind. M
Adj.
A.Low voltage AC voltmeter across voice coil.

B.Repeat operation until no further improvement can be found.
C.Before adjusting set pointer on heavy gold line below 560 KC. with gang closed.
D.Check complete dial for sensitivity.and calibration.
E.Signal generator modulation off and turned up to about 100,000 microvolts.

F.Connect electronic volt meter (equivalent to voltohmist) at point E on the wiring diagram
and turn slug (7) on trimmer location chart to extreme counter clockwise position. Turn
clockwise to 1st peak and adjust to maximum.,
G.Turn slug (8) to extreme counter clockwise position.

Connect electronic voltmeter to Point F on wiring diagram and turn slug (8) until voltmeter
is to zero voltage. Repeat adjustments given in notes F & G until no further improvement
can be made.
H.Connect voltmeter to point E and generator at point C. Adjust (9) (10) (11) (12) then retrii
(7). Move voltmeter to post F and recheck zero voltage (retrim if necessary). These
adjustments should be made with input signal necessary to produce approximately .7 volts
at point E.
I.Change generator dummy as shown on dummy antenna chart picture 3, and modulation on.
J.Use meter across voice coil if using RF generator, but use AVC voltage if working with
AM generator.
K.Should 90 MC. signal not fall in at 90 MC. on the dial, adjust F.M. Osc. Coil to correct
calibration. It is only necessary to slightly press together or open spacing on one turn
to do so. Now adjust slug (15).
L.Repeat adjustments (13) (14) and then (15) until no further improvement can be made.
92 M. Adjust (16) for maximum sensitivity.

6BA6 613E6 6567 T2 6507 T3 6SH7 T4 6S8
X
61 © S
C15 6
R7
to rE
R5 4
11 T 1.11
C14T r- 3 3
5 C33
L12 04011
013
R3 -'VVV- L(42_1 044
R6 C24
039 RI4
R4 C2I G36
R15
R21
C29
C23 T
EH- - R22
R8
022 R9 C3I
C48
Sib SIA RIO II

--
I
I I C49
R24
RII
I
mC30 -L
IN BROADCAST -.7 I II
POSITION 050
LUG VIEW
CII WON SPEAKER 051
or 5
0 28L6
7 C34 t C52 3
of C94 Io
LI Ir
SEC.
/ /
fit
R30
N5$
RI kj R29
Rt7
053.
=
---- --- I
/
L 5524 ARCS 41E4 411411 5547 5147 41117 SS
'11
II
ON TONE CONTROL
II
1
SEC. 7 r -r v -r 7
C65 __TC 60
I
I
11
:75:57:1358 _C59
I
BOTTOM VIEW OF I.F. S2

COIL FORM BASE
115V. AG.
o
of C
RADIO
NOTES:- POSITION 831 )
I.- BAND SWITCH AND PHONO SWITCH
ARE SHOWN AS SHAFT END VIEWS. PHONIO c'ICK-UP
062 MODEL 8FM776
2.- SPEAKER CABLE PLUG AND
RECEPTACLE ARE SHOWN AS CHASSIS8B07D
SOLDERING END VIEWS.
DENOTES CHASSIS
GROUND
MODEL
PARTS LIST 8807D
CHASSIS8FM776
ITEM PART NO. DESCRIPTION
Cl,C48 017-4 .005 mfd, 600V

C2,C14,C15,C16,
C55,C56,C57 6-230 1000 mmf, 300V Ceramic
C3 7-25 Gang Tuning Condenser FM -AM
C4,C10 8-35 Trimmer, 2.5 - 30 mitt
C5,C23,C30,C32
C49 C50 015-5 .01 mfd, 200V
C6,C62 015-8 .05 mfd, 200V
C7 8-59 Trimmer, 2-30 mini
C8 8-63 Trimmer, 1 5-115 mni
C9 8-65 200 - 600 mmf Padder
Cll 6-218 1000 mmf, 5007, Mica
C12 8-38 Trimmer, 3-13 mmf
C13,C22 -6-159 47 mmf, 5007 Ceramic
C17,C41 6-247 24 mmf, Ceramic Special
C18,C25,C26,C34,C35
C19,C20,C27,C28,
C36,C37
6-246
6-250
33 me, Ceramic Special
750 mmf Mica Special
III L3
C21,C29,C38,C44,C51 016-5 .01 mfd, 400V rp'Di
C24,C33,C40,C58,
C59,C60 6-259 .005 mfd minimum disk -type Ceramic
C31,C46,C61 6-151 220 mmf, 500V Mica
C39,C45 6-232 100 mmf, 500V Mica
C42 6-249 62 mmf, Ceramic, Special
C43 6-248 15 mmf, Ceramic, Special
C47 017-2 .002 mfd, 600V
C52 017-5 .01 mfd, 600V. . . .. ...
. . .
C53 19-37 100 mfd-- 150V, 200 mid - 150B, 200 mid - 10V.
Electrolytic
C54 016-8 .05 mfd, 400V
C63 19-32 20 mfd 150V Electrolytic
R1,R8,R11,R16
R21,R28 01-199 470K ohm, 1/4 watt
R2,R13,R17,R20 01-157 47K ohm, 1/4 watt
R3,R12 01-37 68 ohm, 1/4 watt
R4,R14 02-108 3300 ohm, 1/2 watt
R5 01-3 10 ohm, 1/4 watt
R6,R9 01-143 22K ohm, 1/4 watt
R7 01-101 2200 ohm, 1/4 watt
R10,R31 01-227 2.2 meg ohm, 1/4 watt
R15 02-132 12K ohm, 1/2 watt
R18,R19 01-174 120K ohm, 1/4 watt
R22 01-255 10 meg ohm, 1/4 watt
R23 03-32 Volume - Tone Control with switch
R24 01-132 12K ohm, 1/4 watt
R25 02-20 27 ohm, 1/2 watt
R26 9-332 100 ohm candohm
R27 02-52 150 ohm, 1/2 watt 11111
R29 04-69 390 ohm, 2 watt L5
R30 01-45 100 ohm, 1/4 watt
Ll 81400 Loop Antenna Assembly 41111%4
L2 S1407 FM Antenna Coil
L3 8-1410 Wave Trap Coil O
L4 S-1408 FM RF Coil
L5 S-1411 AM Oscillator Coil
L6 S-1409 FM Oscillator Coil
L7 S-1384 R.F. Plate Choke
Le 2-32 Filter Choke
Ti S-1389 1st I.F. Transformer
T2 S-1390 2nd I.F. Transformer
T3 S-1391 3rd I.F. Transformer
T4 S-1392 Discriminator Transformer
94 DIAL STRING
ALIGNMENT
INPUT
00
CONNECT TEST DUMMY SET DIAL a)
OPERATION OSCILLATOR TO SIGNAL BAND ADJUST TRIMMERS
ANTENNA TO PURPOSE
FREQUENCY
1 Stator Plates .05mtd. 455 KC BC 600 KC L12, L13, L16, L17, Align if channel for maximum
of C3d L20, L21 output.
2 Stator Plates
of C3d .05mfd. 455 KC BC 600 KC C8 Adjust wave trap for maximum
Modulated output.
3
O
1500 KC BC 1500 KC C10 Set oscillator to dial scale.
Modulated ar
2 TURNS 02
4 8" DIAMETER 1500 KC BC 1500 KC C7 Align antenna for maximum output.
COUPLED LOOSELY Modulated 0
5
TO LOOP ANTENNA
600 KC BC 600 KC C9 Rock gang to track BC padder
Modulated Fa
6(a) Pin 4 (Grid) on .05mfd. 10.7 MC; FM (Cs
1.22 Coil Slug Primary Align Primary of discriminator
6SH7 Limiter Socket Unmodulated Discriminator for maximum reading.
7(b) Pin 4 (Grid) on .05mfd. 10.7 MC FM JP3 Coil Slug
N4
6SH7 Limiter Socket Adjust secondary of discriminator
Unmodulated Secondary Discriminator for zero reading. Fa
8(c) Pin 4 (Grid) on .05mfd. 10.7 MC FM L18 and L19, Pri. and Q0
6SG7 2nd IF Socket Align 3rd IF Transformer for
Unmodulated Sec. 3rd IF Coil maximum reading.
9(c) Pin 4 (Grid) on .05mfd. 10.7 MC FM L14 and L15 Pri. and CO
6SG7 1st IF Socket Align 2nd IF Transformer for
Unmodulated Sec. 2nd IF Coil maximum reading.
10(c) Lug "B" on Coil L4 .05mfd. 10.7 MC FM L10 and L11 Pri. and Align 1st IF Transformer for
Unmodulated Sec. 1st IF Coil maximum reading.
11(c) Antenna Terminals 300ohm 106 MC FM 106 MC C12 Oscillator Set oscillator to dial scale.
Resistorr Unmodulated Trimmer
12(c) Antenna Terminals 300ohm 106 MC FM 106_MC C4 Antenna Trimmer Align antenna stage for maximum
Resistor Unmodulated reading.
13(c) Antenna Terminals 300ohm 88 MC FM 88 MC L6 Oscillator Slug Set Oscillator to dial scale. 1.3
Resistor Unmodulated
14(c) Antenna Terminals 300ohm 88 MC FM 88 MC L4, L2 Slugs Align Antenna and RF stages for 50
Resistor Unmodulated maximum reading.
15(0 Antenna Terminals Repeat steps 11, 12, 13, and 14 until tracking is perfect at 88 and 106 MC.
EL
IMPORTANT: Alignment of this chassis will in most cases be unnecessary unless an IF or RF transformer is replaced or the adjustment has O
been tampered with. A vacuum tube voltmeter must be used for FM alignment. An AC output meter connected across the primary or
secondary of the output transformer will be satisfactory for all AM adjustments. The signal generator output should be kept
just high enough to get an indication on the meter.
NOTES: a Vacuum tube voltmeter pin "A" on discriminator transformer to chassis (half discriminator load).
b Vacuum tube voltmeter pin 1 of test jack to chassis. (full discriminator load).
c Vacuum tube voltmeter pin 3 of test jack to chassis (limiter grid load).
A much more satisfactory IF and discriminator alignment may be obtained by using a 10.7 MC signal generator, frequency modulated
at an audio frequency and swept approximately 600 KC (±300 KC). An oscilloscope should be connected to test jack pin 3 and all
UP IF slugs adjusted fora symetrical pattern of highest amptitude. See Fig. 1. For discriminator alignment, connect oscilloscope
Ulto test jack pin 1 and adjust T4 for highest linear symetrical pattern. See Fig. 2.
g ac.- F.M. kRADIO- PHONO
SWITCH
ON -OFF -TONE
TUNING
VOLUME
L88- FM
EMI
CHOKE
Cl2- 05C. FM. ID
09- PAOOER
GOO K.C.
O 0 I0
108 M.C.
C10 -08C. B.C.
1800 K.C.
L4-R.F. FM.
58 -WAVE TRAP 66 M.C.
455 K.C. T4
L23
TI
lo.rma(mru
04 -ANT. F.M.
108 M.C. T3
n2
L2- ANT. F.M.
O 88 M.C. TOP L2 4559C.
BOT-L18 10.711.0
PHONO JACK
/TOP-LI7 455KC. TOP- L21 455KC
TOP-LI2 455K.C. BOt-L19 10.1 WC
PHONO MOTOR BOT-LIO 10.7 MC. SOT -1.15 101 MC
CONNECTOR SOCKET TOP -L13 455KP TOP- LI8 455 KC.
BOT.-L11 10.7MC. DOT- LI4 10.7 MC.
is .01
20
SPEAKER _J
SOCKET o., 3
TEST JACK
VOLTAGE TABLE
PLATE CATHODE SCREEN GRID
TUBE FUNCTION
80 0.5 78 ----
6BA6 RF Amplifier
100 0 78 ----
6BE6 Converter
100 0 100 -0.6
6SG7 1st IF Amplifier
100 .7 100 ----
6SG7 2nd IF Amplifier
70 0 21 -0.4
6SH7 Limiter Amplifier
Discriminator, Det., AVC 50 0 --- ----
688GT
105 7 100 ----
25L6 Power Amplifier
117AC 105 --- ----
2525 Rectifier
96 FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2
rn
CD
CABINET
I 1.1.112E2
ANTENNA 2ND E 1.0
2.1 cONvENTER 6012
6.6 6 47 6SET
4C1:11 I
r, C.
6.6
REC j 5:
0
rt
CRT
to
C
002.T
rTEST 2Ck
8.
C34
OILLE
001.222.1.0
ST IP4
P.. PICIPUP P1
c No
234 PC11112. OUTPUT :2
6T
PINS. INS (0
C.6
220
CMS
CST
C. CO
P01.21,11 OUTPUT
TR
SD
ok 00421 Pl..
4640104. U4110
C411
A calarrAca 1-3
PO. MONO
44.
DUAL SPEAKER FOR MODEL I2FM475 6.2 6.1 6S. 4521 626 .V. .61 6Sk
0
.6 .6 6S6T
T9 FIELD COIL
3 5U4 pi
b RECEIPT.
CD
RIC t RFC 3
Kr AY
6"
SINGLE SPEAKER FOR 4i
MODELS 12FM475, I 2FM778 I 2FM779 MODELS I 2FM778 AND I 2FM779 CD
CHASSIS 41201, 12826E

MONCATTS
620U1.
W OUNO c 1.2 IS PT
w 100 12
111141
ITEM PART NO. DESCRIPTION
Cl,C2 7-17 Ganged Tuning Condenser

C3,C8,C10 8-38 Trimmer, 3-3 mot
C4,C55,C71 6-159 47 mint, 500V, ceramic
C5,C6,C9
C13,C73,C74
C7
6-230
6-143
.001 mfd., 400V. ceramic
24 mmf, 500V ceramic
PARTS LIST
Cll 6-218 1000 mmf. 500V Mica
C12 6-199 15 mmf. 500V ceramic MODELS 12FM475, 12FM778. 12R1779
C14,C23,C27,C34, CHASSIS 41201-12626E
C48,C52,C54,C66,C67
C79,C82 5-74 .01 mfd 600V
C15,C16,C51
C53 Part of 1st. IF transformer, T2. .
C17,C22,C26 6-231 .002 mfd. 400V Ceramic

C18,C19,C45,C47 Part of 2nd IF transformer, T3 . .
C21,C24,C25 Patt of 3rd. IF transformer, T4. .
C28,C29,C30 Part of discriminator transformer, T5

C31 6-232 100 mmf. 500V Mica
C32,C40,C46 6-86 220 mmf. 500V. Mica
C33,C49 5-63 .02 mfd. 500V
C35 5-69 .006 mid. 600V.
C37A,C37B 19-34 10-10 mfd. 450V Electrolytic .
C38,C39 5-77 .05 mfd. 600V

C41 5-84 .001 mfd. 1600 V.
C42 6-102 470 mmf. Mica 500V.
C43 19-35 30 mfd. 450 V. Electrolytic
C44 6-234 1200 Ent. 500V.
C50,C68 5-64 .05 mfd. 400V
C56 6-207 220 mmf. 2% 500V. Ceramic
C57 8-65 200-600 Podder
C58,C59 Part of coil assembly L5
C61,C62,C63,C65 Part of coil assembly T7
C69 Part of coil assembly T8
C72 8-35 Trimmer 2i- 30 mmf. ceramic
.01mfd..500V Mica
FIGURE 1
C81C75,C76,C77,C78 8-63 15-115 mmf. Trimmer (Wave Trap).
Ll 20-27 Broadcast Loop Antenna . .
. . .
L2 Loading Coil, Part of Loop 20-27

L3 3-184 FM RF Coil
L4 3-189 FM Oscillator Coil
L5 3-171 AM Oscillator Coil Assembly
L6 3-1468 Wave Trap Coil Assembly
R1 9-294 68 ohms 1/4 watt
R2 9-293 47,000 ohms, 1 watt
R3,R11,R37,R42 9-130 5600 ohms 1 watt
R4 01-2 10 ohms 1/4 watt
R5,R41 9-222 22,000 ohms 1/4 watt
R6,R40 .9-209 22,000 ohms 2 watt
R7,R39 9-253 22,000 horns 1/2 watt
R8,R10,R25,R28,
R43 9-235 47,000 ohms 1/2 watt
R9 9-283 82 ohms 1/2 watt
R12 47,000 ohms (Part of T4)
R13,R20,R35,
R38,R44,R45 9-223 470,000 ohms 1/4 watt
R14 9-256 33,000 ohms 1/2 watt
R15 9-8 100,000 ohms 1/2 watt
R16 9-211 470,000 ohms 1/2 watt
R17,R19 470,000 ohms (part of T5)
R18 9-121 47,000 ohms 1/4 watt
R21 9-213 10 megohms 1/4 watt
R22 13-25 Volume Control, 2 megohms
R23
R24
9-225
14-7
18,000 ohms 1/4 watt
Tone control, 2 megohms, with switch FIGURE 2
R26,R36 9-255 1 megohm 1/4 watt
R27 9-7 2200 ohms 1/2 watt
R29,R31 9-295 270,000 ohms 1/4 watt
R30 9-290 250 ohms 5 watt, wire wound
R32 9-264 12,000 ohms 1/2 watt
R33 9-240 2.2 megohms 1/2 watt
R34 01-160 56K ohms 1/4 watt
R50 01-44 100 ohm 1/4 watt
C80 19-36 100 MF 10V electrolytic Model 12FM475
98 R46
R47,R48
9-297
13-23
2 ohm 5 watt wirewound, Model 12FM475
Potentiometer, 25 ohm, 25 watt, Model 12FM475.
ALIGNMENT
CONNECT
00
INIUT CD
OPERATION OSCILLATOR DUMMY SIGNAL BAND SET DIAL AT TRIMMERS PURPOSE Pi
ANTENNA
TO FREQUENCY 4'a.
1 Conv. Grid .01mfd 455 KC BC 600 KC T2,T3 Bottom Align I.F.'s
nr
2 455 KC BC 600KKC C81 0.
I.F. trap adjustment for
ONE TURN minimum I.F. signal dl
LOOP MADE WITH
3 GENERATOR 1500 KC BC 1500 KC C58 Set BC osc. to scale at 1500 KC
4 LEADS 1500 KC BC 1500 KC 0
C63,C72 Align BC RF. and Loop
5 600 KC BC 600 KC C57 Rock Gang to track BC padder
M
to
6 Al -Gnd. 400ohn 15 MC SW 15 MC C59 Scale osc. at 15 MC
0
7 Al-Gnd. 400ohn 15 MC SW 15 MC Align SW RF and Ant.
C62,C69 0
8 6807 2nd .01mfd. 10.7 MC FM 88 MC T4 top Align for max. voltage at test
I.F. Grid 1...
jack pin 3 Rock gen. over 10.7
MC to check for symmetrical I.F.
response.
1.4
9 6SG7 1st. .01mfd. 10.7 MC FM 88 MC T3 top Align for max. voltage at test 1
I.F. Grid jack pin 3 Rock gen. over 10.7 I-I
MC to check for symmetrical I.F. OD
response. 4=6
10 Converter .01mfd. 10.7 MC FM 88 MC T2 top Align for max. voltage at text CO
jack pin 3 Rock gen. over 10.7
MC to check for symmetrical I.F. Pi
response. Re -check peaking of
T4, and T3.
11 Converter .01mfd. 10.7 MC FM 88 MC T5 primary Align for max. voltage across
grid 6BE6 i discriminator Load (un -used co
Lug bottom of T5 to ground) 0
12 Converter .01mfd. 10.7 MC FM 88 MC T5 secondary Align for zero voltage across 04
grid 686E full discriminator load
(Test jack pin 1 to ground) q
CD
13 FM ant.term. direct 108 MC FM 108 MC C10 Scale OSC at 108 MC (max.
voltage Test jack pin 3. CD
14 FM ant.term. direct 108 MC FM 108 MC C8,C3 Align FM RF and Ant. (max. r

voltage Test jack pin 3. CO
r.
15 FM ant.term. direct 88 MC FM 88 MC L4 Scale osc. at 88 MC. 0
16 FM ant.term. direct 88 MC FM 88 MC
0
L3,T1 Align RF and Ant, at 88 MC
repeat steps 13, 14, 15, 16 as Z
necessary. CD
NOTE: 1. A much more satisfactory IF and discriminator alignment may be obtained by using a 10.7 MC Signal generator frequency modulated
at an audio frequency and swept approximately 600 KC (±300 KC). (D
An oscilloscope Should be connected to Test jack pin 3 and all ol.
IF screws adjusted for a symmetrical pattern of highest amptitude. See Fig. 1. For discriminator alignment, connect scope to q
IDTest jack pin 1 and adjust T5 for highest symmetrical pattern. See Fig. 2. CD
.4
2. In all FM alignment calling for a voltage measurement at Test jack pin 3 (limiter grid resistor) keep signal generator output to ED
up such a value as will result in approximately 2 volts measured with avacuum Tube voltmeter such as the Voltohmyst, Vomax or equiv.
MODELS 12FM475, 12FM778, I2FM779
VOLTAGE TABLE
CHASSIS 41201, 12826E
Measurements made at 117 volts line; volume control at minimum; zero
signal input. Measurements made to chassis ground with vacuum tube voltmeter.
FUNCTION TYPE EF Ep Es EK EG
FM RF AMP. 6BA6 6.3 210 90 1 0

FM CONVERTER 6BE6 6.3 210 100 0 0
AM RF AMP. 6SG7 6.3 260 180 1 -1
AM CONVERTER 63A7 6.3 250 90 0 --
1ST IF AMP. 68G7 6.3 240 125 0 -1
2ND IF AMP. 6.307 6.3 240 125 1 0
LIMITER 63H7 6.3 3 60 0 -.6
DISC.; 2ND AMDET:
AUDIO 688GT 6.3 80 --- 0 -.8
PHASE INVERTER 63J7 6.3 160 --- 80 0
POWER AMP. 6V60T 6.3 260 270 15
POWER AMP. 6V6GT 6.3 260 270 15
RECTIFIER 5V4G 5 --- --- 300
TOTAL B CURRENT FROM RECTIFIER 120 MA.
00
I
0
6V6
GT C5810:01:C59
®
6V6 m
11
*6
1
*8mC
C57
600 KC
1500
KC ---'---mC
. . -°- 1 15
GT
(0 (0
1
0
I [C 0
9
Z
O
5 wog Kc en,MC 8gc 4eamc C63
15MC
Ti
L0017)
0i
u 0 LLI
0
(' TRIMMER
w .. -Q-
oa co
0 .9._
6BA6
6BE6
*7mC ,,
®w
C62
110 1500 KC
.
0-()F-. ®
r 6S8 JACK
TeST - -' '
° @)-1-2
0
107 MC
16'
GT OP viEw)15C69
MC
DISCRIM. 1ST IF
107 MC 107 MC POWER
TRANSFORMER
6SH C'T4 QT -3 ®
6 81
@ 10
SPEAKER 107 MC 107 MC 456 KC
SOCKET I°1 e
L
3RD IF 2ND. IF i
RECORDER LINE
o TUBE LAYOUT rj C'
,;,,,_LCORD
10
-,
op o @ (0 @ 0 (D) ?) (0 0 Q;,) 1, (; c) PHONO MOTOR

ZPHONO JACK I 234 AI A2 rm. DIPOLE
O 0
)ki
DIAL STRING 116.4,

mirt
14 TURNS Alp SHOWN WITH CONDENSER
FULLY OPEN.
I :4 TURNS
DIAL STRINGING
*PLATES
-._.
Soh TURNS 5 th TURNS
1 00 Iv- CONDENSER DRIVE

MEISSNER MODELS 9-1091A, 9-1091B IF
29355
A. M. - F. M. TUNER
VOLUME
°°o
Io
DO
04194 Z
0
Power Supply - 105-125 0 of
Volts, 50-60 Cycles. xz
a.-
Power Consumption - 8o
Watts. BASS
Type of Circuit - Super-

heterodyne.
Tuning Range - 527-16.2o Kc.
*88-108 Mc. BAND
Intermediate Frequency - SWITCH
4.55 Kc. io.7 Mc.

ALIGN AT 455KG
rn
Audio Fidelity - Flat with-
in /1.2 d.b. from 3o to
15,000 cycles. TREBLE ALIGN AT 1400KC
29332
Band Width at 1,000 Kc. -
Sharp 7.5 Kc. Broad 18.5 O
04193
Kc.
Hum - 6o d.b. below rated
output. TUNING
Distortion - Less than 5%.

Output - 8 Volts at High
Impedance - 0.75 Volts at FM ANT.
5oo Ohms.
04194
04193 04193 04193 04(93
6469 6AG5 GAGS 9001
410, 7. 001 GALS

IN/
IMF .ge 1110M 11 If l

000
Oi
11.1,Y -./
411-
.2"
400 ZO
00v
22K 1e%2..
400 aT
.10% 04239
_134214_ 9003 0424, 9003
05 El(01, 6AL5
12K 10%
06%. . al I
10.
r01ist
1.TWO5- II II
22K
::7
4 TK
--'011026
47
001
L-1(-0 6U5/
665
47K
.0001210% 1450
.29332 DIAL LrGHT5
5Y3G/GT
6-8.411B1 0.00.
29230
00051;-7.-4
.00012 0%
= 20-.20
aso
50
0770.
10 5%
.11 rsloor r. 1/2 volt 20, unl 33K
29355
101
1948 Models - Rp-12, RT-12, RG-12 and other
Midwest Models using RGT-12 Chassis
ALIGNMENT - Refer to the alignment chart for step by step procedure. It is
the FM IF stages with an AM or CW Signal. It should
preferable to align
be noted that all adjustment are made for peak avc reading except the secondary of
the third transformer. At this point, if you use an AM signal, it may be tuned for
minimum audio signal; or the discriminator voltage may be used, reading it with
a VTVM, and the- secondary may be adjusted to the zero voltage. There may
be some discrepancy between these methods, and if it is not excessive, is of no
importance.
The FM RF alignment should be made using an FM signal and either avc or
audio for peaking. In doing this alignment, or when feeding the IF signal into the
FM mixer grid, care must be taken not to move the wiring. If the wiring is dis-
placed so as to affect the inductance of the RF circuits it is difficult to re-establish the
RF-Oscillatortracking.
The AM, RF and IF alignment should be done with a VTVM .erc.as the avc.
The recommended signal value is one which will generate 10 volts of avc. When
5U4 XT -4
aligningcthe "AM" band the loop must be plugged in and you need not adjust the
77 GC4 6BE6 RF padder core. The RF padder is very broad and can be aligned only if the con-
X C-8 XC-4
TR-I I 7s7 7A7 66A6 verter grid lead is connected to an RF type VTVM as indicator; this will usually
TR-12
Top View of Series 12 Chassis involve a signal level greater than is normally available.
Coupling Signal -Band Dial Adjustm.at

bwitch
KB -13 To 7Q7 converter grid 456 KC AM 1000 KC Peak 1st, 2nd and 3rd
through .05 mfd. cepa- AM IF trimmers on top of
citor. IF cans.
To "A" on antenna 1600 KC AM 1600 KC Peak RP, converter
AM and oscillator trimmers
ground terminal strip marked .13...
through 200 mfd. and
400 ohms in series. 550 KC AM 530 KC Peak converter and
AM oscillator padder cores
marked "B". Loop
must be plugged in.
Do not adjust RF.
10.7 MC FM 100 MC Peak core adjustments
To 6BE6 mixer grid for avc (around 3
direct. AMor CW
a volts) at 1st, 2nd and
primary of 3rd IF.
Adjust secondary of
3rd IF for audio null
from 30% amplitude
modulated 10.7 MC IF
signal.
To "A" and "A on 105 MC FM 105 MC
doublet terminal strip FM Peak RF mixer and
150
oscillator trimmers for
through a pair ave or audio.
ohm res;stors.
Bottom View of Series 12 Chassis *Read text for use of LW for FM -IF alignment.
50
L
50V RFC SERIES 1112 MODEL SXI2 SCHEMATIC
135V MIDWEST RADIO CORPORATION

100 0001 M N
- 47K
1W
CAPACITY IS GIVEN 2.2 K
IN MNIFLI EXCEPT
0113.05 ARE MFD.
01 2005
RESISTANCE IS
GIVEN IN OHMS. 63A6
M. MEGOHM 68E6 6C4
K.1000 OHMS FM RF AMPLIFIER FM CONVERTER FM AFC
WATTAGE tS 1/2
EXCEPT WHERE
INDICATED.
TOLERANCE IS
±20% UNLESS
INDICATED. 7A 7 707
RF AMPLIFIER 7A7
CONVERTER
V AMPLIFIER
10
K2)
.711 gm
110 V TO
22 M _L 85 V 25 1255
01 8211 01_ 4k-
01
800V I 22 K 01
10I 220
113031..i 200 V
.01
Th" (.1129, V
.011c200V
3.3
22K 000
2W
4-0 470 1
AM
FM
PHONO
6AL 5
COIL RESISTANCE VALUES GIVEN ARE APPROXIMATE. DEVIATION DOES NOT NECESSARILY
00 INDICATE FAULTY COILS. VOLTAGES SHOWN ARE UNDER NO -SIGNAL COMMONS.
7A7
C> 5U4G
RECTIFIER
c, 2% IM 456 KC AM
I2Sv C> 100 10.7 MC FM
2
22K
OFF -ON SWITCH ON
TONE CONTROL
2007
U 200 -. t 5M
7n 7n 100K I OO K
---, 470K
0L100V 7E6 80 V.
7A4oil v
200V AM DETECTOR -1ST AF 2 AF 6.3V
7C5,,
AMPLIFIER
4
ALL FILAMENTS
EXCE RECTIFIER
5 VP**
01 200V. FIELD
TOOK 200V 40 MFD 1000 SI PANEL
0 5V 0.5 V LAMPS
500 10K
40 MFD 5.4 T450 V. *46
AM 4.7 K
FM 4 K
500E - 270
PHoN0 TONE CONTROL 3W
365 V.
40 IMFD
470 I(
01
4501V
VOLUME SOOK 1-23ov
CONTROL
(1 A -.I.-Thread through holes MIDWEST SERIES 12 DE LUXE
in dial drum. CD
'
0 11 1948 Models - R-12, RT-12, RG-12 and other
Holes on top -Gong closed Midwest Models using RGT-12 Chassis 0rs
FM. This is your FM band. It is calibrated in channels. It is possible that an IQ
FM station may identify its frequency in megacycles. Channel numbers have been
chosen as follows: beginning with No. 201 as 88.1 MC they are assigned every 200 z0
KC up to No. 300 at 107.9 MC. This relation is shown in Figure.
CD
Mt
FREQUENCY IN MEGACYCLES 0
88 93 108
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Tie knot here I 1 1 198 1 1.
1113 tP
Series 12 Dial Stringing 200 225 250 275 300 CD

CHANNELS 41+
DIAL STRINGING - Use a light weight flexible dial cord when replacing worn or FM Frequency and Channel Numbers a)
broken cord such as Beven-Wilcox FSN-25-I 2.
REPLACEMENT PARTS - Certain parts are available on an exchange basis; these
are shown on the parts list with an "*.
ly
PARTS LIST
Part Description Part Descript=or. 0..
AD- II -Glass Dial KB-13-Tone & Band Knob
AE -9 --Escutcheon KB-6-Push Buttons, Set of 7
AP- I-Wood Pulley 0G-1-Miter Gear, Pair CD
AP -2 I-Pointer PC-3-Loop Plug CD
AS- I-Wood Pulley Stud PC-5-Phono & Television Plug
CE-6-Filter Condenser 40-40 RV-5-Tone Control AI
CE-4-Cathode Bypass 40 mfd. 25v PV-6-Volume Control
CE-7-Electrolytic 8 mfd. 150v SP-5-Speaker 11 Lit
*CV- I 5-2-Tuning Gang SR-8-Band Switch 0
EG-5----Speaker Grommet TP-8-Power Transformer
FS-12-Miniature Tube Shield QTR -I I-I st IF Transformer
*TR- 12 -2nd IF Transformer Push Button Mechanism
HE-7-Speaker Mtg. Eyelet *TR- I 3 -3rd IF Transformer
IL- I-Panel Lamp 6-8v
KB-4-Volume Knob *UK-12-Mixer Coil Assembly
KB-12-Tuning Knob *UK-13-0scillator Coil Assembly..
PUSH BUTTONS - The push buttons are for your convenience in selecting stations
without the bother of making the exact tuning adjustments necessary for best
Note: Order resistors and condensers by value, tolerance and wattage or vokags. reception. There are seven buttons and each button may be set for a station. The
Note: When ordering include serial number of chassis, since Midwest records of station may be at any point on the dial.
changes in parts specifications are kept by that number.
6BA6 N1 6BA6 Nat 6BA6 3 68A6 Ns4 6AL5
EM -AM MIXER FM,. INPUT LE AMP. FM .D.IFAMP FM DETECTOR
FM ANTENNA 6 0090 Ta
3 TS 7
100
OHM Ij
NPUT
T1
CAT'.-
.o
LOOP SOCKET
PLUG
WIRING SIDE
BROADCAST WIRI
EXTERNAL ANTENNA
AtAYNN
NOTES
6AT6
PIN DETECT.
,^F 0-4`4,,V1012Eg"rn UNLESS
5Y3GT4E1,1r,,,, PASO H SHOWN IN FM POSITION
6C4 NG
TD 100OLLO2L.T.EVVZPZTSMEW" WITH
FM -AM OSCILLATOR
SOO+ SF. LD
C22
.0IMFD
00
DLA,
FRONT REAR
cue V FILOT UGH,

e{o p0 0 vie
I.F TRANSFORMER
SECTION SECTION 2 SECTION 3 TERMINAL BOARD
1 -3 -ac OSCILLATOR re.
AM Sensitivity (For .5 watt output with external

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS antenna) -20 microvolts average
Power Supply 105 to 125 volts, AC, 50 -60 -cycles; FM Sensitivity (For .5 watt output)-I5 micro-
85 watts. volts average.
Frequency Ranges Broadcast Band -540 to 1600 kc. Power Output 3.5 watts 10% distortion. 7 watts
FM band -88 to 108 mc. maximum.
Intermediate Freq. AM -455 kc; FM -I0.7 mc. Loud Speaker 6"x 9" oval electrodynamic. Voice
AM -50 kc. broad at 1000 times coil impedance 3.2 ohms, 400
Selectivity
signal, measured at 1000 kc. cycles.
I.F. FM -180 kc. broad at 2 times

down.
MODEL 74BR-1812A
0 I.F. FM -290 kc. broad at 10 times
down. MON T GOME R Y W AR D
Ull
MON T GO MER Y W AR D
GANG CONDENSER
i _I
FM OSC. 40 0
OSC. PADDER
TRIMMER TRIMMER
C7 C4 6C4
/rE
FM ANT - 10.7 MC. TRAP
TRIMMER TRIMMER
C2 CI
AM* INPUT
6V6GT 6AT6 T5 PRI.
AM -FM I.F.
FM
2 .6
31111115
PRI.
PRI.
RATIO DETECTER
TRANSFORMER NLA6027.4
AM -FM I.F.
TIO FM OUTPUT I.F
6AL5 3
0S, EC 40E2
4
5
T6 6
6 BA 6 # 3
5
3 eel SEC.
PRI. 6 BA64*4 5Y3GT
Chassis-bottom view
A.M.TRIMMERS
6-8 V PILOT LIGHT

6BA6 6AT6
ANT TRIMMER - C-6- BROADCAST
604
6BA6 OSC. TRIMMER- C -6A -BROADCAST
LOOP
ANT 6V6GT
ELECTROLYTIC
SPEAKER
SOCKET
F.M. 6AL5
TRIMMERS
PHONO
INPUT
6BA6
300 OHM
FM. ANT.
106 LINK
GROUND 5Y3GT LINE CORD
Montgomery Ward Model 74BR-1812A
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
Broadcast Band Section I.F. and R. F.
The alignment procedure below includes the sensitivities at the must be set at maximum. The tone control must be set for max -
inputs of various stages. All signal input values are based on an imum treble.
The signal source must be an accurately calibrated signal gene -
output of 1/2 watt. This may be measured by disconnecting the
rator capable of supplying the frequencies designated, modulated
speaker voice coil and substituting a 3.2 -ohm resistor across the
secondary winding of the output transformer. A reading of 1.3 30% with a 400 -cycles audio signal. A 400 cycle audio signal is
required for the audio maasuremen+. Variations in sensitivities of
volts AC across this resistor will be approximately equivalent to
control plus or minus 25% are usually permissible.
a 1/4 -watt output with the speaker connected. The volume
AM - I. F. ALIGNMENT
Band Switch in AM Position. Tune Set to 1400 Kc. Dummy Antenna .1 Mfd.
SIGNAL CONNECTION TO
ADJUSTMENT TO BE MADE ADJUST FOR
GENERATOR RADIO
FREQUENCY
455 Kc. Use Pin No. I of Primary and Secondary of T5 AM windings. Maximum output
2100 6BA6 No. 2 See top and bottom views Should be 1/2 watt
microvolts and ground
Pin No. I ofPrimary and Secondary of T4 AM windings. Maximum output
PinMaximum
6BA6 No.See
455 Kc. Use Should be 1/2 watt
64 microvolts
I
top and bottom views
and ground
No. I of output
400 cycles. Use None Should be I/2 watt
6AT6 and
63 millivolts ground
BROADCAST BAND - R. F. ALIGNMENT

Check Pointer so that it is Exactly Over Calibration Marker to the Extreme Left
When Gang is Fully Closed. For Adjustment Loosen Set Screw on Large Gear.
(see dial mechanism illustration.)
DUMMY ANTENNA ADJUST

SIGNAL GENERATOR FREQUENCY CONNECTION TO RADIO
C6A for maximum

1400 Kc. Antenna and Ground 200 mmf.
1/2 watt
Use 15 microvolts
C4 for maximum
600 Kc. Antenna and Ground 200 mmf.
Use 25 microvolts 1/2 watt
C6
1400 Kc. Antenna and Ground 200 mmf. See Note
NOTE: Recheck first two adjustments after this adjustment because of inter -locking effects.
Procedure for disassembly and assembly of dial mechanism
SCALE
CALBRATION/An4::::.::::............m....,
mipai ..o:1111111
SLIDE dat II,
17
I. LOOSEN SET SCREW Id ii
*II 11 f
2. PULL SLIDE OUT

SCREW IS APPROXIMATELY
IN POSITION SHOWN.
ii- 71
=-
5. REPLACE SLIDE a WITH
ROTORS CLOSED LINE UP
POINTER WITH FIRST MARK
ON CALIBRATION SCALE.
A-_-_-_
ri--_,-_,
- -;;---
r
6. TIGHTEN SCREW.
3. ROTORS CLOSED 107
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
FM Band Section. I.F. and R.F.
IMPORTANT NOTE
No alignment of the FM section of this radio should be The following alignment is based on the use of the new
attempted unless you are positive that the circuits are Simpson vacuum tube voltmeter which has a "floating
in need of adjustment and you have the necessary equip- ground". In other words, the meter, when used as a
ment. vacuum tube voltmeter, can have both the positive
All components used in this radio are extremely stable and negative sides connected to points above ground
and the tuned circuits should require no adjustment and still give true readings.
over long periods of time. A standard AM signal generator is required.
FM - I. F. ALIGNMENT
Band Switch in FM Position. Dummy Antenna .1 Mfd.
SIGNAL VACUUM TUBE VOLT

CONNECTION TO
GENERATOR METER CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT TO BE MADE ADJUST FOR
RADIO
FREQUENCY TO RADIO
Pin No.I of
10.7 Mc. Use 6BA6 no. 4 and Pin no. 7 of 6AL5 Resonance should be
and ground Primary of T10 about 3 volts
about .1 volt ground
Pin No.1 of
10.7 Mc. Use 6BA6 no.4 and See note "A" Secondary of TIO Zero. Use zero center scale.
about .1 volt See note "B"
ground
10.7 Mc. Use Pin No.1 of Resonance should be
about 4000 6BA6 no. 3 Pin no. 7 of 6AL5 Primary and Secondary of T6
and ground about 3 volts
10.7 Mc. Use Pin No.I of Primary and Secondary of
Pin no. 7 of 6AL5 10.7 mc. windings of T5. Resonance should be
about 150 6BA6 no. 2
and ground See top and bottom views about 3 volts
10.7 Mc. FM Antenna Primary and Secondary of Resonance should be
input Pin no. 7 of 6AL5 10.7 mc. windings of 14. about 3 volts
Use 3000
and ground and ground See top and bottom views See Note "C"
microvolts
FM Antenna Minimum reponse. This is
10.7 Mc. input
Pin no. 7 of 6AL5 CI
and ground a trap circuit
and ground
NOTES ON FM-I.F. ALIGNMENT: crossover point will be found at first. Careful adjustment of both
primary and secondary is necessary.
NOTE "A" Connect two resistors, 100K OHMS each, from Pin GENERAL: Input signals should be adjusted to give approximately
No. 7 of 6AL5 to ground. These resistors must be matched within 3 volts. The ratio detector is operating at a reasonable level at this
5%. Connect as shown in dotted lines on schematic diagram. Con- point and will give the truest indication of correct alignment with
nect vacuum tube voltmeter between the mid point of the resistors +he procedure specified.
and point xx. NOTE "C" The input microvolts specified is based on the traF
NOTE "B" If TIO has been tampered with, it is possible that no circuits being adjusted.
FM - R. F. ALIGNMENT
Check Pointer so that if is Exactly Over Calibration Marker to the Extreme Left
When Gang is Fully Closed. For Adjustment Loosen Set Screw on Large Gear.
(see dial mechanism illustration.)
SIGNAL VACUUM TUBE VOLT

CONNECTION TO METER CONNECTION
GENERATOR DUMMY ANTENNA ADJUST ADJUST TO
RADIO TO RADIO
FREQUENCY
100 Mc. Use FM Antenna C7 Osc. Pin No. 7 of Resonance

about 15 300 ohms
lead C2 Ant. 6AL5 and Ground about 3 volts
microvolts
NOTE: If a signal generator with the above fundamental fre- to use a local station carrier of known frequency to align the FM
quency is not available, it is sometimes possible to use harmonics. Band and to use the vacuum tube volt meter as above for reson-
Use extreme care in picking harmonics. An alternate procedure is ance indication. A weak carrier, however will not produce 3 volts.
108
A short wave antenna is provided in cabinet.
The 'liken -Vane,' loop antenna for broadcast and CHASSIS HS -38
short wave reception is located at the rear of
HS -39
the cabinet and should be rotated for maximum
volume of a weak station when the radio is In-
stalled. In locations where additional pick-
up on broadcast and short wave is desired, an MODELS 95F31, 95F31B, 95F31M AND 95F33
external antenna may be connected to clip
marked AN EXTERNAL ANTENNA.
1ST OVNI2 F -M
CONVERTER
6567 6567 65867 6K6GT
I -F AMPLIFIER. 1-F AMPLIFIER DE T AvC 1ST AUDIO PWR OUTPUT
- I T
4 3TMG 1 4.3 IAg.i- DISCRIMINATOR
A.3 MC.
C2,6, 'TAW
-GRIN
2
1F0'11125
tOTE. EXTERNAL F-4 *

AN CONNECTIONS M
R o00
A6tr52 E70i2TRtf445." r
[ T-4 JA. 1.2" ELECTRO
455 KG 1-F T-5 SPEAK
LS,
H
iS
REV.. NOTES
-wf 7t-T- G-22 CHAN.. fROM 500., TO 2506Y
CA. 0.4220 FROA .054IF TO .0.10
G-22 GRA.. FROM .MF TO .016IF
-M G-59 ADDEO
OSC G-40 A0.0.
R-53 ADOED.
R-24 A0020.
R-4 C-13 I0,4 G-41 AWED.
15,000
II
5
2.00
3 POSITION SWITCH
SHOWN IN P0541
- 6507
13 -CL LOOP PH ASE
NVERTER
707
57367
CONVERTER RECT.
W. COLLECTOR
ON -Of
SWITt
00
SHORT wt.. - 5.6 Mc -12.2 MG ELECATV
L-3 L-4 L-2 E -33-T
BROADCAST -535 KG. -1620 KG.
F -M Se MC -1. MG.
O SWITCH
Lot * -PART OF AM -FM ELECTRIC TUNER E -33-T
to
MOTOROLA INC.
MODELS 95F31, 95F31B, 95F31M AND 95F33 CHASSIS HS -38
HS -39
CHART I. ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE WHEN USING AM MODULATED SIGNAL
GENERATOR AND STANDARD OUTPUT METER FOR COMPLETE RECEIVER ALIGNMENT.
DI AL BAND SI GNAL SIGNAL ADJUST

SET SW. GENERATOR GEN ERATOR TRIIIMER
STEP TO SET TO DUMMY CONNECTED TO SET AT OR CORE REMARKS
455 Kc I.F. CHANNEL ALIGNMENT
1620 KC B. C. . 1 MF. 707 B. C. & S. W. 455 KC 1 2. 3 ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT

CON V. GRID &4
(PIN #4)
& CHASSIS
2. 1400 KC B. C. . 1 MF. 707 B. C. & S. W. 1400 KC 5 (B. C. SET OSCILLATOR TO DIAL.

CONV. GRID 0 SC. (ON CHASSIS HS- 38, MOUNT OR HOLD
(PIN #4) TRIM) DI AL SCALE TEMPORARILY ON CHASSIS
& CHASSI S WITH GANG FULLY ME9-IED, POINTER
3-10ULD BE AT LAST, MARK ON DIAL.
THEN SET TO 1400 KC. AND SET
OSCILLATOR.)
3. 1 400 KC B. C. NONE RADIATION LOOP 1400 KC 6( B. C. ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT

LOOP
AN
TRIM.)
S. BAND ALIGNMENT
4. 11.5 MC S.W. . 1 MF 707 B. C. & S.W. 11.5 MC 7( S.W. SET OSC. TO DIAL.
CON V. GRID OSC. MAKE SURE OSC. IS HIGHER IN
(PIN #4) TRIM) FREQUENCY THAN THE SIGNAL BY
& CHASSIS CHECKING IMAGE RESPONSE WHICH
SHOULD OCCUR WITH THE INPUT
SIGNAL AT 12.41 MC.
5. 11.5 MC S.W. 50 NW S.W. ANT. 11.5 MC 8( S.W. B. C. LOOP PLUG SHOULD BE DIS-
TERMINAL AND ANT. CONNECTED. ADJ. FOR MAXIMUM
CHASSIS. CO IL OUTPUT
TRIM)
4.3 Mc I.F. CHANNEL ALIGNMENT
Ei 9(DISC. DETUNE DISCRIMINATOR SECONDARY BY

SEC.) SCREWING CORE OUT AS FAR AS IT
110 WILL GO.

DIAL BAND SIGNAL SIGNAL ADJUST
SET SW. GENERATOR GENERATOR TRIMMER
7. 112 MC FM .001 MF 7F8 2ND FM 4.3 MC t0, 11. ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT
CONVERTOR GRID 12, 13 &
(#1 PIN) & 14 (4.3
CHASSIS MC 1. F. )
FM BAND ALIGNMENT
8. 18 ( FM CHECK THE POSI TI ON OF THE FM OSC.

OSC. TUNING CORE 18. SET SPACING BE.
CORE) TWEEN THE CORE AND BAKELITE PIECE
TO WHICH IT IS MOUNTED. TO 1/ 32"
BY TURNING TUNING CORE SLOTTED NUT.
9. 90 MC FM NONE FM LOOP 90 MC 15. 16 & ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT

ANTENNA 17 ( FM
RECEPTACLE er OSC.. ANT

CHASSIS RE- & VAR I -
MOVE FM LOOP. ABLE I . F.

TRIM)
10. 105 MC FM NONE FM LOOP 105 MC 18, 19 & ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT
ANTENNA 20 ( FM
RECEPTACLE & OSC. , ANT.

CHASSIS RE- & VAR I -
MOVE FM LOOP. ABLE I . F.

CORES)
1 1 . REP EAT STEPS 9 AND 10 SEVERAL TIMES

UNTIL FURTHER ADJUSTMENT DOES NOT
INCREASE THE OUTPUT. MAKE THE FINAL
TRIMMER ADJUSTMENT AT 105 MC. (1.E..
TR INNERS 15. 16 AND 17 AT 105 MC) .
12. 105 MC FM NONE RADIATION ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT WITH FM

LOOP 105 MC 17 ( FM LOOP ANTENNA CONNECTED.
ANT.
TRIMMER)
ALIGN DISCRIMINATOR SECONDARY
13. FM .001 MF 7F8 2ND FM 4.3 MC 9 ( DI SC. ADJUST DISCRIMINATOR SECONDARY FOR
CONVERTOR GRID SEC.) MINIMUM RESPONSE. THE CORRECT
(41 PIN) & ADJUSTMENT 1 S THE SHARPLY DEFINED
CHASSIS MINIMUM RESPONSE POINT BETWEEN THE
TWO PEAKS.
CONNECT OUTPUT OF SIGNAL GENERATOR TO A 5" DIAMETER, 3 TURN LOOP & RADIATE SIGNAL INTO RECEIVER LOOP.
MINIMUM DI STANCE BETWEEN LOOPS SHOULD NEVER BE LESS THAN 12".
111
VOLTAGE AND RESISTANCE DIAGRAM
TUBE AND TRIMMER LOCATIONS
NOTE:- A V.T.V.M. WAS USED TO MAKE MEASUREMENTS. IF A rn
20,000 OHM PER VOLT METER IS USED ALL GRID a AVC CD
0 Ft
T3 T-5 T4 T1 -M V. VOLTAGES WILL READ LOWER.
4.3 110 455 KC 4.3 MC. 955 KC. 43 MC. I -F TRIM.
TOP VIEW 0150 PRI I -F PRL 0FPRL I -F PR!
F -M LOOP
MEASUREMENTS ARE MADE FROM TUBE BASE PIN TERMINALS n
ANT. SOCKET 13 C. LOOP
ANT SOCKET
TO CHASSIS.
VOLUME CONTROL ON FULL.
BEND.
POWER 03.
TRANSFORMER EAR VIE VOLTAGE TOLERANCE *1O%.
RESISTANCE TOLERANCE ± 20%.
zO
rt
TUNER BAND SWITCH IN BC. POSITION; BAND SWITCH IN F.M. POSITION CD
FOR ALL OTHER MEASUREMENTS. CD
B.C. LOOP
PHR1na010
PHONO RADIO SWITCH IN RADIO POSITION. O
SWITCH
I ST. 8 2 ND. FM CONVERTER
M ANT
CORE
35 COgtC
OUTPUT VAR
400 EC GORE
RAM.
0-34
.W. OSC
1 1r.:Z1 G.
7Q7
0-37 BC. a SW. CONY.
RM
11.5 MC.
BOTTOM VIEW
0 90
r-3 T-5 r TO r 2,
4.3 MO 45590. 4.3 MC. 45550 4.3MG.
OISC.SEC. I -F SEC I -F SEC. I -F SEC. I -F SEC. Al
TUBE LOCATED ON TOP
OF CHASSIS 0
6SQ7 6SG7 ao 0
PHASE INVERT. I -F AMR cu
K.1000 (ONE THOUSAND) OHMS. w
1-3
I I RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS. 13, c0CD
Ca 01
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS. M CD
P. CA
*.MEASUREMENTS MAY VARY DUE TO ELECTROLYTIC
CAPACITOR IN CIRCUITS. to
cn 1 0
5Y3GT 6K6GT 6K6GT 6S8GT 6SG7 CCI
RECT. CA1
POWER OUTPUT POWER OUTPUT DET. AVC. 1 ST. AUDIO I -F AMP. co
43 I
52
R-17 0-23 R
I
R-22 -24-i
0 ° C-24 C-10 C-20 C-28 0-37 L-2 0-30

R- 5 R-13 T-3 I C-16 I C-36 R-29
C 35
C 31
R 31
L3
C 34
C-27 C-26 R-27
C 33
0-41 C-25 6S07 C-18
4111. ,11.1 1111 3
r 707
1
L1
VOW
R5
R 30
T 6% 7
4
3 R4
5
4 3
T4
C9
15 1 7 R6
VI 1 3
0 4 R8
5.
1/ 3
.4
A.M. ANT.
5Y3 6K6GT 0-29 R-19 INPUT
R-23 6K6GT C-22 R-16 6S8GT 0-13 T-5 R-7 R-11 0-15 R-33 6SG7 0-10 T-1
R-34 R-26 C-39 R-20 R-25 R-21 C-21 R-14 R-12 R-10 R-9 0-12 0-14 T-2 6SG7 R-28 C-11
NOTE: - R -33 NOT ' USED ON CHASSIS HS -38
BOTTOM VIEW OF CHASSIS
CD
tD
1.1 V-5 V-6

121, AL 1416 12'13:6 4978
Bt 3 10.FII T-1
T if 2 rao CONY ct,w 2 NO. 1011rAMSUT
SC
OISLVIISTOP 7.1,.T.1,71111°V;
" 0-7
T -I 0-2
441
32 4:aw
.oi
0-3:112:957
5-1
5.;26 5R -R 3
0
116 R-27
127 2R '0'
31
. rD
Eti
'39
C 2t ry-2
AT .; 0
5-
1'i-19
kg.T1*"
.01
C -I2
eu
I-3
tD
e=8 tD
R-30 R-35
V-2 V-3 V-0 7.0 _1100_, :510 -

975
1101.7 1 122E6 12906 121346 5065 .00
, ._,-.,n_c,.__p___p___
kil .y A4 . 3 3 a s
0
1
"ii."' mi-26 ,..1,,, C-11
USED WITH HS -89 USED WITH HS -97

.2T.0001rame 7-2)
L is tD
°;.:Zr` SCHEMATIC DIAGRN4 - CHASSIS HS -99 & HS -97
CD
se.
4
tD
II
to
MOTOROLA INC. MODELS 77FM21,77FM22,77FM22M,77FM22WM & 77FM23
WITH GANG FULLY CLOSED, POINTER
SLIDER SHOULD TOUCH EDGE OF HOLE. 0
VOLTAGE & RESISTANCE DIAGRAM rn
DIAL BACKGROUND
BRACKET U)
NOTE: A VTVM WAS USED TO TAKE MEASUREMENTS.
MEASUREMENTS ARE MADE FROM TUBE BASE NOTE -4
PIN TERMINALS TO B-(tf) USE 18 LB. TEST FISH LINE. GANG FULLY
CLOSED m
VOLUME CONTROL ON FULL.
STRING DRIVE
BAND SWITCH IN FM POSITION FOR ALL
MEASUREMENTS EXCEPT AS NOTED.
O WITH BAND SWITCH IN BC POSITION
-9.6V; IN FM POSITION 0 V.
-n
(FRONT OF CHASSIS)
V-6
50B5
POWER
OUTPUT V-1
12AT7
-n
1 ST. S,,2 ND. TUNING
FM CONV.' SHAFT
=MEASUREMENTS MAY VARY DUE TO -4

V-5
V-3 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR IN CIRCUIT.
19T8
DET. AVC. 12BA6 VOLTAGE TOLERANCE ± 10%.
1 ST. AUDIO 2 ND. FM -I -F
BC- I -F RESISTANCE TOLERANCE ± 20%.
400K K= 1000 (ONE THOUSAND) OHMS.
I I
= RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS.
=VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS.
c0
GND =GROUND TO CHASSIS.
V-4 V-2 ALL VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS ARE DC
12BA6 12BE6 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. -n
3RD. FM- I -F 1ST. FM -I -F
BC. CONV.
(JJ
CHART I. ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE WHEN USING AM MODULATED SIGNAL
GENERATOR AND STANDARD OUTPUT METER FOR COMPLETE RECEIVER ALIGNMENT

455 Kc IF CHANNEL ALIGNMENT

1. 1620 Kc BC .1 mf 12BE6, (V-2) 455 Kc 1,2,3 & Adjust for maximum output.
BC Conv. Grid 4
(Pin #1)
pROADCAST BAND ALIGNMENT

2. 1620 Mc BC .1 mf 12BE6 (V-2) 1620 Kc 5 This sets oscillator to dial
(gang BC Conv. Grid (Calibrate pointer by fully
fully (Pin #1) closing gang and noting po -
opened) sitlon of pointer slider.
Pointer slider should be in
line with right hand hole it
dial background bracket as
shown in Figure 12.)
3. 1400 Kc BC None Radiation 1400 Kc 6 Tune in signal with receiver

loop* tuning knob, then peak trim -
MAT. A
FM VARIABLE
I -F TRIM.
BOTTOM -rte\ SEC.

SEC.
VIEW
FM OSC. TRIM.
0
BC DIODE
0
FM DISC FM -I -F
800
FM -I -F FM -I -F
Cr)
FM ANT. TRIM.
00
455KC 4.3 MG 4.3MC 4.3MC 4.3MG 455KC FM ANT. CORE
0 8
12BE6
12BA6 15 FM OSC. GORE
12BA6 12AT7
TOP BC LOOP
TRIM.
VIEW 1400KG
OUTPUT
TRANSE BC OSC.
TRIM
1620KC
116
(Alignment continued)
BAND SIGNAL SIGNAL ADJUST

DIAL
SW. GENERATOR GENERATOR TRIMMER
SET
CONNECTED TO SET AT OR CORE REMARKS
STEP TO SET TO DUMMY
11.a_tc IF cgA2 E1 ALIGNMENT

- - - - - 7 Detune discriminator secon-
4.
dary by screwing core out
as far as it will go.
FM 12AT7 (V-1) 4.3 Mc. 8,9,10, Adjust for maximum output.

5. (extreme .001 mf
2nd FM Con- 11, 12,
high Pre-
quency end) verter Grid 13 & 14
(07 pin)
FM BAND ALIMENT Check the position of the
- - - - - 15
6.
FM Osc. tuning core 15.
Set spacing between the
core and bakelite piece
to which it is mounted,
to two turns from tight
by turning tuning core
slotted nut.
FM Ant. ter- 98 Mc 18 Tuner is set to 98 Mc by

7. 98 Mc FM None
minal moving cores out with
tuning shaft until spac-
ing between bakelite
pieces is 1-9/32". See
Figure 9. Peak 18 for
maximum output.
FM Ant. ter- 90 Mc 19 & 20 Tune in signal with re-

8. 90 Mc FM None
minal ceiver tuning knob, then
adjust 19 & 20 for maxi-
mum output.
None FM Ant. ter- 105 Mc 16 & 17 Tune in signal with re-

9. 105 Mc FM
minal ceiver tuning knob, then
adjust 16 & 17 for maxi-
mum output.
- - - Repeat Steps 8 & 9 sev-

10. - - -
eral times until further
adjustment does not in-
crease the output. Make
the final trimmer adjust-
ment at 12 Mc. (i.e.,
trimmers 19 & 20 at 1Q.5
11.9_)
None Radiate sig- 105 Mc 19 Adjust for maximum out -

11. 105 Mc FM
nal (or use Put with built-in an -
station after tenna connected.
performing
Step 12)
AugH DISCRIMINATOR SECONDARY

12. - FM .001 mf 12AT7 (V-1) 4.3 Mc 7 Adjust discriminator secon-
2nd FM Con- dary for minimum response.
verter Grid The correct adjustment is
(Pin 17) sharply defined minimum
response point between the
two peaks.
* Connect output of signal generator to a 5" diameter, 3 turn loop and radiate signal Into receiver loop.
Minimum distance between loops should never be less than 12w.
117
wElh
mei
FM -BC TUNING UNIT 50 B5
PT -14
30 50 38 12 56 I-1 T-1 V-632 R-32 T-3
66 6 1 10 4 T-7 51 19T8
V-5
C-7 52 I-+
C-8 9 4
C-6 T-6 1:4
T-5 0-0
C6 CO
T-4
04
C-41 00
46
47 1:1
T- 4
51
28
8,13
Sla
-31 CD
cD
S-3 7
O
(ON HS -97 ONLY) 15 35 18(HS-89)
PHONO 19(HS-97)
PWR, RECEPT. 11 C-1 2 PHONO PICKUP LEAD
12BE6 52 51 27 CD
(ON HS -89 ONLY) V- 2
16,36 61 54 62 12AT7 L-1 12BA6 11
PHONO
PWR. RECEPT. V-1 V-4
(ON HS -97 ONLY)
FM BC
JUMPER IN PLACE WHEN C12
NO EXTERNAL FM ANT-
ENNA IS USED. METHOD OF SETTING TUNER TO 98 MC. O
JUMPER
TURN TUNING SHAFT UNTIL DISTANCE
FOR ADDITIONAL PICK-UP BETWEEN BAKELITE PIECES IS 1-9/32"
OF STANDARD BROADCAST AS SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION.
FM BC STATIONS, CONNECT EX-
JUMPER OPENED WHEN TERNAL ANTENNA HERE.
FM ANTENNA IS USED.
CONNECT FM ANTENNA
LEAD -IN AS SHOWN. Ift
300 OHM TWIN TRANS-
MISSION LINE FROM
FM ANTENNA. FIGURE 9. TUBE & TRIMMER LOCATION
JUMPER
0rt
O
CHASSIS 01
HS -89 EXTERNAL ANTENNA TERMINALS
HS -97 PARTS LOCATION -CHASSIS HS -89 & HS -97 -BOTTOM 0
(CAPACITORS, RESISTORS, COILS, TRANSFORMERS, SWITCHES)
R-32
C-38 R-26 G-37 6-33 R-10 T-1 R-27 R-30 R-31 G-11 R-7 R-5 6-5 R-2 S-2 CD
ST1 R-28)
C-32 R-13 R11 1.4
CD
CO
...........
I.A. .rt mq
R-25 -e, ... A
3.;1-Firit.!,... 1\.)
Y-,c___ :,--1' iNlv,;. - C 20
,. ....._
(.,
c-4 0 .4? \;!'S.- AC-
1 7?0,-Ir 6-13
- ' 4_
,- .
;,-...,..t.....:...=:1
II r.lsr:,...7y * 8, /.;;Nilfr --- C-2
... a- 0
E-1 Cu
R-20 of
.4 r.W7
, ma.
T-3 R-33
1.3
C-17 R-34
C-30 / ,,
C 31 1,,iti R 35
'--."
1i\f, .'
R 21
R-22 t,
, -- .::. '-%
4b
1-6 41
C 29 ' Le
R-15 0
G-23
T-4
R-19
PJ
R-18
C -241R-14 R-17 R-9 T-2 R-1 R-8 R-12 6-10 G -I8 C-12 S
6-22 6-28 6-27 6-15 R 16 R-6 R-4 T-5 G-16 C-44 6-3 R-
w.
mak
(FRONT OF CHASSIS)
N
V-6 NOTE: A VTVM WAS USED TO TAKE MEASUREMENTS.
O 50B5 MEASUREMENTS ARE MADE FROM TUBE BASE
POWER PIN TERMINALS TO B -(b)
OUTPUT V-1
12AT7 VOLUME CONTROL ON FULL,NO STATION TUNED
IN.
1 ST. a 2ND.
FM CONV. BAND SWITCH IN FM POSITION FOR ALL
MEASUREMENTS EXCEPT AS NOTED.
WITH BAND SWITCH IN BC POSITION
9V; IN FM POSITION 0 V.
V-5 *.MEASUREMENTS MAY VARY DUE TO
1918 V-3
ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR IN CIRCUIT.
DET. AVG. 12BA6
I ST. AUDIO 2 ND. FM -I -F VOLTAGE TOLERANCE ± 10%.
BC- I -F
RESISTANCE TOLERANCE ± 20%.
K= 1000 (ONE THOUSAND) OHMS.
I = RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS.
1
=VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS.
GND =GROUND TO CHASSIS.
V-4 V-2 ALL VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS ARE DC
12BA6 128E6 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
3 RD. FM -I -F i ST. FM -I -F
BC CONY. INPUT TO SET DURING VOLTAGE MEASURE-
MENTS 117 V. AC.
FM BC
JUMPER IN PLACE WHEN
NO EXTERNAL FM ANT-
ENNA IS USED.
JUMPER
FOR ADDITIONAL PICK-UP

FM OF STANDARD 9ROADCAST
JUMPER OPENED WHEN BC
STATIONS, CONNECT EX-
FM ANTENNA IS USED. TERNAL ANTENNA .ENE.
CONNECT FM ANTENNA
LEAD-IN AS SHOwN.
500 OHM TWIN TRANS-
MISSION LINE FROM
FM ANTENNA.
JUMPER
77X/122 (Wood -Walnut) EXTERNAL ANTENNA TERMINALS

77)0422B (Wood -Blonde ) 77X1121 (Plastic -Walnut)
CHASSIS
MODELS 77XM21, 77XM22 a 77XM22B HS -102
V-4 V -S V-6
V-1 V-2 V-3 50E15
120A6 1-4 19TO
128E6 12066 POWER OUTPUT
12617 3 RO FM 1F DiSCR1M FM DISCRIM SC DE T.
1ST& 2 NO. FY CON V, 1ST FM 1-F 2 /ID FM l -F 4.3MC AVG aisr AUDIO
BC COM/ BC 1-F
EXT 110 T-2 T-3 1-7

ANT OUTPUT
0-6 4.311. 4.310 u TRANSF
C-18
-7 C-27
cI
R-23
311 12.26 .cr2M-
e. C-2, C-29
SPEAKER
1200 -3031.2 COM'

3
j.zoo
R-6 09M R-9 ED
12-24. 6-27
C-12 0.1r ?;ga
T-6
DIODE
T-5 CAT 551. C-27
22
0M 1__
C-9 C-11
L 1
1000
.cjr0-11
Or
C -T C-17
I 100MIXF
C-191
500.011F.
:2;g ,,-;4111t0
C-21
___ TAP Ar
23K
R.10
PT -14 C-14 nzl!
FM-BG
TU NG UMiT MEG
116
C-2
RC OSC
COIL
L-1
L-2
BC LOOP
AM FRI
Ztiltallaptf I
2 PO Si T,1,71
C-38 5-.11,12
AA=
NOTE
BROADCAST 53B -1620 KC
F -M - BB -100 YC
- COMMON B -
K BRE THOUSAND 110001 OHMS.
50
C-39
.540 125 v
-02
N
mob
MOTOROLA INC. MODELS 77XM21, 77XM22 & 77XM22B
CHASSIS
CHART I. ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE WHEN USING AM MODULATED Haw. JAL
GENERATOR AND STANDARD OUTPUT METER FOR COMPLETE RECEIVER ALIGNMENT

1,5,5 EC a
CHANNEL ALIGNMENT
1. 1820 Kc BC .1 mf 128E6 (V-2) BC 455 Kc 1,2,3 & 4 Adjust for maximum output.
Conv. Grid
(Pin #1)

2. 1820 Kc BC .1 mf 128E8(V-2) BC 1620 Kc 5 This sets oscillator to dial.
(gang Conv. Grid (Calibrate pointer by fully
fully (Pin f1) closing gang and noting po-
opened) sition of pointer slider.
Pointer slider should be in
line with right hand, hole in
dial background bracket as
shown in Figure 7.)
3. 1400 Kc BC None Radiation 1400 Kc 8 Tune in signal with receiver

loop* tuning knob, then peak trim-
mer 8.
1.,1 tic. IE CHANNEL ALIGNMENT

4. - - - - 7 Detune discriminator secon-
dary by screwing core out as
far as it will go.
5. iextreme FM .001 mf 12AT7 (V-1) 2nd 4.3 Mc 8,9,10,11, Adjust for maximum output.
high fre- FM Converter 12, 13 & 14
quency end) Grid(g7 Pin)
Ed tAM2 ALIGNMENT
6. - - - - - 15 Check the position of the FM
Osc. tuning core 15. Set
spacing between the core and
bakelite piece to which it is
mounted, to two turns from
tight by turning tuning core
slotted nut.
7. 98 Mc FH None FM Ant. terminal 98 Mc 18 Tuner is set to 98 Mc by

moving cores out with tuning
shaft until spacing between
bakelite pieces is 1-9/32".
See illustration. Peak 18
for maximum output
8. 90 Mc FM None FM Ant, terminal 90 Mc 19 & 20 Tune In signal with receiver

tuning knob, then adjust 19
and 20 for maximum output.
9. 105 Mc FM None FM Ant, terminal 105 Mc 16 & 17 Tune in signal with receiver
tuning knob, then adjust 16
and 17 for maximum output.
10. - - - - - - Repeat steps 8 & 9 several
times until further adjust-
ment does not increase the
output. Make the final
trimmtE adjustment at 105 Mc.
122 (I.e., trimmers 19 & 20 at

115 n.)
ALIGNMENT (cont'd)
BAND SIGNAL SIGNAL ADJUST

DIAL
GENERATOR GENERATOR TRIMMER
SET SW.
REMARKS
STEP SET TO DUMMY CONNECTED TO SET AT OR CORE
TO
None Radiate signal 105 Mc 19 Adjust for maximum output

11. 105 Mc FM
(or use station with built-in antenna con -
after performing nected.
Step 12)
ALIGN DISCRIMINATOR SECONDARY

FM .001 mf 12AT7 (V-1) 2nd 4.3 Mc 7 Adjust discriminator secon-
12. -
FM Converter Grid dary for minimum response.
(Pin i7) The correct adjustment is
sharply defined minimum
response point between the
two peaks.
* Connect output of signal generator to a 5" diameter, 3 turn loop and radiate signal into receiver loop.
Minimum distance between loops should never be less than 12".
WITH GANG FULLY CLOSED,

FIGURE 7. STRING DRIVE POINTER SLIDER SHOULD LINE
UP WITH EDGE OF HOLE.
DIAL NOTE:
BACKGROUND USE 18 LB. TEST FISH LINE.
BRACKET
FM VARIABLE
I -F TRIM. TENSION
SPRING
'
FM OSC. TRIM.
3 TURNS
TUNING SHAFT
BC DIODE FM DISC
®
FM I -F
0@0
FM -I -F FM -I -F BC I -F
0
FM ANT TRIM.
455KG 4.3MG 4.3MC 4.3MG 4.3MC 455KC FM ANT. CORE BAND SWITCH SHAFT
O 0
METHOD OF SETTING TUNER TO 98MG.
FM OSC. CORE TURN TUNING SHAFT UNTIL DISTANCE
BETWEEN BAKELITE PIECES IS I-9/32" t-9/32
AS SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION.
BC LOOP
TRIM.
1400KG
0
BC OSC. TUBE & TR I1% DER LOCATIONS
TRIM
1620KC
0 VARIABLE
I -F CORE
123
p3
C-38
(ON TOP OF CHASSIS ON
SOME MODELS SEE FIG. 10)
0-24 R-25 R-10 V-6 V-3 R-24 C-29 C 28 R-28 G-34 C-26 LS -1 C-7 C-5 C-35
R-23 R-22 R-29 T-3 R-9 S-1 C-13 R-26 T-1 R-27 G-9 C-12 R-5 L-5 G-6 R-1
,411
''11111:07111111111111
Pt......
C-23
piwzmwsnummen
ilaM am emu
CI
625 W -k441 lory
AM
711§
0
a31!1
G 27
--e, V5 C 39
713 C-33
m L-3
CA I R-21
R-12 E-1
E712R-20
H0 14 R-32
. -- C-22
Cl) G-21
8X R-19
T-6 R-31
r--- 1
CA - G-1
- 8 R-18 R-30
1
R-16 At
v't C-30
68 C-16 - -- , 14A7
106.
..g.V1101
I
ii0-18
rilirl itillillaitti*I0 'VLIIIIIIIIIIICIMMONNIMMIIIIM
4.*1011111116.11_11).ink,
111111111Moimasell
WilliM irlffiliiiii Nis ma a==ame,..-,
rim01111111111111111111SUISe4VMWt-. ... - illeVAINIIII
K
lamou iiiimmtaufmkiii.
M T-4 C-17 C-20 R-15 R-8 R-14 C-15 R-7 R 33 C-8 0-32 R-3 V-1 R-2 C-2 L-2
R-13 R-17 V-4 C-31 T-2 R-34 R-6 R-4 T-5 C-36 V-2 C-3 L-4 S-2 L-1
AKoaofa Television Receivers VT -71 and VK-101

Chassis TS -3
Motorola Models VT -71 and VK-101 Television receivers use 29 tubes

including a 10" picture tube. Antenna receptacle is provided for
either a 75 ohm unbalanced or 300 ohm balanced line. The picture I.F.
is 26.4 MC. and sound I.F. is 21.9 MC. The description of the receiv-
er will be divided into sections and reference should be made to the
complete circuit diagram or to other illustrations as instructed.
The material presented here is supplied through the courtesy of
Motorola, Inc., and is of preliminary nature. A great deal of know-
ledge of modern television design can be obtained by the serviceman
in carefully studying this material.
The R.F. tuner permits the selection of any one channel of the 13
television channels existing between 44-88 and 174-216 MC. A wave-
band switch is used. The resonant circuits involved are designed to
pass a band of about 4.5 MC. The overall receiver band pass is about
3.5 MC. as it is reduced by that of the I.F. system. See the upper
left hand corner of schematic diagram.
The secondary consists of a high and low frequency winding in
series to provide more constant impedance over the entire television
band and to avoid reflectioni which would produce ghost images in the
picture. Channels one through six are tuned by connecting capacitors
C17, C16, C15, C14, C13, C12, respectively, across the low frequency
winding L.F.S. These are trimmer condensers and each is pre -tuned at
the factory to a specific frequency in each channel. The high
quency winding (H.F.S.) beimg a very small inductance has negligible
effect on the tuning of the low channels.
For channels seven through thirteen, the low frequency winding is
effectively shorted out of the resonant circuit by means of connect-
ing capacitors C11, C10, and C9, respectively, across this winding.
Capacitor C2 which is permanently connected across the low frequency
coil, resonates the coil above channel six and serves to short the
coil more effectively in the upper channels because of the series
inductance present in the wave -band switch. Resistors R1 and R2 are
used to secure amore constant input impedance.
The R.F. amplifier employs a critically coupled double tuned cir-
cuit. The mutual coupling is provided by capacitors C18 and C19.
Each pair of coils, such as L13 -L14 of the coils numbered from Ll to
L26, is pre -tuned at the factory to the same frequency in each channel
by means of a brass slug.
This type of double tuned circuit is similar in performance to
that of the double tuned I.F. transformer of the average broadcast
receiver. The difference is that a capacitive mutual impedance rather
than an inductive mutual impedance is used. The degree of coupling
which determines the bandwidth of the pass band is controlled by the
size of the capacities of C18 and C19. The smaller the size of this
capacity, the greater will be the mutual impedance and the greater will
be the bandwidth; however, if coupling exceeds critical coupling, a
double hump will occur in the response. ,In these receivers, C18 and
C19 are so chosen that critical coupling is obtained in each channel,
and provides a pass band of approximately 4.5 MC. measured between
frequencies for which the output is 3 DB. down or .7 of the output at
the resonant frequency.
125
50.0,,,NommomoLwIER
V -11V 12 T-2
TUNER 66. 6VU6 6566T
WWI, w Scow 1-F MSC 1ST Aye um!
00
5-5 C-7
0,
C.
IPSO -F 090 VIDEO AMPLIFIER
6.45
i907
C0518,
0
517.49,14i
L"40
C -a2
R-TTUNER 404
c-34-1 "q F
ram
ISMS 7-26 C-2.5
csz 03/3 007T

0-5
Gm .1 .05M, C.39
0-53
IFS
" ;,
33 .wwfM Las
LEyYION SYSTEM
EaTT
GUOIGIPOWER
SUPPLY
T-6
C SEPARATOR C-96
0.66,06 To6
MORIWNTALOEFLECT.VMM6WMVOLTAGESUM,Y 0-126
45 .3 iT
6J5M 606 G
ocemf 6V6GT .
. TAL 64
MA neCIT
MAZZA=
0 Wrovw coaT omp
MainUm6 coAT.
6 0119
-29
SWG T-9
nur eCZ WE Eci, TIOTO AMR. Sum,
O
..C-1113
.00
103 .8
2
RSpfi
"
5 r.ix
A 91
L-70
0-12 107-150,-60-60.6-25.7199
i3 10t% R -I 0-135
Motorola Television Receivers VT -71 and VK-101, Chassis TS -3

The double capacitor C18 and C19 is composed of two large circular
plates with a third circular plate sandwiched between them and insul-
ated from the two outer plates by mica sheets. The two outer plates
are grounded and represent one side of the capacitor. The inner plate
represents the other side of the capacitor. The coupling condensers
C8 and C20 are used to keep D.C. off the exposed coils.
The oscillator circuit (the right hand section of the diagrammed
6J6, V2), is a Colpitts circuit in which the voltage developed across
the grid -cathode capacity provides the feed -back voltage necessary to
maintain oscillation. Capacitor C25 is a small variable condenser
which is provided for the operator to permit fine tuning of the
receiver to the sound carrier. The major change in frequency re-
quired in channel selection is obtained through selection of the
proper oscillator coil of which there are thirteen. These coils are
adjusted at the factory. Capacitors C22 and C24 keep the D.C. plate
voltage off the exposed coils. The very small capacity provided by
C23 has a temperature compensating characteristic and is used to
reduce oscillator frequency drift.
The mixer circuit employs e. triode tube (the other section of the
6J6) V2. Some oscillator voltage injection occurs through the com-
mon cathode lead inductance; however, coupling capacitor C21 provides
the principle source of injection voltage. The plate circuit of the
mixer is resonated by Video I.F. coil L42 to a frequency of 23.5 MC.
The sound I.F. amplifier has three stages of amplification and a
limiter. The first stage using V3, is actually the first amplifier
stage of the video I.F. amplifier system. The second and third
stages (V10 and V11) are single iron -slug tuned coils which resonate
a fixed capacitor of 20 mmfd. and the tube capacities to the operat-
ing frequency of 21.9 MC.
The limiter grid resistor R55 is kept small so that the time
constant of it and the capacitor C74 will be small; hence, when
ignition interference is present and tends to drive the limiter grid
positive, the capacitor C74 will not store the energy very long and
the interference will be reduced.
The discriminator circuit is conventional as used in F.M. receiv-
ers. The circuit uses a novel method for introducing the primary
voltage into the secondary circuit and does away with the R.F. choke
usually placed between the center tap of the secondary and center of
the load. Resistor R61 and canacitor C81 produce audio frequency
de -emphasis necessary because in the F.M. transmitter the "highs'
are over emphasized.
The audio amplifier is conventional end consists of a triode
voltage amplifier 6S8, V13 driving a 6V6, V14 in the power stage.
Resistor R69 provides audio degeneration which reduces distortion.
-0- SW
INDIVIDUAL STAGE
INDIVIDUAL STAGE RESPONSES
RESPONSE CURVES
OVERALL RESPONSE
OVERALL RESPONSE
CURVE (2 STAGES) .7A
'/A + f -.-
SINGLE FREQUENCY TUNED AMPLIFIER RESPONSE STAGGER TUNED RESPONSE 127
The video I.F. amplifier, sometimes referred to as the wide -band
amplifier, is designed to provide gain and a bandwidth of approxim-
ately 4 MC. (at .5 down) to the picture I.F. frequencies. It must
also reject the sound I.F. frequencies so as not to cause sound inter-
ference in the picture. Wide -band response and gain are accomplished
by means of a 5 -stage stagger -tuned system, four amplifiers and the
mixer. Basically, a stagger -tuned amplifier is one in which each
single tuned stage resonates at a different frequency in the pass band.
The overall response of all the stages is then considerably wider than
would be achieved with all the stages tuned to the same frequency, and
the overall gain is still as high. See figure on page 127.
To vary the gain of the video I.F. amplifier the bias of the first
three stages is changed, and is accomplished by means of the CONTRAST
control. This nomenclature is used, as varying the amount of video
signal reaching the kinescope grid determines the amount of black
and white appearing in the picture.
It is necessary to prevent the sound I.F. frequencies from reach-
ing the video detector and the sound from getting into the picture.
This is accomplished by means of the Low Frequency Trap (L.F.T.) L50
in the video I.F. amplifier which reduces the response to the sound
I.F. frequencies to 1/50 or less than that of the video I.F. fre-
quencies. This causes the low frequency skirt of the video I.F.
response to become very steep, see figure.
The trap is made up of components L50, C43, C44,and R22 end is
located in the 2nd. Video I.F. amplifier stage. By resonating this
trap to the sound I.F. carrier frequency 21.9 MC., a negative
resistance is produced which equals the value of R22 and results in a
short to ground at this frequency. This results in high attenuation
of the sound carrier and its side bands. In alignment the signal
generator is set at the sound I.F. carrier and L50 is adjusted for
minimum current in the video detector circuit.
21.9 MC.
122J 23 26 26.4
1
07 A A
ADJACENT SOUND
A OR LESS 27.9 CHANNEL OR HIGH
50 FREQUENCY TRAP.
REJECTOR
TRAP
SOUND OR LOW
FREQUENCY TRAP
VIDEO I -F RESPONSE CURVE
NOTE:
THE FREQUENCIES ON THE CURVE, OTHER THAN THOSE OF THE
SOUND AND VIDEO CARRIERS, ARE APPROXIMATE. SLIGHT VARIA-
1 TIONS WILL OCCUR BETWEEN SETS.
Servicing Notes on 1947-1948 17.114. and Television Receivers
As the sound I.F. trap does not reduce the response sufficiently
to frequencies below the sound carrier, which could result in inter-
ference from any stations operating at these frequencies, a low fre-
quency rejector trap has also been included. This rejector trap
composed of L54 and C49 resonates to 21 MC.
To eliminate interference in the picture resulting from the sound
I.F. carrier of the adjacent television channel which is 27.9 MC., a
trap has been included to attenuate this frequency to 1/50 or more
of the frequencies in the pass band. This trap is of the same type
as that used for eliminating the sound I.F. frequencies and is locat-
ed in the 1st I.F. amplifier stage. It is composed of L46, C36, C37
and R17. In alignment it is tuned for minimum current in the detector
circuit at 27.9 MC.
Please notice that the first and second I.F. stages which contain
the high and low frequency traps, have two shunt tuning coils. In
each of these stages, both coils are effectively in parallel and de-
termine the net tuning inductance; the reason for two is that they
improve the performance of the traps. Two shunt coils were found
unnecessary for the third stage containing the low frequency
rejector trap.
The video detector uses one section of the 6AL5, V7A which is a
double diode tube. The signal voltage is applied to the cathode
producing a negative polarity'video voltage across the diode load
R31. This load is only 3900 ohms in order to prevent the shunting
tube capacities from affecting the high frequency video response.
A video response of approximately 4.5 MC. is desired. The induct-
ances L59 and L60 are peaking inductances which resonate with the
tube capacities and C56 and extend the frequency response.
The video amplifier is a two stage resistance coupled system. It
is similar in operation to that used for audio amplification except
that the frequency response is much greater being approximately 4 MC.
This high frequency response is achieved by using small plate loads
and peaking L59 to L64 coils which resonate the tube capacities.
One other aspect of video amplifiers is the ability to pass the
signal without introducing phase shift. Phase shift causes distortion
due to improper displacement of picture elements. Phase shift at low
frequencies is caused by the reactance of the plate to grid coupling
capacitors. To compensate for this phase shift, the resistor -capacitor
network R34 and C60 is used. This network introduces compensation by
increasing the effective plate load at low frequencies.
To limit the amplitude of noise bursts and auto ignition type of
interference which would smear the picture and upset the synchroniza-
tion, the D.C. plate and screen voltages of the 4th video I.F. tube
and 1st video amplifier have been lowered. The use of a two stage
video amplifier system also aids in reducing trouble from noise in
that large noise amplitudes out of the detector operate in the cut-off
region of the 1st video grid. Stabilizing the 4th I.F. amplifier
plate return with a large capacitor C53 also helps reduce noise streaks
in the picture.
D.C. restoration is necessary because the video amplifiers are not
directly coupled and cannot pass the D.C. component present in the
video signal received from the detector. The D.C. component is that
which determines the average brightness of the picture and its magni-
129
tude is dependent on whether a light or dark picture is being tele-
vised at the station being received. Since the video stages are
capacitively coupled, the D.C. component is not passed; but only the
A.C. component which is the variation about the D.C. component. This
subject receives detailed treatment in the lecture on Television in
"Advanced Radio Servicing" by M. N. Beitman.
In the Motorola television sets, the D.C. restorer consists of the
second section of the 6AL5 double diode V7B used in the video detector
circuit and is connected into the grid circuit of the kinescope. The
D.C. restorer load is R47 across which a positive voltage is developed
when the video signal is applied. The positive restorer voltage re-
duces the negative voltage applied by the Brightness Control R130 and
determines the average brightness. Since the diode is connected with
its plate below its cathode on the resistor string, it will conduct
only on the negative amplitude of the video signal. This means that
the D.C. restorer voltage produced across R47 will be nearly that of
the negative amplitude. The D.C. restorer voltage is maintained for
a time approximately a frame period, becPuse during the period that
the restorer diode is conductive, condenser C64 is charged to the D.C.
voltage developed across R47; and when the tube is non-conductive, this
charge must leak through a resistive path made up of R47, R46, R44 and
R43. Since R47 is particularly high, it takes a comparatively long
time for the D.C. voltage on C64 to change.
In order to synchronize the sweep voltages of the horizontal and
vertical deflection systems, it is necessary to first separate the
synchronizing pulses from the video component. By taking the Sync.
Amplifier input voltage from a point in the kinescope grid circuit
below the D.C. Restorer, the D.C. Restorer tube aids in the Sync. sep-
aration. This action comes about from the difference in Sync. Ampli-
fier input voltage when the tube is conducting as compared to when it
is not. To understand this action, consider the method of obtaining
the Sync. Amplifier input voltage. It is seen to be the voltage
developed across R46, R45,and R130 are by passed by capacitor C65. On
the positive half of the video signal applied to the D.C. Restorer,
the Restorer tube V7B does not conduct as its plate is then negative
with respect to its cathode. The Sync. Amplifier input voltage is then
the fraction 33/1043 of the kinescope grid voltage or voltage across
R44 and, as can be seen, is quite small. On the negative half of the
video signal, the Restorer tube conducts and presents a series imped-
ance of several hundred ohms. This effectively shunts R47 and makes
the Sync. Amplifier input voltage 33/43 of the kinescope grid voltage.
This means that approximately 24 times as much Sync. signal is applied
to the Sync. Amplifier on the negative half of the video signal which
contains the Sync. pulses and some video than on the positive half
which contains mainly the video component. Because of the presence of
some video component on the negative half of the composite signal, the
Sync. input voltage still contains an appreciable amount of video and
further stripping is necessary.
The Sync. Separator removes the synchronizing pulses from the com-
posite video signal. It also stabilizes and limits the amplitude of
the synchronizing pulses so that a constant pulse amplitude is applied
to the deflection systems for a weak or strong video signal. It is a
three -stage system containing a pulse stabilizing amplifier, a pulse
stripper, and a pulse limiter.
The purpose of the pulse stabilizing amplifier is to amplify the
"Sync" pulses and also stabilize the output so that the output will
tend to remain constant for a wide range of input voltages. This
130 stabilization or compression is accomplished by operation over

non-linear portion of the plate current -grid voltage curve.
V-15 is a 6SK7 tube and has a remote plate current cut-off characteris-
tic. The signal received from the kinescope is of negative polarity
and tends to drive the tube toward plate current cut-off. With a weak
signal, the "Sync" pulse operates over the relatively high gain portion
of the curve, while on large signals, the "Sync" pulse operates over a
lower gain portion of the curve. The result is a more constant "Sync"
pulse amplitude.
The pulse stripper stage of the Sync. Separator V16 clips the sig-
nal at just above the blanking level and removes all of the video com-
onent from the "Sync" pulses. This is accomplished by driving the
grid of the Stripper positive. A negative bias voltage proportional
to the "Sync" signal is developed across grid resistor R72 and this
bias is of such value that plate current flows only during the peak
portion of the signal received from the stabilizing amplifier.
The shunt capacitor C91 serves to reduce the high frequency compon-
ents of the video signal reaching the grid of the stripper. The coup-
ling capacitor C92 is made small to discriminate against low frequency
voltage changes that would cause the "Sync" pulses to move up and down
and cause the picture to jitter. However, the use of a small coupling
capacitor causes differentiation of the vertical pulse group, that is,
the grid coupling condenser C92 charges up rapidly on the wide vertical
pulses which causes the pulse at the grid to have a saw -tooth shaped
top, as shown in the left hand figure at the bottom of the page.
The pulse limiter stage flattens the top of the vertical pulses
received from the clipper so that a good square shaped pulse is applied
to the integrating circuit which provides the resultant vertical pulse
that "Syncs" the vertical blocking oscillator. It also helps provide
a more constant pulse amplitude for change of signal input level.
A 6J5 triode V17 is used and is operated at zero bias. The "Sync"
pulse applied is negative going but the coupling condenser C95 pro-
duces an A.C. axis which because of the width of the pulses and the
diort interval between pulses is located close to the top of the "Sync"
pulses. The positive component is then very large and drives the grid
positive producing a bias voltage across R76 which is quite large, see
figure at right belowcn this page. This bias voltage is represented by
Ec. The top part of the pulse wnich as the saw -tooth shape then falls
beyond the cut-off point and is, therefore, clipped producing a square
pulse in the plate circuit.
Ip
Ip
-E8 0 #E5, 0 7ES

CO
311
I WAVEFORM - STRIPPER ACTION ,q WAVEFORM - LIMITER 131

The vertical deflection system generates the 60 cycle saw -tooth
voltage. It is a four circuit arrangement involving three tubes. It
consists of a pulse integrator, a blocking oscillator, a discharge
tube, and an output amplifier. The pulse integrating circuit generates
contained in the
one large pulse from the vertical group of six pulses
composite video signal. This integrated pulse is then used to syn-
chronize the blocking oscillator. The blocking oscillator generates
a large positive pulse which is applied to the discharge tube grid and
makes it conductive. This tube then discharges a capacitor across
which the saw -tooth sweep voltage is developed. The output amplifier
converts this sweep voltage into the sweep current that is used to
deflect the kinescope beam.
The pulse integrator circuit consists of a double RC filter in the
grid return circuit of the vertical blocking oscillator. It is com-
nosed of resistors R78 and R79 and capacitors C97 and C98, see the
schematic diagram. The vertical group of pulses consisting of six
equalizing followed by six field pulses and then six more equalizing
pulses is applied to the integrator through capacitor C96. The time
constants of R78 and C97, R79 and C98 are so large that capacitors
C97 and C98 charge very little during each equalizing pulse period.
As the interval between equalizing pulses is larger than the pulse
period, any charge due to the equalizing pulses leaks off. During the
periods of the six field pulses, however, capacitors C97 and C98 are
charged appreciably since the field pulses are quite wide, further
since the interval between field pulses is very short, very little of
the charge can leak off before the next pulse is applied. The result
is the charge builds up on each field pulse creating a pulse of
sufficient size to reduce the negative voltage on the grid of the
blocking oscillator tube to a value less than cut-off and starts the
oscillator cycle. The vertical "sync" pulse built up in the integrator
leaks off in the long interval between vertical pulse groups.
The blocking oscillator is a regenerative arrangement. The oscil-
lator tube which is one section of a 6SN7, V18 has its plate circuit
coupled to its grid circuit by means of the transformer T4. This oscil-
lator produces a varying voltage on the grid that is used to control
the discharge tube. The circuit arrangement produces a very sharp
positive grid voltage rise. The peak value is limited by grid satura-
tion. The positive grid voltage gradually drops from the peak until a
reversed action takes place and the grid voltage drop through negative
values to cause plate current cut-off. The negative charge on C99
prevents immediate reversal of the action. The action would reverse
in time and continue even without the "sync" pulse, but this pulse
triggers the -action and produces these oscillations, at the same fre-
quency as the vertical synchronizing pulses.
The discharge tube is the second section of the 6SN7, V18, used
as the blocking oscillator. Its grid is tied directly to that of the
blocking oscillator grid so that during the non -conduction period of
the oscillator it is also cut-off. Capacitor C101 then charges
through resistors R133, R85, R82 and R132. Capacitor C101 continues
to charge until the positive pulse produced by the blocking oscillator
causes the discharge tube to conduct which discharges capacitor C101
quickly through the tube plate resistance and resistors R82 and R132.
Resistor R82 and the variable resistor R132 are placed in series with
capacitor C101 in order to produce a saw -tooth voltage of the shape
in deflection
necessary to produce a linear cnange of current
coils which contain both resistance and inductance.
132
Servicing Notes on 1947-1948 17.114. and Television Receivers
The variable resistance R133 serves to control the size of the
sweep voltage since it determines the time constant or rate at which
the capacitor charges. The variable resistance R132 is a linearity
control as it determines the amplitude of the square pulse component
which produces linear current through the inductance of the deflection
coil. Indirectly it also affects the size so a readjustment of the
size control is usually necessary when the linearity control is changed.
The output amplifier V19 is a power stage and serves to convert
the voltage wave into a current wave of the same shape. This is done
by means of the output transformer in the plate which is a step down
transformer of approximately 8/1. The second linearity control R134
affects the bias of the 6V6 output tube and, therefore, controls the
linear operating characteristic of the output stage. It tends to
correct for any non -linearity in the sweep voltage applied to the grid
or any non-linear deflection characteristic of the kinescope.
Resistances R111 and R112 shunted across the vertical deflection
coils serve to dampen any oscillation which might occur in these coils
as a result of the distributed capacity resonating with the coil induc-
tance. The Vertical Centering Control is the potentiometer R137 and
controls the amount of D.C. current through the vertical deflection
coils L72 and L74.
The horizontal deflection system generates the horizontal sweep
current. The shape of this current is similar to that in the vertical
deflection coils, but its frequency is much higher being 15,750 c.p.s.
It also incorporates an automatic frequency control system (AFC) for
synchronizing the generated sweep voltage to the frequency of the line
"Sync" pulses. It differs from the vertical "Sync" method in that
horizontal synchronization is not deterinined by each consecutive line
pulse but rather by the frequency of the line pulses, thereby, reducing
considerably the interference caused by noise pulses which tend to upset
synchronization.
The deflection system also contains EC discharge tube V23 for gener-
ating the desired shape of sweep voltage and an output amplifier V24 to
convert the voltage wave into a current wave in the deflection coils.
The output amplifier performs one other function and that is to gener-
ate a high pulse voltage which is rectified and used on the anode of
the kinescope.
from the
A very high voltage results in the transformer T-7 winding during
rapid change in plate current when the discharge tube is cut-off
By using an auto -transformer arrangement in the
the retrace time.
primary, a very high pulse voltage of approximately 10,000 volts is
the kine-
developed, which is rectified by tube V25 and is applied to
scope anode. Capacitor C124, Resistor R110 and the capacity between
the inner and outer Aquadag coating on the kinescope glass, C126,
provide a filter circuit that eliminates the 15,750 c.p.s. ripple
voltage which would otherwise exist.
Cathode ray tubes using magnetic deflection present the problem of
burning the screen by the negative ions existing in the beam. These
ions are thousands of times heavier than the electrons and though
charged are little affected by the magnetic field. In an electrostatic
deflection system the ions are also acted on by the electron fields, so
this problem does not exist. To prevent the dark spot resulting from
the burning of the screen by the ions, the electron gun of the 10BP4
magnetic type cathode ray tube used in this receiver is located in the
tube at a slight angle to the axis of the tube. This causes the beam
to strike the side of the tube rather than the face. By using
the Ion Trap which is a small double coil arrangement mounted 133
on the neck of the tube, a magnetic field is set up that acts on the
electrons in the beam and bends them so that they strike the tube face.
The alignment procedure is not included in this text since our main
objective in this instance was to give the general theory of operation.
Because stagger -tuned I.F. system is used, the alignment frequencies
and procedure is critical.
Faults in a television receiver can be localized by examining vari-
ous raster distortions, or limitations in the quality of the picture
obtained. The hints given below are suggestive and can be applied to
other television receivers. It is recommended that you study these
possible faults by referring to the diagram on page 126.
No Raster on Kinescope Signal at Kinescope Grid, But No Sys

Ion trap out of adjustment Too much video I.F. gain
V22, V23, V24, or V25 defective Open C90
No high voltage -- T7 defective Defective V15, V16, V17
(open or shorted primary,
open V25 fil. winding) Raster, but No Sound, Pict. or Sync
Defective V26 or 10BP4 Defective R.F. Amplifier
R.F. oscillator dead
Small. Raster Defective V3, open C29
Low V24 or V29 Ant. coil pri. shorted to ground
Partial short in T7 Picture Stable but Poor Resolution
Shorted C122 or C123
Low B voltage Open L59, L62, L63, or L60
Open C105 or C106 Video I.F. out of alignment
Low line voltage R.F. tuner much out of alignment
Picture Smeared
Trapezoidal Raster Video I.F. bandwidth excessive
Improper Ion Trap adjustment Video stages overloaded
Poor focus coil adjustment Low bias voltage on V8 & V9
Defective yoke Condensers C61 or C63 leaky
No Horizontal Deflection, Vert. Low Video Sensitivity
Open 173 or L75 Weak tubes in R.F., video I.F.
Open secondary T7 Improper video I.F. & R.F. align.
No Vertical Deflection, Horiz. O.K. Shorted Ant. coil pri. to ground
Open L72, L74, C100 Sound "Bars" in Picture
Open or shorted T5 Fine tuning control improperly se
Defective V18 or V19 Low freq. trap L50 adjustment
Open or shorted T4 L50 open or shorted
Poor Horizontal Linearity C43 or C44 shorted or open
Improper adjustment of R136, L70 Low Screen Intensity
Defective V24 or V26
Weak V24 or V23 tube
No Sound, Picture O.K. Partially shorted T7
Open speaker voice coil Improper Ion Trap adjustment
Defective V14, V13, V12, V11, Vii Defective V26 or V25 tube
Improper R.F. osc. frequency Open C121 or C120 condenser
Defective T2 or T3 Low line voltage
Shorted COO or C81
Band switch on wrong channel
134
MAI-. WOLF ANTENNA 1 M1
WO,
AN, COM
5066/)
- For. LA 682612) ' 68A6 (3)
"TZArZT
PALS 6S07 (I) 666-GT/ (I) 0,
OAA? TA-ioaol INomr 1O -MOM
WA 1 4,5
oNjemoodo e 11 ::13;3
3Mo It ITURNle
Name NM L5 L6
VO0010 ON 0491
C
-
a 0SCILL On
CS
C4
OMR
jANN 1.101,(0. ON 'NO rookosis
z
IC
11511.01orlD
STS-GTre
I 1IN
I. Nu Orsofnaf zo OXMAN, Goo who,. Ositols Onoommosa OftoINED.

2. Nu moo CONOONNtios NOS "rotAMONON,MON.o. OTIOpromMt SPONIFINO.
105-121V,ttAusooLv IMO StLECTON NOM. MM. No .kl MOM..
O. Ou_o. vOtroMONS Neoltylel0 ileromEN Morn INENCAllm NIOUNO.IMIN
MAXIM CONTR. NINA. oN NM Mole MIA No-ool: POSITO011.
MON COW FON 1, *N.

IL MOM
To remove the chassis from the console, it is first necessary to disconnect the loop connector plug, the female connector
plug on the speaker, the phono input plug, the motor plug and the two F.M. lugs on the F.M. antenna terminal post. Then remove
OLYMPIC RADIO the four knobs and the four screws holding the chassis to its mounting panel.
ALIGNMENT
Models 7-925, 7-934, 7-936, 7-939 Equipment Required: Modulated a -m, r -f signal generator; modulated f -m signal generator covering the range from 88 to
108 megacycles; vacuum tube voltmeter; output meter; insulated screw driver; radiation loop (1 turn of about 6" to 8" diameter of
14-12 or ,114 wire connected across output of signal generator and placed parallel to receiver loop about 8" or 10" away); one .1
mfd 400 volt condenser; two 150 ohm resistors.
With the receiver removed from the cabinet, connect output meter, or vacuum tube voltmeter and signal generator as
indicated in the alignment procedure chart and keeping the output of the generator as low as possible, proceed exactly in the
sequence as shown on the chart.
f) Before aligning, close the variable condenser fully counter clockwise (plates fully closed) and check that pointer coincides
with the reference line on the dial.
RADIO OLYMPIC TRU-BASE
Models 7-925, 7-934, 7-936, 7-939
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE CHART
ADJUST THE FOLLOWING -
TURN RE AD
CONNECT HIGH SIDE OF SET SIGNAL (KEEP SIGNAL FROM SIGNAL GENERATOR
SET BAND POINTER OUTPUT
SIGNAL GENERATOR GENERATOR
ON- AS LOW AS POSSIBLE).
STEP SWITCH TO-
TO- TO-
ON-
VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER L5 (RATIO DETECTOR)
ACROSS 6800 OHM RESISTOR FOR MAXIMUM READING.
(SEE 7C ON CIRCUIT DIAGRAM).
PIN 1 OF 6BA6 (3) TUBE
1 F. M. VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER L6 (RATIO DETECTOR)
FOR .1 VOLT SIGNAL. ACROSS 'El. ON
10.7 MC. FOR ZERO READING.
SIFTED CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
SIGNAL. C13 AND C12 (21.. LE. TRANSFORMER)
EXTREME RIGHT HAND
VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER FOR MAXIMUM READING.
2 F.M. PIN 7 OF 6BE6 TUBE POSMCN. (CONDENSER
ACROSS 6800 OM RESISTOR
C11 AND 010 (1 it I.F. TRANSFORMER)
IN SERIES WITH A .1MFD.. PLATES FULLY OPEN).
(SEE VON CIRCUIT DIAGRAM). FOR MAXIMUM READING.
3 F.M. 400 VOLT CONDENSER.
C9 AND 08 (2eo. LE TRANSFORMER)
R.F SECTION OF VARIABLE FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT.
4 A.M. CONDENSER OR PIN 7 OF OUTPUT METER ACROSS
THE 68E6 TUBE IN SERIES 455 KG SPEAKER VOICE COIL. C7 AND C6 (I it I.F. TRANSFORMER)
WITH A .1 MFD.,400 VOLT FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT.
5 A.M.
CONDENSER.
REPEAT STEPS 2 AND 3.
6 F.M. CS (OSCILLATOR TRIMMER)
1700 KC. 1700 KC. ON DIAL. FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT.
7 A.M. ANTENNA SECTION OF
VARIABLE CONDENSER C2 (R.F. TRIMMER)
RESONANCE, APPROXIMATELY OUTPUT METER ACROSS
OR PIN 1 OF THE 68A6 1500 KC. FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT.
8 A.M. 1500 KC. ON DIAL. SPEAKER VOICE COIL.
TUBE IN SERIES WITH C4 (PADDER)
A /MED., 400 VOLT RESONANCE, APPROXIMATELY ROCK %/BASLE FOR MAXIMUM SIGNAL.
AM. 600 KC. 600 KC. ON DIAL.
9 CONDENSER.
REPEAT STEPS 7, 8 AND 9.
10 A.M. LI (ANTENNA LOADING COIL)
RESONANCE, APPROXIMATELY
USE RADIATED SIGNAL 600 KC. ROCK VARIABLE FOR MAXIMUM SIGNAL.
11 A.M. 600 Kt ON DIAL. OUTPUT METER ACROSS
(CONNECT BOTH SIDES SPEAKER VOICE COIL. CI (ANTENNA TRIMMER)
OF SIGNAL GENERATOR RESONANCE, APPROXIMATELY FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT.
1500 KC.
12 A.M. TO RADIATION LOOP).1500 KC. ON DIAL.
13 A.M. 05 (OSCILLATOR TRIMMER)
(08 IAC. 108 sia ON DIAL. FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT
14 F.M. OUTPUT METER ACROSS
SPEAKER VOICE COIL. L4 (OSCILLATOR COIL)
CONNECT F.M. SIGNAL 88 MC. ON DIAL
88 MC. FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT.
F.M. GENERATOR TO DIPOLE (CHECK IMAGE AT 109.4 MC.).
15
TERMINAL POSTS WITH
16 F.M. A 150 OHM RESISTOR L3 (RE. COIL)
IN SERIES WITH EACH FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT.
SIDE. 30% MODULATED OUTPUT METER ACROSS
102 MC. 102 MC. ON DIAL. SPEAKER VOICE COIL. L2 (ANTENNA COIL)
17 F.M. SIGNAL.
FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT.
Ir0 w 0c,.
0,
0 L.,
<)--
6<
<K5
i
_I <w
w0 cr 0 1- 0 _J 0 8
2 Ce ...,
3 Z ®
> 8 \ 1.-- N
to
0 - Ell t-
58
A. g \ pc,--
..
,-
2 En
T
.z [ O -
N
i
I
1-
W L,,
00
..._.,
0 0, ...R i
aI- U. .
cc
w 2-
t...) gi,
0,, 0 0
0-
'i''
0
---._ a 4, 7 )-
.0 itl
0 4-
-
8 CE3 V lt
<
_J Wx \9 - -- -.7 ,-: ce
La I- 5
.
La 411b4_,,,, f,2
5
O-
1, ta
LI 5
re
,t,
c,
1-- EL 0
lC-
© 1.. ,'
En En
2 5
II
o5
-1 4,
X 1. .....] em 0
Eli'
0 1 i--) Li 0
5 -.0
0- 0
'..-., u. 2
-
w
' cn
I
._ 8c4. I 1
1111 17)
22
I
-.... t...
5. 2 z -i- DI z 1
0.I
.
,,
+ .-.., ocr
<:.---
F- _r z<I
,± z 0-
,
0; 40 _J
4
ZWZ g i.
E
o- La
CCsr E- lal
-I .--
ici c7
i_ m ^ oom ,_2 r7 2 0 w _i 0 0- x L.JF.
op
Of 4 5 ,_.. .1 6 . ox Oa o
I-, '" 0 L1- 1- 4 o-
0)
00 .05 r 0 oo
, 01
00
136 0-1 0-0. Cl) -O-
.3 -.1. _1 CCU
Aria4440eii
SERVICE DATA - MODEL 872 - FM TUNER
Tubes:
Tube Function
6BA6 R. F. Amplifier
6BE6 Converter Oscillator
6BA6 1st. I. F. Amplifier
6BA6 2nd. I. F. Amplifier
6BA6 Driver Tube
6AL5 Ratio Detector
6C4 Audio
5Y3 Rectifier
GENERAL INFORMATION
1 1 1 1 111 1 11111' 1111111111011M1111111NIEN1111 1 1 1 1 1 1'111 11 1_
Model 872 is a tuner designed to receive fre-
quency -modulation signals in the Frequency -
Modulation Band which extends from 88 to 108
SPECIFICATIONS megacycles. It may be fastened inside the record
Overall Dimensions : compartment of any Packard -Bell console type
Weight radio phonograph. If it is not practical to incorpo-
Height 71-/2" Chassis 7 lb. rate the tuner and regular broadcast receiver, the
Width 12" Cabinet 4 lb. tuner can be purchased complete with its own
Depth Total . . . 111b. cabinet.
Electrical Rating: Outstanding Features of the 872 Tuner are:
Line Voltage . . . 110-120 volts 50-60 cycle A.C. 1. Ratio Type Detector which is more sensitive
Power Consumption . . 52 watts to desired FM signals and less sensitive
Tuning Frequency Range : to undesirable noise than types of detectors
Frequency Modulation Band . . 88-108Mc previously used.
Intermediate Frequency :
10.7 Mc 2. Two I.F. Stages assuring adequate sensitiv-
Electrical Power Output: ity, and permitting the reception of weak
This tuner is designed to operate into the (distant) FM stations with good volume.
3. Miniature Type Tubes, advantageous to FM
amplifier of any regular broadcast receiver. because of their size.
The output voltage is comparable to that of 4. Folded Doublet Antenna giving good pickup
the crystal pickup used on the phonograph. when located on back of radio cabinet and
A signal from an average strong station will maximum pickup when located as high as
give an audio output of 1 to 3 volts. possible above surrounding terrain.
Loudspeaker:
The speaker will be that of the receiver into
which the tuner is operating.
DIPOLE 6BA6 60E6 6BA6 6E06
(t)
3-9 CI R C10 Co cm
ds CAA CT 9011
4--K-c
T WI! 100K
0.
ailts.411lot 1111
COS
.C"
5Y3 GT
it0 VAC
50 ION
CIO
tO
let
120 41014.1
1000 PACKARD -BELL
MODEL B72
SWITCH ICI ON FACTOR
137
glelvidffelte MODEL 872 Oscillator Cathode Voltages:
This measurement should not be made as it is
SPECIAL SERVICE INFORMATION impossible to connect a meter to the cathode
without disturbing the proper functioning of
Stage Gain Measurements: the oscillator circuit. Fortunately, oscillators
Stage gains are measured by connecting the either operate or do not function at all at these
VTVM to AVC (point A) and proceding back- frequencies. Make usual overall sensitivity
wards stage by stage and calculating gain of measurements to determine if oscillator is
desired stage. functioning.
Audio Gain . . 10X at 400 cycles
.
D.C. Resistance Measurements.
Ratio Detector Sensitivity . . . 100,00 microvolts All three I.F. Coils are identical
on driver grid results in approximately 3.0 Primary . 0.6 ohms Secondary 0.6 ohms
volts as measured at AVC point.
Second I.F. Gain . . . 20X at 10.7 Mc Ratio Detector Coil
First I.F. Gain . . . 20X at 10.7 Mc Primary . 1.2 ohms Secondary 0.2 ohms
Converter Gain . . This measurement can not
. R. F. Coils
be made accurately. The gain is approxi- These coils are wound with heavy wire and
mately 5X at 100 Mc have only a few turns. Their resistances are
R.F. Gain . . 5X at 100 Mc
.
extremely low and will read zero on any ohm-
Antenna Gain . . . 1.2X at 100 Mc meter test.
MODEL 872 ALIGNMENT CHART
CONNECT TEST METER ADJUST -

TEST OSC. OSC. CONNEC. MENT
TO SETTING TO
STEP S-2
1 "C" Driver 10.7 Mc A Slug S-1 S-8 S-6 S-4
Grid Max. Output
2 "C" Driver 10.7 Mc B *Slug S-2
Grid Zero Center 3RD. I.F
Output I ST. If: 2ND. I.E RATIO
3 "E" 2nd 10.7 Mc A **Slugs S-3 DETECTOR
I.F. Grid S-4

Max. Output ®
4 "G" 1st 10.7 Mc A Slugs S-5, S-6
I.F. Grid Max. Output
5 "I" Cony. 10.7 Mc A Slugs S-7, S-8
Grid Max. Output
6 Antenna 108. Mc A Trimmer C-8 BOTTOM VIEW
Max. Output
7 Antenna 105 Mc A Trimmer C-7
Max. Output
8 Antenna 96 Mc A Slug S-9
Max. Output
604
5Y3 GT/G
6BA6
RATIO
S-3
6846 S-5 68A6 S-7
0
,, 250 VAC
6C4
250 0
VAC0
0 260
0 OQ 3.5 S -I
2ND.I.E 1 ST. 1.F..
00
60 DETECTOR
260-
5Y3 GT/G
5.4
VAC 0 0 0
60
C-7
0 CBE 6BA6
6AL5
6BA6 6BA6 6BA6 O 8
o
0 0 0
0 5.4 5.4 5.4
0 0 VAC 0
175
0 0 AG
175
0 0 VAC
170
TOP ' VIEW
1.0 0 2 LO 40 0 82 1.7 co 0 100
- TRIMMER LOCATIONS
180
0 180
100
5.4 5.4
VAC 0 0
NOTE: * As slug S-2 (Bottom of Ratio Detector Coil)
VAC
.75
5.4
is turned back and forth, a direct -current voltage of posi-
0
VAC tive or negative polarity should be observed if detector is
0 0 0 0 0 functioning properly. Adjust for zero (center) output.
6BA6 6BE6 6AL5 ** A resistive shunt consisting of 1000 ohms in series
with 100 mmf should be used. Connect shunt from point
"C" (on schematic) to ground and adjust slug S-3. Move
shunt from point "C" to point "D" and adjust slug S-4.
VOLTAGE CHART Same procedure for 1st I.F. and converter.
138 For steps 6, 7, and 8, the tuner should be set to the

required frequency.
PILOTUNER
PILOT RADIO - MODEL T-601
Tuning Range 88-108 Mc.
ALIGNMENT CHART
(Follow sequence as indicated)
RCVR. SIGNAL GEN. TRIMMER OR PROCEDURE
STEP DIAL METER METER CONNECTIONS
CIRCUIT SLUG ADJUSTMENT
ALIGNED POINTER FREQ. CONNECTIONS
Through mfd. VTVM Across two 100K resistors S2, SI, Adjust for maximum out-
IF 88 me 10.7 mc .01
cap. to grid of -indicated by dotted S4, S3, put
613E6 lines in schematic 56, S5
2
Repeat Step No I
From: Junction of two Adjust meter to zero

10.7 mc Same as No. I VTVM SI (Check proper zero set)
Ratio 3 88 mc 100K resistors
TO: Audio output of Meter should register re-
Detector verse polarity when slug
ratio detector. Connec-
tions indicated by dot- is rotated through zero
ted lines in schematic output.
4 90 mc 90 mc Through carbon VTVM Same as Step No. I P8 Same as Step No. I
Oscil-
lator 300 ohm resistor
to Ant. Terminal
Same as No. T7 Same as No. I

5 106 mc 106 mc Same as No. 4 VTVM I
6 Repeat Steps No. 4 & 5
Same as No. PIO Same as No. I

7 90 mc 90 mc Same as No. 4 VTVM I
Same as No. T9 Same as No. I
RF 8 106 mc 106 mc Same as No. 4 VTVM I
TO ALIGN RECEIVER USE FREQUENCIES AS

5, RATIO DETECTOR SEC 0.7 MC T9 INDICATED ON LEFT. ADJUST ALL TRIMMERS
St RATIO DETECTOR PRI. 0.7 MC FOR MAX. D C OUTPUT ACROSS 33K.11 RESISTOR
SS 2501.F. SEC. 0.7 MC T7 PB
07 MC IN 6 AL5 CIRCUIT.
S. 2.01.F PRI.
TO ALIGN SECONDARY OF RATIO DETECTOR
Ss 15T I.F. SEC. 07 MC
Se 1311F .PRI. 07 MC S2 UPPER CONNECT METER AS INDICATED IN SCHEMATIC
06 MC. SE
IT 05C. TRIMMER
90 MC AND ADJUST 5,, FOR ZERO OUTPUT.
Ps OSC. PADDER S, LOWER
Is ANT TRIMMER 06
90 rC
t'i1C
'To
Pa R F.. PADDER
1st IF a CAN ASSY RATIO DETECTOR a CAN ASSY.
273-117 279-34
56 si
Kn-1000-, 1
ALL CONDENSERS 400V
UNLESS OTHERWISE
INDICATED
i
p_
ozl
2 I
L
0 :
6AL5
6846 6BA6 7
5
2 6
5
7 4
3
_ 1500
-7 =
1500ppf
6 I
r
180ppf
01 pf .r. )--,5 I
33K
*-1( 2
24-77
00555f
-Lv_t y OF oft e LDIEG TN Em NT
ONLY *
ON POWER I
SWITCH 110.1' 0 1500ppf
10 ppf j" 55-13
1111
.05pf
50 69 7T
1111
Ali 75-19 PHONO-- FM
INPUT OUTPUT
139
100-125 V ANT LINE
LINE CORD
60 f.A.C. 103-18 ' 47 MAZDA
Z. 'Tot v. 68-6
C. For distant FM stations: In a few cases, an outside FM
wpmeh dipole an-
BRIEF tenna may be found to be necessary when the FM PILOTUNER is
oper-
INSTRUCTION ated at a great distance from the broadcasting station, or under unusual
O LABEL operating conditions. The outside dipole antenna (equipped with a 300 ohm
I
flat lead-in) should be connected to terminals No. and No. 3, after the wire
TERMINAL I
link between terminals No. and No. 2 has been disconnected.
CONNECTIONS
The FM PILOTUNER is a
tx==.
complete, superheterodyne frequency
modulation unit, consisting of 5 miniature tubes and a selenium rectifier. It
contains its own power supply, designed for AC operation only. ...----OUTSIDE DIPOLE
it does not contain a loudspeaker and audio system. However,
Therefore, the FM
PILOTUNER must be connected and
operated through your own radio
receiver, or separate phonograph, record player or amplifier system. All in-
stallation connections from and to the FM PILOTUNER are made to the
I CONNECTIONS FROM PILOTUNER TO RADIO RECEIVER
terminals on the back of the cabinet, numbered from to 7.
A brief resume of the installation instructions is printed on the label A 5 ft. shielded cable is furnished with
attached to the back of the cabinet. the FM PILOTUNER to facilitate connecting
ANTENNA CONNECTIONS the tuner to your radio receiver, or separate
phonograph, record player or
The choice of antenna to be used for the best FM reception amplifying
depends on system. One end of this cable is provided
many factors: your location, the type of building, power and distance of the with spade lugs for easy connection to the
FM station. The three main types of antennas are explained below. Test terminals at the back of the PILOTUNER.
FM PILOTUNER and choose the one most practical for your
your use. Attach the center wire of one end of the connector cable to terminal
A. For local high-powered FM stations: No. 7; attach the outside shielded wire of the same end of the connector
The PILOTUNER, when cable to terminal No. 6.
shipped from the factory, is equipped with a permanent built-in antenna that
will be satisfactory for good reception of most local FM stations.
This built-in OUTSIDE SHIELDED
antenna is connected internally through a wire link between terminals No. I WIRE OF CENTER WIRE OF
and No. 2. For best results when 6
using the built-in antenna, keep the electric CONNECTOR
line cord extended to its full length and separated from the connector CONNECTOR GABLE
of the PILOTUNER. cable CABLE
I 2
WIRE LINK Now, the FM PILOTUNER is ready for attachment to your radio
107-70) receiver. The method of connecting the PILOTUNER will depend on whe-
ther the radio receiver is a combination set with phonograph, a radio with
B. For local weak -powered FM phonograph outlet only, or a radio without phonograph or phonograph outlet.
stations: Improved reception of weak
FM stations may be obtained, in some localities, by disconnecting the wire
1
link between terminals No. and No. 2, and attaching a 4 ft. length of wire
to terminal No. I. Keep this wire stretched out at full length in order Alignment of the PILOTUNER should be done by a competent radio
to service technician, provided the proper output meter and signal generator
secure the maximum signal pick-up. are available. Insulated alignment tools
are necessary. The output meter
should be a D.C. vacuum tube voltmeter with a range of at least 20 volts.
The signal generator should cover the frequencies of 10.7, 90 and 106 mc.
Allow the PILOTUNER to warm up for at least 30 minutes before making
adjustments. The location of the adjustment screws is indicated clearly any
on
the schematic diagram. Follow the sequence in the alignment chart.
610V2 (RC -610) FM Ratio Detector Alignment
RANGE SWITCH IN FM POSITION-VOL. CONT. MAXIMUM
RCAVICTOR Steps
Connect high
side of sig.
gen. to-
Signal gen-
erator output
Adjustments and
indications
VICTROLA 610V1, 610V2 1

Connect a 680 ohm resistor between pins 5 and 7 of
the ratio detector tube 6AL5. Connect the d -c probe of
a VoltOhmyst to the negative lead of the 5 mid. capac-
itor, C20, t..e common lead of the VoltOhmyst to chassis.
Chassis No. RC -610C RC -610
Pin 1 of driver 10.7 mc. modu- Driver trans. T5,
AM -FM Radio -Phonograph Combination tube 6AU6 in bated 30% 400 for max. d -c
series with cycles AM across C20
2 (Approx. 14.5
.01 mfd. (Approx. .25
Circuit Description volt) volts)
Models 610V1 and 610V2 have individual built-in antennas for Disconnect the VoltOhmyst and the 680 ohm resistor
FM and AM coupled to individual 1st Det.-Osc. tubes (6BE6 VI from tne 6ALS. Connect two 68,000 ohm resistors (within
and V2). The outputs of these two tubes are connected to sepa- 1../. of earn other) in series across the 22,000 ohm re-
rate IF transformers (T1 and T2) whose secondaries are in series sistor R17. Connect the common lead of the VatOhmyst
and connected to the IF amplifier tube (6BA6 V3). The output 3 to the center point of the 68,000 ohm resistors andtrans.
the
of V3 is connected to separate IF transformers (T3 and T4) whose d -c probe to terminal "A" of the ratio detector to
primaries are in series. The secondary of T3 (FM IF) is connected T6. Use 30 volt scale of VoltOhmyst first, reducing
to the driver tube (6AU6 V4). The secondary of T4 (AM IF) is lower scale as required.
connected to the AM second detector (6SQ7 V6). The output of if T6 bottom core
the driver tube (V4) is coupled thru the driver transformer (T5) for zero d -c
and ratio detector transformer (T6) to the FM ratio detector tube balance.
(6AL5 V5). [In 610V1 the functions of both T5 and T6 are combined 4 Same as Step 2 Same as Step 2 t T6 top core for
in one unit (T5).] min. audio
The audio outputs of the AM second detector and the FM ratio output.
detector are connected thru a section of the range switch
to
the volume control input. Reconnect VoltOhmyst as in Step 1, omitting 680 ohm
5 resistor.
The B+ supply (+245 V) to the plates and screen grids of VI
and V2 is controlled thru a section of the range switch. 6 Repeat Step 2.
Simple AVC is used on AM and is applied to both the IF
amplifier (V3) and the AM 1st detector (V2). Delayed AVCThe is 7 Remove ALL connections.
used on FM and is applied only to the IF amplifier (V3). Near the correct core position the zero point is approached
AVC distribution is controlled thru a section of the range switch.
rapidly and continued adjustment causes the indicated polarity to
reverse. A slow approach to the zero point isbe an indication of
turned in the
Alignment Procedure severe detuning, and the bottom core should
opposite direction.
The zero d -c balance and the minimum a -f output should oc-
Alignment Indicators: cur at the same point. If such is not the case, the two cores
should be adjusted until both occur with no further adjustment of
An RCA VoltOhmyst or equivalent meter is necessary for meas- either core. It may be advantageous to adjust both cores simul-
uring developed d -c voltage during FM alignment. Connections taneously, watching the VoltOhmyst, and an output meter, hooked
are specified in the alignment tabulation below. An output meter across the voice coil for the point at which both zero d -c and
is also necessary to indicate minimum audio output during FM
Ratio Detector alignment. Connect the output meter across the
speaker voice coil.
The RCA VoltOhmyst can also be used as an AM alignment
to measure a -v -c FM IF-RF Alignment
indicator, either to measure audio output or
voltage. (FM Ratio Detector must be aligned first.)
When audio output is being measured the volume control should RANGE SWITCH IN FM POSITION
be turned to maximum. Adjustment for
Connect Sig. gen. Turn radio
Steps sig. gen. output dial to- peak output
Signal Generator:
connect the Connect the d -c probe of a VoltOhmyst to the negative
For all alignment operations, except FM IF-RF, chassis. The lead of the 5 mfd. capacitorC20 and the common(fully
lead
low side of the signal generator to the receiver to chassis. Turn gang condenser to max. capacity
output should be adjusted to provide accurate resonance indica-
1
tion at all times. If output measurement is usedbefor AM align- meshed).

ment the output of the signal generator should kept as low
10.7 mc 'Using alter -
as possible to avoid a -v -c action. 30% modu- nate loading:
High side to lotion, 400
Calibration Scale.-The dial scale printed in this service note one FM ant. cycles AM.
T3 bottom
core (sec.)
may be temporarily attached to the chassis for quick reference term. in Adjust to T3 top core
during alignment. series with pxovide 2 to Max. ca-
2
.01 mfd. Low 3 volts indi- city (pri.)
side to the (fully TI bottom
Using Printed Dial Scale.- cation on core (sec.)
other FM
ant. term.
ystmeshed)
VoltOhmyst Tl top core
I. Cut out the printed dial scale, or, better still, make a tracing during
alignment.
(pri.)
of the scale.
2. With gang at full mesh the pointer should be set to the
first High side to
reference mark from the left hand end of the dial backing one FM ant.
plate. term. in
series with
3. Place the printed dial scale or the tracing under the pointer a 120 ohm
so that the extreme left scale graduations coincide with the resistor.
Low side to 106 mc 106 mc
C54 osc.
pointer. Use scotch tape to hold the dial scale in place. 3 C52 ant.
the other
FM ant.
610V1 (RC -610C) FM Ratio Detector Alignment term in
series with
RANGE SWITCH IN FM POSITION-VOL. CONT. MAXIMUM a 120 ohm
resistor.
Connect high side Signal generator AdJustments and L3 moo.
Stops of sly. gen. to-,- output indications Same as 90 mc 90 mc L2 ant.
4
Step 3.
Connect the d -c probe of a VoltOhmyst to the negative Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until further adjustment does not
I lead of the 5 mfd. capacitor, C20, the common lead of 5 improve calibration.
the VoltOhmyst to chassis.
Top core T5 for Alternate loading involves the use of a 680 ohm theresistor to
SAME
10.7 mc. modu- max. d -c across and the plate winding while the grid winding of
winding is loaded
Pin 1 of driver lated 30% 400 C20 (Approx. 4 TRANSFORMER is being peaked. Then the grid peaked. Only one
tube 6AU6 in cycles AM volts) with the resistor while the plate winding isthe 680 ohm resistor
2
series with (Approx. .1 Bottom core 75 for winding is loaded at any one time. Remove
.01 mfd. volt) minimum audio after T3 and Tl have been aligned.
output
Repeat Step 2 until further adjustment does not improve
3 alignment. 141
AM Alignment Critical Lead Dress
(Correct alignment of the 455 kc. IF requires that the 10.7 me. IF 1. Dress capacitor Cl near chassis base.
be aligned previously.) 2. Dress lead from pin 5, V-1, to terminal C, of transformer
RANGE SWITCH IN BC POSITION Ti, as near bottom of FM shelf as possible.
3. The lead from capacitor C23 to the high side of the volume
control must be dressed next to chassis along front apron.
Connect 4. Dress resistor R20 near chassis base.
Steps high side Sig. gen. Turn radio Adjust for
of sig.(pm. output dial to- peak output 5. Dress all A.C. leads away from volume control.
to- 6. Solder FM antenna coil primary leads to terminal board
with as short a lead length as is practical.
'T4 top core 7. Make all FM 'leads as short as possible.
1 aM conver- (sec.) 8. The lead from pin 2, V-3, to chassis ground must be dressed
ter grid 'T4 bottom as close to base and as near to the back apron as possible.
6BE6 V-2 Quiet point core (pri.) This lead provides degeneration for the IF stage and neither
in series 455 kc at low its length nor the point at which it is grounded to the chassis
with .01 freq. end. 'T2 bottom should be changed.
2 mfd. core (sec.)
*T2 top core 9. Dress all leads away from the 3300 ohm resistors R28 and
(pri.) R29.
"A" termi- C57 osc. Push Button Adjustment

3 nal of ter- 1400 kc 1400 kc C58 ant.
minal (loop)
board at 880 - TO 740 TO 1430 610 TO 1250 540 TO
rear of 1600 KC
I
00100
KC
1
KC 1030 KC
chassis in TRIMMER I
4 series with 600 kc 600 ke L5 osc. SCREWS

200 mmf. (Rock gang) 6 5 4 3 2
(link open) CORE
!
5 Repeat Step 3. RODS ® ® : ® 0 0

After chassis and loop have been installed in cabinet, The push buttons connect to separate magnetite -core oscillator
8 adjust C58 for max. output on a weak station near coils and separate loop circuit trimmers which must be adjusted
1400 kc. for the desired stations. Use an insulated screwdriver or align-
ment tool such as RCA Stock No. 31031. Allow about five minutes
'Align T4 and T2 by means of alternate loading as explained warm-up period before making adjustments.
under FM IF-RF alignment. Use a 47,000 ohm resistor instead The procedure is as follows:
of a 680 ohm resistor. 1. Make a list of the desired stations, arranged in order from
Oscillator frequency is above signal frequency on both AM low to high frequencies.
and FM. 2. Turn the range switch to the broadcast position and manually
tune in the first station on the list.
NORMAL
PROM/
PS GS 3. Turn range switch to push-button position and press in the
SOFT SASS FM left-hand button.
Adjust core rod No. 1 to receive the first station. To secure
OFF lib LOUD
1111
4.
the best adjustment, rotate the loop for least pickup, and ad-
just core rod No. 1 for peak output.
POWER -VOLUME TONE SELECTOR TUNING Rift 5. Adjust trimmer screw No. 1 for peak output on the first sta-
tion.
Front Panel Controls 8. Proceed in the same manner to adjust for the remaining sta-
tions.
DRIVER RATIO DETECTOR 7.Repeat adjustments for best results.
bAU 6 6AL5 On the 880 to 1,600 kc push-button, the higher frequency stations
V-4 v -S may be received with core rod No. 6 either in or out (oscillator
frequency either 455 kc below or 455 kc above the station fre-
quency). The ,adjustment with this core in its out position (oscil-
lator frequency 455 kc above the station frequency) is the correct
one.
NOTE: Clockwise adjustment of cores and trimmers tunes the cir-
cuits to lower frequencies.
TENSION
SPRING
<_01SIVE CORO
CIT
PULLEYS
RATIO DETECTOR CIRCUIT 610V1 (RC -610C) sji
Schematic Diagram otherwise same as 610V2 (RC -610), except' °05
C59 of 1st I.F. Trans (FM) is omitted. 2410455
Ts IN MODEL 61001
(RC 610C)
MODEL 6I002
ONLY/ (RCGIO) 194050 JACK
CSA F.M. DOE.
106 MC. 6. A F.M. F. M. DIAL INDICATOR-
DRIVER''
TOM IS.
4255,E TRANS.
10.7 MC.
11,10 TRAMS.
10.7 MC. F. M. 06C. FM ANT AND DRIVE MECHANISM
T3 OF.M. T1 F.M. 90 MC Vl 901MC.
Tser. M. TOP - PRI. TOP- PRI.
I01M C.,, POT -SEC. BLK. }OUTPUT
ROT - SEC.
T8
106 MC. BLK-RED TR PLATES
T6 RATIO 2+3 LE TRANS 19.11.F. TRANS,
BET TRANS 455 KC. ASSNC.
e T4 eA.M. T2 eAAA C53
F. M.
TOP 10.1MC TOP -SEC. TOP-PRI,
05C.
RECT.
SOT.167MC. 80T-PRI. SOT -SEC. BRN-BLK. FILAMENT
CABLE
SOCKET OUTPUT
(FRONT VIEW) BLK. RED
Vs SCREENS
65Q7 OUTPUT TRANS.
T7
6K66T (c'e v.ca

SPEAKER
w PLUG
(PRONG VIEW)
142 Top View Chassis SPEAKER CONNECTIONS

70X -I BX
[..._TAT ANT. TO GRID V .SX 1 4Tg CV
4S.SitC. 4130,
2.SX(100AC.) j
MEASURED WITH 3VOLT FIXED BIAS
V-5 V- V- a
V1 V-3 OUT PUT
PATIO DETECTOR 24PDET.- AVG.- PHASE 11.1.
F. DRIVER
eT DE7 OSC.F.M.
GREG ,BAG 6AUG GAL5 G5C1T (GICG-GT
s
ecL 15v.
/CENTERING RV) tf
joss,
".1 A -111A. -RED TO.
T. 71-1
tcg, C64 HAS
TT
410
LH-
. sna.
10.11;C
6 860
12 CI
3 ZIA -I )1 MS Km. GREW,.

1 OUTPUT
CAS CIS 111-1 C
TO -a .1 ISdOO GICGGT
=g 1,6106 1.00
"C F I
V-2 L_L1 J
ILDET6DSC. A.M.,.
GBEG
R.
00. CATHODE CURRENTS
(I) WREN 9.6...
(860E1
(3)) SBA. 18.3. 0MASMAT
(4) AAUG 13.0MA
c 0.
(616547 500.
(T) 6SQ7 .SMA.
(3) 6O6 -6T 23.00A.
(5) BOG -GE 21.0MA.
DO) SY3-ST 115.0MA.
lY REM ONLY
51% TA ONCE
611
53- REAR 31 RIME S2 REAR PNONO JACK
5=c'ErjotuB
VOL. COST - I0
TySV, oo
YEL.
LINK CLOSED FOR `.7 5TNCO ABEL VOLTAGE, MEASURED WITH

LOOP OPERATION BED CHANALvsT On VOLTONwees7
50A Cfg VOLTAGES stIOULD NOLO WITHIN
49011. WT.
VOL CONT 2101 WITH iorv. A.C. L.Y.
FR TOTAL
IOU
TEL
css-1.
.! RED
LS OUTPUT .7= .cr4.
SI FORNT 6507
53. FRONT
RANGE SWITCH VIEWED FROM FRONT AND SHOWN TA wN a
ume _ IN .11.110S/OT POSITION (MAX. C/CLOCHWISE POSITION
1 41 t. CIDDUO /IS
00WEIS SUPPLY
SCL -,m.sc Ls COIL RESISTANCE VALUES LESS

r----- PILOT LAMP
F At ANTENNA THAN ONE OHM ARE NOT SHOWN.
4 LOOP VEW
c'y:())
A
1111,
L
Model 610V1 01C -610C)

The schematic diagram If RC -610C chassis is similar to that
shown also.. W. major dittemn. being the ratio deMctor cir- SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM-MODEL 610V2, RC610
cuit Ms schematic diagram of which is shown on page 3. IX ad- (Siroplifird schematic diagrams of bend
dition C-59 ot T1 OM I.E. PM) is omini., R13 is 68 ohms, R14 is
33.000 ohms, RIO is 1.5 insgohms and C36 is .005 cold. switch shown on following pager.)
usdI 83 V2 va Ta "C. va 72"F" RIO R3 V2 VZ 1.2"C" V2
PINr7 PIN 42 & P.34 PIN 4G & Tv.," RIO R2 T4 "F.
A 7917 PIN112 & 034 rites a,
RN I BA
4 #
i AVC TO V3 - IAVC TO V3
1 4804
CE En
I I
I CD
r- J. +245 V
s +245V
I R7 I
z
C17 6
R33 C17 L
r- -1r
!6!
7 AM SOUND INPUT RIB >

FM SOUND INPUT _1
r- RIB
As SOUND INPUT
r PNONO u4
S - PNONO
S -' -
4r 0
53 8 VOL.
S3 CONT
REAR s REAR <, CONT.
C34 C29 6
CZ9
P.R. es -GREEN - P. 6. GREEN 52 REAR
ASSEM. . -BLUE- 61 -BLUE
ASSEM{61- L',42t,L, INPUT_ - J 0
L_
3
O
C 5
4;1 - 0561 CS?
7 J 7 6
TO LOOP TO '4" LSI
L4 53 FRONT 53 FRONT '181" St FRONT AVC TO V3
AM AVC SUPPLY L4
AM AVC SUPPLY
PHONO
PUSH BUTTON CD
Simplified schematic diagram of band switch
Broken lines (- - Simplified schematic diagram of band switch
-) indicate circuits not in use, some of which may be grounded Broken lines (-
(indicated by dashed ground symbols) through range switch contacts. -) indicate circuits not in use, some of which may be grounded 03
(indicated by dashed ground symbols) through range switch contacts.
R3 v2 V2 T2.0. va T 2"F' RIO R12 T4
PIN.? PIN 42 & 1234 PIN'S &
v2 VZ TVC. V2 T 2"F" RIO R2 T4..F.
RG
PIN.? SIN42 & R34 PIN% N
RE
AVC TO V3 Vc AVC TO V3
CE
C6
+245V 4. +245 V
- C17 &
R33
AM SOUND INPUT I O RIB

SOUNDFM INPUTI r :17 R27
B1
L WI PSIONO
2
JACK CD
gi CD
4
S3 53 3.1 VOL
REAR T. 41
I CONT
029 REAR'S;.1 029
P. B. -GREEN
- 52 REAR - --
ASSEM .as P. 13. -
{ F2SWOJ.PLa J asEm -BLUE-
-BLUE- 0
r I
'
NI O
5 4
CD
al
C
TO LOOP AVC TO V3
L4 53 FRONT SI FRONT TO LOOP (4.
AM AVC SUPPLY L4
I -
DIAL TUNING (BC) CD
Simplified schematic diagram of band switch PM

Broken lines (- - Simplified schematic diagram of band switch
-) indicate circuits not in use, some of which may be grounded Broken lines (- - -) indicate circuits not in use, some of which may be grounded
BAND V2 V4 vs v7
CABINET 68A6 GBAG GBA6 6AUG GVAGUG GALS
WIRE KAMER 11- 10.7 MC. 1ST. I.F. 2ND. T.F A DRIVER 04110 DU.
,_
13_710.7,AC. Ts_ TO -373.7140
7; 7 7 77 77-
7 710770.10.
7 71 -,5
E
230V. I I I I
235 V 220V. T 230 V. if 200V. 1
cl
i
1
.., o 1
i ---
5 s ,apan
c2e1 C451 ic47 CSC!? 61057 cis.%
INTERNAL C6 2 C 7--- i C74 - 22.K
a. 1
OR EKT 220 + 70 V
.
r1
;11 ' 5
_4
DIPOLE 1072 :
C51.11 ,
. ''T I
1 MI1. In C27 1BOT1 COG L_ 7 - .:, _____I
.003 .005 TUNE
........." -
T2. 495 KC L O
CABLE r, 4
r- )1 H3_
CBS 14-455110. t 530 CUB C65 T 78
100 0009 ISK C59 .005 C751
L- 111.00 r .002 .005 .0005 .05
110
522K I
CAE 4
RIO C42 R33
350 Cal.... 1247
.005 IRK 22 14060 '13 0075 .2.2 MEG.
CO C32 C33
.01 .05 C89 C58
220 .01 .005 MET
W-4 41124
LO f1000 (-1
RFC 612 077 C82 T
REAR 2200 L 005 .005
C43 AMC FM
R CBS REAR .005 R 3G
CII 3.9
637
CA.A. 2200 4000
330 MEG. .005 KA 1000
012 C R.F. ALL RESISTANCES IN OHMS.
10 - 448
R25 ALL CAPACITORS LESS THAN 1
0 2200 IN MF. AND AISOVE 1 1N MMF.
F A 264 22:°
eltte4i :41 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
!In-' A
--- Lo VOLTAGES SHOULD HOLD
5-27 Y' ANT B -3.5A WITHIN *20% WITH 117 V. AC.
3 SUPPLY.
GAIN 33X $ '27400K
CB 2.2 MEG. 400
55 THROUGH 3-357rTaT ^6.R
A CONNECTION V8
\ 7 150 V.
51 FROM 6AT6
6~L1255 2.2 MEG
FRONTFRONT FRONT SET. AVC-
AF
4
R32 SWITCHES VIEWED FROM 33

3 FRONT AND SHOWN IN F.M. 68E6 r57K
(MAX. CLOCKWISE) POSITION. 054. CO% 361 A FIXESR
RS
T GAIN DATA
RS CI7 10K
22K .0
.005
IG 18
I( SS -FRONT
RS)
C35 7 RA2 627
S .01 1 5 MEG. 1 MSG.
6.4-21 VoL.CONTR. N.F. TONE
4 CONTROL
TAPPED AT
2505 ARO 3
TC16 SOO K .01
FM
- '°°
32 VI V3 V8 V7 VG VS VA C53
34 041 .01 R26
.11 .05 2 MEG.
31A 311 14.1. 31, 314 PLUG RIB
2.2 MEG. L.F. TONE
LB L7 (PINS TOWARD 1114
vou -coo 638 CONTROL
A" -VS -.1r7 470K 1.270
c3,3 700K 180K
C21 - C22 R28 RSS
1 00 93 +270V. .05 rN" 100K 270K
Fr.
1,01 T C87 CG1
.01 .01
Complete schematic for Radio Chassis -Range Switch shown in FM position. For separate schematic
of range switch positions see figures 11, 12 and 14. See fig. 2 for power amplifier.
Gain data found on A band schematic Fig. 11.
NOTE: -On some instruments C40 is .01 mfd.
On later instruments starting with the Serial TUBES CONTROLLED BY AV.C.
II TOP CORE 40.). LEAK/
Bi.S. 25,000 an additional 10 ohm carbon ATIO Oft A BAND _ V1, V2, VA.
TRANS.
BOTTOM CORE ACV11N IS SAND - VI , V4.
resistor is added between C16 (100 mmf.) and P.M. - VI. V4.
terminal No. 1 of S4 front. The purpose of this PLATE OF OSC. OPEN FOR
resistor is fo eliminate dead soots between 1400 P0050. AND TELEVISION OPERATION. VOLTAGES SHOWN MEASURED
WITH VOLTOWAYST AND AwITCHES
t o 1600 kc on "A" band. The resistor should be A DIODE (No. 5) FUNCTIONS TO IN FM. POSITION.
PREVENT AMC. SUS FROM ( FOR OTHER SwItxpi POSITIONS
added to any early model set developing that BECOMING POSITIVE. SEE VOLTAGE CHART)
I trouble.
RADIO CHASSIS UNIT RK121 VOLTAGE CHART Cl)
APPROX GAIN IX 12x
DATA USING '
CHANALYST 6F6G Tube Type Pin (i Phono. B.C. S.W. F.M.
VZ OUTPUT
3 375 Plate 5 260 225 220 235
0) V3 CS -= VI 6BA6
SCG 6 95 110 90 85
.0035 MF.
J2
6JA.R.5 -25V. 4
AUDIO 3 Z Plate 5 260 255 240 230
INPUT .05 MR C3 dl 70 70
T2 V2 6BA6 SCG 6 90 100
.02 MF. RG BL 6 6.5 1.8 1.3
220K Cathode 7
T CI
6OTAAL
14 155 140
R5 Plate 5 0 160
R2 H
56 K 27K Grids
R7 GRt4. 2-3-4 0 155 160 140
H 2 6,7
220K 0 RED
R4 C4 TR.' -5.2 -10.5 -6.6
22 K .02 MF. Grid 1 1 (1600 (9.5 (108
5
CG KC) MC) MC)
-25V. 4 V3 6BE6
= V4
.0035 MR -2.7 -15.5 -6
JUMPER ON RSsps()8
2700 375 V. 1 (550 (16.2 (100
SPEAKER PLUG-- 3 Grid 1
FIE KC) MC) MC)
YEL. +270V.
2 LI 1
RIA
-9
YE L. VI GFG G Grid 1 1
(88
106011 2760 OUTPUT MC)
BLK. RED 5U46 5 245 250 230 220
RECT. Plate
150.0.
a RI B - C2. Note: - 6 110 120 105 95
- CIA V4 45BA6 SCG
4 TOTAL 2520 is on late models 1.2 1.4 1.5
Cathode 7 1.4
Lae'
o MF. CIB is 50 mfd.
RED -Y0. 240 230
vo T" CICAI Plate 5 255 245
CI 40 RIC V5 6A136 140 140
RED SCG 6 145 140
MF. 180
BLK. Plate 5 0 0 0 200
SRN. V6 6AU6
6.3 v SCG 6 0 0 0 110
5RN. V7 6AL5
117 V. AC.
Plate 7 150 150 150 150
SUPPLY V8 6AT6
JI
SOCKET + 10o V AMPLIFIER UNIT RS123 VOLTAGE CHART
TERM. VIEW + 270 V.
Plate 3 230
V2 6J5
Cathode 8 36
Fig. 2
Plate 3 375 1-3
111 FIELD
PILOT LAMP 6F6G SCG 4 270 CD
V3
Grid 5 -25 CD
T2 PLUG V4 6F6G Same as V3
OUTPUT D
TRANS. (PRONG VIEW)
"B" Voltage Measured from Rectifier Fil (5U4G) to Gnd. 380V.
LINK
BLK ERN +
Voltages were measured with Voltohmyst with the Radio Chassis
BLK RED T2 TAP RK121 connected.
TI
POWER J2 GND
All voltages are measured in respect to ground.
AUDIO BLK
TRANS SOCKET
0 INPUT Cathode Currents with Band Switch in FM Position rM
SOCKET VI RF. Amp. 14 ma. V7 Ratio Det. CD
(FACE VIEW) T2
BLI+Rt13 TR. V2 Mixer 4.7 ma. V8 Det.-Avc.-AF
CD
tow RIA V3 Osc. 15.9 ma. Power amp. RS123
V4 First IF. 12.4 ma. VI Rectifier Total 140 ma.
SPEAKER CONNECTIONS CD
OWER CORD TV32 5.6 ma. V2 Phase Inverter 2.15 ma.
V5 2nd IF.-Phono. Amp. K
V6 Driver FM 13.7 ma. V3, V4 Power output 27 ma. w
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE CRITICAL LEAD DRESS
(Make lead dress before alignment)
Before aligning set, completely mesh the gang and set the
dial pointer on the mechanical maximum calibration point at 1. Lead from pin 5, tube V2, to terminal "C" on transformer
the extreme left hand end of the dial. T1 should be dressed close to chassis.
When making a complete alignment follow in proper se- 2. Leads to terminals "C" and "D" on transformer T2 should
quence the tabulated form below. be dressed close together.
If only a portion of the circuit is to be aligned select the 3. The following capacitors must be dressed close to the
portion required, followed by the remaining steps in the chart. chassis with leads kept as short as possible: C32, C33, C66,
Any adjustments made on the FM 10.7 mc. IF's make it C69, C79, and C80.
necessary to realign the AM 455 kc. IF's. 4. All FM coil connections must be soldered in exact place
as the original. (One -sixteenth inch difference in length
For "A" and "C" band alignment use output meter across may be excessive).
voice coil keeping Test Oscillator output as low as possible to
prevent AVC action. 5. Lead from pin 7, tube V8, must be dressed away from lead
to terminal 'D" of transformer T7.
Equipment Required for Alignment Two 68,000 ohm Resistors within
1% of each other (Carbon)
6. ALL wiring in the receiver is critical as to length and
Electronic Voltmeter (VoltOhmyst) 200 mmf. Capacitor placement. It is therefore important when servicing, that
Output meter 20-30 minf: Capacitor extreme care should be taken so as not to disturb more of
Test Ow. AM
680 ohm Resistor .01 mid. Capacitor the wiring than absolutely necessary.
150 ohm Resistor Carbon
120 ohm Resistor Note: Keep tuning capacitor rotor grounding brushes clean
and making good contact,
C
I
RR
m. IT o
VS
11 -Ion nLS.. Mt L'°ewl 8

1,64 OSC.
fa mc. Ja TS -FM
C20-1,10, 03.1,1 RR'. CS- P.1 ANT.

LW 107
n-rN106 We Noc OG
b
0 33 T1 -FM TS -FM
74 -AM
-A. I2F 'Ai 06C

- 0 AC.- 4A"ANT. III C84 Lig C36 It
GOOKC. 400KC GOOKC 1400KC.
4 161
rig. 5
?1,1,W
= IN] se CI5 - 117 - C37
7-9.51AC. 15.31K, 9.5mC.I3.21/C p,5MC. 15.2 MC
77 -FM
NEXT To 'C'AMT. "eRF

FM RATIO DETECTOR ALIGNMENT CHASSIS Fig. 6
SET RANGE SWITCH TO FM POSITION ANT.-RF.-IF. ALIGNMENT
Connect. High Connect the Connect
Steps Side of Test Tune the Turn Vol. Adjust Radio
Oat. To- Osc. To- Cont. To - High Side of
Steps, the Ground Tune the Dial
Test Osc. Side of the Osc. To- Tuned Adjust
Connect a 680 ohm Resistor between lugs 13 and E of the to- Test Osc. to -
ratio detector transformer T7. Connect DC probe of a volt-
ohmyst to the negative lead of the 5 mid. Electrolytic
ohmyst
capacitor C81. The common lead of the meter to chassis.
'FM" IF Alignment
Driver grid 10.7 MC
pin 1, of 6AU6 30% Mod. Maximum Driver transformer
2. (V6) in series 400 Cycles Volume T6 for maximum Connect the DC probe o a voltohmyst to the negative lead
with a .01 MFD AM DC voltage across 1. of the 5 MFD electrolytic capacitor C 81, and the common
capacitor. C-81 lead of the meter to chassis ground
Remove Meter Leads and disconnect the 680 ohm resistor Mixer grid pin To RF 10.7 MC Max. cap. *T5, T3, T1
from D and E on T7. Connect two 68,000 ohm resistors #1 of 6BA6, Tube shelf 30% (Fully top and bot-
3. (within 1% of each other) in series, across C81. Connect (V2) in series ground modulated meshed) torn cores al -
the common lead of the Voltohmyst to the center point of with a .01 near mixer at 400 ternately load-
the 68,000 ohm resistors and the DC probe to contact No. 7 MFD capacitor tube(use cycles ing primary &
on rear of Switch wafer S6. Use the 30 volt scale. (Adjust test very short AM. secondary of
osc. output for leads) each trans -
IT7 Bottom core for 6 -10 volts former with
Zero DC Balance developed 680 ohms
Volume on Voltohmyst ,. across C81) while the op -
4. Same as
Step 2
Same as
Step 2
Control
Maximum
ttT7 top core for
minimum audio
' (Range switch
in FM
posite side of
the same
output. (Output esition) transformer in
meter across voice (Use very being ad -
coil) short lead) justed. Adjust
all trans-
5. Reconnect voltohmyst as in step 1, omitting the 680 ohm resistor. formers for
maximum
6. Repeat step 2 omitting 680 ohms. voltage across
C8I.
7. Remove all connections.
tNear the correct core position the zero point is approached rapidly and
continued adjustment causes the indicated polarity to reverse. A slow 'AM" IF Alignment
approach to the zero point is an indication of severe detuning, and the
bottom core should be turned in the opposite direction.
11 -The zero DC balance and the minimum AF output should occur at Mixer grid pin To chassis 455KC High ...Top and
the same point: if such is not the case, the two cores should be adjusted f1 of (V2) m ground Freq end bottom Cores
until both occur with no further adjustment of either core. It may be series with a of Dial of T2 and T4.
advantageous to adjust both cores simultaneously, watching the volt- 01 MFD (For maximum
ohmyst, and an output meter connected across the voice coil for the point Capacitor. voltage across
at which both zero DC and minimum output occurs. (Turn band voice coil)
switch to "A"
Note: -Two or more points may be found which will satisfy the condition or "C" band)
required in step 4. T7 top core should be correctly adjusted when approxi-
mately Xi inch of threads extend above the can, therefore, it is desirable
to start -adjustment with the top core in its furthest "in" position and turn
out, while adjusting the bottom core, until the first point of minimum AF
and minimum DC is reached.
147
ANT-RF-IF-ALIGNMENT (Continued) When the windings are loaded, it is necessary to increase the 10.7 MC
input since the gain will decrease and the voltage across C81 will be less.
Connect the Connect Radio
High Side of Ground Tune the Dial **It is necessary to alternately load the primary and secondary of each
Steps the Adjust 455 KC I. F. transformer with 10,000 ohms while the opposite side of the
Test Om Side of the Osc. To- Tuned
same transformer is being adjusted.
to- Test Osc. to -
***To guard against the possibility of alignment of L17 and C37 to
image frequencies, tune the test oscillator to 15.5 MC and turn the radio
dial to 15.5 MC. Then adjust the test oscillator to 16.41 MC (image
frequency). By increasing the test oscillator output, a signal should be
"C" Band OSC.-RF.-ANT. Alignment heard.
Tune the test oscillator to 9.5 MC and turn the radio dial to 9.5 MC,
"C" Band Ant. 15.5 MC 15.5 MC then adjust the test oscilliator to 10.41 MC (image frequency). By increas-
Terminal 43 Osc.-C37***
O ing the test oscillator output, a signal should be heard.
RF.-C15 (If these image frequencies cannot be heard, the set is incorrectly aligned,
4. Ant.-C8 therefore repeat steps 4 and 5)).
Through a maximum ****Two points may be found to fulfill the requirements. Use the one
dummy Ant. voltage across with the longest threaded end extending out of the transformer.
comprising a voice coil)
150 ohm re- To Chassis *****Two points can be found having the greatest noise voltage developed.
sistor in series ground Use the one with the greater capacity (tighter adjustment).
with a 25 to 30 9.5 MC 9.5 MC
mmf capacitor Osc.-L17***
RF-L12
5. Ant. -L5
(For maximum
voltage across 0.11.A.VI
voice coil)
.6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for accurate alignment
"A" Band OSC.-RF.-ANT.

1400 KC 1400 KC Osc.-C36
RF.-C84
,., High Side Ant. -C1
7. (Red Lead) of (For maximum
Loop Primary voltage across
with link open voice coil)
through a To Chassis
Dummy Ant. ground 600 KC 600 KC Osc.-L18 TUNING CAPACITOR DRIVE
comprising a RF-L13 PULLEY
200 mmf. Ant. -L6
8. Capacitor (For maximum DIAL INDKATOR
voltage across DRIVE CORD -TO
voice coil) REAR SHEAVE OF
PULLEY.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 for Max. output
"FM" Band OSC.-RF.-ANT. Alignment

106 MC 106 MC Osc.-C20 for TUNING CAPACITOR
maximum DRIVE CORD -TO
voltage across FRONT SHEAVE OF
CU. DRIVE SPOOL PULLEY
10. To FM
FM antenna antenna END VIEW OF DRIVE MECHANISM SHOWN
terminal #1 terminal #2 WITH TUNING CAPACITOR AT MAX. CAPACITY.
in series with in series
a 120 ohm with a 120
resistor ohm 88 MC . 88 MC **vs
resistor Osc.-L9 for Fig. 8 Fig. 9
11. maximum Loop antenna
voltage across
C81.
12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for exact calibration.
*****
106 MC RF, C13 for
No maximum 01A----95-\ 10.0 11.0 120 [4.0 N 160 -Wa*#--
13.
Carrier voltage across
C81 scrrae<71"-11-4
POINT
(Noise 6 V§ -I
Remove or turn Voltage)
test oscillator off. Vi -J J-155 60 70 80 IOU .120 .140 160 B...d..d --
v***
90 MC RF, L11 for si
I-, 4 -.1
No maximum 17'
14. Carrier voltage across 90 -

-1 106
C8I.
(Noise 88 91_?/ 96 100 i 044,/ 108 Atod,,i.
Voltage) i
IS. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for maximum output.
Fig. 10
Same as Same as 106 MC 166 MC Ant. C5 for Dial scale drawing
16. step 10 step 10 maximum
voltage across
C81. Circuit diagram breakdown description
Same as Same as 90 MC 90 MC Ant. L3 for In order to have the instrument function in all of the
step 10 step 10 maximum
17
voltage positions of the band switch, a number of extra tubes and
parts are required. We have attempted to simplify the
18. Repeat steps 16 and 17 for maximum Output.
circuits by including simplified schematics showing only the
parts actually required for the instrument to operate in the
19. Disconnect dummy antenna and adjust Ant. trimmer Cl on position to which the switch is turned.
loop when set is installed in cabinet.
It can be noted by examining the different simplified
*This method is known as alternate loading which involves the use of a schematics, that a few of the circuits deviate from the con-
680 ohm resistor to load the plate winding while the grid winding of the ventional form.
same transformer is being peaked. Then the grid winding is loaded with Tube V8 performs the function of 2nd Det., AVC and AF
680 ohm resistor while the plate winding is being peaked.
amp. in "A" and "C" bands only. Diode #5 of V8 functions
as a device to prevent the AVC bus from becoming positive.
148 Tubes V6 and V7 are used only in the FM positions; V6 as

a driver and V7 as an FM demodulator.
MEASURED WITH 3 VOLT FIXED BIAS
APPROX. GAIN
DATA USING 5X -4 0.5X I
70 X 0.8X
CHANALYST 600 KC. 600 KC. 1 600 ler 600-.455 KC. I
4558 KC. 455 KC. 455 KC -71
0
VI V2 V4
LI 6BA6 6BA6 6BA6
LOOP R.F. MIXER Ti- 10.7 MC. 1ST. 73.- 10.7 MC.
SEC.
0 C451
CI CG
2-20 iu
220 _L
ILD
612V1, 612V3
R2
Gj 1 MEG. C27 O
L-1-2- 3-4-5 .003 L NOTE:
T2.4.53 KC..
T C53 = CS T4-455 KC. For gain measurement, use a 3v bat-
100 1
.003 !
53 tt A I
r tery connected to a.v.c. bus as indicated
=. -.. i
22K ,C31 in schematic.
z F O
L.0 C48 F117417
5, 0 0
1 2- 3 042
.005 I
11- B C32 C33
LG -3f
C49 rJ
'A"LOoP 524
LOAD 100 I t R31 NOTE:
1000
22K THE SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC INDICATES
52 SS 41i
Si REAR L_ ONLY THOSE PORTIONS OF THE CIRCUIT
REAR REAR C43 C0 BEING USED FOR THE PARTICULAR OPERATION; 1.1
.005 1050
RS IT IS POSSIBLE FOR A FAILURE IN SOME
o E 3.9 C44 COMPONENT NOT SHOWN TO EFFECT
MEG. .005 THE OPERATION OF THE RECEIVER.
CT C12. (C )
10...448 10-4.48
R25 529 /Pb
2200 270K
CO
R40
270K
THROUGH
CONNECTION
55
51 52 53 FRONT 6486
FRONT FRONT FRONT DET-AVC- 2.2 MEG.
AF
S 4 4o
10 3
oC REAR
56 2 1-3
REAR C62 C63
R32 SWITCHES VIEWED FROM R7 .01 .01 O
3 FRONT AND SHOWN IN "A' C 88
15K .005
BAND. POSITION. O
5 R19
RS
iRe 1 MEG.
"10K .o o5
22K
SS -FRONT
C35 R44 C64.
22K .015 R27
RA MEG.
1.5 1 MEG. 0
4
VVs./.-) VOL.CONTR. N.F. TONE
54 CONTROL Pm
FRONT TAPPED AT
3 10 543 C65 250 K AND
_cte, 27K .015 SOO K
C36 -I .01
T100 2-18 2
V2 VI V3 V8 V7 VG V5 V4 C38
.H( O
11.5-342
TEL.
C53 O
34 PNONO. F.M. .0012
3/14 311. 3/14 3/14 3/).24 J1 INPUT INPUT OUTPUT
R26
R IS 2 MEG.
(PINS AWAY 2.2 MEG.
L8 FROM YOU L.F. TONE
1230 CONTROL
RIT _ T 270 tD
37 1COK 180K 1.11
C21 - C22 .05 53
01
270K
100 I
-C23- -EAT
.01
I NTV.A.C.
117v AC.
C61 I
T.,
RADIO CORPORATION OF AMERICA U)
RCA VICTOR DIVISION CD
BAND V2 V4
CABINET 61i/a1A6 GBAG GBA6
O WIRE R.F. MIXER 71- 10.7 mC. 1ST. L.F.
1.
AlC3o
O F
111
3-4- T2-455 KC.

R
0rt
1 1002I T4-455 KC.
3 j
1- -1-1
00 0 0 cae...., - E FI:c4a
L-1 2 C42 12_2: .._.
390RIO
I
.005 5 I
C10 C32 C33 I

.01 .05 612V1, 6121/3
220 I
-)I rj
C49
R7A 100
10001 I231
I 22K
53 512
52 REAR 2200 _,,Li__11...
REAR -I NOTE:
7-. C43 C50
O R
'--3L
.005 THE SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC INDICATES 1'4
C3 CII o 0 3.9b ONLY THOSE PORTIONS OF THE CIRCUIT
9 330 330 - MEG. BEING USED FOR THE PARTICULAR OPERA.
TION IT IS POSSIBLE FOR A FAILURE IN
SOME COMPONENT NOT SHOWN TO EFFECT
10-448 THE OPERATION OF TIE RECEIVER. (0
- 2 R52 R2S 529
it 2200 2200 270K
03
R40 hi
270 K
03
3-35
'C. IA L5 A
55
a 51 52 53 FRONT 6A -T6
FRONT FRONT FRONT DOT- AVC- 2.2 MEG
o AF
4
IFi
ro to
"0
.
1 2
54
REAR
SWITCHES VIEWED FROM V3
R32 5:12 .C:13
3 FRONT AND SHOWN IN "C 6BE6 cee
RAND POSITION. OSC. .00S CD
Re
RS 10 K C55 CD
22K 005
56 -FRONT 9-1(
, R 27
c19 MEG. CO
6.4- 5 2 1.14
TIN H.F. TONE "
CONTROL 1ar
3
-6TC1'°° C54
FM .07
V2 VI VS VB V7 C3$
*-1( ry
VG VS V4 C37
11.5-342 3-33 -053 CD
L9 A PROMO. TEL. A.F. .0012
4 13 4 11.2.6
/.14 /14 3 /14 3 Ali 5 /14 INPUT INPUT OUTPUT
(PINS AWAY
RIS 2 MEG.
FROM YOU)
2.2 MEG. -T"E m
LB 2
CONTROL
R16 R17 1_
Si C39 100K 180K
C2I - C22 .05 .R53
100 270K
T.07 1-/--°° 57Yac. CGt -
C87
.cm 117Y 4C .01
4,
PRESS PUSH BUTTONS INWARD- PUSH SUTTON CAP REMOVED
Push -Button Adjustment SCREWDRIVER
SHOWING PUSH BUTTON ROD
SLOTTED HEAD ADJUSTMENT SCREW

The push -buttons should be adjusted for eight favorite sta- - PUSH BUTTONS
tions after the receiver is operating, and has had a 5 or 10
minute warm-up period.
Any standard broadcast or frequency modulation stations
may be chosen. The preferable arrangement is to adjust for
stations in the order of frequency, from low to high. Proceed
as follows: MARKER PLATE
1. Remove the first PUSH-BUTTON (Just pull) and note THREE SCREWS
the adjustment screw beneath.
I I- L I MARKER PLATE
2. Loosen the adjustment screw.
3. Manually tune very accurately for the desired station. WINDOW STRIP
STATION
4. Push the PUSH-BUTTON rod in till it is against stop. MARKER
TARS
MARKER 80ARD
5. Tighten adjustment screw.
6. Make adjustment for the other buttons, setting up and Fig. 15
checking each for the chosen station in a similar manner. Push -Button set-up
7. Recheck all PUSH -BUTTONS and reset if found
necessary. TO REMOVE SHAFT AND BALL BEARING..
LOOSEN BRASS LOCK NUT.
2. TURN COLLAR TOWARD
TO pHONO. HEX. SHOULDER.
MOTOR DIAL CORD DRIVE DRUM
AND CLUTCH
I
2 II YELLOWn
GREEN I I
7
2
SPACING
WASHER
TO
3
1 i
RED II 3 TO
, ,
CoRRE5P. 4 BLUE 1 i
4 CORRES P.
5L.K -RED ELK -RED Th., ill.
TERMINALS 5 BLK- BRN TERMINALS MI=I,
IJ I-8
67
ON PLUG BLACK I I
7 ON SOCKET 3-272
8
H
1 1 BROWN BRASS LOC MIT 'TENSION SPRING
9 v BLK-RED TR. 9
C WASHER
Fig. 15
SOME MODELS MAY HAVE EXTRA SPACING WASHER
Power Cable TO INCREASE CLUTCH FRICTION
Some instrument may not have the color code as indicated, therefore Fig. 17
use continuity method to check cable assembly. Tuning Shaft and Clutch Assembly
VS
6AU6
2ND. TFA TS -10.7 MC
I 1 I
612V1, 612V3
430
514 C59
.002
R31
CBS C5E1
.01 .005
NOTE.
THE SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC INDICATES
r 11.--4 h-
ONLY THOSE PORTIONS OF THE CIRCUIT l'.1ZEo.
BEING USED FOR THE PARTICULAR OPERATION,
R IS POSSIBLE FOR A FAILURE IN SOME
COMPONENT NOT SHOWN TO EFFECT TOE
OPERATION OF THE RECEIVER.
' nt nt0
IS MF
22 K
VB
6.4i6
SWITCHES VIEWED FROM FRONT

AND SHOWN IN `PHONOGRAPH" SS
POSITION. REAR coo
CNN
.005
FRONT
R 42 R 27
CO64 1 ME
MONO. I 5 HIES
(0) 45 CBS
27K .01S
,A,L.CONTR
50.K f."'
CA4
H.F. TONE
CONTROL
R 32
PNONO.. TEL A.F.0012
IfL
C4.1 INPUT INF, OUTPUT R2G
(Pws AwAy
neom you) - 25, Wv--1.05
2112 ----RIL G0 it4
2 MEG.
L.F. TONE
CONTROL
um Ril 4, .7., -.Cors T 270
57 CS -... PTO. 18014
ST 055
+370v Kt 270 K
70
v-/
eel
.01 T ."
Fig. 14. Schematic shown for phonograph reproduction.

Note: Oscillator plate voltage is removed when operating phonograph.
151
DIAL
(REAR VIEW) BAND INDICATOR LAMPS
612V1, 612V3 --N.C." BAND
Fig. 13. Radio chassis wiring diagram.
N 63 BAND -*-
SHIELD sLkS
T.6 RAS FM BAND..
EXT.\
GREEN
r9
YELLOW
57 Off
I
CONNECT COMMON LEAD OF C87

VOLTORMYST HERE FOR STEP LAMP
No. 3 AND NO.A OF RATIO
DETECTOR ALIGNMENT. ------
m
Cal
CONNECT DC. PROBE A
OF VOLTOMMTST RA7 YELLOW -
HERE FOR STEP NO.7 L _I L.J
OF RATIO DETECTOR
ALIONMEN
BAOWNN
_._1
T.B.
SHIELD
MOUNTING
BRACKET FY
.0"."
s-
Ts
17-1
T B.
BRO. BRN.
BOTTOM MEAN,
SWITCHES ARE SHOWN A5
VIEWED FROM FRONT.
INDICATES GOD.- SOLDERED t
TO CHASSIS. LOOP C SVC DIPOLE
RCAVICTOR
TELEVISION RECEIVER
MODEL 630TS
Chassis No. KCS 20A (60 cycles) and
KCS 20C-2 (50 cycles)-Mfr. No. 274
Important information on the operation, adjustment, and repair

on RCA Victor Model 630TS television receiver is presented on pages
153 to 162. The RCA Victor Division of Radio Corporation of America,
through its Home Instrument Department, has made these service notes
available to the trade for the development of television and as an
information medium to the service fraternity.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Model 630TS is a thirty -tube, direct -viewing, 10" table model, hold; Stabilized vertical hold; Two stages of video amplifica-
Television Receiver. The receiver is complete in one unit and tion; Noise saturation circuits; Three stage sync separator and
is operated by the use of seven front -panel controls. Features
of the receiver include: Full thirteen channel coverage; F -M clipper; Four mc. band width for picture channel, and Re-
sound system; Improved picture brilliance; A -F -C horizontal duced hazard high voltage supply.
RECEIVER OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
The following adjustments are necessary when turning the 9. Adjust the PICTURE control for suitable picture con-
receiver on for the first time. trast.
1. Turn the receiver "ON" and advance the SOUND VOL-
10. After the receiver has been on for some time, it may be
UME control to approximately mid -position.
necessary to readjust the FINE TUNING control slightly for
2. Set the STATION SELECTOR to the desired channel. improved sound fidelity.
3. Turn the PICTURE control fully counterclockwise. 11. In switching from one station to another, it may be
4. Turn the BRIGHTNESS control clockwise, until a glow necessary to repeat steps number 6 and 9.
appears on the screen then counterclockwise until the glow
12. When the set is turned on again after an idle period,
just disappears,
it should not be necessary to repeat the adjustments if the
5. Turn the PICTURE control clockwise until a glow or pat- positions of the controls have not been changed. If any adjust-
tern appears on the screen. ment is necessary, step number 6 is generally sufficient.
6. Adjust the FINE 13. the position of

If
TUNING control for the has been
controls
best sound fidelity and changed, it may be nec-
SOUND VOLUME for essary to repeat steps
suitable volume. number 1 through 9.
NOTE: If any diffi-
7. Adjust the VERTI-
culty is experienced with
CAL hold control until
steps number 7 or 8,
the pattern stops vertical
turn the PICTURE con-
movement. BRIGHTNESS VERTICAL PICTURE STATION
HOLD SELECTOR
trol 1/4 turn counterclock-
8. Adjust the HORI- wise and repeat those
HORIZONTAL OFF -ON CHANNEL NO.
ZONTAL hold control HOLD SOUND adjustments.
until a picture is ob- VOLUME FINE TUNING
tained and centered. Figure 1-Receiver Operating Controls
153
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION otherwise be airectly applied to the control grids of the 6J6
It is advisable that the reader be familiar with a recent stand- r -f amplifier, VI. Cl and C2 are antenna isolating capacitors.
ard textbook of television principles in order to properly under- The d -c return for the grids of VI is through R3 and R13 which
stand the receiver circuits and their functions. Such a knowl- also properly terminate the 300 ohm antenna transmission line.
edge is assumed for the purpose of this publication. The C3 and C4 are neutralizing capacitors necessary to counteract
discussions which follow will not dwell on the operation of the grid to plate capacitance of the triode r -f amplifier.
conventional circuits used which have been used in previous
In the plate circuit of the r -f amplifier are a series of induct-
receivers and which should be well known. In general, the
ances LI to L25 and L2 to L26 inclusive. These inductances
circuits discussed will be only those that are new to the field.
may be considered as a quarter wave section of a balanced
For ease of understanding the basic operation of the receiver, transmission line which can be tuned over a band of frequen-
a 15 unit block diagram of it is shown in Figure 2. The circuit cies by moving a shorting bar along the parallel conductors.
description will follow the numerical order of these blocks in
Adjustable coils L25 and L26 provide the correct length of line
order to logically follow a signal through the set.
for the thirteenth channel, 210-216 mc. L13 to L23 and L14
R -F UNIT (block # 1)-The r -f unit is a separate subchassis of to L24 are fixed sections of line which are added to L25 and
the receiver. On this subchassis are the r -f amplifier, converter, L26 as the shorting bar is moved progressively down the line.
oscillator, fine tuning control, channel switch, converter trans- The physical construction of each one of these inductances is
former, r -f, converter and oscillator coils and all their tuning a small non-adjustable silver strap between the switch con
adjustments. The unit provides operation on all thirteen of tacts. Each strap is cut to represent a six -megacycle change
the present television channels. It functions to select the in frequency. In order to make the jump between the lowest
desired picture and sound carriers, amplifies and converts to high frequency channel (174-180 mc) and the highest low fre-
provide at the converter plate, a picture i-f carrier frequency quency channel (82-88 mc), adjustable coils L11 and L12 are
of 25.75 mc. and a sound i-f carrier of 21.25 mc. inserted. To provide for the remaining five low frequency
R -F Amplifier-Referring to the Schematic Diagram channels, LI to L9 and L2 to LIO are progressively switched
in to add the necessary additional inductance.
Tl is a center tapped coil used for the short circuiting of low
frequency signals picked up by the antenna which would
ANTENNA
2. 3.
SOUND I F AMPLIFIER 4, AUDIO AMPLIFIER
DISCRIMINATOR 1111111
2 TUBES
4 TUBES 6 AT6, 6 6CTT
.016210A6,615A6, 6 AU6,6 ALS
R F AMPLIFIER, CON-
VERTER Q R. F. OSC.
3 TUBES
6J6, 6.16, 6J6 5. 6.
PICTURE IF AMPLIFIER VIDEO AMPLIFIER
4 DETECTOR # DC RESTORER KINESCOPE
414 TUBES 214 TUBES
GAGS, 6AG5, 6AGE
GAGE 4 .6 of 6 A L5 6AU6,6K6GT.4%1 oi6AL5
8. 9. 14
SYNC. AMPLIFIER VERTICAL OSCILLATOR HIGH VOLTAGE
4 SEPARATOR DISCHARGE 4 OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY
21/2 TUBES 2 TUBES I TUBE
65147, 65141 4 V- 6S8I7GT 6J5, 6 X 6 GT 153 - GT/21016
13
10 I1 HORIZONTAL DISCHARGE
HORIZONTAL SYNC HORIZONTAL OUTPUT 4 REACTION
DISCRIMINATOR OSCILLATOR SCANNING
I TUBE 1 TUBE t TUBES
GA LS 61C6GT 1/1 OF GS N7CTT
12 61366 Cr 5V4Cs 15
MORIZONTAL LOW VOLTAGE
OSCILLATOR POWER SUPPLY
CONTROL
I TUBE 2. TUBES
154 6 ACT Figure 2-Receiver Block Diagram SU4G, SU4G

61306 6546 .6406
1S 60..) NO SRC. SOVNOIF. 700125-4 6764.1"r010 Auot : V68liTPUT
SOUNDV. V105 V. VI07 VIOS So ,09 ,ss
.1103E 1+1200.
R.F. UNIT 291 C208 .010 ourPur

.coSme TRA226.
r I ow*
LI/ 1.25 221 V25 Lz
4R/00 LS . L/ . W LIS LIS
0000 "
ppm
11
I1500 '
6 9 n 12 ao, 27 Kgaff' ..
62
502,0.4, 'z1r. 1i 50 +30o,
bk 10 00$$5
1-0
a, 00 00.
T 3100 IQ
loo ..55.V. .1950. wiss, .2754 1114 02244,a ,,,,,2
1 1.6 L LIO LOG
o v. CI .0
.4 Lit Lw LIB L2o 1.2 GAGS 6 FIG 5 6065 6 R65 601.5 M
CI CI! .5 250. Plc. IF Mo.P1%. IF 0219 41n. PIO. I. PI 2ND D T L/I.E6
,,6, AVVIDEO .6 K,61oiT.. se12 _,Conleol
0.G5 122. PIK IF.
f40 CI6 VIII V11,2A V116
270 vino ...., ne.e., VIM., List
2.2 !i COUPLING '1,071.* 24,3
kko .1 1.4 1.65 14/ L45 6J6 ITs 270 '' .ireir. '.. 0
I.Y LOS L55 L5.7 CST3
21. .
116 4E) Lie 390 a5 sp1 IV . ..o.
al
:4.. LC TIa3
L, 1
.111 a
M.0.26704.
Leo OR.1 Av. ' 6v,i4,4L.:
P L 330 IT
CtO.i.ir 3e.
o A 0
SI We'
/ 22 soo-4ti
V13
1111500 7 W,,Tz -sc. rz ,i:'
C9- Ng 6'" .2%t r. ti:276:....
0
v.> 500 1
Liz Lit Lai L513 Lao 002 Las Ls Lae 1.50 39 .6',IiiTkrOOO 74r- 5230 396 ta '422
cciYi1,460
6J6 o 4' 7a .136 vam .276, -i6v. OIssv.
---
" 74: Ole. OM&
165 167 1.66 01 273 05 L77 C6 -
57 L59 1.61 1.65
:u pap C mf gum0 mnms
wee 860
119
R7 Iwo %a '<'477L'E
54-6 500 ;gal- gal
64-A boo G4z"N vg2,4 iaR:
CB la1 RE Ro3N ,I CONTPCL 2700
C5
1500 MEI 1.0 I #0000 11
1.54 L5 L5 L60 L42 L44 Lg. 1.10 02 L74 L76 C7-4.7 .275.
1RS I
7y 05 RIO .275 V.
22 ..2.??5,6 47 100e 6J S 6/1 6GT RN TRAP
WITC4L GNE TUN.. 6567 6567 6 SN7GT 1.203 L20
510011 J 67. SYNC.ReAR SYNC SEPARATOR UR SYNC. 4450 VERT 05C &I:OW.6 VERT. OuTPOT
VIIO \fit! 6120-A v121 0122
412705C TRW 7000 Ver 6750
-Il- s, cen. CO l
06 aid
son *5.212
Eat kTg MO V 01;0, 51.22DER
R 176 ...n -T.
5.
664 C157 .:;r
LP. 40 rat' '
CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM '5F 62"r MEG.
C,68 0174 70
m! Zp2oo .0614, F ONT2,6ROL Lt95
82.. ..
Rus3
L L 1., .4 .00 2474
K = 1000 4.Z ski LTA. ll80
oN. COIL g
paC a?y 2700
All resistance values in ohms, and 0.157 R166 .
capacitance values in nnfd., unless yee7" 6 is Rne MG
otherwise noted. 5.&O.01&& 270
41;14$ t-,,
Direction of arrows at controls indi- rt
cates clockwise rototion. CONTROL ga .111° ,n,.., ,,,,
27 t69.69/
All voltages measured with Volt- 19016
contral cOun- KV. RECT. boy. 2760 -bey c2P24
v566
Ohrnyst and with is 60 or.
terclockwise. Voltages should hold 4127
wlthin =20 with 117 v. 0-C wren, V4-6
GAL 5 6K6GT 6 5N 7GT 6866-.6 REACTION
In some receives, CI9 is omitted. VolR. DISC WOR.OuTRuT SCANNING VOICE
11 SYNC. D15C0 C172 VI20-16 V126 240 1611 - 06f .C.OIL
'1°W' 3 33 VI
Vi22 .004.14E o, 76v BO r- veL
In some receivers CI4 is fined. EL C 2204
In some receiers, substitutions hare CI77 sooy
eso .ol a7 1000 49,9
coused changes in component lead color 6 0 A tee
cues 550o
codes, in electrolytic capacitor 76.1 .el i
and their lug identification mareingi. 54 6.900
hlfa=2 Elf,1 :Soo 5046 5U46
LINER v REcY
420 91121N6 ...5191MLG
COMTRo
12203 220 187 tog".
1,1 cws 0173 RISK 13
zga "FS NOR. DRIVE / .6v
4-)" CONTROL v
CtG7 P20o
.004 me RIOS
N 05.2,CYNTR 0 .00 470 K 00
197
rage
., 6. f YYE
-boy. 27 .275V THO
.g17.ie
(-4 .009'4.
,9.
-, .
I =2 5"F;171:e'n's.t.a.
0
SYNCH.unstA POS.
-2 ....;EW4nKE 0101
n
44
TELEVISION RECEIVER 0Mi
RCAVICTOR MODEL 630TS

Servicing Notes on 1947-1948 F . M. and Television Receivers
Coils Ll to L9 and L2 to L10 are unusual in that they are SOUND I -F AMPLIFIER AND DISCRIMINATOR (block #2)-A
wound in figure 8 fashion on fingers protruding from the portion of the energy absorbed by the T2 trap circuit is fed to
switch wafer. This winding form produces a relatively non- the first sound i-f amplifier. Three stages of amplification are
critical coil since the coupling between turns is minimized. A used to provide adequate sensitivity. A conventional dis-
maximum amount of wire is used for the small inductance criminator is used to demodulate the signal. The discriminator
which is required, thus permitting greater accuracy in manu- band width is approximately 350 kc. between peaks.
facturing.
AUDIO AMPLIFIER AND SPEAKER (block #3 and 4)-The
Converter-The converter grid line operates in a similar man- audio amplifier is a conventional system employing a 6AT6
ner and is so arranged on the switch to provide coupling high mu. triode amplifier and a 6K6GT power output tube
between it and the r -f line. C10, C12, C13 and a link, provide feeding a 5 -inch E.M. dynamic speaker.
additional coupling which is arranged to produce at least a
4.5 megacycle band pass on each of the channels. PICTURE I -F AMPLIFIER AND DETECTOR (block #5)-The
picture i-f amplifier departs considerably from the conventional
L80 and C14 form a series resonant circuit used to prevent coupled amplifier. To obtain the necessary wide band char-
i-f feedback in the converter by grounding its grids for i-f acteristic with adequate gain, four stages of i-f amplification
frequency. They also act as a trap to reject short-wave signals are employed. The converter plate and each successive i-f
of i-f frequency which arrive at the converter grids in a push transformer utilizes only one tuned circuit and each is tuned to
push manner. a different frequency. The effective Q of each coil is fixed
by the shunt plate load or grid resistor so that the response
A 616 twin triode is used as converter. Since the grids are fed product of the total number of stages produces the desired
in push pull by both the signal and the oscillator, the hetero- overall response curve. Figure 3 shows the relative gains and
dyne products (i-f signals) are in phase on the converter plates selectivities of each coil and the shape of the curve of the
so the two plates are connected in parallel. Unwanted sig- quintuple combination.
nals of i-f frequency that arrive at the converter grid in a
SHARP CUT OFF
push pull manner are out of phase on the converter plates. ON OVERALL
TUE EFFECTS OF THE
TRAPS ON TUE
RESPONSE DUE T2 T1OS
Since the plates are tied together, these signals tend to cancel TO 0,1S MC N. k
INDIVIDUAL RESPONSE
CURVES ARE NOT
SOUND TRAPS SWOON.
thus reducing the possibility of interference from this source. k
T104
R -F Oscillator-The oscillator line is similar except that trimmer
adjustments are provided for each channel and the low fre-
quency coils are not figure 8 windings. For tuning each chan-
nel, brass screws are used in close proximity to the high
frequency tuning straps L66 to L76, and brass cores are
adjusted through coils L54 to L62. It is obvious that the high Figure 3-Stagger Tuned I -F Response
frequency adjustments should be made before each lower fre- In order to obtain this band pass characteristic, the picture i-f
quency one. transformers are 'uned as follows:
C15 is a fine tuning adjustment which provides approximately Converter transformer 21.8 mc. (T2 primary)
plus or minus 300 kc. variation of oscillator frequency on First pix i-f transformer 25.3 mc. (T103 primary)
channel 1 and approximately plus or minus 750 kc. on channel Second pix i-f transformer 22.3 mc (T104 primary)
13. On a few early production units, slightly less range is
Third pix i-f coil 25.2 mc. (L183)
available.
Fourth pix i-f coil 23.4 mc. (L185)
The physical location of the oscillator line with respect to the
converter grid line is such as to provide some coupling to the In such a stagger tuned system variations of individual i-f am-
converter grids. This coupling is augmented by the link shown plifier tube gain do not affect the shape of the overall i-f re-
on the schematic and provides a reasonably uniform oscillator sponse curve if the Q and center frequency of the stages re-
main unchanged. This means that the i-f amplifier tubes are
voltage at the converter grids over the entire tuning range
of the unit. The converter transformer T2 is a combination picture i-f trans-
former, sound trap, and sound i-f transformer. The converter
The converter transformer T2 is a combination picture i-f trans-
former, sound trap, and sound i-f transformer. The converter To align the i-f system, the transformers are peaked to the
plate coil is assembled within the structure of a high Q reso- specified frequencies with a signal generator. The overall
nant circuit tuned to the sound i-f frequency. This high Q coil i-f response is then observed by use of a sweep generator and
absorbs the sound i-f component from the primary. Thus on oscilloscope. Slight deviations from standard circuit Q are
the T2 primary (from which the picture i-f is fed), the sound compensated for with slight shifts in transformer center fre-
carrier is attenuated with relation to the picture channel. quency until the desired response curve is obtained. If this
response cannot be obtained, the difficulty is likely to be in a
156 location that affects either the frequency or Q of one or more

of the i-f transformers.
The response curve does shift slightly as the picture control is tuned to the adjacent channel picture carrier frequency. The
varied due to the Miller effect. This effect is the change in fourth trap (T105 secondary) is in the cathode circuit of the
tube input capacitance as its gain is varied by grid bias fourth picture i-f amplifier V113 and is tuned to the accom-
changes. The change of input capacitance causes a slight de - panying sound carrier i-f frequency. The primary of T105 in
tuning of the preceding i-f transformer and a small shift in re- series with C181 forms a series resonant circuit at the fre-
sponse shape. This effect is slight, however, and when the quency to which L185 is tuned (23.4 mc.). This provides a low
receiver is aligned with the specified grid bias, no difficulty impedance in the cathode circuit at this frequency and per-
from this source should be encountered. mits the tube to operate with a gain. However, at the resonant
frequency of the secondary (21.25 mc.), a high impedance is
For familiarization with the frequencies which are important reflected into the cathode circuit, and the gain of the tube
in the receiver's operation, Figure 4 shows the relative -position for this frequency is reduced by degeneration. The rejection
of the picture and sound carriers for channels 2, 3 and 4. If with this circuit is limited to the gain of the tube.
a station on channel 3 is transmitting a picture with video
Picture Control-The picture (or contrast) control varies the bias
frequencies up to 4 mc., the picture carrier will have side band
on the r -f amplifier and the first, second and third i-f amplifier
frequencies up to 65.25 mc. The lower side bands are sup-
control grids. It is a manual sensitivity control, and is oper-
pressed at the transmitter.
ated to prevent overloading of the i-f stages and to provide
the correct video output level from the second detector. A
2-.4.- CHANNEL Dom-CHANNEL 4-41
64 -60 MC 60 -66 MC 66 -72 MC novel arrangement is used in conjunction with the control.
59.75 MC 65.75 MC 11.75 MC The object of this system is to provide optimum signal to
SOUND SOUND SOUND
CARRIER CARRIER CARRIER noise ratio from the receiver. This is achieved by allowing
55.25 MC 61.25 MC 67.25 MC the r -f amplifier to run essentially at full gain over a consider-
PI% PI% Pis
CARRIER CARRIER CARRIER able range of the picture control. The gain in the r -f stage is
54 60 66
reduced only when it becomes necessary to do so in order to
MC MC MC
MC
prevent overloading of the first i-f stage. The circuit shown in
Figure 6 is used to provide the non -proportional r -f and, i-f bias
Figure 4-Television Channel Frequencies
from a single control.
With the receiver r -f oscillator operating at a higher frequency

than the received channel, the i-f frequency relation of picture
to sound carrier is reversed as shown in Figure 5.
ADJACENT ADJACENT
CHANNEL CHANNEL
CHANNEL S
DID CARRIER Figure 6-Picture Control Circuit
25.75 When the picture control is in the maximum gain position, the
MC
i-f bias is approximately minus one volt. The r -f bias is taken
21. 25 MC from a tap up the control network which would be several
171.15 2/.25
C CRANNSL C
CHANNEL 2
volts positive except for relatively heavy conduction of the
CHANNEL 4 SOUND CARRIER
PIE CARRIER SOUND CARRIER diode. Diode conduction holds the voltage at this point to
approximately ground potential.
Figure 5-Overall Picture I -F Response
As the picture control gain setting is reduced slightly, the i-f
Traps-Since it is necessary for the picture i-f to pass fre- bias begins to go more negative. At the r -f bias junction,
quencies quite close to the sound carrier frequency, the sound diode conduction is reduced but the voltage remains essen-
carrier would produce interference in the picture. In order tially constant. When the picture control setting is reduced
to prevent this interference, traps must be added to the picture still further, diode conduction is stopped and the r -f bias volt-
i-f amplifier to attenuate the sound carrier. If the receiver age changes rapidly to assume a more negative potential than
should be operating on channel 3, it is possible that inter- the i-f grid.
ference would be experienced from the channel 2 sound carrier
and the channel 4 picture carrier. The adjacent channel traps This high value of bias on the r -f amplifier is necessary to
are provided to attenuate these unwanted frequencies. reduce the triode nearly to cut-off. Although triodes are not
generally considered to be remote cut-off tubes, sufficient curva-
The first three traps are absorption circuits. The first trap (T2 ture is present in the grid control characteristic to provide ap-
secondary) is tuned to the accompanying sound i-f frequency, proximately a ten to one reduction in gain when the bias ap-
the second trap (T103 secondary) is tuned to the adjacent proaches the cut-off point.
channel sound frequency, and the third trap (T104 secondary)
157
VIDEO AMPLIFIER AND D -C RESTORER (block #6)-The func- Integrating Network-The purpose of this network is to sepa-
tion of this section of the receiver is to amplify the video output rate the horizontal from the vertical sync and to pass the
of the second detector. Two amplifier stages are employed. vertical to the vertical oscillator.
The gain from the first video grid to output plate is 30X and
the frequency response extends to 4 mc. Since the horizontal sync pulse is of short duration (5 micro-
D -C Restorer-Since the video amplifier is an a -c amplifier,
seconds) and the vertical pulse is of much longer duration
the d -c component of the video signal that represents the (190 microseconds), they can be separated by an r -c filter
average illumination of the original scene will not be passed.
which is responsive to wave shape. The integrating network
Unless this d -c component is restored, difficulty will be ex- which is such a filter is composed of R163, R164, R165, C151,
C152 and C153. In operation it can be considered as a low-
perienced in maintaining proper scene Illumination. For any
given scene, this average illumination could be set properly pass filter which by-passes the narrow or high frequency
by the brightness control. However, a change of scene would horizontal sync but passes the broad or low frequency vertical
sync.
probably necessitate resetting this control. The d -c restorer
accomplishes this setting automatically thus assuring proper
VERTICAL OSCILLATOR DISCHARGE AND OUTPUT (block
picture illumination at all times.
#9)-The function of these circuits is to provide a sawtooth
KINESCOPE (block #7)-The Kinescope is a 10" tube employ-
of current of the proper frequency and phase to perform the
ing a new type screen material which provides considerably
vertical scanning for ihe Kinescope. To produce such a current
improved picture brilliance. The tube employs magnetic de-
in the vertical deflection coil, a somewhat different shaped
flection and magnetic focus. An ion trap is employed to pre- voltage wave is required.
vent the ion beam from producing a brown spot on the picture
Since the vertical trace is slow, requiring approximately 16,000
screen. The inside and outside of the flaring portidn of the
microseconds, and the vertical deflection coil inductance is
bulb are given a metalhc coating. The inner coating, which
small, approximately 50 millihenries, the majority of the volt-
is the second anode, is connected to the high volrage supply.
age across the coil during trace is across its resistive com-
The outer coating is grounded by means of two small springs
ponent. In order to produce a linear change of current through
on the deflection yoke support. The capacity between the two
a resistance, a linear change of voltage is necessary. Retrace,
coatings is approximately 500 mmf and is used as a high volt-
however, must be accomplished within the 666 microsecond
age filter condenser.
vertical blanking time and therefore requires faster
rate of change of current through the coil. During this time,
SYNC AMPLIFIER AND SEPARATOR (block #8)-The function
the effect of its inductance becomes appreciable because of
of this system is to amplify the sync signal and effect separa-
the required fast rate of change of current. It is therefore
tion of sync from the video.
necessary to apply a large pulse of voltage across the coil in
order to obtain rapid retrace. The composite waveform re-
Sync Amplifier-The first sync amplifier V118 is a 6SK7 which
quired to produce a sawtooth of current in the coil is a saw-
has a remote cut-off characteristic. The signal from the d -c
tooth of voltage with a sharp pulse as shown in Figure 7.
restorer is fed into this amplifier with the polarity such that
VI21 and V122 supply such a voltage.
the sync is in the negative direction. Noise pulses above sync
that remain after the limiting action of the first video grid are Vertical Oscillator and Discharge-A single 615 triode, V121,
thus further compressed and the sync to noise ratio is again with its associated components form a blocking oscillator and
improved. discharge circuit. The wave form of the voltage at the control
grid of this tube with respect to time, is a small, positive surge
Sync Separator-The sync at the sync separator grid is posi- followed by a large negative drop which returns to the posi-
tive in polarity. The operating voltages applied to the grid, tive condition at a relatively slow rate. During the negative
screen and plate, are such that the negative portion of the part of the cycle, the grid is beyond cut-off and the discharge
applied signal is cut off. Thus, the video and blanking pulses capacitor, C158, charges through resistors R169 and R170.
are removed and only the sync pulses appear at the sync
VERTICAL OSCILLATOR VERTICAL DEFLECTING COIL
separator plate.
CIL/N
Second Sync Amplifier-The sync pulses appearing at the sec- GRID

VOLTAGE COIL
ond sync amplifier, (V120A), grid are negative in polarity and
must be inverted before they can be injected into the sweep
oscillators. The signal at the V120A grid is sufficient to drive
the tube beyond cut-off and the signal is again clipped. This
final clipping removes all amplitude variations between sync VOLTAGE
PLATE ACROSS
pulses due to noise, hum, etc., and it appears with the correct
polarity at the plate.
VOLTAGE THE
COIL L L
158 Figure 7-Vertical Sweep Waveforms

When the grid reaches a voltage that permits plate to cathode HORIZONTAL SYNC DISCRIMINATOR, HORIZONTAL OSCIL-
conduction, C158 discharges through T106 secondary and LATOR AND OSCILLATOR CONTROL (block #10, 11 and 12)
V121. The discharge current of C158 builds up a magnetic -These circuits are a radical departure from the conventional
field in T106 that in turn induces a positive voltage at the grid systems used for framing the picture in the horizontal direc-
of V121. This positive voltage on the V121 grid lowers the tion. Their features are ease of operation, stability and good
plate resistance of the tube and allows C158 to discharge noise immunity.
more rapidly. This process builds up very rapidly until C158
is nearly discharged. The magnetic field in T106 then collapses HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR (block #11)-The horizontal oscil-
and drives the V121 grid negative. The charge placed on C154 lator is an extremely stable Hartley oscillator operating at the
due to grid conduction during the positive pulse now holds scanning frequency 15,750 cps. The primary of T108 (ter-
the grid negative. As the charge on C154 leaks oft through minals A, B and C) is the oscillator coil. This coil is closely
11171, R172, etc., the grid slowly becomes less negative and coupled to the secondary winding (terminals D, E and F) and
approaches the point which will allow plate to cathode con- thus feeds a sine wave voltage to V123.
duction. Just before the conduction point is reached, the 60 HORIZONTAL SYNC DISCRIMINATOR (block #10)-The sync
cycle vertical synchronizing pulse from the integrating net- discriminator, V123, is a 6AL5 dual diode in a circuit which
work is applied to the V121 grid. This pulse is sufficient to produces a d -c output voltage proportional to the phase dis-
drive the tube to conduction and the process is repeated. In placement between two input voltages.
this manner, the incoming sync maintains control of vertical
scanning. The sine wave oscillator voltages applied to the plates of V123
are equal in amplitude and opposite in phase. The syn-
On the plate of V121, a sawtooth of voltage appears due to
chronizing pulses from the second sync amplifier are fed
the slow charging and rapid discharging of C158. A sharp
through a differentiating network to attenuate the vertical sync
negative pulse also occurs during the discharge period. See
and then applied to the center tap of T108. The horizontal sync
Figure 7. This pulse appears because of the action of R174
pulses thus appear in phase and of equal amplitude on the
and C158, an action which is known as peaking. When V121
diode plates as shown in Figure 8. When the pulse and sine
is conducting, the plate voltage drops nearly to cathode po-
wave are properly phased as in (A), both diodes will produce
tential. C158 discharges during this time. However, since the
equal voltage across their load resistances, R191 and R192.
conduction time is short, C158 cannot be completely discharged
However, these voltages are of opposing polarity and there-
due to the time constant of R174 in series with C158. When
fore the sum of the voltages across these two load resistors
V121 becomes non -conducting, the plate voltage does not
will be zero. If the phase of the pulse changes with respect
have to rise slowly from cathode potential but instead rises
to the sine wave as in (B), the top diode will produce more
immediately to an appreciable value due to the charge that
voltage across 11191 than the bottom diode produces across
remains on C158. The plate voltage then slowly rises from
R192. Thus, the voltage across the two will be positive. In
this value as C158 charges through R170 and R169. Ad-
(C) the reverse condition exists. It is obvious that the output
justment of the height control R169 varies the amplitude of
of the discriminator can swing from positive through zero to
the sawtooth voltage on V121 plate by controlling the rate
negative dependent upon the phase relation of the synchro-
at which CI58 can charge.
nizing signal and the oscillator. This d -c output is applied to
The voltage present on the V121 plate is of the shape re- the grid of V124.
quired to produce a sawtooth of current in the vertical de-
flection coil. It is now necessary to amplify it in a tube
capable of supplying a sufficient amount of power.
Vertical Output-A 6K6GT is connected as a triode_ for the
output stage, V122. The vertical output transformer T106 TOP DIODE
matches the resistance of the vertical deflection coils to the
plate impedance of the 6K6GT. O
R178 is provided as a vertical sweep linearity control. Since
the grid control characteristic curve of V122 is not a straight
line over its entire range, the effect of adjustments of 11178 is to
produce slight variations in shape of the sawtooth by shifting
BOTTOM DIODE
the operating point of the tube.
Since the slope of the curve varies at these different point Figure 8-Sync Discriminator Waveforms
and thus varies the effective gain of the tube, it is apparent
that adjustments of linearity effect picture height and that such HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR CONTROL (block # 12)-V124
adjustments must be accompanied by readjustments of the the oscillator control is a 6AC7 connected as a reactance tube
height control R169. Adjustments of the height control affect across the V125 oscillator coil. A change in 'the d -c output
the shape of the sawtooth voltage on V121 plate so that ad- of the discriminator produces a change in Gm of V124 which
justments of height must be accompanied by readjustments of
linearity.
159
Servicing Notes on 1947-1948 F . M. and Television Receivers
in turn changes the frequency of the oscillator. II the phase In operation, the visible portion of the horizontal trace is ap-
of the oscillator shifts with respect to the synchronizing pulse, proximately 53 microseconds in duration. Although the induct-
the corresponding change in d -c from the discriminator brings ance of the horizontal deflection coil is in the order of 8 milli -
the oscillator back into correct phase. C167 and C170 form henries, at the horizontal scanning frequency, the reactance of
a voltage divider to attenuate rapid changes in d -c from the the coil predominates over its resistance. This is a different
sync discriminator such as are produced by vertical sync or case than that encountered in the vertical deflection system
bursts of noise. and so a different method of operation must be employed.
HORIZONTAL DISCHARGE. OUTPUT AND REACTION SCAN-
NING (block # 13)-The purpose of these circuits is to produce Horizontal blanking is approximately 10 microseconds in dura-
a sawtooth of current in the deflection coils to provide horizon- tion. During this time, the Kinescope beam must be returned
tal scanning. One-half of a 6SN7GT is employed for to the left side of the tube, the trace started and made linear.
the discharge tube V120B. In order that all this be accomplished within the horizontal
The oscillation in V125 takes place between screen -grid and blanking time, only 7 microseconds can be allowed for the re-
cathode. Since the peak to peak voltage on its grid is ap- turn trace. In order to obtain such rapid retrace, the hori-
proximately 130 volts, a square wave is produced on its plate. zontal deflection coil, output transformer and associated cir-
This wave is differentiated by C176 and R202, and the pulse cuits are designed to resonate at a frequency such that one
so obtained is applied to the grid of the discharge tube V120B. half cycle of oscillation at this frequency will occur in the 7
The discharge tube is normally cut off due to bias produced by microseconds retrace time limit.
grid rectification of these incoming pulses. The pulse from
V125 overcomes this bias and drives the tube into heavy During the latter part of the horizontal trace, the output tube
momentary conduction. During this period the plate voltage conducts very heavily and builds up a strong magnetic field
falls nearly to cathode potential and C179 discharges rapidly. in the deflection coil and output transformer. When the nega-
However, since the period of conduction is quite short, C179 tive pulse from the horizontal tube is applied to the output
is not completely discharged due to the time constant intro- tube grid, its plate current is suddenly cut off and the magnetic
duced by R187 and R210 in series with C179. Then when field in the transformer and deflection coil begins to collapse
V1203 again becomes non conducting, the plate voltage rises at a rate determined by the resonant frequency of the sys-
tem. Actually the system is shock excited into oscillation.
quickly to a value determined by the charge remaining on
C179. From this point the plate voltage rises slowly and ap- Since the output tube is cut off and since the voltage generated
proximately linearly as C179 charges through R204. by the collapsing field is negative on the reaction scanning
tube plate so that it is non-conductive, there is essentially no
load on the circuit and it oscillates vigorously for one half
Horizontal Output and Reaction Scanning-The operation of
cycle. If the reaction scanning tube were not present, the cir-
these two circuits is so interconnected that it will be neces-
cuit would continue to oscillate as shown in Figure 9 (A). This
sary to discuss them simultaneously. The function of the out-
condition, however, is not permitted. One half cycle of oscilla-
put tube V126 is to supply sufficient current of the proper
tion is permitted because at the end of such a time the cur-
wave form to the horizontal deflection coil in order to provide
The function of the re-
horizontal scanning for the Kinescope. rent in the deflection coil has reached a maximum in the op-
action scanning tube V128 is to stop oscillation of certain posite direction to which it was flowing at the end of the trace
components at certain times and thus help provide a linear period. This reversal of the direction of flow of current was
trace. Other functions of these circuits include the utilization the requirement for retrace and it was accomplished in the
of energy stored in the horizontal deflection coil to furnish re- allotted 7 microseconds.
trace and Kinescope high voltage. The reaction scanning cir- Now that retrace has been completed, it is necessary to start
cuit also recovers some of the energy from the yoke kickback the next trace. The energy which was placed in the deflec-
and uses it to help supply the plate power requirements of the
tion coil by the output tube in the later part of the last trace
output tube. has not been dissipated. During the one-half cycle of oscilla-
tion retrace was accomplished with very little loss of energy.
The field in the coil was merely reversed in polarity. So, at
MORrIONTOL OUTPUT TUBE NORIZONTAL DEFLECTION COIL this point, a strong field exists in the deflection coil.
As mentioned previously, if the coil were not damped, it would
continue to oscillate at its natural frequency as shown in Fig-
ure 9 .(A). To prevent such an oscillation the reaction scan-
ning tube is brought into action. This tube is in a modified
damper circuit which is effectively connected across the de-
flecting coil.
VOLTAGE
In the oscillating circuit, the current in the deflection coil lags
ACROSS
N! the voltage by approximately 90 degrees and when the cur-
PLATE COIL
CURRENT rent has reached its maximum negative value, the voltage
across the coil being 90 degrees ahead, has begun to swing
160 Figure 9-Horizontal Sweep Waveforms positive. When the voltage on the reaction scanning tube
plate becomes positive with respect to its cathode, it begins to
SERVICE SUGGESTIONS
conduct heavily. This places such a load across the deflection
coil that it cannot oscillate. Instead the field begins to decay Following is a list of symptoms of possible failures and
at a rate permitted by the load which the reaction scanning an indication of some of the possible faults.
tube placed on the coil. The circuit constants are such that NO RASTER ON KINESCOPE:
this decay is linear and at a rate suitable for the visible trace.
(1) Incorrect adjustment of ion trap-Coils reversed either
If no additional energy were fed into the coil, the field would front to back or top to bottom, ion trap coil open.
fall to zero and the Kinescope beam would come to rest in
the center of the tube. In such an r-1 circuit, as the current (2) V126 or V127 inoperative-check voltage and waveform
approaches its final value, it does not do so linearly but on grids and plates.
asymptotically as indicated in Figure 9 (B). It is therefore
necessary to have the output tube begin to supply power to (3) No high voltage-If horizontal deflection is operating as
evidenced by the correct waveform on terminal 4 of
the deflection coil before the energy in the coil is completely horizontal output transformer, the trouble can be isolated
dissipated. Figure 9 (C) shows the shape of the current sup- to the 8016 circuit. Either the T109 high voltage winding
plied by the output tube. Although the currents supplied by is open, (points 2 to 3), the 8016 tube is defective, its
the output tube and by the decaying field are curved at the filament circuit is open, C187 is shorted or R239 open.
cross over point, together they produce a coil current that is
linear.
(4) V125 and V120 -B circuits inoperative-check for sine wave
on V125 grid, pulse on V120 -B grid, and sawtooth on
By the time the beam has reached the right side of the Kine-
V126 grid. Refer to schematic.
scope, the output tube is conducting heavily and has built up
a strong field in the transformer and coil. At this point, the (5) Reaction scanning tube (V128) inoperative.
output tube is again suddenly cut off and the process is re-
peated. (6) Defective Kinescope.
The 6BG6G plate voltage is supplied through the 5V4G which
is conducting over the major portion of the trace. Capacitors (7) R152 open, (terminal 3 to ground).
C186 and C188 are charged during this period and this charge
(8) No receiver plate voltage-filter capacitor or speaker
is sufficient to supply the 6BG6G plate when the 5V4G is not
field shorted-negative bleeder or speaker field open.
conducting.
The charge is placed on these capacitors by the receiver d -c
NO VERTICAL DEFLECTION:
supply and by the current from the collapse of the field in
the horizontal deflecting coil. The a -c axis of the sweep volt- (1) V121 or V122 inoperative. Check voltage and wave forms
age is 275 volts above ground since the T109 secondary is on grids and plates.
connected to the receiver 275 volt bus. The charge placed on
these capacitors by the coil kick -back is therefore in addition (2) T107 open.
to that from the d -c supply and thus the capacitors are (3) Vertical deflection coils open.
charged to a voltage greater than the d -c supply. This per-
mits operation of the 6BG6G at a higher voltage than is ob- NO HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION:
tainable from the receiver power supply and produces an in-
crease in the system efficiency by salvaging energy that would (1) V125, V120B, V126 or V128 inoperative-check voltage and
wave forms on grids and plate.
otherwise have been wasted.
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY (block #14)-The Kinescope (2) T109 open.
high voltage supply is unusual in that the power is obtained
(3) Horizontal deflection coil open.
from the energy stored in the deflection inductances during
each horizontal scan. When the 6BG6G plate current is cut
off by the incoming signal, a positive pulse appears on the
POOR VERTICAL LINEARITY:
T109 primary due to the collapsing field in the deflection coil.
This pulse of voltage is stepped up, rectified, filtered and ap- (1) If adjustments cannot correct, change V122.
plied to the second anode of the Kinescope. Since the fre-
quency of the supply voltage is high, (15,750 cps), relatively (2) Vertical output transformer defective.
little filter capacity is necessary. Since the filter capacity is
(3) V121 inoperative -check voltage and wave forms on grid
small, the stored energy is small, and the high voltage supply
and plate.
is made less dangerous.
(4) R174, C158, C221 C or C222 -B defective.
LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY (block #15)-The low volt-
age power supply provides the filament and plate voltages (5) Low bias or plate voltage-check rectifiers and capacitors
in supply circuits.
for the receiver. The unit is conventional, and employs two
5U4G rectifier tubes in parallel to supply 400 volts d -c at
approximately 290 ma.
161
SIGNAL AT KINESCOPE GRID BUT NO SYNC: PICTURE JITTER:
(1) Picture control advanced too far. (1) Picture control operated at excessive level.
(2) V114 -B, V118, V119, or V120 -A inoperative. Check voltage
and waveforms at their grids and plates.
(2) If regular sections at the left picture are displaced change
V126.
(3) C142 defective.
(3) Vertical instability may be due to loose connections or
noise.
SIGNAL ON KINESCOPE GRID BUT NO VERTICAL SYNC:

(4) Horizontal instability may be due to unstable transmitted
sync. Connect sync link to terminal 1 and 2.
(1) Check V121 and associated circuit -C154, T106, etc.
RASTER BUT NO SOUND, PICTURE OR SYNC:
(2) Integrating network inoperative -Check C149, C151, C152,
C153, 11162, R163, R164 and R165. (I) Defective antenna or transmission line.
(2) R -F oscillator off frequency.

SIGNAL ON KINESCOPE GRID BUT NO HORIZONTAL SYNC:
(3) R -F unit inoperative -Check V1, V2, V3 and their socket
(1) T108 misadjusted voltages.
(2) V123 or V124 inoperative -check socket voltages and DARK VERTICAL LINE ON LEFT OF PICTURE:
waveforms.
(1) Reduce horizontal drive and readjust width and hori-
(31 T108 defective. zontal linearity.
(4) C166, C167, C170 or C171 defective.
(2) Replace V126.
(5) If horizontal speed is completely off and cannot be ad-
LIGHT VERTICAL LINE ON LEFT OF PICTURE:
justed check C168, C169, R168 and R196.
(1) C181 defective.
SOUND & RASTER BUT NO PICTURE OR SYNC: (2) V128 defective.
(1) Picture i-f, detector or video amplifier inoperative -check (3) Change tap on R209.
V110, V111, V112, V113, V114, V115 and V116 -check
socket voltages. POOR HORIZONTAL LINEARITY:
(2) Bad contact to Kinescope grid. (1) If adjustments do not correct, change V128 or V126.
(2) T109 or L201 defective.
PICTURE STABLE BUT POOR RESOLUTION:
(3) C186 or C188 or R209 defective.
(1) V114, V115 or V116 defective.
(4) C179, R187 or R210 defective.
(2) Peaking coils defective -check for specified resistance.
WRINKLES ON LEFT SIDE OF RASTER:
(3) C138. C140, C141 or C142 defective.
(4) Make sure that the focus control operates on both sides (1) R180, R201 or C181 defective.
of proper focus.
(2) Defective yoke.
(5) R -F and I -F circuits misaligned.
PICTURE OUT OF PHASE HORIZONTALLY:
PICTURE SMEAR:
(1) T108 winding D to F incorrectly tuned or connected in
(1) Video amplifier overloaded by excessive input -reduce reverse.
picture control setting.
(2) 8200 or R202 defective.
(2) Insufficient bias on V115 and V116 resulting in grid cur-
rent on video signal. Check bias and possible grid current.
RASTER & SIGNAL ON KINESCOPE BUT NO SOUND:
(3) Defective coupling condenser or grid load resistor -check (1) R -F oscillator off frequency.
C138, C140. C141, C223B, R138. R142, R143, R148, etc.
(4) This trouble can originate at the transmitter -check on (21 Sound discriminator or audio amplifier inoperative --
another station. check V104, V105, V106, V107, V108, V109 and their socket
voltages.
(3) T114 or C209 defective.
162 (4) Speaker defective.

Sparton Superheterodyne Model 10 -76 -PA
EM. ALIGNMENT
In that the alignment of the I.F. stages of an F.M. receiver is inherently far more critical than is
the case in the conventional A.M. receiver the visual method using an oscilloscope and frequency modulated
signal generator should be used where such equipment is available. In case this equipment is not available
any good signal generator providing a stable signal at 10.7 Mc. may be used providing a vacuum tube volt-
meter and zero center voltmeter are used in place of the output meter. Both methods are outlined below.
Visual Alignment of F.M.-I.F. Transformers and Discriminators.
1. Equipment required.
(a) Cathode ray oscilloscope with both vertical and horizontal amplifiers and preferably with
calibrated screen.
(b) Frequency modulated signal generator providing sweep width up to approximately 400 Kc.,
preferably variable. The modulation voltage should be available at terminals to syncronize
the oscilloscope sweep.
(c) Insulated alignment tools and shielded leads for the scope and signal generator.
2. Preliminary adjustments.
(a) Set the signal generator for a center frequency of 10.7 Mc. and allow sufficient warm up
time for the generator to stabilize. It is very important that the frequency remain at
exactly 10.7 Mc. throughout the entire alignment procedure. A shift in frequency during
alignment might result in stagger tuning with consequent impairments of receiver performance.
(b) Turn the oscilloscope on and after focusing the beam for the smallest spot of desired bril-
liance, center the spot exactly.
(c) Connect syncronize or sweep terminals of signal generator to the horizontal input post on
the oscilloscope.
3. Alignment of plate reactor and discriminator.
(a) Connect output from signal generator to pin #4 of 1st limiter tube (6SJ7GT).
(b) Connect output cable from pin #5 of 6S8GT tube to the vertical input terminals on the scope.
(c) With the sweep or modulation control off advance the P.F. control on the signal generator to
give a trace approximating Fig. 1.
(d) If the sweep control is now advanced the trace will tilt like Fir. 2.
(e) Adjust core in L15 plate reactor for maximum vertical deflection. Note that the length of
trace increases as Fig. 3.
163
(f) Align discriminator transformer by adjusting primary C60% for maximum vertical deflection,
meanwhile keeping the trace in the exact center of the screen by adjusting secondary C606.
See Fig. 4 Fig. 4
When the discriminator has been properly aligned and the generator sweep increased to about
400 Kc. the conventional shaped discriminator curve will be presented on the screen.
See Fig. 5.
This presentation will be helpful for final alignment and balance of the discriminator trans-
former. Make sure that the straight center position crosses the exact center of the screen
and that the distance from the Jertical center line to each peak is approximately equal.
4. Alignment of #3 I.F. Transformer
(a) Connect input from signal generator to pin #4 on No. 2 I.F. amplifier tube (6SE7GT).
(b) Connect output cable from AVC terminal on #3 I.F. transformer to the vertical terminals on
the scope using a 50 K ohm isolating resistor at the set end of the cable.
(c) With generator sweep width set for approximately 400 Ec. increase W.F. output until a con-
venient pattern is presented on the screen.
(d) Adjust C42A and C42B for maximum vertical deflection with a symmetrical curve. See Fig. 6.
Fig. 6
DUMMY ANTENNA
0-07M
I Cl A
A
0 0
Generator i
C2 Receiver
-11-AAAN\ A
0
0 0
G G
C1-200 mmf.Condenser 400 V.D.C. ----Case Shield

C2-400 mmf. Condenser 400 V.D.C. Choke Coil Specification
C3-.02 mmf.Condenser 400 V.D.C. Tubing - 3/8" Diameter Bakelite
R -100 ohms Resistor 1/4 Watt Wire - No. 38 Enameled
L -Choke Coil Turns - 59 closely wound (Impregnated)
164 Note: When using this dummy antenna the generator

output impedance should be 10 ohms or lower.
5. Alignment of No. 2 I.F. Transformer
(a) Connect input from signal generator to pin #4 of No. 1 I.F. tube (6SK7GT). The output
connection remains at the AVC terminal of the 3rd I.F. transformer.
(b) Align C33A and C3313 per instructions and diagram in (c) and (d) above.
6. Alignment of No. 1 I.F. Transformer
(a) Connect input from signal generator to Pin #6 on the converter tube (7Q7). (Note: There
will be an apparent reduction in gain here due to the short circuiting effect of the F.M.
detector coil but this may be compensated for by increasing the generator output. If the
generator output is still too low the lead from 7Q7 pin #6 to the wave band switch may be
unsoldered thus removing the short circuit).
(b) Align C27A and C27B per instructions in (c) and (d) Par. 4. See Fig. 6.
7. Caution: Do not try to "touch up" or worse yet completly align the I.F. channel by applying
the signal to the converter grid. To do so will almost certainly result in misalignment of
one stage to compensate for the poor alignment of another.
8. For alignment of the A.M.-I.F. transformers see alignment chart. Operation

VOLTAGE CHART
Position of volume control: Full with set tunned to quiet channel.

Line Voltage: 117 Volts AC
Position of Band Switch: Broadcast with the exception ***.
Voltage of Socket Prongs to Ground
See ,gone Nss. on s-hemmtic.
TUBE FUNCTION Grid
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5 No. 6 No. 7 No. 8 Cap
6SG7 R. F. Amplifier 0 0 2.20 .10 2.20 155 6.0* 270

7Q7 Osc. & Convt. 6.05* 270 110 -9.8 0 ** 0 0
6SK7GT No. 1 I. F. Amp. 0 0 3.0 ** 3.0 95 6.05* 270
6SK7GT No. 2 I. F. Amp. *** 0 0 3.0 ** 3.0 *** 6.05* 270
6SJ7GT 1st Limiter 0 0 0 -.3 0 46 6.05* 270
6SJ7GT 2nd Limiter 0 0 0 -.42 0 47 6.05* 207

6S8GT F.M.-A.N.Det. 1st Audio -.20 0 -.20 -.30 ** 95 6.05 0 -.27
6V6G Power Amp. 0 0 260 270 ** **** 6.05* 12.5
5Y3GT Rectifier 0 375 0 360* 0 360* 360 375
6E5 Viso-Glo 5.95* 23 -4.4 270
NOTES: Voltage readings are for schematic diagram on back of sheet. Allow 15% ,L or - on all measurements.
Always use meter scale which will give greatest deflection within scale limits. All DC measure-
ments made with 20,000 ohms per volt voltmeter. All AC voltages made with rectifier type voltmeter.
Unless designated otherwise, voltages in table are / DC voltages.
AC volts.
** Cannot be measured with 20,000 ohms per volt voltmeter.
*** Band switch in F.M. position.
**** Zero volts or 237 volts. (Tie point only on some receivers).
165
THE SPARKS-WITHINGTON COMPANY
Sparton Superheterodyne Model 10.. 7 6 -PA

ALIGNMENT CHART
NOTE: See page 6 of this bulletin for complete F.M. channel to megacycle equivalents.
OPER- ALIGNMENT GENERATOR DUMMY GENERATOR BAND TUNNING

ATION OF CONNECTED ANT. FREQUENCY SWITCH COND. TRIMMER REMARKS
TO SETTING SETTING
1 Set dial pointer even with left-hand stop line with condenser closed.
Pin #6 of 7Q7 C34A & B Peak Accurately
A.M. -I.F. Convt. .02 MFD 456 KC. BC. Open C28A & B " "
2 Tube Cond.
3 1600 KC. 1600 KC. C24B Osc.T. "
fl
BC. BC. BC. 1500 KC. C3B R.F.TR. " "

4 R.F. ANT. * 1500 KC. C2A Ant.TR. " "
5 600 KC. 600 KC. C24A Osc. P. **

6 Repeat operations 3, 4, & 5.
7 Check calibrations at 600 KC., 1000 KC., and 1500 KC.
C25 Osc.Tr. Peak Accurately
C2B R.F.Tr. **
8 S.W. F.M. ANT. * 18 MC. S.W. 18 MC.
C3A Ant. Tr.
BAND to BAND
GND. C26 Osc. P. See Oper. #9
9 C26 Osc. Padder is precision set ak, the factory and should not be moved.
10 Repeat operation #8.

11 Check calibration at 6 MC. and 18 MC.
SPECIAL NOTE: For complete F.M.-I.F. visual alignment instructions see pages 3, 4, and 5 of this
12 bulletin. An alternate F.M.-I.F. alignment using a V.T.V.M. is shown in operations 13, 14, 15, 16,
17, and 18 below.
Pin No. 4 on let .02 MFD. 10.7 MC.
13 LIMITER Lim. Tube. Cond. Unmod. F.M. Optional L15 Slug ***
Disc. Pin #4 on 1st C60A

Stage limiter to Gnd. Disc. ***
14 .02 MFD. 10.7 MC. F.M. Optional Prim.
Pri.
Cond. Unmod.
Disc. Pin #4 on 1st C6OB
15 Stage Limiter to Gnd. Disc. See Note 1.
Sec. Sec.
C42A & B
16 F.M.-I.F. Note "A" No. 3. I.F. See Note 2.
17 Note "B" .02 MFD. 10.7 MC. F.M. 10.7 MC. C33A & B
No. 2 I.F. " " "
Cond. Unmod.
C27A & B
18 Note "C"
No. 1 I.F. " " "
C22 Osc.Tr. " " "

108 MC.
F.M. 270 108 MC. F.M. 300 C13 R.F.TR. " " "
19 F.M.-R.F.
Ant. OHMS Unmod. Channel C8 Ant.Tr. " " "
20 Repeat operation 19.

21 Check calibration at 200, 250, and 300 channels.
NOTE: The F.M.-I.F. alignment proceedure shown above is made with a measurements vacuum tube voltmeter.
* Use dummy antenna as described on page 1 of this bulletin.
** Rock dial while adjusting for maximum output.
*** Connect V.T.V.M. from C.T. of discriminator coil to chassis gnd. using lowest scale on D.C.
range. Adjust for maximum reading.
NOTE 1: Connect V.T.V.M. from pin #5 of 688GT tube to gnd. adjust for zero reading on V.T.V.M.
NOTE 2: Connect V.T.V.M. between A.V.C. terminal on #3 I.F. Trans. to gnd. Tune for maximum response
on lowest scale D.C. range.
"A" Connect signal generator between pin #4 on No. 2 I.F. tube and gnd.
"B" Connect signal generator between pin #4 on No. 1 I.F. tube and Gnd.
166 "C" Connect signal generator between pin #6 on 7Q7 converter tube and gnd.
THE SPARKS-WITHINGTON COMPANY
0
L3 C2A
C3A
328
C3B
Sparton
L7
L4
Superheterodyne Model
10 -76 -PA
L9
CHASSIS DIAGRAM
0 I0
L14 6SJ7GT L13 C31 C33

C42 (DB cp, B
6 6
B A
GA 0A
L12
6S8GT 6SK7GT
L15
I
6SK7GT
6SK6GT
C24B
O OB OPB
C22 O L11 (Di OA

C4A
O
C28 027
C13
Fwr. Trans.
6E5
CS
Green4D
O Black
lr"
See Schematic
Ii
167
SW.& Tone Control Volume Band Switch Tuning
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM MODEL IO-76PA
A.M. INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY 456 K.C.
F. M. INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY 10.7 M.C.
BOTTOM VIEKS OF ALL SOGKET CONNECTIONS
F'A rOIL7""
TO ALL HEATERS !UT ST310
.o, 5.`'7GRT
=w CO'ke.41;i7 1
Lc-
Z.11.7-1ALW'`^'
ef:ftolfat
C46 A,B.0 15-15,0 WOE LEG T.
C41 24 1a/r.. MOLDEO MICA
21°
.0011,0.200 V. TUBULAR
20 WO. 25 V.ELEC T.
.01 400 V. "RIM,.
IM4rINTZL
Li LOOP ..TEN NR
5.W. ANT COIL 0,5E4C .1511-
U.; Pg. M: :1111. 137703

Lb U: 01E. trg: ttIM-1
alisc4t7.41P-17-E71
5X0000 KC./ 30.6 X (1000KC. TO 455KG.) 30 X(10.7 MC.1
-2.5 X(1000 KC) 2.2 X I9EAC,T010.76,)
I X (98MCI 3 X( 98 NC)
87 0(4550C.
RAT 0
()ET CTOP
CONVERTER T-2 2501 F.
AMPLIFIER :111, DRIVER
If
,
C. 1
Mr
C.I5 r
LOOP
4
22,000.6
0-20 IL N
100
00
( 400 32 I 400 )
4.4,)
1ST AUDIO
B A.M. DET.
it 11,
It ,
L J
NOTES:
PHONO
I- RANGE SWITCH SHOWN IN F.M.-1 POSITION. 100.000.
JACK 2-"F. INDICATES SWITCH ELEMENTS ON FRONT 65
00000 SIDE OF WAFER. T- 4 T-5
3-.R" INDICATES SWITCH ELEMENTS ON REAR I
A -s2 OUTPUT
SIDE OF WAFER
750MMF 000 P.10
RECTIFIER
C 19
SLIDER CARRIAGE
110 V. AC.
60 CYCLES
WIRE
RECORDER
A C OUTLETS
CABINET
LAMP
Voltage Rating 50-60 Cy. 105-125 V.
Type of Circuit Superheterodyne
Tuning Range Broadcast -540 KC. -1700 KC.
FM. 1-88 MC. -108 MC. FM. 2-42 MC. -50 MC.
Number & Type of Tubes -1 1
Stromberg-Carlson 1-6BA6 R.F. Amp. 1-6H6 Ratio Det.
1/2 TURN 1-6AT6 1st Audio-A.M. Det.
1-68E6 Converter
DRIVE PULLEY 1-613A6 1st I.F. Amp. 1-6SC7 .2nd Audio -Inverter
1-6BA6 2nd I.F. Amp. 2-6V6 Audio Output
1-6AU6....(3rd IF.) Driver 1-5Y3 Rectifier
NO. 1210 Input Power Rating Radio 86 Watts, Phono 30 Watts

Intermediate Frequency A.M. 455 KC, F.M. 10.7 MC.
a SERIES NO. 10 -1 1 WHEN DRIVE PULLEY, SLIDER CARRIAGE Speaker Voice Coil Impedance at 400 Cycles 6-8 Ohms
AND POINTER ARE IN POSITION SHOWN, 10 Watts
CORES ARE COMPLETELY MESHED. Power Output
(1)
STROMBERG-CARLSON Model 1210, Series No. 10-11
.,
Measurements are made at 117V line, using electronic Voltmeter.
Except where otherwise indicated, voltages are D.C. and are! . -
positive with respect to the reference point which is the chassis ..
0 j Z,
C)
F ,,, iiia .1.
rci '10! 000 / t0 ?.?
g.
.0
. 1.
.,---,
i,...._:.
..g. -:eE, 0
.
, .- el'
.,
---
io:
,
. : ;'=CI ' 0,
CC
< 6
0,-=
35g
.,..._.;
z
1_,_
,
w >2
a- -..9- cr c
St
of n o
.1.0-
c''';
al
ww
co
w
a_cr
o o 0. E
i,.
M V
w
" 0" se& sew
sr ' DUD iigC.4- 0 ,,,0 leiielloi
Li -e.1
0 v.
ge°-
42 ;,-,.--,,---
2 . 2 li 2
0s0 .
u: 0..';
FI-40 .-----.
00
!ij
/7,1 '4'
n 1- .7"%' 2.T,12
?i g 2
>
0 r, -a
2, °
;50,0 ft
,ig
s; -
tg
,.:
wo
ow .
-
wd
_
.,.;.
,.,
VI ,..-
:
.
,I., 0
,
2
a
CO
>F--
(00
>F- 0 0
kao
(Do c04°
co
L ec.11-1
IQ
in. 002:
.
i0
..1
C..'
, 0 ,E
''. 0.
Iti
40. "2
,...i._
2
-J
1. &Fie
0 F,
W
0
tc-0.
W
0 u:
21e,
rr) 2
m
w
LTE3t
LP
u4_
21
t\I 0.4
0°-''
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE 1210

Band and Pointer Setting Input Generator Setting Input and Dummy VTM and Scope Input Trimmer Adj. and Notes
A.M. I.F. ALIGNMENT
1 AM Low end 455 kc. Junction C-17 and L-8. Junction R-12 and Adj. Pri. and Sec. 1st and 2nd I.F. (Top
of dial 400 cy. mod. See location chart. C-60 (See location of Chassis) for highest voltage on -3V
100 mmf. dummy chart) DC Scale
2 " 455 kc. "
swept 15 kc.
Adj. same cores as above for best
over -lapping curve on scope.
F.M. I.F. ALIGNMENT
FM (1) Low end 10.7 mc. Junction C-17 and L-8. AVC buss Detune Sec. Ratio Det. (Top of Chas-
of dial 400 cyc. mod. See location chart. (Green and White Wire) sis). Adj. Pri. and Sec. 1st and 2nd I.F.
1
100 mmf. dummy Pri. Ratio Det. (Bottom of Chassis) and
3rd I.F. (1-9 Top of Chassis) on -3 VDC
Scale for max. AVC voltage.
10.7 mc. Pin No. 6 Driver tube
2* swept 150 kc. Adj. same cores ( as in step 1) for best
(screen) thru .01 capac. overlapping curve on scope.
3* " " Junction Adj. Sec. of Ratio Det. for zero volt -
R -12 and C-60 age. (Top of Chassis).
*Repeat 2 and 3 if necessary
A.M. R.F. ALIGNMENT
Broadcast Extreme 535 Kc. Ant. term. AVC Buss
Low Freq. 400 cyc. mod.
Adj. C-16 for max. AVC voltage
1
200 mmf. dummy Green and White Wire
2 Extreme Hi Freq. 1700 Kc. 400 cyc. mod.
Adj. L-11 for max. AVC voltage
3 Repeat 1 and 2
4 600 Kc 600 Kc. 400 cyc. mod. " " Adj. C-15 for max. AVC voltage
5 1500 Kc 1500 Kc. 400 cyc. mod. " " Adj. L-12 for max. AVC voltage
6 Repeat 4 and 5
7 600 Kc 600 Kc. 400 cyc. mod. " " Adj. C-14 for max. AVC voltage
F.M. R.F. ALIGNMENT
1 FM 1 Ant. term. (DO) AVC Buss CAUTION: Align FM -1 1st.
Channel 260 100 Mc 150 ohm series Green and White Wire 1. C-17
with each side 2. C-13 Adjust for max. AVC
of Gen. 3. L-5 and 6 Voltage. (All Trimmers)
1.
2 FM 2 .
CC-121}Adjust for max. AVC
23:
Channel 60 46 Mc. Voltage (All ,Trimmers)
CAUTION: Use low signal input especially for steps 2 and 3 of F.M. I.F. Alignment to avoid overloading.
Use dummy loop No. 114048 for A.M. R.F. Alignment
Use insulated aligning tool No. 80777 to prevent damage to iron cores.
Refer to Number 4, Vol. 1 Current Flash for suggested instrument use.
170 R.F. alignment procedure of iron core tuners is different from condenser tuners in that trimmers are adjusted at low frequency
end and coils are adjusted at high frequency end of dial.
STEWART-WARNER 12IN
IISGMMINATOI
(12
12BA6 1211A8 IRAII0 TYPE) co
MS Moll 1.00 1.06,0001 A72D4 t
SOWN 3 IN1-0, 114. UM/ R.F. MODELS l A06A It A72TI A72C3 I
IF -MI ha LF.
NNW. IT NAT N CON-
PC[FED 10 NW. ../0 ROLM
Or fa. WOW 'MOW IMP 128E6 128A6 5185
DET.-OSC. 1st I.F. s OITPIT
96
eti
6A06 T" eCt
(FA) A.F.
111-M12e1DET.
4.11A-A.F.
a)
at
, O
'Resistor tit 44 is located in Is I.F. 1-A

LOCATING Iansf tamer housing and is con-
LUG f nected between terminals Qa
CD
SS$ S2% 10E0
NOTE
I si%
sic) 9 6
The above circuit applies to chassis which have a letter "S"
v
SA 1 or "H" stamped on rear surface adjacent to model number.
44 S5 Chassis which do not show either of these letter designations AUDIO OSCILLATION
FM ANT. BC. OSC,
COIL COB, have the following circuit difference* The audio system of this receiver utilizes a two stage type of inverse feed-
505062 505042 1. Resistor No. 7 is connected to A.V.C. instead rf as
S8 S60 shown above. back arrangement and, should it ever be necessary to replace the speaker
DIA- or output transformer, it is important to maintain a definite phase relationship
GRAM PART DESCRIPTION 2. Condensers Nos. 107 and 108 are omitted.
SAND SWITCH NO. NO. 3. Resistor R87 is 33,000 ohms. in the lead -back circuit. If the connections to the output transformer are
504938 co
CONDENSERS Changes I and 2 are incorporated in chassis which carry reversed or if the feed -back connection is made to the wrong side of the
Condenser -.02 Mid. 200 volt ....
the "S" designation and all three changes appear in chassis output transformer secondary, the system will become regenerative instead
504725
A to E Condenser -variable gang and drum ..
504955 with the "H" designation.
Condenser -trimmer; 3 to 12 Mmid,
504954 . . These changes were made to increase sensitivity on FM of degenerative. Under those conditions audio oscillation may result. If that
504974 Condenser -ceramic 47 Mmtd. 500 volt ,
operation. occurs, oscillation may be prevented by reversing the connections to the

504069 Condenser- trimmer) 3 to 35 Mmid....
0 504976 Condenser -ceramic 1500 Mmfd. 150 volt secondary of the output transformer.
2 505025 Condenser -ceramic 100 Mmfd. 350 volt 91 505028 Condenser --.05 Mtd. 150 volt
3 505052 Condenser -.002 Mfd. 400 volt 95 505073 Condenser -05 Mid. 400 volt. SOCKET VOLTAGES
4 505073 Condenser -.05 Mid. 400 volt 96 96 5049'3 Condenser -ceramic 22 Mmfd. 500 volt
5 504975 Condenser -ceramic 470 Mattel. 350 volt 99 50E327 Condenser -.01 Mid. 400 volt Measured with voltmeter having sensitivity of 1000 ohms
7 502295 Condenser -ceramic 10 Mmfd. 500 volt 102 505071 Condenser -.2 Mid. 400 volt per volt except where indicated by (). The 11
8 505053 Condenser -ceramic 15 Mmtd. 500 volt 106-A. IL symbol designates a vacuum tube voltmeter measurement.
0 504954 Condenser -trimmer; 3 to 12 Mmfd. C, D 504380 Condenser -electrolytic ALL MEASUREMENTS MADE WITH BAND SWITCH IN "FM" POSITION UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED
3 505027 Condenser -.01 Mtd. 400 volt A-20 Mid. 25 volt
5 504730 Condenser -ceramic 3 Mmid. 500 volt 8-00 Mid. 150 volt DIAL TUNED TO 108MC, FOR "FM" MEASUREMENTS
I
27 504973 Condenser -ceramic 22 Mmfd. 500 volt C-40 Mid. 150 volt
29 505454 Condenser -.05 Mid. 400 volt (low impe- D-40 Mid, 150 volt I
DIAL TUNED TO 540KC. FOR "AM" MEASUREMENTS
FM R.F dance at 955 Kc-do not substitute 107 504975 Condenser --ceramic 470 Mmfd. 350 volt
COIL 108 504979 Condenser ceramic .01 Mid. 150 volt VOLUME CONTROL SET TO MINIMUM WITH NO SIGNAL 1-3
505060 ordinary capacitor)
30 505072 Condenser -ceramic 33 Mmfd. 350 volt
51 504954 Condenser -trimmer; 3 to 12 Mmid. RESISTORS 110 A. C.
33 504974 Condenser -ceramic 47 Mmtd. 500 volt He
119491 Condenser -trimmer; 10 to 90 Mmid. 7 502134 Resistor- carbon 470.000 Ohms / watt 12H6.
34 6AQ6 -123 ac,
505051 Condenser -trimmer) 440 to 660 Mmfd 9 504969 Resistor -.carbon 33 Ohms 1/2 watt 12BB
36 DISCRIMINATOR SELENIUM RECTIFIER
504979 Condenser -ceramic .01 Mfd. 150 volt 11 502794 Resistor -carbon 60 Ohms 1/2 watt
37 RATIO TYPE (F-81) A.F. id DET.-1188.
504975 Condenser -ceramic 470 Mmfd. 350 volt 22 502133 Resistor -carbon 220,000 Ohms VA watt BOTTOM VIEW OF CHASSIS
38 26 502130
39 504979 Condenser -ceramic .01 Mid. 150 volt Resistor -carbon 22,000 Ohms 1/2 watt (A-MI2ed DET.- A.V.C.-A.F. IA
41 504979 Condenser ceramic .01 Mid. 150 volt 40 502406 Resistor carbon 1,500 Ohms V, watt .(50"----) SEE
502134 .
- 0.2 NOT A
117 VOLT 60 CYCLE A. C. 0
43 505060 Condenser ceramic91 Mmfd. 350 volt 44 Resistor carbon470.000 Ohms V, watt 0 -0.6
45 502794 Resistor carbon60 Ohms 1/2) watt o' ,., Tcpc., °3 ;-001 POWER SUPPLY USED 85
46 504976 Condenser -CernMiC 1500 Mmfd. 150 volt SEE
Condenser 05 Mid. 150 volt 50 _502287 Resistor carbon680 Ohms .4 watt .. FOR THESE MEASUREMENTS. NOTE A
47 505020 0 95 0
55 504710 Resistor -carbon 33,000 Ohms f4 watt . . *ii
48 504979 Condenser -ceramic .01 Mfd. 150 volt *405' 815 HEATER VOLTAGES MEASURED ACROSS
57 502134 Resistor. carbon 470,000 Ohms It) watt IA
49 .. 505211 Condenser .08 Mid. 400 volt SOCKET TERMINALS. ALL OTHER VOLTAGES 440 0
52 505068 Condenser -ceramic 91 Mmtd. 350 volt 59 502268 Resistor carbon1 Meg. 1/2 watt 16.1 (PI '') vOCW 0 ).-72
60 504968 MEASURED BETWEEN SOCKET (....,,
53 505028 Condenser 05 Mid. 150 volt
64 502267
Resistor-- carbon 10 Ohms 1/2 watt
Resistor ---carbon 680 Ohms V,
'f-oS1
t. 0, 0
7-25
.
54 505026 Condenser- ceramic 150 Mmtd. 350 volt \-''',,, TERMINALS AND B- LUG. -tc,',..)
56 505026 Condenser -ceramic 150 Mmfd.350 volt 69 502514 Resistor -carbon 3,300 Ohms 1/4 watt
FM OSC. 58 504978 Condenser -ceramic .005 Mtd. 150 volt 73.A 8 504967 Resistor --Volume control 1 Meg SEE
COIL (with Switch) NOSTEEA NOTE A
61 504979 Condenser -ceramic .01 Mid. 150 volt AIA
505060 62 504976 Condenser ceramic1500 Mmfd. 150 volt 75 505029 Resistor -carbon 22 Ohms 2 watt 0 0.1 08
63 504978 Condenser -ceramic .005 Mid. 150 volt 79 502134 Resistor -carbon 470.000 Ohms watt 0
80 502136 Resistor -carbon 10 Meg. 1/2 watt 95 0 98 98 T-065 105 0.8
66 505074 Condenser -ceramic 43 Mmfd. 350 volt SEE NOTE A
67 504954 Condenser trimmer;3 to 12 Mmid. 504710 Resistor --carbon 33 000 Ohms )/4 watt
60 505025 Condenser is 100 Mmid. 350 volt 87 502408 Resistor- carbon 68.000 Ohms .5 watt 98 0 98 0 105
115 6.2
70 505028 Condenser -.05 Mid. 150 volt (used only in chassis stamped with ae
509979 Condenser -ceramic .01 Mfd. 150 volt letter "WI 0
71. 72 (49) ( II ) ( II )
74 505083 Condenser -.02 Mfd. 400 volt 89. 90 502134 Resistor -carbon 470.000 Ohms tit watt II- LOGS (.;
92 502134 Resistor -carbon 470.000 Ohms V, watt .... AC A.C. 9.C. 0
77 504976 Condenser -ceramic 1500 Mmfd. 150 volt
78 504977 Condenser ceramic .002 Mid. 150 volt 94 505023 Resistor -carbon 33 Ohms 1 watt
II 505082 Condenser ..02 Mid. 150 volt 97 502135 Resislor-carbon 2.2 Meg. tx, watt ... 5115 12BA6 12BA6
98 504437 Resistor -carbon 150 Ohms 1/2 watt 12BA6
84 505027 Condenser -.01 Mtd. 400 volt (FM) tH LF. Ist
504937 Condenser electrolytic 5 Mfd. 50 volt 103 502132 Resistor -carbon 100,000 Ohms l/s watt .... OUTFIT (F -M) R.F.
85
86 504979 Condenser ceramic .01 Mfd. 150 volt 104 504971 Resistor -carbon 2.200 Ohms 1/2 watt
68 505n75 Condenser ceramic 100 Mmtd, 350 volt 105 504970 Resistor -carbon 470 Ohms, 2 watt
Fmk
Servicing Notes on 1947-1948 F. M. and Television Receivers II
FREQUENCY MODULATION -
INSTRUMENTS: Alignment of the FM circuits in this receiver may be accomplished with either a conventional AM type signal generator or an
FM signal generator. The output indicator should be an oscilloscope or a vacuum tube voltmeter.
Although it is preferable to use an FM generator and an oscilloscope, reasonably accurate alignment is obtainable when using a conventional -
AM generator and a vacuum tube voltmeter providing proper care is exercised in adjusting the discriminator circuit trimmer condenser.
IMPORTANT: If an AM signal generator is used, it should be capable of producing fundamental frequencies of 10.7 and 88 to 108 MC. Avoid
using an AM generator which produces signals in the 88 to 108 MC range by using harmonics higher than the second. Generators which are
dependent upon third, fourth or fifth harmonics for frequencies of 88 to 108 MC will generally produce undesireable spurious beat signals with
the local oscillator in the receiver and alignment will be exceedingly difficult.
The following procedure is adaptable for use with either an AM or FM generator and oscilloscope or vacuum tube voltmeter --merely follow
the instructions that are applicable to the instruments that are used.
SIGNAL GENERATOR CONNECTIONS V -T VOLTMETER OR OSCILLOSCOPE CONNECTIONS
CONNECT HIGH 'CONNECT GROUND FREQUENCY IF A V -T VOLTMETER IF AN OSCILLOSCOPE BAND
SIDE OF SIGNAL LEAD OF SIGNAL & TYPE OF IS USED, CONNECT IT IS USED, CONNECT IT SWITCH
GENERATOR TO GENERATOR TO MODULATION AS FOLLOWS: AS FOLLOWS: POSITION
fA
00
R.
0
10.7 MC 4.3
Pin #1 of 12BA6 (FM) AM signal may be Connect vertical amplifier
2nd I.F. use a .01 MFD. B- in vicinity of 12BA6 400 cycle modu- Connect common (or ground) ter- "high" lead in series with FM
con denser in series (FM) 2nd I.F. tube. lated minal of meter to B-. D.C. probe an 0.1 MFD. condenser to Maximum co
with generator lead. Or lead of meter is then connected to pin #7 of 6AQ6 tube. Con- clockwise to
FM signal should Pin #3 of the 12H6 tube. nett scope ground lead to position O
preferably be mod-
ulated ±300 KC. U
Before connecting V -T voltmeter, it

is necessary to connect two 68,000 b0
ohm resistors (resistance of both QS
units must compare within 1%) in
series from pin #3 of the 12H6 f.
Same as above Same as above Same as above tube to B-. Then connect common
(or ground) terminal of V -T volt- Same as above Same as above 43
meter to the junction of these two
resistors. D.C. probe lead of meter
is now connected to junction of re-
sistor #69 (3300 ohms) and con-
denser #70 (.05 MFD.) which are 8)
in the discriminator output circuit.
Recheck the two preceding adjustments to be sure that both trimmers are set as accurately as possible to obain the specified output indication on vacuum
Pin #1 of 12BA6 (FM)
1st I.F. tube; use a .01 Connect common (or ground) ter-
MFD. condenser in se- B- in vicinity of 12BA6 Same as above minal of meter to B-. D.C. probe Same as above Same as above O
ries with generator (FM) 1st I.F. tube. lead of meter is then connected to
lead. Pin #3 of the 12H6 tube. 'Li
Pin #7 of 12BE6 tube;
use a .01 MFD. con- B- in vicinity of 12BE6 Same as above Same as above
denser in series with tube. Same as above Same as above
generator lead. ri
Generator output leads must be connected to 98 MC

the two "External FM Antenna" terminals at AM signal may be O
back of antenna loop frame. Connect "high" 900 cycle modu- O
lead to one terminal in series with a 120 ohm lated Same as above Same as above Same as above
resistor and connect generator ground lead or
to the other terminal in series with a 150 ohm FM signal should
resistor. preferably be mod-
ulated +300 KC.
4-)
Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above as
C.)
Same as above rl
Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above
Check calibration and tracking of receiver with input signals of 88 and 108 MC.
172 .If your signal generator has an AC -DC type power supply, insert a .25 MFD. condenser in series with the ground lead before making the connections
IServicing Notes on 1947-1948 F. M. and Television Receivers
"FM" - ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
AM channel first, then align the FM channel as instructed
1. If alignment of both AM and FM channels is required it is necessary to align the
in the following chart
2. Before removing the chassis from the cabinet, turn the tuning control until dial pointer is at 98 MC. Then remove chassis and place a pencil
mark on dial frame so as to indicate the 98 MC calibration point.
3. Do not attempt to reposition pointer by releasing it from clip on dial card as this is done only during AM alignment.
4. Set the receiver volume control to the maximum volume position.
5. Dress FM circuit leads as short and straight as possible, particularly those in the oscillator circuit. I.F. plate and grid leads should also be
kept short and straight.
6. Alignment of receiver circuits may now be accomplished by using the procedure in the chart below.
RECEIVER TYPE OF ADJUSTMENT AND OUTPUT INDICATION
ADJUSTMENT AND OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT AND OUTPUT
TRIMMER
DIAL OR SLUG TRIMMER INDICATION WHEN USING INDICATION WHEN USING
SETTING NUMBER DESCRIPTION A V -T VOLTMETER AN OSCILLOSCOPE
Set vertical amplifier of scope for maximum amplifi-
cation. Where FM signal generator provides an out-
put voltage for synchronization, connect this voltage
to "sync" terminals of the scope. Then adjust setting
of trimmer #9, before attempting to adjust trimmer
#8, until a pattern similar to the following aj,pears
on the screen. If pattern does not remain stationary,
operate sweep frequency control on scope and also
"sync" control until desired result is obtained.
A A
Any position where B -OR-

it does not affect 8 Discriminator Set meter to a low D.C. voltage range and
the signal. Primary adjust trimmer #8 for maximum meter
reading. (This voltage will be negative.)
C C
This double "S" curve This single "5" curve

pattern results when pattern results when
'scope uses "Sawtooth" 'scope uses properly
horizontal deflection phased "sine wave"
voltage. horizontal deflection
voltage.
Adjust trimmer #8 for maximum amplitude and
steepness of that portion of the curve between "A"
and "C".
Set meter for operation on its lowest D.C.
voltage range. Note that as trimmer #9
is rotated a point will be found where With the 'scope set up as described above, '
adjust
voltmeter will swing rather sharply from
Discriminator a positive to a negative reading or vice trimmer #9 until the cross -over point "B" is cen-
Secondary versa. Correct setting of trimmer #9 is trally located in both the horizontal and vertical
directions; in addition, the portion of the curve be-
Same as above 9 Use an insulated phas- obtained when meter reads zero as trim-
tween "A" and "C" should be as linear (straight)
ing tool to adjust this mer is moved through this point. The ad-
justment is somewhat critical and con- as possible,
trimmer. siderable care must be exercised to set
the trimmer for a zero meter indication.
the 2nd step.

tube voltmeter or oscilloscope. Then disconnect and remove the two 68,000 ohm resistors that were used for the vacuum tube voltmeter connection in
With 'scope set up as described above, adjust trim-
mers #10 and #11 for maximum amplitude and
Adjust trimmers #10 and #11 for maxi- steepness
2nd IT. of that portion of the pattern between "A"
Same as above 10 and 11 mum meter reading. and "C".
Adjust trimmers #12 and #13 for maximum ampli-
Adjust trimmers #12 and #13 for maxi- tude and steepness of pattern as described above.
If the enlarged pattern now indicates a lack of sym-
Same as above 12 and 13 1st I.F. mum meter reading. metry, readjust trimmer #9 for correct cross -over
point.
Adjust trimmer #14 to obtain the symmetrical pat -

Oscillator Set trimmer #14 to receive 98 MC, signal tern shown above. Correct setting of trimmer # 14 is
14 and adjust for maximum meter reading, obtained when cross -over point in pattern is cen-
98 MC Trimmer
trally located.
Adjust trimmer #15 for maximum meter Adjust trimmer #15 for maximum amplitude of
15 R.F. Trimmer reading. pattern.
98 MC 1st I.F.
Recheck adjustment of these trimmers for Recheck adjustment of these trimmers for maximum
amplitude and symmetry of pattern.
12 and 13 maximum meter reading.
Antenna Adjust trimmer #16 for maximum meter Adjust trimmer #16 for maximum amplitude of
98 MC 16 Trimmer reading. pattern.
Read this chart across two pages. 173

Stewart -Warner Models A72T1 A72T2
9026A 9026B
A72T3 A72T4
9026C 9026D
BROADCAST BAND - "AM" - ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
1. Remove chassis and loop antenna from cabinet.
2. With the gang fully meshed, the dial pointer should be in the position indicated by the last mark below 55 on the dial. If it is set
incorrectly, release the pointer clip on the dial cord and reposition pointer.
3. During the alignment of this receiver, it will be necessary to set the dial pointer to the following frequencies: 1500 Kc., and 600 Kc. In
order to avoid replacing the chassis in the cabinet each time a dial setting is required, it will be found more convenient to mark the
required frequency points on the white dial background before starting the alignment.
4. Connect an output meter across speaker voice coil or from plate of the SOBS tube to B- through a 0.1 Mfd. condenser (see voltage chart
for convenient B- connection).
5. Connect ground lead of signal generator to B- lug.
CAUTION: If your signal generator is designed with an AC -DC type power supply, connect ground lead of signal generator to B- lug
through a .25 Mfd. condenser.
6. Set volume control to the maximum volume position and use a weak signal from the signal generator.
7. If alignment of both AM and FM channels is required, it is necessary to align the AM channel first; then align the FM channel as
instructed in the preceding section.
DUMMY ANT. CONNECT

IN SERIES SIGNAL BAND RECEIVER
HIGH SIDE OF TRIMMER TRIMMER
GENERATOR SWITCH DIAL
WITH SIGNAL SIGNAL NUMBER DESCRIPTION TYPE OF ADJUSTMENT
FREQUENCY POSITION SETTING
GENERATOR GENERATOR TO
0.1 MFD. Pin #7 of Broadcast Any point

where it does 1-2 2nd I.F.
455 KC (counter- Adjust for maximum output.
Condenser I2BE6 tube. clockwise) not affect the Then repeat adjustment.
signal. 3-4 1st I.F.
200 MMFD.
External Anten-
na Terminal Broadcast
Mica 1500 KC (counter- 1500 KC 5 Broadcast
Condenser (AM) on
clockwise) Oscillator Adjust for maximum output.
Loop Antenna
External Anten- Broadcast Tune to
200 MMFD. na Terminal 1500 KC
Mica 1500 KC (counter- Generator 6 Broadcast Adjust for maximum output.
Condenser (AM) on clockwise) Antenna
Loop Antenna Signal
External Anten- Tune to Adjust for maximum output.
200 MMFD. Broadcast Broadcast Try to increase output by de -
Mica na Terminal 600 KC (counter- 600 KC
7 Oscillator tuning trimmer and retuning
Condenser (AM) on clockwise) Generator (Series Pad) receiver dial until maximum
Loop Antenna Signal output is obtained.
200 MMFD.
External Anten-
Mica
na Terminal Repeat adjustment of trimmers 5 and 6 at 1500 Kc. Then re -check adjustment of trimmer 7 at 600 Kr.
(AM) on
Condenser Loop Antenna
OSC.
600 KC.
DISCRIMINATOR
KC. KC. SECONDARY
10.7 MC.
DISCRIMINATOR
PRIMARY
10.7 MC.
10.7 10.7
174 MC MC. TRIMMER LOCATION CRART

These helpful notes on adjustment and detection of external faults
in television receivers is taken from Stewart -Warner T-711 Manual.
CONTRAST-The receiver has now been properly tuned to the READJUST BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST-The "Brightness" and
selected Television Station and the picture may be made visible by "Contrast" controls must be adjusted simultaneously to strike a
turning the "Contrast" knob on the front panel in a clockwise direc- proper balance of picture quality. Too much contrast and too little
tion. As the name suggests, the "Contrast" control adjusts the black brightness is apparent when the picture is lacking in gradation
and white contrast between the various picture elements. This control between black and white or if the picture loses form as shown in
should be turned clockwise until the picture remains stationary on Figure 9. Too little contrast and too much brightness causes the
picture to appear faded so that it seems composed entirely of grays,
the screen but not so
as illustrated in Figure 10.
high that the gradation
between black and whi",E.. FOCUS - If the pic-
ture has a fuzzy or
is lost. In the event that
the picture does not re
remain stationary on the
`
ts t
CkAisse.. -
cloudy appearance as ii -
lustrated in Figure 11,
screen, proceed to the rdsessOssv-,. the "Focus" control
next step. should be readjusted to
a position which gives
-Should the picture on sharpest definition.
the screen appear to
HORIZONTAL LINE-
move horizontally or
ARITY - Adjustment of
completely break up as Fig. 6 picture linearity, b o t h
shown in Figure 7, ad- Sound Interference Caused by horizontal and vertical,
justment of the "Horizon- Incorrect Tuning
must be made while re- Fig. 10
tal Hold" control on the
ceiving some form of cir- Increase Contrast-Reduce Brightness
rear of the chassis is
cular test patten on the
necessary. This control
receiver screen. Broad-
locks the horizontal pic-
casting stations usually
ture elements in synchro-
transmit a pattern of that
nism with the transmitted
type before their regular
picture, and although it
entertainment programs.
has a relatively wide Improper horizontal line-
control range, care
arity will cause the cir-
should be taken to set it
correctly so as to insure cular pattern to appear
optimum performance. As condensed on one side
a check for proper set- of the screen and ex-
Fig. 7
ting of this control, turn Horizontal Movement tended on the other side
the set off for a few sec- as shown in Figure 12. Fig. 11
onds and then turn it on Proper horizontal bal- Adjust Focus
again. If the control is ance can be obtained by
properly set, the picture adjusting the "Horizontal
should lock into position Linearity" control on the
within a reasonable in- rear of the chassis. It
terval after the picture may be necessary to re-
tube becomes illumi-
adjust the "Width" con-
nated.
trol if an appreciable
In the event that strong
reflections or "ghosts" change was made in the
occur, which are dis- linearity control setting.
placed approximately 1/4 VERTICAL LINEAR-
raster width from the true Fig. 8 ITY - Improper vertical
picture, then the "Hori- Vertical Movement linearity will cause the Fig. 12
zontal Hold" control may circular test pattern to Adjust Horizontal Linearity
not lock the picture into appear condensed on the
synchronism. It will upper edge of the screen
therefore be necessary to and extended on the low-
orient the antenna so as er edge or vice versa.
to minimize reflected sig- The effect of incorrect
nal response. setting of the "Vertical
VERTICAL HOLD- Linearity" control is
Should the picture ap- s h o w n in Figure 13.
pear to roll by in a Proper linearity is ob-

v e r t i cal direction or tained by adjusting the
cause multiple overlap- "Vertical Linearity" con
con--
ing vertical images, as Fig. 9 trol on the rear of the
Reduce Contrast-Increase Brightness chassis. It may be nec-
shown in Figure 8, it is Fig. 13
necessary to adjust the "Vertical Hold" control on the rear of the essary to readjust the Adjust Vertical Linearity
chassis. After the adjustment is made, reduce the setting of the "Height" control if an
contrast control until the picture is barely visible, then readjust the
"Vertical Hold- control to "lock" the picture in position.
appreciable change was
made in the linearity control setting. 175
The quality of the picture that is reproduced on the screen of a Severe static, or man-made
modern television receiver is dependent upon many factors, some of electrical interference,
which are beyond the control of the receiver. The information pre- which is audible in a con-
sented in the following paragraphs is therefore intended to aid the ventional receiver may be
installation and serviceman in becoming acquainted with the way both audible and visible in
a perfectly normal television receiver will perform when it receives a television receiver. For
transmitted picture signals which have been affected by some un- example, interference from
favorable external condition. automobile ignition sys-
tems, Inadequately filtered
The strength of the trans- electrical appliances, arc-
mitted picture signal that ing electrical contacts,
reaches the receiver is a elevators, street cars, or
vitally important factor in electric signs may cause Fig. 16 Multiple Images
determining the quality of white streaks in the pic-
the picture that is repro- ture as shown in Figure
duced on the screen. A 17. If the interference is
very weak signal will pro- particularly severe, the
duce a picture similar in picture may lose syn-
appearance to that shown chronization and effects
in Figure 15. In cases similar to those shown in
where the signal is ex-
Figures 7 or 8 will prevail.
ceedingly weak the pic-
ture has a "milky" ap- A "herring bone" pattern
pearance which is usually Fig. 14 in a television picture in-
accompanied by a "speck- Correctly Adjusted Picture dicates the existence of
led" or "snow" effect. interference from electric-
ally operated medical Fig. 17 Auto Ignition Interference
The very high frequency equipment such as dia-
waves used for the trans- thermy machines. When
mission of television picture signals act quite similarly to rays of such equipment is in rela-
light in that they do not bend around corners and are reflected by tively close proximity to a
obstacles In their path. It should therefore be appreciated that tele- television receiver, the re
vision waves do not follow the curvature of the earth and reliable suiting interference may
reception should only be anticipated in the region determined by either partially or com-
the "line of sight" to the horizon in all directions from the antenna pletely obliterate the pic-
tower of the transmitting station. This region is generally designated ture as indicated in Fig-
as the "normal service area" of the station and the strength of ure 18.
signals encountered within that area is usually found to be adequate. Interference created by
Since signal strength decreases rapidly when the "line of sight" signals coming froma
distance is exceeded It is not possible to reliably predict conditions short wave transmitter that
which might prevail at greater distances away from the transmitter. may be close to the re- Fig. 18
The technician who installs the television receiver must always care- ceiver or operating on the Diathermy Interference
fully check to determine if signals at a particular location are of wrong frequency will pro-
satisfactory strength. duce the type of pattern
shown in Figure 19. This
The characteristic of high bar pattern appears to
frequency television sig- ripple or 'move across the
nals which permit them to screen diagonally and
be reflected from the walls should not be confused
of nearby buildings or with the horizontal pattern
other objects may, under produced by incorrect tun-
certain conditions, create ing. The type of interfer-
"multiple transmission ence described here should
paths." This would permit be rarely encountered and
the reflected signal to ar- is only included in this sec-
rive at the antenna a short tion in the interest of fur-
interval of time later than nishing complete informa- Fig. 19
the signal traveling in a tion on the subject of Interference from
direct path from the trans- interference phenomenon. Radio Transmitters
mitter and the effect pro- Fig. 15 If the quality of the television picture is unsatisfactory, the fault
duced on the picture of Weak Signal may not lie in the antenna system or the receiver, but may be due
the television receiver is to temporary operating difficulty at the transmitting station. Keep in
illustrated in Figure 16. mind that television picture quality is heavily dependent upon the
These multiple images, lighting conditions of the actual scene. Where the "telecast" origi-
known as "echoes" or "ghosts," may generally be prevented 131 nates in the studio of the transmitting station, excellent results may
careful installation and orientation of the antenna. be expected since lighting conditions can- be closely controlled;
Aircraft in the vicinity may also produce a temporary "multiple however, where the "telecast" originates from locations outside of
transmission path" as the surfaces of a plane are capable of reflect- the studio, lighting conditions may occasionally be inadequate for
ing television signals. Although this source of interference is usually highest quality picture reproduction.
rare, its effect would be recognized by a temporary fluctuation in Should you find that poor quality is noted when observing a "tele-
picture brightness and sound volume as well as the existence of a cast" of a motion picture film, this may be due to the quality of the
"ghost" image. In areas of relatively low signal strength, aircraft film-wait until the motion picture program is finished and observe
interference may cause the picture to temporarily lose synchronization whether picture quality improves when the next studio program
or "tear out." begins. If there is more than one television station in the locality
it is always desirable to tune in on another station and obtain a
176 quick check on picture quality whenever some transmission fault is
suspected.
SW -3 T-4 T-8
SW -3 SW -3
SECTION (REAR) I
2 ND I.F. TRANS. (FM) RATIO DETECTOR TRANS.
SECTION 3 (REAM/771m SECTION 2(FRONT)
CHASSIS
/77+7-7
1I( CHASSIS
/ 11 L-10 fir ORE (MACK
/ 1-.7'3
CHASSIS 1.511
L -I
C-20 ED ORE EN
47
" MMF
1-2 R-32 R-33
T5
1ST IF TRANS (FM, 2ND LF T-7
TRANS. (4.M1 3RD. LF TRANS (kW)
6" fir GREEN BLUE 2I I
-----
e
GREENS
2,C3 (C.
R-2 100K C) -
c> 7
BUILT-IN F.M. (41.
FOLDED DIPOLE RED BLACK BLACK
MOO OHM TWIN 1-3 C- 7
IST LF TRANS. 530 MW
LEAD CABLE) BLUE (A.
GREEN'. I
L-2
L- -J
R-5 6800
C-17 w.w C-24 C-26 -
15 ...IR
R-7 .,20It SW 4
/771777 SIMILE SECTION
(FRONT)
CHASSIS
R-26
2.21( m
R -I5 I MEG.
L-9
00
1.511 SW -3 0.44
L -3D
C-9 SECTipaNITI /477 PHONO
CHASSIS PICK UP
.2018ME
C-7 Rio- CONTACT SIDE
15MME
PRONG ENO
R-(2' VIEW
0-4 2 MEG
SW -I 05 TO HEATERS
GREEN
BLACK
PILOT LAMPS
GE MAZDA NO. 47
R-IO
3315 ED
R-14 I MEG
SP -I
IFt VOLTS A.C. 30 30
60 CYCLES C-22 TO SPEAKER
YELLOW .01 1. NC -171- BASKET
SW -2
YELLOW
/// //
CHASSIS
RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
"K" EQUALS 1000 OHMS, "MEG" EQUALS 1,000,000 OHMS.
ALL TUBE SOCKETS ARE SHOWN FROM PIN END VIEW.
CAPACITY VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
SWITCHES ARE SHOWN IN EXTREME COUNTERCLOCKWISE
POSITION (PHONO POSITION) SHAFT END VIEW.
A.M.-455 KC I.F I0.7 MC IT.
ma,
144
WESTERN AUTO SUPPLY COMPANY TRUETVNE
STOCK NO. D1752
ALIGNMENT CHART
The following equipment is necessary to properly align this receiver :
1. AM signal generator with frequency coverage NOTE: Oscilloscope equipment not required if aligned ac -
from 455 kc. to 1700 kc. cording to the following procedure:
2. FM or CW signal generator covering the FM The accuracy of the AM RF and AM antenna slug
band from 87.25 mc. to 108.75 mc. and the 10.7 adjustments may be determined by noting the trim-
mc. frequency for FM IF alignment. mer adjustment at each end of the band when the
3. Vacuum Tube Voltmeter (VTVM). oscillator is set for proper coverage. The proper
4. Output meter -to match 4 ohms, 5 watts maxi- setting of the AM or FM oscillator slugs is indicated
mum. by proper tracking of the receiver at the center of the
5. Insulated alignment screwdriver. respective band. The FM RF and FM antenna slugs
6. Dummy antenna -0.1 mfd. capacitor, 300 ohm must be adjusted to dimensions given in the perme-
carbon resistor and inductive loop (fashioned ability tuner illustration.
from several turns of wire).
Step Band Signal Connection Dummy Dial Adjust
Switch at Remarks
No. Position Generator Receiver Antenna Setting Trimmer
1 AM 455 kc. 6BE6 Con- 0.1 mfd. HF end E, F, H, J, L, M, Adjust for Maximum Output.
verter Grid AM IF Trimmers
Pin No. 7
2 AM 535 kc. 6BA6 Grid 0.1 mfd. LF end C-10 AM Osc. Adjust for Maximum Output.
Pin No.1 Trimmer
3 AM 1620 kc. 6BA6 Grid 0.1 mfd. HF end L-4 AM Osc. Adjust for Band Coverage.
Pin No. 1 Shunt Tracking (See Note 1.)
Adjustment.
(Remove Fly-
wheel from
Shaft of Tuning
Control.)
4 AM 535 kc. 6BA6 Grid 0.1 mfd. LF end C-14 AM RF Adjust for Maximum Output.
Pin No. 1 Trimmer
5 AM 1400 kc. Thru Loop Inductive 1400 kc. C-1 AM Adjust for Maximum Output.
(With Re- Loop Antenna
ceiver Loop Trimmer
Connected
to Set.)
6 FM 10.7 mc. 6SG7 Driver 0.1 mfd. HF end L-8 Ratio Adjust for Maximum AVC between
(CW Sig- Grid Detector Point "A" on Wiring Diagram and
nal) Pin No. 4 Primary Chassis using Electronic Voltme-
ter. See Notes 2 and 3.
7 FM 10.7 mc. 6SG7 Driver 0.1 mfd. HF end K Ratio See Note 2. Adjust for Zero Posi-
(CW Sig- Grid Detector tion (Using Electronic Voltmeter)
nal) Pin No. 4 Secondary from No. 12 Position on Single Sec-
tion Switch and Point "B" on Wir-
ing Diagram.
8A FM 10.7 mc. 6BE6 Con- 0.1 mfd. HF end L-6, D, L-7, G See Note 2. Adjust for Maximum
(CW Sig- verter Grid 1st and 2nd AVC.
nal) Pin No. 7 FM IF
8B FM 10.7 mc. 6BE6 Con- 0.1 mfd. HF end L-6, D, L-7, G See Note 3. Adjust for Maximum
(CW Sig- verter Grid 1st and 2nd Output.
nal) Pin No. 7 FM IF
9 FM 87.25 mc. 6BA6 Grid 0.1 mfd. LF end C-12 FM Osc. Adjust for Maximum Output.
(FM Sig- Pin No.1 Trimmer
nal)
10 FM 108.75 mc. 6BA6 Grid 0.1 mfd. HF end L-5 FM Osc. Adjust for Band Coverage. (See
(FM Sig- Pin No. 1 Shunt Tracking Note 4.)
nal) Adjustment
11 FM 87.25 mc. 6BA6 Grid 0.1 mfd. LF end C-15 FM RF Adjust for Maximum Output.
(FM Sig- Pin No. 1 Trimmer
nal)
12 FM 87.25 mc. Thru 300 ohm 300 ohm 87.25 Inc. C-2 FM Adjust for Maximum Output.
(FM Sig- Carbon Re- Carbon Antenna
' nal) sistor to End Resistor Trimmer
FM Antenna
Terminal
and Center
178 FM Antenna
Terminal.
nr.jiA;11 EXTERNAL
PROMO MOTOR CORD
POWER CORD
NO INPUT
EXTERNAL -CAA
POWER
ANTENNA
SPEAKER
OUTLET
IC -21
FM ANTENNA
TRIMMER
RF TRIMMER
IC -121FM
OSCILLATOR
TRIMMER
L'S IFM
OSCILLATOR
SHUNT TRAOLING
ADJUSTMENT
pc &t!t1AToa
I 9'ur,Z,TsTIE'41
PHONO N
TONE CONTROL
ONOFE SWITC zi'17.
VOLUME CONTROL STATION SELECTOR BAND SWITCH
Trimmer Location
Calibration Points
Reference Notes to Alignment Chart on Page 178.

Note 3-For all tests requiring an FM signal, the
Note 1-If 1620 kc. signal is received lower in fre-
quency than the 1620 kc. dial calibration, turn generator output (22.5 kc. deviation, 400 cycles)
BC oscillator shunt tracking adjustment (L-4) must be adjusted to give approximately one-
outward. Retrack at 535 kc. (Step 2). If higher half watt receiver output before final adjust-
than the 1620 kc. dial calibration, screw adjustments are made. Either STEP 8A or 8B may
ment inward and retrack at 535 kc. Repeat un- be used depending on equipment available.
til 535 kc. and 1620 kc. signals coincide with
their respective dial calibrations.
Note 4-If 108.75 mc. signal is received lower, in
Note 2-Adjust input voltage to give approximately frequency than the 108.75 mc. dial calibration,
5 volts AVC before final adjustment is made. turn FM oscillator shunt tracking adjustment
For STEPS 6 and 8A-Voltmeter "common" (L-5) outward. Retrack at 87.25 mc. (STEP 9).
lead to chassis. If higher than the 108.75 mc. dial calibration,
For STEP 7-Voltmeter "common" lead to screw adjustment inward and retrack at 87.25
point ".B" on wiring diagram. The desired zero mc. Repeat,until 87.25 mc. and 108.75 mc. sig-
position is at the point where the meter indi- nals coincide with their respective dial calibra-
cates a polarity change from plus to minus or
vice -versa.
tions.
TO CHASSIS GROUND
TO TERM. NO.2
(FRONT -SEC. I) TO FM RF
ON BAND SWITCH RIMMER BRACKET
(GROUND)
FM OSC.SHUNT
TRACKING COIL TO FM ANTENNA
TRIMMER BRACKET
TO TERM. N0.10 (GROUND)
(FRONT -SEC. I)
TO "AM" TERMINAL
ON BAND SWITCH
TO AM ANTENNA
TO AM OSC. SHUNT TRIMMER
TRACKING COIL
TO DIPOLE ANT
TO AM RF TRIMMER TERM. BOARD
(EN D "FM -TERM.)
TO TERM. NO.10
(FRONT-SEC.2) TO FM RF
ON BAND SWITCH TRIMMER
AM RF COIL TO FM ANTENNA
TRIMMER
L -3C AM OSC.
COIL 111, t L -3B FM ANT COIL
L -3F FM RF COIL
L -3D FM OSC.
COIL 4.1 1:3A AM ANT COIL
TO FM OSC.
TO FM OSC. TRIMMER BRACKET
(GROUND)
TRIMMER
Permeability Tuner Illustration
179
Western Auto Supply Company TRUETVNE
STOCK NO. D1752
SOCKET VOLTAGES
TUBE POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6BA6 RF Amplifier 0 0 6.3 AC 0 250 100 .6
6BE6 Oscillator -Converter 0 0 6.3 AC 0 250 90 0
6SG7 1st IF Amplifier 0 0 .6 0 .6 125 6.3 AC 250

6SG7 2nd IF Amplifier 0 0 .6 0 .6 125 6.3 AC 250
6SQ7 AM Detector-AVC- 0 0 0 0 0 90 6.3 AC 0
1st Audio (AM -FM)
6116 FM Detector 0 6.3 AC 0 0 0 0 0 0
6V6GT Power Output NC 0 240 260 0 260 6.3 AC 14
5Y3GT Rectifier NC 325 NC 325 AC NC 325 NC 325
NOTE: All DC voltages measured with a 1000 ohm -per -volt Tone control in clockwise position.
meter from B- to socket contact indicated. All volt- Band switch in "AM" position.
ages are positive DC unless otherwise marked. Line voltage 117 volts, 60 cycle AC.
Volume control full on. Zero signal input.
CHASSIS REMOVAL - Remove the receiver 3. Remove the loop and dipole antennae leads from
power cord from the electrical outlet before starting their respective terminals.
to remove chassis. 4. Detach the phono-motor cord (plug .and socket
1. Turn the tuning control so that the dial pointer connection).
is in the extreme left-hand position (low fre- 5. Remove the phono input leads at the terminal
quency end). board on the chassis shelf and remove the
2. Unhook the dial cable from dial pointer and slide speaker plug from receptacle at back of chassis.
the pointer to center of cutout in the pointer
track. The dial pointer may be removed, if neces- 6. Remove knobs and the four chassis mounting
sary, by turning it clockwise and clearing it screws. The chassis can now be removed from
through the cutout. the cabinet.
0 tat ID 41Its e
eit 44 R-17
It OS! C Ilt) 6 . G32 . a c ID 0 eits 0 4)

11) 42
i.. I V .
... ,,..
,
o
le Iry
-7 .--Topi,"=---i-ariiiing- ift-
I IN _am.
.wy
R-5
. w
111::1
' Iii
4%);#04,-
t-mo
42) iN1 . t0P
Alilfil
r.-40,,Tuttior
ISIVOII
,r-- -I' 4 9 411;) tet --...
; ill
_...
clo
MICA41:1
ID \AIMailW,14_
-2.9 P_L14, a PI4A
11,11,,Alivaacevr,,;.-
/,1 1,
I
if*
,,),P
rf
c .
.
---ori
j.7
'..
kpo-Vittitri
SAM
nom
a 4081
.ffir
,'E
-R.
0R4411
e
rifiqr`teehtiQ, C gi
0
-I.
104Ktr,...,iiimm
411J, RA C GA 411)
8"'
'f
PlgC#H \- ,131/4.71(.-41MI
G
0 111PP A 4d j Ignii'
l'imtiA Im lay
0
1 I Iiii
emboli 111
%h.
10
IP'. Att ISD
32 Al I .
0 e ear 1
.
.
CIO
iik
R 24
!I,. ID 1) ID Ilt 4D It 0 ®® ID 0 ID
,
CPIt ID 9,1 39-g° 0 C is GA P, I 5 AI 1=,0EV 0,0: P SolsLgnE, 00 : N 7 5:, ER 0 ProC71,, AXT
(GROUND) II FM.OSCILLATOR TRIMMER, 0-12
1 80 Bottom View- Parts Layout

JeuL
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
id 01846
AM STAGES
Volume Control Maximum all Adjustments. The following is required for aligning:
Connect Radio Chassis to Ground Post of Signal Generator with An All Wave Signal Generator Which Will Provide an Accurately
a Short Heavy Lead. Calibrated Signal at the Test Frequencies as Listed.
Allow Chassis and Signal Generator to "Heat Up" for Several Output Indicating Meter, Non -Metallic Screwdriver, Dummy An-
Minutes. tennas - .1 mf, and 50 mmf.
SIGNAL GENERATOR
GANG ADJUST TUNING SLUGS
FREQUENCY CONNECTION AT GROUND DUMMY CONDENSER (I -F ONLY)
SETTING RADIO CONNECTION ANTENNA SETTING TRIMMERS (OSC. & ANT.)
455 KC Control Grid Chassis .1 mf Turn Rotor to 2nd I.F. Pri. & Sec.
1st 6BA6 Pin No. 1 Base Full Open
4.55 KC Control Grid Same .1 mf Turn Rotor to 1st I.F. Pri. & Sec.
6BE6 Pin No. 7 as above Full Open
1st Det.
1620 KC Control Grid Same .1 mf Turn Rotor to Oscillator C-39
6BE6 Pin No. 7 as above Full Open
1400 KC External Same 50 mmf Turn Dial to Antenna C-35
Antenna Lead as above 1400 KC.
See Note A
NOTE A-Set pointer at the 1400 KC mark on the dial scale. Attach pointer to drive cord.
FM STAGES
Allow chassis and signal generator to warm up for several minutes. Zero center scale DC vaccum tube voltmeter having a range of
The following equipment is required for aligning:
approximately 3 volts.
An accurately calibrated signal generator providing unmodu-
lated signals at the test frequencies listed below.
Non-metallic screwdriver. (If a zero center scale meter is not available, a standard scale
Dummy Antennas and 1-F Loading Resistor-.01 mf, 300 ohms vacuum tube voltmeter may be used by reversing the meter
and 100 K ohms. connections for negative readings.)
SIGNAL GENERATOR BAND ADJUSTMENT

FREQUENCY CONNECTION AT DUMMY SWITCH CONDENSER FOR MAX. METER
Discriminator SETTING RADIO ANTENNA SETTING SETTING DEFLECTION
6BA6 2nd I -F Disc. Pri.
10.7 MC Pin & Chassis
1 .01 mf FM Rotor to Full Open Note A
10.7 MC Same as above .01 mf FM Same as above Disc. Sec.
Note B
10.7 MC Same as above .01 mf FM Same as above Disc. Pri.
10.7 MC Same as above .01 mf FM Same as above Disc. Sec.
Note B
I -F 10.7 MC 6BA6 1st IF .01 mf FM Same as above 2nd I -F Pri.
Pin 1 & Chassis 2nd I -F Sec.
Note C
10.7 MC Unsolder lead from Pin 7 .01 mf FM Same as above 1st I -F Pri.
to band switch. Insert 100K Note C
ohm resistor between Pin
7 & Ground and feed sig-
nal into Pin 7 of 6BE6
10.7 MC Same as above .01 mf FM Same as above 1st I -F Sec.
Note C
RECHECK I -F ADJUSTMENTS IN ORDER GIVEN
Ant. & Osc. 108.4 Disconnect dipole and con- 300 ohms FM Rotor to Full Open Osc. C-38
nect generator to dipole
terminals with resistor in
Note D series.
104.5 Same as above 300 ohms FM Tune rotor for max. Ant. C-37
AVC voltage
RECHECK ANTENNA & OSC. ADJUSTMENTS IN ORDER GIVEN
FM ALIGNMENT NOTES
NOTE A-The zero center scale DC vacuum tube voltmeter is to megohm resistor (R-14) and its junction with the
the 1
be connected between chassis ground and the A.V.C. terminal strip. Adjust for zero voltage indication.
line at the 27 K. ohm resistor (R-11) and its junction with NOTE C-Connect zero center DC vacuum tube voltmeter as in
terminal strip. A signal of .1 volt must be fed into the Note A. Adjust input to give same output on the zero
receiver for this adjustment. center DC vacuum tube voltmeter as in Note A.
Note output voltage on the zero center DC vacuum NOTE D-Remove the 100 K ohm load resistor and solder the lead
tube voltmeter. from pin 7 of 6BE6 tube to the band switch before at-
NOTE B-Disconnect zero center DC vacuum tube voltmeter from tempting to check the antenna and oscillator coil adjust-
A.V.C. and connect it to the audio takeoff point at ments.
181
6BE6 6 BA6 6BA6 6 AL5
/ST IF AND DISCRIMINATOR
Am FM CONVERTER
5
E 10 MMF, 1ST IF TRANS.IFM, Z 2 5 2ND IF TRAWS.CFM1
7 7 FM DISC TRANS
a7, / 0/n 11 I
-1
I 0.7.4..
11, I
.-10
1. I I
_11 4 1.100 MM F ,... 63,

DIPOLE I (=0 -- 100
'I ..".10 .23 I
MMF I !
1001
1 I M
1
ANTENNA\ SWITCH MF ,---
1 --..,
2 ND. SEC. -Tw L_ _ _ MME MMF.70
Le_1 MME. ,...
3 Jp035n
I-.-i
FRONT 1.4..
PARAs/r/c CHOKE 22 Kn.

5000
-11-0 1ST IF TRANS./AAP:4 r.j 2NO IF TRANS. (AM)
FIL. MMF.
C-3 1-' 0
TOCHOKE FM 47 MMF. 14. I 14.0
6 3E R-11 1
I
AM. OSC.
LOOP ANTENNA (AM) ...."" MO no 5m0m0FT 68,
I ,174) 1M ME
100 I 27 Kn
MMF mmE
kz774.0.1--1
T-5 L LI __MMF. e Nos., _j
ANT COIL OSCIF14/ j SWITCH - -7 - 11
.1) MF.
..." /ST. SEC REAR el L44,
of t -H 12700
0 MME
0. 100'''' co 1200A 01 MF 15000 MMF. i_____
MMF '11 1
0 6,
57: M
35K 1000" 6800n. 6800n

m01 MF. 4 7 K M:
1
FM 1
8200n VWV1V-I 1.-150 MMF. 1
A R-14
SWITCH 1.0 MEG.
PHONO.
1ST. SEC.FRONT
SWITCH
SECTION
C:Th2NORE 4R
5Y3 05 MF. FM
RECT 6 V6
8 .1400^ 1000." AM 6 AT6 OUTPUT
RED 4 470K). 2ND DEC AVC OUTPUT TRANSFORMER
PHONO
POWER PHONO' 7 3
TO EXTERNAL TRANSFORMER INPUT 220 I .02 ME. 3.2n
ANTENNA RED-YEL K:41F° aI 5 001
BL AC YELLO 350 V 7 40 2ND SECTION MMF.i 5 MF
FRONT 6
MF13501/7. 0.5 MEG. 1
7 2
ON -OFF c.170, RED
SWITCH 68 MMF VOLUME
7
swIrcre CONTACT YELLOW .005
NUMBERING CONTROL MF.
2.0^ cz,
SYSTEM YELLOW 10 MEG. o
PHONO MOTOR GRN 470K^ ,T
SOCKET BLACK 6.3 V
HEATERS 156n
0.1, 3 MEG
OR
CONTROL
.04 MET rONE
DIAL
LAMPS
451
SWITCH SECTION NOTE,

VIEWED FROM FRONT COIL WINDINGS FOR WHICH NO
OF CHASSIS RES1STANCESARE SHOWN, HAVE C,..3:9)0SC. SECTION
A D.C. RESISTANCE OF LESS
0 NTER CLAMP
THAN 0.1" FM
OSC. COIL CC:3:6)ANT. SECTION
A B AM PRI. ADJ.
(AM) SEC. ADJ.
LI- GANG
, LOOP
DIAL SEC.ADJ.7 COND
DRAGNET
TENSION SPRING ANTENNA-, A
I FM DISC.
Socket voltages are shown on the Bottom Socket TRANS.
diagram at the tube socket terminals. All voltages are CONDENSER IN
FULLY CLOSED
between the socket terminal and chassis ground. Plate, DIAL POSITION
STRING FM SEC. ADJ.
screen and cathode voltages were taken with a 1000
PRI. ADJ.
ohm -per -volt meter with a 300 volt scale used for -plate -35 (NMI
AM SEC. ADJ. AM SEC. ADS

and screen voltages. Audio grid voltages were read
DRIVE
with a vacuum tube volt -meter. SHAFT (ST L F. 2ND I.F. 2ND I. F.
(ST I.F.
TRANSCEND TRANS. (AM) TRANS. (FM
TRANS. (AM)
6 SB7 Y 6307 6
6SG7 cll 256 I.F. LIMITER
AYR .3'088r CONVERTER
CB .265 V.
2211.1F #106 V. (6
OVERALL PRI.4.7.rt
0 -2 SLUE 40 2#
OVERALL PRI. 4.2.n. 24, BLUE
CVO
mp COVERALL SEG.4.8nR3
1
0"3 LUE , 2112 I.F. TRANS. A BLUE 3112 I.F. TRANS. 6 DISC RIMINATOR TRANS.
01670 31 I.F. TRANS. - '-'
LIO o01 LIO 10.7 MC 00 1:-.C-115: TEL
00 C 6 4 AMP
rl r5s7.7GC IOLA H
S.C. ANT. COIL (oo CS5 I
1
2y 1 s A 2561-
2.8n. or, 6RN. it L22 L23 LIS LIS
L.9 G)
®113101:71;
1
GTE,' 4
GT7 IR
RC 66-1 I
NOK .s 25 I UI
0 L2,t7=- L.710 7IA
I
MW (1.1..27 L21.0_3
"VL
ONO 036-.05 R3I 33
08E0 -I 711E0 I 'GREEN
m&r 0 ssK!R, L. -------a-030 0
S.W. ANT COIL SK _1! ,2
1-76-c;:ir
0.1o. R41
1()M.67
5K
054 0. C16
.0? 2.005 " R9
RI 33K
EN. ANT COM, R30 -IM T.
R26 L3
220
0
550 2
SW 6 REAR SIAM 6H6/G7 O
TU RT AP NU sT
DISCRIMINATOR PHASE INVERTER
RI, 11,AF
100 -L- Lau
32 /GT SEE
4 001840 0 OT
.0 PilLUG IH.
OOMMF
Vkkfe:, DM
S Ck241 a 7,
R15
6W 3 R36 SW 56/8 100 10 tomagISPKR
FRONT 100 MF
- 032- SONEMANTP12.?4.SINGLE
MMr
R1I5
0. CI 613K
59 CAB 01 R26
C60 R4
053 A50 Eb2q) SPEAKER SOCKET
,' CTOME
-." TEST 100K TONE - II IY OP
1.01 JACK CONTROL
IR R9 -7K
R39 -56 SEE OT 111,
eF .:IntlillTIO
C33
G12 'PRIE/Mr ,W1.!
2 3 4 5 6 470
414 TT 414 T 3 087AMF
1
C ES
.i. RO T OUT PUT
ONC .001
CATH
) PORNO SPRR
LII JACK 2.! AMC PLUG
i-1-4)3.1' R35-2.2 OUT PUT
035
013
(R44-220 C R32 -
.05
RAT- TOK
-J-- 2200 5.0 250.
0531
076: 079 coo:
it ii i i col: C62
OSCI
4. C9
RI -10
2205312
LBT .0'
LUTUNING EY
522
L26 LIT L28 L 9 L] ..t" S 6 SOT 038 50M6IF PHONO 02 LOK
- -CS a OSO PICKUP 0 0,0
'' Olit 2 P38-56 13
4 900
00 6SJ7/GT
CVO
00 OOK
L -/ NOISE RECT. R2
PUSH BUTTON SWITCH a TUNERS 210
LOOFCITUNPNGINES2"" 120
R55 -100
SV11 INPUT 308 100
SWITCH ON TRANS R2-10
A.G. INPUT VOLUME CONTROL la a 1,600
PLUG YO MD c,
rt
Aie R ECT.
A.G. POWER 63 R42-15
T4-.0 SOCKET 9210.11 G ?1:MED %0:ED
0 CI a R3-68 R9 -TOO
)1
0 R56 -15K
PILOT LAMPS
it* TO ALL HEATERS E 3CEPT 500 RECT.
NOTES -
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCIES
SPEAKER PLUG REMOVED A.m.- I. F. - 455 K.C.
2. VOILE COIL DISCONNECTED
mob J. SWITCH SW.2-3-1-5-6-78 8 SHOWN IN COUNTER -CLOCKWISE OR FOIST POSITION -F M BRNO.
-10.7 M.G.
SECOND POSITION CLOCK WISE - 1ENUAL BC. BANG.
THIRD POSITION CLOCKWISE -PC -BC SAND
FOURTH POSITION CLOCKWISE- SW. BAND.
FIFTH POSITION CLOCKWISE - PHONO.
SWITCHES ROTATE 60. BETWEEN POSiTiONS 8 ARE SHOWN AS VIEWED FROM FRONT OF SET
. ALL VOLTGES MEASURED FROM CHASSIS WNW USING 20,000 OHMS/VOLT MEIER
LINE VOLTAGE V C MA, VOLUME CONTROL SETTING AT NO SIGNAL CONDITIONS FOR B.C. BAND.
rr
4 3 2
rn
i
ci)
m
0 ,
G.)
rrII;771 1 I 1 1 11 ri M n x4.
4
ASSW2 OO 0rt
R46 cig 0
R26 12 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 Pm
0 3 3 3 - r-
F- 70P LUG
S-BOTT LUG
F -L6
S L6 L3
SW3
Iva
R6
67613
irit141 PB COILS
F -L7
C39 %%.)-t SW. ANT. TRIM. ft

VI
400 10l 059 FM. ANT. TRIM
6. C Pm
R24
C22
058
C57 W4 C49.0-- BC. ANT. TRIM.
4. C35 SW. RF. TRIM. 1$
023 .151.7F,L2
R2 R5 C84 or-vor-1, 060.0-1.- FM. RF. TRIM.
R22 so.
676Q
8311 C36 la
:w: 048 BC. RF. TRIM.
R42 7 .4; .Wrg
GI7
R40 \P"-- 7 r -mg
CCC LIEU
R20 C21 JMMYki %owl
L
s- BONI
063 6 BC. 05C. TRIM.
C. C R39 C46 .1 7
III 011 SW7 I 4/6 BC. 09C. PAD.
RI RIO
I R30
R38 3
R2I CIO
'it'. R4
't R29
6SQ7/OT C38 061f -FM. 09C. TRIM.
R37 C56
t] r. 4IN
11/4111* O
0 00 00 431")
C
0 0 0 0 0 0
ri R13 S R44 013 SW. 06C. TRIM
0 0 0 0 C) 0 C7
00 00 00 SW8 LI
45 062
C44 s.0 ,0 RI R15
6$Q7/GT 6H6/GT §117/, 0
IN 04 RII 'V >1
(-) O
R45 6567Ina R33 6 '7
5U4G 00_2019IF
44. MAO O°
6 00 CCC
BL lATRANS. C15
TRANS. Z 0
S 0 0 C14
0 e lir RED 0 O 0 GCC C. C. a
00 00 R35
art 0)
I7
0 0 09 R27 RI9 PTRANS.G
BLUE
04;28 c s2o
C42 RIO R32 0 Zro
ri 4,0 DI SCTRUNATOR PPPP
AC POWER INPUT SPEAKER SOCKET PHONO JACK
FM TEST JACK
PHONO POWER SOCKET
Westinghouse RADIO . TELEVISION

POWER OUTPUT:
Undistorted
Maximum
14 watts
25 watts
FREQUENCY RANGES: POWER SUPPLY RATING: 105-120 volts, 50-60 cycles A -C

Standard Broadcast 550 to 1700 kc.
International Short Wave 5 0 to 18.0 mc. POWER CONSUMPTION (radio sect. only): 175 watts
Frequency Modulation 88 to 108 mc.
ALIGNMENT BROADCAST AND SHORT WAVE BANDS

AMPLITUDE MODULATION
Connect an output meter across the speaker voice coil.
With the volume control set for maximum output and the signal from the generator attenuated
to avoid A.V.C. action, proceed as follows:
Connect SignalSignal Generator Radio Dial
Step Generator to- Frequency Setting Adjust
1 Set Phono-Band switch to "BC"
2 6SG7, 2nd I -F, control grid 455 kc 550 kc 455 kc secondary and primary trimmers
through a 0.1 mfd capac- of 3rd I -F transformer for maximum output.
itor
3 6SG7, 1st I -F, control grid 455 kc 550 kc 455 kc secondary and primary trimmers
through a 0.1 mfd. capac- of 2nd I -F transformer for maximum output.
itor
4 6SB7Y, converter, control 455 kc 550 kc 455 kc secondary and primary trimmers of
grid through a 0.1 mid ca- 1st I -F transformer for maximum output.
pacitor
5 6SB7Y, converter, control 455 kc 550 kc carefully "peak" all 455 kc I -F trans -
grid through a 0.1 mfd ca- former trimmers for maximum output.
pacitor
6 BC antenna t e r ni i n al 600 kc 600 kc BC oscillator padder for maximum output.
through a 200 mmf capac-
itor
7 BC antenna t e r m i n a 1 1600 kc 1600 kc BC oscillator trimmer for maximum output.
through a 200 mmf capac-
itor
8 Re -check steps 6 and 7
9 Radiated signal (no con- 1400 kc 1400 kc BC R -F and ANT trimmers for maximum
nection) output.
10 Set Photio-Band switch to "S.W."
11 SW antenna terminal 18.0 mc 18.0 mc SW oscillator trimmer for maximum out -
through a 400 ohm resistor put.
NOTE: If the signal is heard at two dif-
ferent trimmer settings, the one nearest
minimum capacity is correct-the other is
the image.
12 Radiated signal (no con- 16.0 mc 16.0 mc SW R -F and ANT trimmers for maximum
nection) output.
2 3 4 5 6
CHASSIS LAYOUT
1
1 1 1 1 1 1
cpp co,
...., - .,...._ -
06,04300,
NO 44 PILOT AMP NO 44 PI OT LAMP
TRIM
d
COIL A.
- C33
111111111111 -050
0 900pc
1600 KC
540 KC
900
110
Ti
POWER
.
CI:
',......
t.
..". -C se MIE ..-R 23 TRANS.
11111.1 -05'
== 1.)\....../
,..=
A
-052 65J7 6H6 6507 6507
C55 /GT
/GT GT GT
,,,....... e.......... ......... ; .

t .
'ELF. 2-
TRNS. TRANS.TRANS. 65J7
/GT 50
6H6
,..m...... ... "km...m=0 /GT
BP
DISCRIMINATOR
10.7MC
- 455 KC
11-116 11-117
455 KC P 455 KC 5Z MAHOGANY WALNUT
DISCRIMINATOR
S0
P
e 10.TMC 10.716C
0
10.714C
TEST JACK
eF Mo
PHONO. JACK op AC. PROW,.
0
6 6 8 8' 6 SPKR. SOCKET 0 LINE CORD
185
Weitinghou3e electric MODELS H-113, H-114, H-116, H-117 AND H-119
F. M. BAND
FREQUENCY MODULATION
Connect a 20,000 ohms -per -volt or Vacuum Tube Voltmeter between the Discriminator Test
Jack and the chassis.
With the volume control set for maximum output and the signal from the generator attenuated
to avoid A.V.C. action, proceed as follows:
Step Connect Signal Signal Generator Radio Dial Adjust
Generator to- Frequency Setting
1 Set Phono-Band switch to "F.M."
2 Detune secondary trimmer of discriminator transformer.
3 6SG7, 2nd I -F, control grid UNMODULATED 88 mc 10.7 mc primary trimmer of 3rd I -F trans.
through a .01 mfd mica 10.7 mc for maximum voltage.
capacitor
4 6SG7, 1st I -F, control grid UNMODULATED 88 mc 10.7 mc secondary and primary trimmers
through a .01 mfd mica ca- 10.7 mc of 2nd I -F trans. for maximum voltage.
pacitor
5 Fixed plates of the FM UNMODULATED 88 me 10.7 mc secondary and primary trimmers
converter tuning capacitor 10.7 mc of 1st I -F transformer for maximum volt -
through a .01 mid mica ca- age.
pacitor
6 Fixed plates of the FM UNMODULATED 88 mc carefully "peak" all 10.7 mc I -F trimmers
converter tuning capacitor 10.7 mc for maximum voltage.
through a .01 mfd mica
capacitor
7 FM antenna terminal UNMODULATED 105 mc FM oscillator trimmer for maximum volt -
through a non -inductive 105 mc age.
300 ohm resistor
8 FM antenna terminal UNMODULATED 105 mc FM R -F and ANT trimmers for maximum
through a non -inductive 105 mc voltage.
300 ohm resistor
9 Fixed plates of the FM UNMODULATED 88 mc Primary trimmer of discriminator trans -
converter tuning capacitor 10.7 mc former for maximum voltage.
through a .01 mfd mica ca-
pacitor
10 Fixed plates of the FM UNMODULATED 88 mc Secondary trimmer of discriminator trans -
converter tuning capacitor 10.7 me former for zero voltage. The voltage will
through a .01 mfd mica ca- change polarity as the trimmer is tuned
pacitor through resonance. Tune carefully for
zero voltage.
11 Re -check steps 9 and 10.
PUSH BUTTONS
Push buttons to 3 are designed to receive stations
1 4. Adjust C78 for maximum receiver output (either
from 900 to 1600 kc; push buttons 4 to 6 are designed to a station or static will be heard depending on the
receive stations from 540 to 900 kc. setting of L26). Now adjust L26 until the desired
Refer to CHASSIS LAYOUT drawing for location of station is heard. It will be necessary to re -adjust
C78 at intervals to maintain maximum output.
push button adjusters, and then proceed as follows:
1. Turn on radio and allow it to warm up for five 5. Make a final adjustment of L26 for proper tuning
minutes. and C78 for maximum output.
2. Set the Phono-Band switch on "BC," and tune in 6. Return the band switch to B.C."- to make certain
the desired station in the frequency range 900 to that the push button has been set to the desired
1600 kc. station.
3. Re -set the Phono-Band switch on "P.B.", and de-
press the first push button (right button viewed 7. Adjust the remaining push buttons in the same
from the front). manner.
TENSION SPRING
94
4 0
1.)
la
POINTER
2 TURNS- -.0.
; 4 II
186 DIAL DRIVE MECHANISM

Westtnghouse RADIO
11-161
.
11-168 and H -168A
TELEVISION
MAHOGANY AND BLONDE MAHOGANY AND BLONDE
ALIGNMENT
BROADCAST BAND -AMPLITUDE MODULATION
Connect an output meter across the speaker voice coil.
the tone
While making the following adjustments, keep the volume control set for maximum output,
control set on treble, and the signal generator output attenuated to avoid AVC action.
Connect Signal Signal Radio
Gen. Freq. Dial Adjust for Maximum Output
Step Generator to-
1. Set Phono-Band Switch to "AM"
2nd I -F, control grid 455 kc 540 kc 455 kc primary trimmer of 3rd I -F transformer.
2. 6BA6,
through a 0.1 mfd capacitor
1st I -F, control grid 455 kc 540 kc 455 kc primary and secondary trimmers of 2nd
3. 6BA6,
through a 0.1 mfd capacitor I -F trans.
converter, control grid 455 kc 540 kc 455 kc primary and secondary trimmers of 1st
4. 6J6,
through a 0.1 mfd capacitor I -F trans.
converter, control grid 455 kc 540 kc Peak all 455 kc I -F transformer trimmers.
5. 6J6,
through a mfd capacitor
0.1
1600 kc 1600 kc AM oscillator trimmer.
6. Radiated signal (no actual
connection)
Radiated signal 600 kc 600 kc AM antenna padder.
7.
Radiated signal 1400 kc 1400 kc AM antenna trimmer.
8.
9. Recheck steps 7 and 8 in order given. "Rock" tuning capacitor while adjusting AM antenna trimmer.
FM BAND -FREQUENCY MODULATION

Do not align the 10.7 mc I -F circuits until all 455 kc I -F adjustments have been completed.
Connect Signal Signal Radio Adjust -
Generator to- Gen. Freq. Dial
Step
1. Set Phono-Band switch to "FM."
Connect a vacuum tube voltmeter between point X (see Figs. 3 and 4) and ground (chassis). _
2.
control grid Unmodulated 88 mc 10.7 mc primary and secondary of 3rd I -F
3. 6BA6, 2nd I -F,
trans. and primary of discriminator trans. for
through a .001 mfd mica 10.7 mc
max. voltage.
capacitor 10.7 mc primary and secondary of 2nd I -F
6BA6, 1st I -F, control grid Unmodulated 88 mc
4. trans. for max. voltage.
through a' .001 mfd mica 10.7 mc
capacitor 10.7 mc primary and secondary of 1st I -F
Stator of FM tuning capacitor Unmodulated 88 mc
5.
(C42) through a .01 mfd mica 10.7 mc trans. for max. voltage.
capacitor
Connect the vacuum tube voltmeter between point Y (Figs. 3 and 4) and chassis.
6.
Stator of FM tuning capacitor Unmodulated 88 mc Secondary of discriminator trans. for zero
7.
10.7 mc voltage. The voltage will change polarity as
(C42) through a .01 mfd mica the trimmer is tuned through resonance. Tune
capacitor carefully for zero voltage.
8. Connect the vacuum tube voltmeter between point X and chassis.
Unmodulated 88 mc Primary of discriminator trans. for max. volt -
9. Stator of FM tuning capacitor age.
(C42) through a .01 mfd mica 10.7 mc
capacitor FM oscillator trimmer for max. voltage.*
FM antenna terminal through Unmodulated 105 mc
lg.
a 72 ohm non -inductive re- 105 mc
sistor max. voltage *-
FM antenna terminal through Unmodulated 105 mc FM antenna trimmer for
11.
105 mc "rock" tuning capacitor while adjusting.
a 72 ohm non -inductive re- _
sistor
12. Check dial calibration and tracking at 90 mc.**
* The FM oscillator and antenna trimmersbecan be adjusted by using the thumb and forefinger to rotate the outside drum
of the capacitor. Hand capacity effects may reduced by holding the heel of the hand against the 1st I -F trans. can.
* After the radio has been aligned at 105 mc., check calibration by tuning to a 90 mc. signal from the generator. If the
adjustments are necessary. frequency side of 90 mc.,
If the pointer is on the highdial
dial pointer indicates 90 mc., no further (L6) and repeat steps 10, 11, and 12 above until calibration is correct. If
slightly compress the length of oscillator coil slightly expand the length of oscillator coil (L6) and repeat steps 10, 11,
the pointer is on the low frequency side of 90 mc.,
and 12 until dial calibration is correct. has been "peaked" at 105 mc., check the antenna circuit
After calibration has been checked and the antenna circuitantenna trimmer. If the "peak" setting is the same at 90 mc. as it
tracking by tuning to a 90 mc. signal and rotating theIfFM the trimmer capacitance must be increased to obtain maximum out-
was at 105 mc., no further adjustments are necessary. coil (L3) and repeat steps 11 and 12 until correct tracking is obtained.
put at 90 mc., slightly compress the length of antenna length of antenna
If the trimmer capacitance must be decreased to obtain maximum output at 90 mc., slightly expand the
coil (L3) and repeat steps 11 and 12 until correct tracking is obtained.
187
- -7,- NO RI PILOT LAMPS-
CSC TRIM
INS
OSC TRIM FM -046
ANT PAD AM -La
ANT. TRIM. F. COS
ANT TRIM AM. -039
0
FIG. I-CHASSIS LAYOUT FIG. 2-DIAL DRIVE MECHANISM
FIG. 3-BOTTOM VIEW OF CHASSIS
CSC.-CONVENTER
6846 64U6
I.F LIMITER OFT F.M.
026 IOOMMF
POW; TRANS
SWI SWITCH
ON VOLUME CONTROL
i c31
ILL
-0)
C33
CO
TUNER ISN'T
MAIN ASS,
NOTES.
I
SELECTOR SWITCH SHOWN IN ExTHEME COUNTER CLOCKWISE POSITION (FM. SAW .
SECOND POSITION CLOCKWISE IS AM BAND. 2 ALL VOLTAGES MEASURED FROM CHASSIS MO) USING 20,000 OHMS/VOLT METER -LINE VOLTAGE HT VAG.
THIRD POSITION CLOCKWISE IS PROMO. VOLTAGES SHOULD AS SHOWN 1: 20 PERCENT
3. SPEAKER PLUG REMOVED.
I. VOICE COIL DISCONNECTED
FIG. 4-SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

COWNP' MODELS 12H090 -12H091 -12H092 -12H093 -12H094
(1. (D CA 1...
02o 0 P.
CD Ct. OCI
CHASSIS No. 11C21
11. T 60044. 'Rom 6004c 04534C 4.54A1453 1,G.
4 5AATE.004, ®
O 0' CD ANT onFRom 9814c. TO 4.5.6
0 SS EoACT0400 ""'
40A
VFZT
BoT TO. ylEyr Or AT 6S8GT
co ts CD 0 TIRO SUGAETS L VOLTAGES MEASURED PROM
6AG5 +55 PCTUIIH LO POINTS 6SB7 7W7 6S1i7 DISCRIMINATOR
Ct 6SG7/GT
P 0 0 R.F R. Is*. I. F. 2". L F. LIMITER A.V.C,DET d in AUDIO
,=LUP,IrTtik CONVERTER
CD CO Cr
45y o
1..1 Cr Cr (D 0
CO 0' I CI.
0) R6
Ef6
co
to 000
'1 0_ _
E WOOER
ArlNLle
CI
,SLF
NSS'J'EZES3DS c1-
011 1-4
D7 (D o 0
'-a oo o
1-4
O 0 so AN
ISP COIL
455 KG C$ GI2
00
Rpl 24
pq
200 IRON 2200
P 10.
100
3
F+. co a
O P.' 0 ANT. COIL
c0
o I-1 CD 721 2 SAES
pi 0 630
to 02
aID o) 10014 22040 C25
ct ta CI) 0 AUDIO POWER SUPPLY CHASSIS

P. a P. 0 6J5GT 6V6GT
O P. P INVERTER PWR. AMP.
1-1 0 0 TREBLE VOICE ALTO
."r
MSS LOLLASSNOIMPAL
to ,1 KIVA al 4.501 NAMPO MON 100eil 161.10 611
M TONE GONTNOL SWITCH
1 tico a)
Ct .005 CAL7GT S.
C59
CORO CHARM TUNING EYE 005
SW
I-+ T30 NON
cr .TEE TERM... END OP 260v 6V6 G T
PIM. SOCKET PWR. AMP SPEAKER
ro a r SI AR
0'533 WOO/.
00 so Ct MOVE n
rALPrE PLUG ON PWR 121090
SUPPLY CABLE
" 0 P.
IQ
pm END
ylE
gni;
SP axER
,C co
49-5 5 I0.0,111
t-4 5Y3GT
ct ct LN rpan
RECT a,
.Ltl "0 II3PVIEW
0 Of 600 A( OT)
MAO SWITCH Si SHOWN IN le POS. FM 451116. WATIg01.7-1' .
POWER
LET SOCKET ,G41
a 000 AV 100406 573A. 3014ED
1-b MAIOSIMTCH POSITIONS SAPPOS AUTOMATIC 40,4
ROMS STOOMMCCAST 100 W. 4'..
1-1/4 G36
MAPOS S.W. .005
s...._... AWPOS PHONO
{2MPOS TEL
t4 ct .485 imbTOR ON
CO VOLUME CONTROL RV
,,,,,
LP) ALL CONDENSERS -PAPER!tIo ILL
ALL RESISTORS T 20 v. MERANO13. mucAS GSRAmIG i 3201
1 ALL OL TAW, AM 0 C U CTERMSE SPECIEWO
uNLESS OTNERINSE sPECIP4E DENOTES CHASSISs,,
I0
ZENITH RADIO CORPORATION ED
m
14
D1AG
No. DESCRIPTION
tla
O MODELS 12 H 0 9 0- 12 H 0 91 - 12 H 0 92 - 12 H 09 3- 12 H 0 9 4 CI
02 25 MMFD,C R.
3 -GANG V<RIABLE
500 0
22-1501 FORMED. CER. 500 V.
C. BROADCAST ANT. TRIM_
CHASSISN o . 11 C 21 05 22-1506 22 MMFD CER. 500 V.
r
..0
C6 22-1493 FM ANTENNA TRIM. 11,4
CT 22-1503 150 DEM 3000.
1
C6 5.1. ANT. TRIM.
CIO 12 -'91 ;.:/*ETIETIP-T 13 1 ISMER M-

y4
CD 22-15011 35MMFO CER. 500V
The 11C21 chassis incorporates a superheterodyne circuit C12 22'196 .01 MFO. 6000 0
with two stages of IF, and one stage of RF amplification on C13 22-1505 17MMFD CER. 5000 r.r
all hands. CIA, 2,i4C!' TRIM.
!F
MODAPTCIASTTRD';:,.
...-C16 OSC. 8W C16 20.1502 5W:0SG. TRIMMER v7v
AM Alignment: The alignment of this chassis on the short 117 MC- C17 0601 BROADCAST OSC.TRIM.
wave and standard broadcast band is conventional. The align- CIO 22-1387 !SOWER:14ER, 500V.
C19 22,169 .001 MFD.M1CA 600 V. 0..y
ment slugs in the IF transformers are threaded and screw into 02022-1509 52 mmeo LER. 500 V. 7,1
the coil forms. The slugs are slotted for a small size fiber cV 27 67 475 MMFELMICA OISC
screw driver. Do not press hard on the aligning tool (fiber 1"a
222.-r:863Y: '10':O.NM°E65fiC1..T.:1 CIMA M62700%0
3.0. I.F. TRANS. 242. LA TRANS.
screw driver) or the threads in the coil forms will strip and 'c023
z .2, .02LEf0. 6000.
L23, 0-24 455 0111, 0-20 4551(0. C25 22-1136
CD
adjustment will be impossible. C.
L2I, L22 5.3 MC. L IT, L I5 4.3 MO. 500MNFO MICA 600V. _t...
C27 22-365 100MMFD MICA 600V. ..
FM RF Alignment: L2I C28
The same coil slug arrangement which L22 22171 .05 MFO 600V ,...1
.; LIT1. C29 22-1362 .004 MEM 600,0 -Al
tunes the 100 MC FM band also tunes the 45 MC band. However, on LI5 -
L24 C30 22-440 t004NF01.10% 6000. 8
45 MC the band switch connects trimmer condensers in parallel Leo-- 11. , C31 22.II27 .02171,F0. 400V. 1.1
'..
;:, .1;10 'w
and padding wires in series with the 100 MC coils. The tuning
(ID
23
6SG SA21221121 .0IAIFD. 400V. ,,o,
6SH7 GT 11_3 2E-209 DORMER MICA 600v 1,1,1
slugs are attached to threaded shafts and the slugs are varied uo C54 22-319 .005MED SOO V.
/3 MC. 031FM 6SST___/72,.

IIM I.F. TRANS. 41
in the field of the coils by turning the shafts clockwise or ir-DMCIATRANS. 92 MC 4.15- ...Wt. -IS, 1.46 45000. /O 036 22-242 750 MMFD MICA 5000.
counter -clockwise. After adjustments the shafts must be senor- t 1,13, I:14 1311 057 22-868 480MMFD SILVER MICA co
0 er-1.2 ; 45 MO. C38 221041 .005 MFD 400V
ed with a drop of speaker cement. 9:00S IY. -® ' C39 22-1257 .0531117r5 1000 V.
114 IF Alignment: The same type of tuning slugs for align - L2s-ej cm 015 DES ` 41.N. 0 4500. -....4
nj
WAVE TRAP L5 °ET. FM Gt131;-49;frITIZEM.3
I4006.C.ROA C42 22-1386 .02 NED. 2000
ing the AM IF Amplifier are used for the FM I.F.'s. Observe CD 45501 98 MC.
04 ANT 1109 , 41tETFM
the same precautions when making adjustments. The second 8.3 SWCAt7
14001C. I 6AG5 45 MC,
Mc IF stage is overcoupled. Overcoupling gives a wide band 6S8GT 11.7 MO. - Pi 63-607 15M OHM W_
C8-... 1-.3 ;:T/A.M FY 63-715 100M 000.1 W
pass with good sensitivity. When an overcoupled stage is align- SW ART OHM W.
15 MC. 41t FM i lb
ed with an unmodulated signal, the stage must be loaded. A 300 R4 6653 1848456 5"60"0 W.
6AL7GT 45MC.
R5 63-593 47MALIA__ *
ohm carbon resistor soldered across the secondary of the second
I BANDSWITCH 1 TUNING 07 63- 510 113M OHM 2W.
400a,
IF transformer provides a satisfactory load for this circuit. &VOLUME Re 63-579 HO DINA YEW.
The resistor leads must be kept short to reduce the dietribut- 1000 OHM
ed capacity of the circuit. Vo (6.::f6;:
6V6 6V6 6J5 RD 63-5.60 RIM CON a7...- IA
V27v. ...
When aligning a loaded stage, it will be found that con- GT GT GT RIO 63-1446 1200 OHM }1236 W
RIO 63.592 33M OHM LNW.
siderable signal from the generator will be required, and that RIO 63-1447 40 M OHM PEW fiN0.....
it will tune broadly. f51. LOAD RESISTOR MUST BE REMOVED AFTER ' RI5 631003 220005IM VF -1/. v.
/--
, ,___, 016 63-296 ZOOM OPM V4W.
4
ALIGIIMENT. R17 F3-380 ICON OWN 1W.
,......
If the signal generator used does not have sufficient out- 100M ONN w
L. W.
til :317,0
6!916 l/RW.
En
POWER I.F,'
put to overcome the temporary loss caused by the load resistor, TRANS. 92063-595 100M CNN LNW. ^
the load resistance may be increased or the signal fed into the R21 63-1349 LS MEO.VOL.CONTROL ..../
5Y3 R22 63-651 OVA ORM V.W.

preceding Stage. R2365 -SOS ISM OHM 1,43V-
,--. ___..., GT 124 63-411. 1 ME00111.1
MA Discriminator Alignment: When the secondary of the P.R.
02563-586 3300 ONM VOW.
use sufficient signal R26 3585 2200 OHM /OVA
discriminator is aligned (operation 9)
027 3-648 471 OFIM
poi
AUDIO II POWER SUPPLY VOW.M
input to get a good positive and negative indication before R211 3-1187 410 0611 1W. RIF
setting the slug for zero reading. A center zero indicating R29 63-657 330M OHM 1/W0
03065.397 470M OHM VoW th
meter is recommended for this adjustment, but is not absolutely R31 63-1189 100071MVPREWOUND2W RE,
532 63-620 3301413 WM l'"
necessary._ Reversing the leads of a non -zero center meter, or 533 63.626 110 ONN V44.
TUBE AND TRIMMER LOCATION 44
observing closely when this meter starts to go to the left CD
(negative) of zero will give the same results. DI
DI
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
Connect Dummy Input Signal Set Dial
Opera-
tion Oscillator to Antenna Frequency Band To AdJ.Trimmers Purcose
Pin 8 on Converter 455 Kc. L15,16,19,20,23 Align I.F. channel for M ct N o
1 Tube 6SB7 socket .05 Mfd. Modulated BC 600 Kc. and 24 maximum output '"S 0 0 SI) 0
Pin 1 on R.F. tube 455 Kc. Press any but- Adjust wavetrap to cY'H. Ft
gog oct
2 6AG5 socket .05 Mfd. Modulated Aut. ton on Auto. 010 minimum
2 Turns loosely 1600 Kc. Set oscillator to dial afn0'0 CAclP'MgCt©r4
coupled to wavemag. Modulated BC 1600 Kc. C17 scale
3 N' FS
2 turns loosely 1400 Kc. O0 CO 0 0
Modulated BC 1400 Kc. C15 & C4 Align dot. and ant, stages. ct O. ct b
4 coupled to wavemag.
Antenna Post (Re- 400 11.7 Mc. ,
Set oscillator to dial O 1-4 0-*
move line an ohms Modulated SW 11.7 Mc. C16 scale 0
5
Antenna Poet (Re- 400 11.7 Mc. (t)
6 move line ant.) ohms Modulated SW 11.7 Mc. C9 Align ant. stage ;3 ct
Antenna Poet (Re- 400 9.7 Mc. Align ant. stage Repeat H cD 0 CD 0
SW C8 Ooer. 6 for maximum outtut
7 move line ant.1 ohms Modulated 9.7 Mc. O
Pin 4 grid on 607 8.3 Mc. FM L25 coil slug Align primary of disorimin- O 00 0 gID
limiter socket .05 Mfd. Unmodulated 45 primary disc. ator for maximum reading O CY '1 0 tD
8 (a) 0
Pin 4 grid on 6SH7 8.31,1c. FM L26 coil slug sea. Adjust secondary of diecr. t
9 (h) limiter socket .05 Mfd. Unmodulated 45 of discr. for zero reading
fc21(.3) ta9 ct
Pin 6 (grid.) on L21 & L22 prim. &
tc o0c sc
7W7 2nd IF tube 8.3 Mc. FM sec. of 3rd IF Align 3rd IF transformer o
10 (c) socket .05 Mfd. Unmodulated 45 transformer for maximum reading *Inpoi-41-
L17 & L18 prim. & cn CO m
Pin 4 (grid) on
FM sec. of 2nd IF Align 2nd IF transformer
Ct 0 M
11 (c) 6SG7 let IF tube 8.3 Mc. I -4o an
(d) socket .05 Mfd, Unmodulated 45 transformer ;or maximum reading 2:Smoppoo
Pin 8(grid)on 6SB7 L13 & L14 prim. & OA 0 0,
FM cia
12 (c) converter tube 8.3 Mc. sec. of let IF Align let IF transformer OH H. 0
45 for maximum reading &
(d) socket .05 Mfd, Unmodulated transformer 0 0i0
Antenna Post (re- 270 98 Mc. FM 98 Mc. L10 Oec. coil Set oscillator to CD CO
P., CD po
13 (c) move line ant,) ohms Unmodulated 100 Slug dial scale ¢ca 04 0 0 0
Antenna Post (Re- 270 98 Mc. FM 98 Mc. L5 and L3 Det. Align det. and Ant. H. 0
ct 1--` cD
move line ant.) ohms Unmodulated 100 and RF coil stage to maximum CD c -t- 0 ct ct
14 (c) slugs reading I-4 FS
Antenna Poet (re- 270 45 Mc. FM 45 Mc. C22 Set oscillator to ctO
h4
ctO 0 0o
15 (0) move line ant.) ohms Unmodulated 45 dial scale O 0 NI CD
Antenna Post (re- 270 45 Mc. FM 45 Mc. C14 and C6 Align detector and C°
rig 7 Oct H.<
move line ant.) ohms Unmodulated 45 ant, stages for " (D H cD
16 (c) maximum reading CO ct-
Cn
9-
A vacuum tube voltmeter with an isolation resistor of 200,000 ohms in series with the hot lead will ct P-
serve for FM adjustments. This lead must be shielded.
CD 1---1 Sn
An ordinary AC output meter connected across the primary or secondary of the output transformer will I H
be satisfactory for all AM adjustments.
The signal generator output should be kept just high enough to get an indication on the meter. 0
(a) Vacuum Tube Voltmeter pin 5 on discriminator transformer to chassis (half discriminator load.)
(b) Vacuum Tube Voltmeter pin 7 on discriminator transformer to chassis (full discriminator load).
w eb (c) Vacuum Tube Voltmeter 6SE7 limiter grid (pin 4 to chassis).
(d) 300 ohm watt carbon resistor soldered across the secondary L18 (pin 2 and 3 of 2nd IF trans.).
(JD The leads to the resistor must be as short as possible and the resistor removed before operation
max 13 is started.
INDEX
Reference is made to the first page where
material for the particular model begins,
Admiral Corp. Majestic Radio R.C.A. Victor

7C73 5 8B07D 93 KCS 20A 153
9A1 5 8FM776 93 RK-121 145
12B26E 97 RS -123 145
Airline 12FM475 97 610V1 141
74BR-1812A 105 12FM778 97 610V2 141
12FM779 97 RC -610C 141
Bendix Aviation 41201 97 612V1 145
847-B 13 612V3 145
Meissner Mfg. Co. 630TS 153
Crosley Corp. 9-1091A, -B 101
86CR 21 Sparks-Withington
86CS 21 Midwest Radio see Sparton
87CQ 21 R-12 102
88TA 18 RGT-12 102 Sparton
88TC 18 RT-12 102 10 -76 -PA 163
146CS 29
Montgomery Ward Stewart -Warner
A72T1 171
Du Mont Laboratories 74BR-1812A 105
RA -101 33 A72T2 171
A72T3 171
Motorola, Inc
Emerson. Radio TS -3 125 A72T4 171
528 109 T-711 175
47 HS -38
9026A to -D 171
537 51 HS -39 109
120038 47 VT -71 125
120043 51 77FM21 114 Stromberg-Carlson
77FM22 114 1210 169
Espey Mfg. Co. 77FM23 114
7-B 54 77XM21 121 Truetone
77XM22, -B 121 see Western Auto
Farnsworth Television HS -89 114
GK -140 to 144 55 95F31, -B, -M 109 We Auto
GV-220 59 95F33 109 D1752 177
GV-240 59 HS -97 114 D1846 181
GV-260 59 VK-101 125
HS -102 121 We Electr.
Galvin H-113 183
see Motorola Olympic Radio H-114 183
7-925 135 H-116 183
7-934 135 H-117 183
General Electric H-118 183
417A 63
7-936 135
7-939 135 H-119 183
801 69 H-161 187
Packard -Bell H -168,-A 187
Howard Radio 872 137
472AC, -AF 91 Zenith Radio
472C, -F 91 Pilot Radio 11C21 189
474 89 T-601 139 12H090 to -094 189
192

Beitman Most Needed FM & Television Service Information 1948.CV01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Beitman Most Needed FM & Television Service Information 1948.CV01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Most Often - Needed

This manual has a two -fold purpose.

As always, it is the object of

All rights reserved,

Preface 2 Motorola, Inc.

Crosley Corporation Models VT-71,VK-101 using

Model RA -101 33-46 Packard -Bell Co.

Model 801 69-88 Stromberg-Carlson Tel. Mfg. Co.

Model 8FM776, Chas. 81307D 93-96 Western Auto Supply Company

nating currents, ohmmeter testing, wattage

FM ALIGNMENT POINTER SETTING

87.5 M.C. 108.5 M.C.

ADMIRAL FREQUENCY MODULATION CIRCUIT

Due to the higher operating frequencies used for frequency

The audio modulation is obtained from the carrier in an amp-

Conventional Discriminator Due to the function of a limiter (which is essentially a class

ADMIRAL 9A1 R ECEIVER CIRCUIT

VITT:SWITCH OPEN WHEN TONE CONTROL

COILS, TRANSFORMERS, ETC.

COILS, TRANS.,ETC., Cont.

T2 ... Transformer, 2nd I.F. (F.M.)....728 26

C52a. . 30 mfd., 350 Volts)

R28... 470,000 Ohms, '/2 Watt 60B 8-474

FM IF AND RATIO DETECTOR ALIGNMENT

SETTING SIGNAL GENERATOR TO

Connect Dummy Antenna Signal Receiver Adj. Trimmers

To loop ant. Direct 1300 KC 1300 KC T. U

90 92 9S 90 1132 108 107

Controls --The various controls are shown in the above drawing.

540 650 650 900 900

CIRCUITS USED ON EARLY MODELS

6034C o 210 0 275 V. AC NC

TEST CIRCUIT FOR FM ALIGNMENT VALUE OF THIS RESISTOR TO BE

BENDI X RADIO ) GN CND. SIDE OR CHASSIS

F.M. DUMMY ANTENNA 15

Gen. Dummy Gen. To Band Sw. Pointer Special VTVM

* See Fig. "Test Circuit for FM Alignment".

Ant coil is checked and adjusted exactly like RF coil.

SET POINTER TO THIS MARK

short from ref. nection Osc. "S" curve is

MO, SEG L MAP DE TAKEN PROM

Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 17

CHASSIS TOP VIEW SHOWING ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENTS

1 AM 455 100 Mixer Grid AM Open A&B Single See Note 1

3 AM 1400 220 Loop AM 1400 kc. D Above See Note 1.

4 FM 10.7 30 2nd I.F. Grid FM Closed E See Notes 1, 3, 4. 5 & 6.

5 FM 10.7 30 1st I.F. Grid FM Closed F See Notes 3, 5 & 6,

6 FM 10.7 30 F.M. Ant. FM Closed G See Notes 3, 5 & 6.

9 If Trimmer (J) in Step 8 is turned more than Yi turn, repeat Step 7.

10 Repeat Step 8 if Step 9 was necessary.

11 FM 98.0 *78 F.M. Ant. FM 98 mc. K Adjust for maximum out-

IS' I -F. AMPLIFIER AM. DECTECTOR a AVG FM. DISCRIMINATOR

SOCKET VOLTAGE CHART ®

operating voltage 117 volts -60 cycle

1st 0. CILLATOR GRID VOLTS

SOCKET VOLTAGE CHART SHOWING BOTTOM ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENTS

Dummy Antennas: F.M. SIGNAL

SOCRI, V01.146( MARI. 110. T. -111T4

A. M. Signal Generator Output Position of ALIGNMENT CHART (Output Meter Method)

*Refer to remarks (with corresponding asterisk) in last column. 23

MODELS 87CQ, AND REVISED MODELS 86CR, 86CS.

ALIGNMENT CHART (Scope Method)

5 F. M. 10.7 30 1st I. F. Grid FM Open